Epson Color Multi-Function Page Printer Aculaser CX11, CX11F Parts & Service PDF

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F
Color Multi-Function Page Printer

SERVI CE MANUAL
SEOT04007
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNI NG Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
4. ALWAYS WEAR GLOVES FOR DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY TO AVOID INJURY FROM SHARP METAL EDGES.
WARNI NG
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
manuals4you.com manuals4you.com
About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and proce-
dures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the
product.
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling
the product.
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-
approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product.
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference:
System Connection Diagram and Printer System Electrical Connection
Packaging Specification
Exploded diagram & Parts List
Electrical circuit boards schematics
System Parameter/List of Error List
Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read
NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
that is necessary to keep the product's quality.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition
that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
equipment.
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also
provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or
comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
ADJUSTMENT
REQUIRED
CAUTION
CHECK
POINT
WARNING
Abbreviations
The following is a representative example of abbreviations (both original and common ones) used in this manual.
ADC............... Automatic Density Control
AG .................................... Analog Ground
APS............................... Auto Paper Select
ARC................. Auto Registration Control
ASSY......................................... Assembly
ATS.......................... Auto Tray Switching
B .......................................................Black
BCR............................... Bias Charge Roll
Bk .....................................................Black
BLK..................................................Black
BLU................................................... Blue
BRN................................................ Brown
BTR ............................. Bias Transfer Roll
(Transfer Unit)
C ........................................................Cyan
CLN...............................................Cleaner
CRU...............Customer Replaceable Unit
CRUM.................................CRU Monitor
CTRG ......................................... Cartridge
DET ...................................... Detoner Roll
DEVE. ...................................... Developer
DIAG. .......................................Diagnostic
DISP ........................................... Dispense
dpi ......................................... dots per inch
DTS.........................................Detack Saw
DUP............................................... Duplex
ESB............................Electro Static Brush
ESS ............................. Electric Subsystem
F........................................................ Front
FEED,FDR ..................................... Feeder
FIP .....................Fault Isolation Procedure
GND ..............................................Ground
GRN................................................. Green
GRY................................................... Gray
HT..............................................Harf Tone
HUM........................................... Humidity
HVPS............ High Voltage Power Supply
ICDC ........Image Count Dispense Control
ID........................................Image Density
(or Identification)
IBT ..................Intermediate Belt Transfer
(Intermediate Transfer Unit)
INTL,INLK.................................Interlock
IOT ...................... Image Output Terminal
K....................................................... Black
L ..........................................................Left
L/H ............................................ Left Hand
LD........................................... Laser diode
LDD..........................Lightly Doped Drain
LED.......................... Light-emitting diode
LEF..................................Long Edge Feed
LH.............................................. Left Hand
LV......................................... Low Voltage
LVPS.............Low Voltage Power Supply
M................................................. Magenta
MAG.......................................... Mag. Roll
MCU....................... Machine Control Unit
MOB.................................. Marks On Belt
MOT................................................ Motor
MSI............................ Multi Sheet Inserter
N/P.............................................. No Paper
NVM.......................Non Volatile Memory
OEM..Original Equipment Manufacturing
OHP............................... Overhead Project
(In this manual,
OHP means a transparent sheet.)
OP.............................................. Operation
OPC.................. Organic Photo Conductor
ORN.......................................... ORANGE
PC................................Personal Computer
PCDC.........Pixel Count Dispense Control
PH .................................... Paper Handling
PHD....................................... Printer Head
PNK.................................................... Pink
POP ..................... Paper On Photoreceptor
PPM............................... Prints Per Minute
PR,P/R........................................... Process
PV ........................................Print Volume
PWB(A) ................... Printed Wiring Boad
(Assembly)
R........................................................Right
R......................................................... Rear
R/H.......................................... Right Hand
REF ............................................ Refresher
REGI. ..................................... Registration
RH........................................... Right Hand
ROS....................... Raster Output Scanner
ROT.................................................Rotary
RTC.........................Rubber Tube Charger
RTN.................................................Return
SEF..................................Short Edge Feed
SG ...................................... Signal Ground
SMH.................. Special Material Handler
SNR.................................................Sensor
SOL. ............................................ Solenoid
SOS ...................................... Start Of Scan
STM.......................... Single Tray Module
SW.................................................. Switch
TEMP. ................................... Temperature
TM........................................ Tray Module
TNER,TNR...................................... Toner
TP............................................Thermopile
TR................................................ Transfer
VIO..................................................Violet
WHT ................................................ White
XERO ....................................Xerographic
Y .................................................... Yellow
YEL................................................ Yellow
Safety Information
To prevent accidents during a maintenance procedure, strictly observe the Warnings and Cautions and never depart from the instructions given in this document.
Do not do anything that is dangerous even if not specifically described in this manual.
In addition to the descriptions below and those given in this manual, there are many situations and circumstances that could result in serious bodily injury.
Always pay enough attention to secure safety when working with the printer.
Power Supply
Before starting any service procedure, turn the printer off and unplug the power cord
from the wall outlet. If you need to work on the printer with power applied, such as
voltage measurement, strictly follow the instructions in this manual and use extreme
caution to avoid an electric shock.
WARNING
If you need to work on the printer with power applied, never
touch any electronic components other than the target
component.
The power supply switch/inlet part (MAIN POWER SWITCH
& INLET) is live even after the power switch is turned off. Use
extreme caution not to touch the live part when working on the
printer with the power supply cable connected.
Do not touch any live part unless instructed to do so.
Leg_001_002RA
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
Mechanical Components
When servicing any driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn the power off and unplug
the power cord. Then manually rotate the assembly.
High Temperature Assembly
When working with hot parts (FUSER etc.) make sure to turn the power off, unplug the
power cable, and leave the printer until it cools down sufficiently to work on it to
prevent burn injury.
WARNING Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the assembly
(printer) is operating. WARNING As the inside of the printer is high-temperature state immediately
after the operation, leave it more than 30 minutes before working.
Leg_001_022RA
FUSER Unit
Caution Label
(Refer to Caution Label About High-temperature Surface)
Laser Beam
WARNING
Letting a laser beam get into your eye directly could result in
loss of vision.
Never open the Cover where the Warning Label About Laser
Beam is affixed.
Before disassembling or assembling, be sure to turn the power
off.
If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly
follow the instructions in this manual.
Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme
caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you.
CHECK
POINT
The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more
coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light).
The beam has excellent monochromaticity and convergence,
thus it reaches long distances. Because of these characteristics,
the laser beam converges into one point, causing high density
and high temperature. And that is why a laser beam is harmful
to the human body.
The laser beam in this printer is invisible.
Leg_001_003RB
Caution Label
(Refer to Caution Label About High-temperature Surface)
ROS ASSY
Warning/Caution Labels
Warning labels and caution labels are attached on the corresponding locations on or in
the printer.
Caution Label About High-temperature Surface
The labels are attached on the Fuser assy and the perimeter alerting the user to
avoid burn injury.
(Refer to High Temperature Assembly)
Warning label for Laser Beam
The label is attached on the top of the laser beam emitting unit (ROS ASSY) to
alert the service personnel the danger of laser beam.
(Refer to Laser Beam)
CHECK
POINT
In maintenance work, check that the labels are free from peeling
and soiling.
Leg_Sec001_018EA
Leg_Sec001_019EA
Leg_Sec001_020EA
Leg_Sec001_023EA
Cautions relating to Toner cleaning
To prevent ignition, explosion, burn, injury, etc., do not use a general vacuum
cleaner for cleaning dropped toner. (To do so may cause the toner to catch fire by
sparks in the vacuum cleaner.)
Cautions relating to Storage of Paper
To achieve the appropriate printing results, unused paper that is stored outside of the
unit should be sealed up by packing material or put into a plastic bag to prevent it from
becoming moist.
WARNING Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner. To
do so may cause ignition.
Leg_Sec001_014EA
Safety Devices
Use extra care when checking or servicing the safety devices (e.g., interlock switches,
fuses, thermostat). The printer's cover, control panel and any other parts which are
directly related to the user's safety should also be observed carefully.
As the major safety devices, the printer is equipped with the following four interlock
switches:
SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
When any one of the above interlock switches turns off, +24VDC supply to the
motors and solenoid is cut off. The SWITCH ASSY TOP turns off when the
COVER ASSY TOP is opened. The SWITCH-INLK FRONT does when the
COVER FRONT ASSY U is opened, and the SWITCH-INLK FUSER does when
the COVER FUSER is opened.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
The FUSER LOCK SWITCH turns off when the latch lever of the FUSER ASSY
is released, then AC power supply to the Heater of the FUSER ASSY is cut off.
Leg_001_024RA
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH ASSY TOP
Schematic Diagram of Safety System
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Descriptions
A 28 April, 2005 First release
B 13 July, 2005 <Modification>
Chapter 1:
Reception setup items (p.68) / New information is added.
Chapter 4:
4.2.3.7 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (p.338) / A caution box is added.
4.2.4.4 FRAME ASSY-PH (p.352) / New information is added.
EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F Revision B
14
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRI PTI ON
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 18
1.1.1 Printer Section ............................................................................................ 18
1.1.2 Scanner Section .......................................................................................... 18
1.1.3 Fax Section ................................................................................................. 18
1.1.4 Controller.................................................................................................... 19
1.1.5 Software...................................................................................................... 19
1.2 Basic Specifications............................................................................................. 20
1.2.1 Whole System............................................................................................. 20
1.2.2 Printer Section ............................................................................................ 29
1.2.3 Scanner Section .......................................................................................... 41
1.2.4 ADF section................................................................................................ 42
1.2.5 Copy Performance ...................................................................................... 43
1.2.6 Fax Performance......................................................................................... 45
1.2.7 Controller Specifications ............................................................................ 46
1.3 Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 47
1.3.1 Panel Specifications.................................................................................... 47
1.3.2 Basic Functions........................................................................................... 52
1.3.3 Setup Functions .......................................................................................... 64
1.3.4 Special Operations ...................................................................................... 69
1.4 Status Sheet ......................................................................................................... 71
1.4.1 Printer Section ............................................................................................ 71
1.4.2 Fax Section ................................................................................................. 75
Chapter 2 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLES
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 78
2.1.1 Outline Specifications................................................................................. 79
2.1.2 Detection Mechanisms................................................................................ 82
2.2 Printer Section Operating Principle..................................................................... 84
2.2.1 Print Process ............................................................................................... 84
2.2.2 Flow of Print Data ...................................................................................... 95
2.2.3 Drive Transmission Path............................................................................ 96
2.2.4 Paper Feed ................................................................................................ 102
2.2.5 Xerographic .............................................................................................. 108
2.2.6 Electrical ................................................................................................... 120
2.2.7 Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 122
2.2.8 Flying-start printing.................................................................................. 123
2.3 Scanner Operating Principles ............................................................................ 124
2.3.1 Scanner Mechanism Overview................................................................. 124
2.3.2 ADF Mechanism Overview...................................................................... 126
Chapter 3 TROUBLESHOOTI NG
3.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 129
3.1.1 Procedure for troubleshooting .................................................................. 129
3.1.2 Checking Installation Status ..................................................................... 129
3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work................................... 130
3.2 Errors/Warnings Display................................................................................... 131
3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode................................................................................... 133
3.3.1 Self diagnosis............................................................................................ 133
3.3.2 Fax Maintenance....................................................................................... 137
3.4 Printer ................................................................................................................ 143
3.4.1 Notes on Using FIP................................................................................... 143
3.4.2 Warming-Up Flowchart at Power-ON ..................................................... 144
3.4.3 FIP ............................................................................................................ 145
3.4.4 FIP by Message Display........................................................................... 146
3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble .............................................................. 248
3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble.............................................................. 280
3.5 Scanner/ADF Section........................................................................................ 285
3.5.1 FIP by Message Display........................................................................... 285
3.5.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms................................................................. 287
3.6 Fax Function...................................................................................................... 288
3.6.1 Troubleshooting by Panel Message.......................................................... 288
3.6.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms................................................................. 289
3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies ............................................................ 291
3.6.4 Collecting Error Information.................................................................... 293
15
Chapter 4 DI SASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 300
4.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 300
4.1.2 Before you start work ............................................................................... 302
4.1.3 List of Screws ........................................................................................... 303
4.1.4 Tools ......................................................................................................... 304
4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures ...................................... 305
4.2 Printer ................................................................................................................ 306
4.2.1 SCANNER................................................................................................ 306
4.2.2 COVER..................................................................................................... 308
4.2.3 MSI ........................................................................................................... 329
4.2.4 PH ASSY.................................................................................................. 349
4.2.5 TRANSFER.............................................................................................. 366
4.2.6 XERO ....................................................................................................... 387
4.2.7 ROS........................................................................................................... 401
4.2.8 DEVE........................................................................................................ 404
4.2.9 FUSER...................................................................................................... 415
4.2.10 DRIVE.................................................................................................... 420
4.2.11 ELECTRICAL........................................................................................ 428
4.2.12 500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER ............................... 442
4.3 Scanner Section ................................................................................................. 481
4.3.1 ADF Unit .................................................................................................. 481
4.3.2 COVER..................................................................................................... 482
4.3.3 IR A Assy ................................................................................................. 485
4.4 ADF Section ...................................................................................................... 492
4.4.1 COVER..................................................................................................... 492
4.4.2 ADF BASE ASSY.................................................................................... 498
4.4.3 ADF FRAME ASSY................................................................................ 509
4.4.4 ADF PCB ASSY....................................................................................... 525
4.4.5 PAPER GUIDE ASSY............................................................................. 526
Chapter 5 ADJ USTMENT
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 531
5.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 531
5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items............................................................ 531
5.2 Printer Section ................................................................................................... 532
5.2.1 Writing USB ID........................................................................................ 532
5.2.2 Firmware Update ...................................................................................... 534
5.3 Fax Function...................................................................................................... 541
5.3.1 Fax unit Firmware Update........................................................................ 541
5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data................................................................... 541
Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
6.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 546
6.2 On-site Service .................................................................................................. 547
6.2.1 Details of On-site Servicing ..................................................................... 548
6.3 Lubrication and Glueing.................................................................................... 551
6.3.1 Printer Section .......................................................................................... 551
6.3.2 Scanner/ADF Section ............................................................................... 551
6.4 Printer Maintenance Function ........................................................................... 553
6.4.1 Maintenance Menu ................................................................................... 553
6.4.2 Maintenance Information Output ............................................................. 555
6.5 Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement........................ 562
6.5.1 Consumables............................................................................................. 562
6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts....................................................................... 563
Chapter 7 APPENDI X
7.1 System Connection Diagram............................................................................. 565
7.2 Printer System Electrical Connection................................................................ 566
7.2.1 Connector Summary................................................................................. 566
7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams................................................................... 571
7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts ............................................. 573
7.3 Packaging Specification .................................................................................... 586
7.4 Parts List............................................................................................................ 588
7.4.1 Printer Section .......................................................................................... 588
7.4.2 Scanner Section ........................................................................................ 592
7.4.3 ADF Section ............................................................................................. 594
7.5 Exploded Diagram............................................................................................. 598
7.6 Schematic Circuit Diagram............................................................................... 628
7.7 Fax Unit System................................................................................................ 635
7.7.1 List of System Parameter.......................................................................... 635
7.7.2 Error List................................................................................................... 659
CHAP T E R
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
18
1.1 Overview
The AcuLaser CX11/CX11F are all-in-one host- based color laser printers, which
include scan, copy, and fax functions. (The AcuLaser CX11 does not have the fax
function.)
A4 full-color 4-cycle engine, which is the same as AcuLaser C1100, is employed. Both
of the two models have a control panel with a large LCD. As the control panel is
independently-designed for each model; AcuLaser CX11 (fax-UNinstalled model) and
AcuLaser CX11F (fax installed model), changing CX11 to CX11F or the reverse is not
available.
1.1.1 Printer Section
Compact and lightweight engine, which enables True 600 dpi
Print Speed
Color : 5.0 PPM (for A4 printing)
Monochrome : 25.0 PPM (for A4 printing)
Manual duplex printing supported
Paper Feeder Capacity
MP cassette : 200 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m
2
)
Optional lower cassette : 500 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m
2
)
Paper Eject Capacity
Face-down : 250 sheets
NOTE: Conditions for the capacity:
22 degrees C/55% RH, standard paper (simplex/duplex printing).
The print ratio is 5% for both B/W and color printing (With color
printing, 5% for each color)
Consumables
Toner Cartridge with CSIC chip (C, M, Y, K)
Photoconductor Unit with CSIC chip
(Transfer Belt and Waste Toner Box are included)
1.1.2 Scanner Section
Color CCD
A4 compatible flatbed scanner with optical resolution of 600 dpi
Scan Speed
Color : 5.0 PPM (for A4 size)
Monochrome : 25.0 PPM (for A4 size)
Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
Capable of loading up to 50 sheets (paper basic weight is 80g/m
2
).
(Fax model only)
1.1.3 Fax Section
High-speed operation suitable for business purposes
Super G3 compatible
Communication Speed : 2.4K to 33.6Kbps
Supports both PSTN and PBX
Improved usability suitable for business purposes
One-touch send button : 3 buttons
Speed dial : Up to 60 entries
Group dial : Up to 20 groups
Conforms to Color FAX standards
Conforms to Communication standards for each country
Supported countries : 36 countries
19
1.1.4 Controller
New ASIC for controlling scanning and copying, and a FAX controller are added
to the controller for host-based printer.
CPU : TX4955 (192MHz)
RAM : Standard 128 MB (expandable up to 576 MB)
Network I/F board (Cobalt)
Control panel with a large LCD (with backlight)
Built-in Interfaces
USB2.0HS
Ethernet (10Base/100Base-T) (standard or option)
Fax modular (The AcuLaser CX11F only)
1.1.5 Software
ESC/PageS03 installed
A wide variety of copy modes
Copy Mode : Text, Photos, Text/Photos, and High resolution
2 in 1 copy is available
Push-type scan (Enables to send scanned data to another PC via network)
Support both Local TWAIN and Network TWAIN
The ROM is used for all destination models
Network I/F board (Cobalt) compatible
20
1.2 Basic Specifications
1.2.1 Whole System
1.2.1.1 Outline Specifications
WARM UP TIME
(Including ESS system check and RAM check)
37 seconds or less: From turning the power on to ready-to-print status.
(22 degrees C 55 %RH, rated voltage)
30 seconds or less: From standby mode to ready-to-print status.
(22 degrees C 55 %RH, rated voltage)
PRINTING MODE
Color mode (F/C)
Prints in color with Y, M, C, and K toners
Monochrome mode (B/W)
Prints in monochrome with K toner (The highest printing speed can be achieved in
this mode)
THROUGHPUT
Copy (TBD)
Note *1: Makes multiple copies of one original
*2: Makes one copy of multiple originals using ADF
*3: Memory : Standard / Paper tray, MP tray/SC lamp
Printer : Ready-to-print status after the warm-up
Print
*6
Note *1: For details on the paper orientation, see Supported paper size, type and orientation
(p32).
*2: Standard mode (Color) : Feeds (prints) papers at the maximum speed of the color
mode.
Standard mode (B/W) : Feeds (prints) papers at the highest speed of the product.
*3: Low speed mode : For thick papers that exceed 163 g/m
2
(43 lb)
(including transparency/envelope)
Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation
*4: Low speed 1 mode : For thick papers that exceed 105g/m
2
(28 lb)
(including envelope/label)
Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation
*5: Low speed 2 mode : Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation when
printing on transparencies.
*6: Note that the time given in the tables above does not apply when the printer is in the
conditions described in Section 1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions (p39).
Scan
Monochrome : 2 sec/A4, 300dpi
Full color : 11 sec/A4, 300dpi
Copy Mode
Color*
3
Monochrome*
3
A4/300dpi A4/600dpi A4/300dpi A4/600dpi
First copy 29 sec 73 sec 12 sec 18 sec
Multi copy*
1
5 ppm 5 ppm 25 ppm 25 ppm
ADF continuous copy*
2
5 ppm 1 ppm 25 ppm (TBD) ppm
Table 1-1. Monochrome Print Mode (Unit: PPM)
Paper size*
1
Standard*
2
Low speed*
3
LGL, GLG, F4 20.0 4.0
A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, EXE 25.0 4.0
Envelopes --- 4.0
User defined size (lenght) 297.00 mm or less 25.0 4.0
Table 1-2. Color Print Mode (Unit: PPM)
Paper size*
1
Standard*
2
Low speed 1*
4
Low speed 2*
5
LGL, GLG, F4 2.3 TBD ---
A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, EXE 5.0 2.3 1.9
Envelopes --- 2.3 ---
User defined size (lenght) 297.00 mm or less 5.0 2.3 ---
21
NOISE
Sound Pressure
NOTE1: Conforms to ISO-7779 concerning measurement and calculation methods
2: Figures are actual measurement values (when copying in monochrome)
Sound Power
NOTE1: Conforms to ISO-7779 concerning measurement and calculation methods
2: Figures are actual measurement values (when copying in monochrome)
1.2.1.2 Electrical Characteristics
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Power supply operating voltage/frequency
AC 220V/240V 10% : 50Hz/60Hz 3Hz
Power supply for the controller (TBD)
DC 5.0V 5% : 1A or lower
DC 3.3V 5% : AVG 3.0 A
: MAX 4.0 A or lower
DC 24.0V 10% : MAX 1.0 A
POWER CONSUMPTION
The maximum rated current and power consumption are measured with all engine
options and controller options installed.
Base model/Fax model
Note *: As for the base model, the values are measured when performing printing.
Scanner consumption current
Table 1-3. Sound Pressure
Model During printing Standby mode Sleep mode
Base model 54dB Background noise Background noise
FAX model 57dB Background noise Background noise
Table 1-4. Sound Power
Model During printing Standby mode Sleep mode
Base model 6.6B Background noise Background noise
FAX model 6.8B Background noise Background noise
120V 240V
Maximum Rated Current 7.5A 4.0A
Power
Consumption
Max. 740W 790W
Continuous copy using ADF
(average)*
Color 189W 191W
Monochrome 287W 294W
Standby (average) (heater ON, scanner lamp OFF) 49W 51W
Low power consumption (average) (heater OFF) 16W 18W
Power switch OFF 0W 0W
Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current
Output voltage Without ADF With ADF
24V 0.55A 0.83A
12V 0.07A 0.07A
22
CONSUMPTION CURRENT
When using 500-sheet cassette (option)
5 V/(0.1) A or less
24 V/(0.5) A or less
INRUSH CURRENT
1/2 cycle : 100 A or less (0-peak)
Including heater inrush
(Conditions: 23 degrees C or above, with cold start)
LEAK CURRENT
120V : 3.5mA or less
220V series : 3.5mA or less
GROUND CONDUCTION
When applying 12 V, 30 A to the products earth terminal and the metallic section
where grounding is required, ground resistance should be 0.1 or less.
FAST TRANSIENT/BURSTS (AC LINE NOISE)
Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC61000-
4-4.
1 kV : No errors excluding insignificant dot errors
2 kV : There should be no damaged part
INSTANTANEOUS OUTAGES
No effect on printing quality.
DIP : 1 cycle 100 % (rated voltage -10 %)
RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY
Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC61000-
4-2 CISPR 24.
Contact electric discharge 5 kV : No error on any device after applying
Aerial electric discharge 10 kV : No error on any device after applying
INSULATION RESISTANCE
10 M or more
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE
There should be no break down during application of the voltages shown below.
Leak current should be 20mA or less when applying the voltage for one minute.
5V 0.2A 0.2A
(3.3V) 0.15A 0.15A
Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current
Output voltage Without ADF With ADF
Table 1-6. Withstand Voltage
Between inlet and non-charged
metal parts
Between primary and secondary
supply transformers
120V AC1000V AC1500V
200V series AC2000V AC3000V
23
1.2.1.3 Environmental Specifications and Conditions
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
Note *1: Should be no condensation.
*2: Humidity should be 65 % or less when the temperature is 32 degrees C.
Temperature should be 26 degrees C or less when the humidity is 80 %.
VIBRATION
There should be no damage under the following conditions
Frequency : 5Hz to 55Hz
Acceleration : 1.5 G (Between 5 to 10 Hz, however, constant 7.5 mm
double amplitude is assumed.)
Frequency sweep : Logarithmic sweep 10 minutes for one-way
Direction of application : X, Y, Z directions
Number of cycles : 3 cycles for each X, Y, Z direction (1 hour)
SHOCK (DROPPING)
There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the packages under the
conditions below.
Main unit (ADF installed) : 460 mm
500-sheet cassette (option) : 760 mm
AIR PRESSURE (ALTITUDE)
Note : Withstands altitude of 0 to 15, 000 m while transported by air. However, this assumes
that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.
LEVELNESS
Difference between front and back: 5 mm or less /445 mm
Difference between left and right: 10 mm or less /445 mm
ILLUMINATION
3, 000 lx or less (do not expose to direct sunlight)
Table 1-7. Temperature and Humidity
Status Temperature Humidity
*1
Guaranteed period
When operating
*2
10 to 32 degrees C 15 ~ 80 % ---
When
stored
Normal
conditions
0 to 35 degrees C 15 to 80%RH
12 months after
manufacture
Severe
conditions
High
temperature
35 to 40
degrees C
High
humidity
80 to 90
% RH
max. 120 hours
Low
temperature
-20 ~ 0
degrees C
Low
humdity
10 ~ 15
%RH
Table 1-8. Air Pressure (Altitude)
Status Altitude
Operating Printer 65 to 101 kPa (0 to 3,100 m or less)
Scanner/ADF 0 to 2,500 m or less
When stored 0 to 3100 m or lower*
24
1.2.1.4 Conformed Safety Standards
SAFETY STANDARDS
SAFETY STANDARDS (LASER TRANSMISSION)
EMI STANDARDS
COMMUNICATION STANDARDS
Model Type Applicable Standards
120V
UL60950 3rd Edition
CSA C22.2 No.60950-00
21 CFR Part 1010,1040
NOM-019-SCFI-1998
230V IEC60950 3rd
120V FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040
200V series
IEC60825 Class 1 Laser Product
CE Directive
Nordic Agency Approvals
120V FCC Part15 Subpart B, Class B (AnSI C63.4/11.4D)
230V
EN55022 (CIRSPR Publication22), Class B
EN61000-3-2 (Harmonics) ClassA
EN61000-3-3 (Flicker)
EN55024
GB4943
GB9254 Class B,GB17625.1
KN22 Class B
KN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
AS/NZSCISPR22 Class B
120V
FCC Part 68
IC CS03
COFETEL
PSTN01
230V
TBR21
Ministry of Telecomunication
ANATEL
CNC
IDA
SIRIM
PTD
AS/ TS001
TNA 102
HKTA 2111
MII&NAL
25
1.2.1.5 Environmental Characteristics
ENERGY STAR
International Energy Star Program not compliant
BAM
Not compliant
ECO MARK
Not compliant
EXHAUST GAS
Ozone concentration : 0.02 mg/m
3
or less
(measurement method conforms to BAM)
Styrene Concentration : 0.02 mg/m
3
or less
Dust concentration : 0.075 mg/m
3
or less
(measurement method conforms to BAM)
TVOC : 0.2 mg/m
3
or less
MISCELLANEOUS
Toner : should have no affect on the human body
(OSHA, TSCA, and EINECS compliant)
OPC : should have no affect on the human body (OSHA
compliant)
Ozone evolution : UL 478, 5th edition compliant
Materials : should not contain any materials prohibited in each
country, nor include harmful substances greater than
accepted.
26
1.2.1.6 Reliability
PRINTER SECTION
Paper Jam/ Multi-Feed Rate
Note : The above rates are measured under the following conditions.
Paper size: Regular size
Newly unpackaged paper were used.
The 500-sheet cassette does not support special paper.
Multiple-sheet feed rate: Conditions when adding new paper onto remaining
paper in the tray or cassette are not considered.
MPBF
Main unit: 50,000 pages
NOTE: MIBF: 150,000 pages
Number of images: As color printing uses 4 color images (Y, M, C, K),
four images are counted per page.
For LGL size, 8 images are counted per page.
Calculated as Color : Monochrome = 2 : 1.
Monochrome : 50,000 1/3 = 16,700 images
Color : 50,000 2/3 4 colors = 133,200 images
MIBF : 16,700 + 133,200 = 149,900 images (approx. 150,000
images)
Mechanical Life
Printer life : 200,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
500-sheet cassette: 200,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
Note: Calculated as Color : Monochrome = 2 : 1
Color only : 150,000 pages
Monochrome only: 200,000 pages
Durability
Number of printable pages
Ave. : 3,000 pages/month
Max. : 45,000 pages/month (Monochrome : Color = 3 : 1)
SCANNER SECTION (TBD)
Carriage MCBF : 100,000 cycles or more
Opening/Closing of the document cover : 30,000 times
Opening/Closing of the scanner module : 2,000 times
Light source MTTF : 10,000 hours
ADF SECTION
Feed error : 1/2,000 or less
Multi-sheet feed : 1/2,000 or less
Paper jam : 1/1,000 or less
Life of paper feed : 100,000 pages
Life of opening/closing operation : 15,000 times
SERVICEABILITY
MTTR (Mean Time to Repair) : Average 30 minutes or less
(The MTTR is a time for service
personnel to locate and correct the
malfunction only, and the time for
examining malfunction is not
included.)
Table 1-9. Paper Jam/Multi-sheet Feed Rate (unit: page)
Reliability issue
Standard paper Plain paper Special paper
MPtray
500-sheet
cassette
MPtray
500-sheet
cassette
MPtray
500-sheet
cassette
Jam rate 1/3000 1/5000 1/2000 1/3000 1/100 ---
Multiple-sheet
feed rate
1/1500 1/2500 1/1000 1/1500 1/50 ---
27
1.2.1.7 Outside Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions and weight of base model, FAX model, and options
NOTE1: Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight.
2: Consumables are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included).
*: ADF: Width becomes 494 mm when the LGL extension paper tray is opened.
Figure 1-1. Dimensional Outline Drawing
Dimensions and weight when the option cassette is installed
NOTE1: Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight.
2: Consumables are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included).
*: ADF: Width becomes 494 mm when the LGL extension paper tray is opened.
Figure 1-2. Dimensional Outline Drawing (main unit + 500-sheet cassette)
Table 1-10. Dimensions and Weight
Product Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg)
Base model 460 467 593 30.9
FAX model 460
*
467 667 33.1
500-sheet cassette 440 446 130 8
467mm
5
9
3
m
m
460mm
6
6
7
m
m
Base model FAX model
Table 1-11. Dimensions and Weight with Option Cassette Installed
Combination and Condition
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
Height
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
Main unit (Base model) +
500-sheet cassette
460 467 724 38.9
Main unit (FAX model) +
500-sheet cassette
460
*
467 798 41.1
Main unit when the scanner is open
(base model) +
500-sheet cassette
460
*
--- 979 38.9
Main unit when the scanner is open
(FAX model) +
500-sheet cassette
460
*
--- 983 41.1
460mm
7
9
8
m
m
467mm
Base model FAX model
7
2
4
m
m
28
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
Installation Method
1. Remove the hook that join the upper and the lower parts of the package.
2. Pull out the upper part of the package upward.
3. Take out the photoconductor unit and the toner cartridge boxes. *
1
4. Hold the handles on the bottom of the main unit, lift up the printer, and place
it at the installation location (two persons are required to perform this
operation). If you lift up the printer holding its right-and-left sides, make sure
to support the backside of the LEG with your hands to keep balance.
5. Turn the printer power off.
6. Open the cover A to remove the development unit protective cover, and install
the specified toner cartridge.
7. After installing all the 4-color toner cartridges, close the cover A, lift up the
scanner section*
2
, and open the cover B.
8. Turn up the photoconductor insert lever.
9. Insert the photoconductor unit.
10. Close the cover B.
11. Fully extend the paper output extension on the cover B. Be sure to extend the
folded part of the paper output when printing on LGL sized papers.
12. Before scanning LGL sized papers using the ADF, extend the folded part of
the ADF paper feed tray extension, and open the LGL paper output extension.
Note *1: The photoconductor unit for domestic FAX model is packed separately.
*2: As for FAX model, the scanner section is only lifted when the ADF is
closed.
Figure 1-3. Space Requirements
300mm
258mm
353mm
100mm
Fax Model
Leg_008_011RB
300mm
258mm
353mm
100mm
Base Model
Leg_008_012RB
251mm
Fax Model
ROD-CLEANER
251mm
Base Model
ROD-CLEANER
Leg_008_013RB
1005 mm
1068 mm
353 mm 258 mm
Fax Model
1016 mm
1068 mm
353 mm 258 mm
Base Model
Top
Front
Side
29
1.2.2.1 Process Specifications & System
Printing method : Semiconductor laser beam scanning and dry
electrophotographic process with two ingredients
Light source : Semiconductor laser
Photoconductor : Organic photoconductor
Charging : Roller charging system
Development : Two ingredients, None-contact developing system
Toner : Made up of two nonmagnetic ingredients
Primary transfer : Intermediate transfer belt method
Fixing : Heat roller and fuser belt system
1.2.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications
RESOLUTION
600dpi
FIRST PRINT TIME
The time from receiving the Start command to when trailing edge of the paper leaves
the paper eject roller.
Note that the time given in the tables below does not apply when the printer is in the
conditions described in 1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions (p39).
Table 1-12. Monochrome mode (Unit: second or less)
Paper size
Simplex printing
Standard Low speed
A4 9 17
LT 9 17
Table 1-13. Color mode (Unit: second or less)
Paper size
Simplex printing
Standard
Low speed 1
Low
speed 2
Thick/Extra
Thick Paper
Label/Coated Paper Envelop
A4 17 27 24 27 28
LT 17 27 24 27 28
30
PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE
Note *: Reverse side indicates the second print side when feeding manually to print on both
sides.
Paper feed reference
Reference position to feed paper (in any size) is always center of the feeders.
PAPER FEED
Note *1: Environmental condition for the capacity: 22 C/55% RH.
*2: Refer to 1.2.2.3 Paper Specifications (p34).
Table 1-14. Printing Mode by Paper Type
Paper Type
Printing Speed Mode
F/C B/W
Plain paper 2 64 to 80g/m
2
(RX-80/4024) Standard Standard
Plain paper 2
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Plain paper
2.
Standard Standard
High quality paper 81 to 105g/m
2
(EPSON standard paper) Standard Standard
High quality paper
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the High quality
paper
Standard Standard
Thick paper 1 106 to 163g/m
2
Low
speed 1
Standard
Thick paper 1
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Thick paper
1.
Low
speed 1
Standard
Thick paper 2 164 to 210g/m2
(including double postal card and 4-sided
postcard)
Low
speed 1
Low
speed
Thick paper 2
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Thick paper
2.
Low
speed 1
Low
speed
OHP Transparency (color, monochrome) Low
speed 2
Low
speed
Label 2 Labels Low
speed 1
Standard
Envelopes 75 to 105g/m
2
Envelops for each country Low
speed 1
Low
speed
Coated paper 3 105 to 210 g/m2 Low
speed 1
Low
speed
Coated paper 3
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Coated
paper 3
Low
speed 1
Low
speed
Table 1-15. Paper Feed
Paper feeder
Sheet
capacity
*
1
Height
capacity
Paper type*
2
/Paper size
Available Paper
Basic Weight
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
MP tray 200 sheets Standard paper: RX-80 64g/m
2
180 sheets Standard paper: EPSON High quality Plain
paper
82 g/m
2
20mm Plain paper/Recycled paper
A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, Executive
64 to 80 g/m
2
20mm High quality paper 81 to 105 g/m
2
75 sheets Transparencies: A4, Letter ---
75 sheets Labels: A4, Letter ---
20mm Coated paper 105 to 210 g/m
2
20mm Thick paper:
A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, F4, LGL
(14), GLG (13), Executive
106 to 163 g/m
2
164 to 210 g/m
2
20 sheets Envelopes
Yokei #0, Yokei #4, Yokei #6
Chokei # 3, Chokei #4, Kakugata #3
75 to 105 g/m
2
20mm User defined size:
Width 90.0 to 220.0 mm
Length 110.0 to 355.6 mm
64 to 210 g/m
2
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
500-sheet
cassette
500 sheets
56mm
A4, LT 64 to 105 g/m
2
31
COMBINATION WITH OPTIONAL CASSETTE
An optional 500-sheet cassette can be added to the printer to feed papers as follows.
Note *1: RX-80 (64 g/m
2
)
*2: EPSON high quality plain paper (82 g/m
2
)
Table 1-16. Combination with Optional Cassette
Combination 1 2
Standard MP tray 200 sheets *1/180 sheets
*
2
use use
500-sheet cassette 500 sheets*
1,2
--- use
Total Number of Sheets 200*
1
180*
2
700*
1
680*
2
32
SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE, TYPE AND ORIENTATION
Note *1: For details on orientations of envelop and postcard, refer to Envelop Orientation
(p33).
*2: Load the envelop with its flap opened. If the length of the envelop is 110 mm or less
when the flap is opened, the envelop cannot be used.
*3: Papers which are only supported by firmware (handled as user defined size by the
video I/F).
"": Feeding is possible by specifying the size code with the control panel.
"SEL (Short Edge Feed)" : Set paper to be loaded from its short side.
"LEF (Long Edge Feed)" : Set paper to be loaded from its long side.
Table 1-17. List of Supported Paper Size, Type and Orientation
Paper
Paper size: unit mm (inch)
MP tray 500-sheet cassette Paper orientaion Manual duplex
Vertical (length) Horizontal (width)
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
A4 297.00 210.00 SEF Available
A5 148.00 210.00 --- SEF Available
Letter 279.40 (11.00) 215.90 (8.50) SEF Available
HALF Letter 215.90 (8.50) 139.70 (5.50)
*3
--- SEF ---
Legal 355.60 (14.00) 215.90 (8.50) --- SEF Available
GLG 330.20 (13.00) 215.90 (8.50) --- SEF ---
GLT 266.70 (10.50) 203.20 (8.00)
*3
--- SEF ---
EXECUTIVE 266.70 (10.50) 184.15 (7.25) --- SEF Available
F4 330.00 210.00
*3
--- SEF ---
User defined size: 110.00 to 355.60 90.00 to 220.00 --- Free ---
S
p
e
c
i
a
l

p
a
p
e
r
OHP A4: 297.00 A4: 210.00 ---
SEF
---
LT: 279.40 LT: 215.90
Label A4: 297.00 A4: 210.00 ---
SEF
---
LT: 279.40 LT: 215.90
Envelop
*1
235.00 120.00
*3
--- SEF ---
235.00 105.00
*3
--- SEF ---
98.00
*2
190.00
*3
--- LEF ---
235.00 120.00
*3
--- SEF ---
205.00 90.00
*3
--- SEF ---
277.00 216.00
*3
--- SEF ---
33
Envelop Orientation
NOTE 1: Load envelopes in the MP tray with its print surface facing up
2: Image quality and feed is not guaranteed when printing on the back side
(flap side) of envelopes.
3: Envelopes with adhesive or tape are not available.
4: Load the envelop with its flap opened. If the length of the envelop is 110
mm or less when the flap is opened, the envelop cannot be used.
Printing Surface Set Direction
Set paper with printing surface facing up. (for both MP tray and 500-sheet
cassette)
PAPER EJECT CAPACITY
250 sheets, Face down only
NOTE: Conditions for the capacity:
22 degrees C/55% RH, standard paper (simplex/duplex printing).
The print ratio is 5% for both B/W and color printing (With color
printing, 5% for each color).
CONSUMABLES AND PERIODIC REPLACEMENT UNIT
Note : For detailed specifications, refer to 1.2.2.5 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit
(p37).
Paper feed
direcction
Envelopestype Yokei #0
Yokei #4
Yokei #6
*4
Chokei #3
Chokei #4
Kadokei #3
Printing surface
Paper feed direcction
Paper feed direction
Table 1-18. List of Consumables and Periodic Replacement Unit
Classification Replacement unit
Consumables Toner cartridges (Black, Cyan, Yellow, Magenta)
Photoconductor Unit
(with waste toner box)
Regular Replacement
Parts
FUSER ASSY
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (Developer)
2ND BTR ASSY
34
1.2.2.3 Paper Specifications
SUPPORTED PAPER TYPE
Standard paper
Monochrome : RX-80 paper (monochrome), 4024 paper (20 lb)
Color : EPSON Color Laser Paper
Plain paper
64g/m
2
~ 105g/m
2
(Commonly used copy paper, recycled paper, high quality plain paper)
Recommended recycled paper: Green100
Special paper
EPSON transparency sheets (A4)
Labels
Thick paper (106 g/m
2
~ 210 g/m
2
)
Envelopes
EPSON coated paper (A4)
PAPER THAT MAY CAUSE PRINTING DEFECTS, PAPER JAMS OR
PRINTER MALFUNCTION
Transfer paper (carbon paper, non-carbon paper), thermal paper, impact paper,
acid paper
Paper that is too thin or too thick
Paper that is wet or damp
Paper with special coatings or color printer paper with processed surfaces
Glossy (too slick) paper, paper with too rough surface , or paper that the roughness
is significantly different between the front side and the back side.
Paper with punch holes or perforations
Creased, curled or torn paper
Irregularly shaped paper or paper with non-perpendicular corners
Labels that peel off easily
Paper with glue, staples or paper clips attached to it
Special paper for ink jet applications (super-fine, glossy, glossy film, etc.)
Paper previously used in a thermal or ink jet printer
Transparencies for other color laser printers or color photocopiers
Paper that has been already printed by other color/monochrome laser printers or
photocopiers
Sheets of paper stuck together
Postcards for ink jet printers, unofficial postcards, and adhesive postcards
Iron print coated paper (for both ink jet and laser printers)
Paper that is deteriorated or discolored, due to temperatures lower than 180 C.
CHECK
POINT
7
lb : ream weight = gross weight of 500 sheets of 17 x 22
sized paper
g/m
2
: 1g/m
2
= 0.2659763lb
Before purchasing a large amount of paper, test the paper if it
can be printed normally.
35
AVAILABLE PAPER BY FEEDER
Note : Paper feed and image quality is guaranteed.
: Paper feed and printing is possible. However, this is limited to types of paper
for general applications.
Image quality is not guaranteed.
X : Feed is not possible.
PRINTING AREA
Maximum printable area
216.00 mm (width) x 355.60 mm (length)
NOTE: Continuous printing beyond the guaranteed printing area (border 4mm)
causes soiling inside the mechanism.
Printable area
The minimum left, right, top and bottom margins are 4 mm for any type of paper.
For envelop, however, left and right margins should be 6 mm.
Figure 1-4. Printable Area
Table 1-19. Available Paper by Feeder
Paper Feeder
Standar
d paper
Plain
paper
Special paper
OHP
Postcar
d
Label
Thick
paper
Envelo
pes
Coated
paper
MP tray
500-sheet
cassette
X X X X X X
4mm 4mm
4
m
m
4
m
m
Printable area
36
1.2.2.4 Image performance
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY
Figure 1-5. Printing start position accuracy
SKEW
HEIGHT OF CURL OF OUTPUT PAPER
Note : Measurement conditions
1. Print out 20 sheets of paper continuously in order to stabilize the fuser unit.
2. After the 20 pages are printed out, pick out the 21st to 30th pages as samples, and
wait for 5 minutes before measuring them.
3. Place those papers on a flat surface with their curls facing upward, measure the length
between the flat surface and the tip of the curl of the bottommost paper, similarly
measure the other three corners, and define the largest value of four corners as the
curl value.
Table 1-20. Printing start position accuracy
A4 Simplex printing
Main scanning direction Reference point (c) 2.5mm
Sub-scanning direction Reference point (a) 2.0mm
c
a b
f
e
d
Feed direction
Printable area
Table 1-21. Skew
A4 Simplex printing
Main scanning direction (| a-b |) 1.2mm
Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |) 0.8mm
Table 1-22. Length standard of measurement
A4 Simplex printing
Main scanning direction (e) 190mm
Sub scanning direction (f) 114.5mm
Table 1-23. Height of Curl of Output Paper
Paper Type Curl height
Normal paper, plain paper 15mm or less
Other special papers No regulation
37
1.2.2.5 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
Note *1: Approximate number of printed pages using A4 continuous printing at 5% print rate.
The cartridge lifetime varies according to the paper size and type of printing (toner
save mode etc.)
*2: Monochrome : Color = 1 : 2, 2p/J, print rate 5% (A4)
The lifetime depends on printing method and the frequency of switching the power.
The life of the photoconductor unit is reduced by half when printing on LGL sized
paper only.
CONDITIONS FOR STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
Temperature and humidity conditions
NOTE1: Non-condensing
2: Storage time after opening is 12 months in the normal operating environment.
Storage altitude
65 to 101kPa (0 to 3100m)
(Withstands altitude of 0 to 15, 000 m while transported by air. However, this
assumes that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.)
Package dropping
There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the listed in the
table below by drop of 91 cm.
Table 1-24. Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement
Program Configurations Lifetime (pages)
External
dimensions (mm)
Weight
(kg)
Toner Cartridge
(Y, M, C, K)
Toner Cartridge 1500*
1
52.7 (W)
285.6 (D)
58.4 (H)
0.2
4000*
1
0.27
Photoconductor Unit Transfer belt
Photoconductor with
waste toner box
14000*2
B/W continuous:
42,000
F/C continuous:
10,500
310 (W)
280 (D)
110 (H)
2.8
Fuser unit Heat roller 100000 330 (W)
110 (D)
105 (H)
1.3
Developer unit Development roller K : 100000
Y/M/C: 66700
315 (W)
75 (D)
85 (H)
0.7
Second transfer unit Transfer roller 100000 315 (W)
35 (D)
15 (H)
0.2
Table 1-25. Temperature and humidity conditions
Status Temperature Humidity Guaranteed period
Normal
Conditions
0 to 35 degrees C 15 to 80 % RH
24 months
(unopened)
Severe
Conditions
High
temperature
35 to 40 degrees C High
humidity
80 to 95 % RH
Max. of 1 month
Low
temperature
-20 to 0 degrees C
Low
humidity
5 to 15 % RH
Table 1-26. Package dropping
Package name Drop
Toner Cartridge 91cm
Photoconductor unit + Transfer unit 91cm
Fuser unit 91cm
Developer unit 91cm
Second transfer unit 91cm
38
1.2.2.6 Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional
Products
CONSUMABLES
Toner Cartridge
The power supply of the main unit should be on.
If the main unit is turned off, the cartridge that needs to be replaced does not move
to the cartridge replacement position.
Photoconductor Unit
This unit can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on.
OPTIONAL PRODUCTS
500-sheet cassette
Turn off the main unit before installing.
If the main unit is on when the cassette is installed, it is not detected.
Secure the cassette to the main unit with the coupling part on the top surface
inside the unit.
Adding Controller Option Parts
Turn off the main unit before installing. The part will be damaged if the power is
on.
39
1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions
FACTORS LIMITING PRINTING SPEED
Image Quality Adjustment
Note *1: Condition to print 50 copies (pages) continuously:
The average of the print ratio should be 35% or less for each color.
*2: ADC = Automatic Density Control: A control to ensure stable print density
*3: The printer sometimes perform the ADC control more than once. In such case, the time required can be obtained by multiplying "Time for once ADC" by "Number of executions".
*4: A/C = Area coverage:
Print ratio of each color
*5: 3 seconds x 4 colors
Cooling down
This is performed to prevent the edges of the heat roll from rising in temperature when small-sized paper is used. If the temperature difference between the edges and the center
of the heat roll reach a certain level, the printer stops the current job to perform the cooling down operation. Time required may vary according to paper size, number of printed
pages, etc..
NOTE: Ave. : 60sec /Max. aprox.110sec
Table 1-27. Image Quality Adjustment
Purpose Condition and control
Time required
(sec.)
1 During printing To keep the image density at target level. 1. When printing more than 51 copies (pages) continuously
*1
Every time the printer makes 50 copies (pages), it stops the job temporarily to
perform the ADC*
2
control.
2. If the printer detect a near-end of Toner Cartridge, it changes the timing of the
ADC control to every 25 copies (pages).
45 seconds
2 Admix*
3
(Toner Cartridge Developer)
To prevent making a density difference between input
data and output image.
To prevent toner from being stirred unequally.
To supply toner when printing an image with high print
ratio.
When the printer comes into the following conditions, it stops the job temporarily
at the timing given for each condition to perform the ADC control.
1. A/C*
4
= 100% : 5 per page
2. 35% Average of A/C < 100%: Every 5 to 50 pages
3. Average of A/C < 35% : Every 50 copies (pages)
15 seconds/
color
3 Collection(Developer Toner
Cartridge (collection space))
To prevent excessive amount of toner in the black developer
when printing in black and white continuously.
After printing in black and white continuously, the printer rotates the rotary if it
detects that the toner dispense time during the job is equivalent to 30 pages.
12 seconds *
5
40
FACTORS LIMITING PRINTING START
Note *1: When the operation performed during the warm-up, the warm-up time becomes 74 seconds.
*2: The warm-up time is included. (After the cover is opened and closed, the normal warm-up operation is executed.)
TONER DUTY LIMITING VALUE
240% (to prevent paper from twisting around the FUSER ASSY)
NOTE: If it exceeds 240%, the engine (Mechanical Controller) forces a hard stop.
Table 1-28. Factors Limiting Printing Start
Purpose Condition and control
Time required
(sec.)
1 Cycle Down To keep the image density at target level. When the number of printed copies (pages) becomes 20 (by both continuous or
intermittent printing) after performing the ADC, the printer performs another
ADC when the current job is finished.
45
2 Cycle Up To correct the toner density 1. The printer performs the ADC if the SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects that the
temperature and humidity in the printer are under the following conditions at
power-on or when returning from the low-power mode.
20 degrees C/85% to 32 degrees C/42% or more
2. The SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects the temperature and humidity inside the
printer at power-on. The detected condition is compared to the condition
detected at the previous power-off, and if the difference is as shown below, the
printer performs the ADC.
Temperature : 4 degrees, Humidity : 10%RH
45*
1
3 Photoconductor Unit Parameter control according to the piece-to-piece variations
of Photoconductor.
The printer performs the ADC when replacing the Photoconductor unit with a new
one or used one.
74*
2
4 New Toner Cartridge Filling toner -> Recovering from an Empty error The printer performs the ADC when replacing the Toner Cartridge with a new
one. (Not performed when replacing with a used one.)
20 ~ 85 sec
5 Prevention of color toner
concentration
To prevent the color toner from concentrating to the left side
in the developer, which may cause partly (right side on the
paper) missed printouts, after printing in black and white
continuously.
(By the rotary rotation while performing continuous black
and white printing, color toner, which is not used for the B/
W printing, is moved along the spiral of the Auger (The
Auger of the developer for colors do not rotate during black
and white printing). With the color toner concentrated to the
left side, color printing may result in missing the right side
image.)
1. When the printer have finished five B/W print jobs in a row, it rotates the
Augers of the three developers (C, M and Y) switching the rotary position to let
the color toner in the developers spread evenly.
2. When the printer is turned on for the first time after purchase, it does the same
operation as described above so that the toner spread evenly in the developers.
15 sec/color
41
1.2.3.1 Scanner basic specifications
Type
Flatbed color image scanner
Scanning Method
Carriage moves to read the fixed document
Sensors
Color CCD 4 Line CCD (RGB_BW)
Maximum Scan Area
216mm x 297mm
Maximum Effective Pixels
5,100 x 7,020 pixels (600 dpi)
Maximum Document Size
A4, LT
Optical Resolution
Main scan: 600 dpi
Sub scan: 600 dpi (1-2 phase)
Light Source
White cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL)
Gradations
16 bit input, 1/8 bit output for each pixel of each color
Scan Speed
Monochrome: 2 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Full color: 11 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Warmup Time
Within 45 sec (at 25 degrees C)
(Light intensity output reaches 95 % within 90 sec at 25 degrees C)
Document Size Detection
Not available
ADF Detection
Available
Scan Pause and Resume
Available
Lock Mechanism
Scanner unit cannot be opened when the ADF is open
Weight
3.3kg
Dimention (W x D x H)
460 x 348 x 65 (BOX HEIGHT)
Read Accuracy (main scanning)
1.5 % /216mm
Read Accuracy (sub scanning)
0.5 % /100mm at 600dpi
42
1.2.4 ADF section
1.2.4.1 ADF Basic Specifications
Scanning/Paper Feeding Method
Small window scanning, U-turn paper feed method
Maximum Document Size
A4, LGL, LT, B5
Width: 182 ~ 216mm
Length: 257 ~ 355.6mm
Maximum Loadable Pages
A4 (80g/m
2
): 50 sheets
LT (75g/m
2
): 50 sheets
LGL (80g/m
2
): 50 sheets
NOTE: Gross thickness of papers 8 mm or less
Basic Weight of Document Paper
50 ~ 124g/m
2
Document Paper Type
Laser printer paper, Ink-jet paper, Plain paper, Recycled paper, etc.
Scanning Order
1 to N
Document Stack
Face-down
Document Positioning
Center
Scan Speed
Monochrome: 2 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Full color: 11sec/A4, 300dpi
Detection of Paper Presence on the ADF
Available
Document Size Detection
Available for A4, LT, and B5
Cover Open Detection
Available
Lock Mechanism
ADF cannot be opened when the scanner unit is open
Weight
2.65kg
Size
448 x 323 x 90
Registration Accuracy
Leading edge registration 0 1.5mm (sub scanning direction)
Center registration: 0 1.0 mm (main scanning direction)
Anti-Skew Accuracy
Sub-scanning direction: 0 1.5 mm/297 mm
Main-scanning direction: 0 1.0 mm/200 mm
Magnification Error
Main scanning 1.5 % /216 mm
Sub scanning 1.0% /356 mm
43
1.2.4.2 Document Specifications
SUPPORTED PAPERS
Paper type
Plain paper/Semi thick paper/Recycled paper/Laser printer paper/Ink-jet paper
Paper size
B5/A4/LT/LGL
Document basic weight (g/m
2
)
50 ~ 124g/m
2
UNSUPPORTED PAPERS
Paper type
Tracing paper for drafting/Coated paper/Thermal paper/Paper with adhesive/
silicone oil paper/CF paper/Cut-and-patched paper/Processed paper/Thick paper
more than 125g/m
2
.
Document status
Curled document that are 10 mm or more in width and 20 mm or less in
length.Wrinkled or folded document that are 5 mm or more in width and 20 mm or
less in length.
REMEDY FOR PAPER JAM
If the document is entangled with the roller inside the ADF mechanism, turn the knob
counterclockwise so that the jammed document is ejected to the document tray.
(The knob cannot be turned clockwise)
1.2.5 Copy Performance
1.2.5.1 Paper Size and Print Area
Figure 1-6. Guaranteed Printing Area
NOTE: The scanned area of the original is determined based on the paper size
matching the home position of the original (origin on the document table)
with that of the paper. When the size of the original (original scan area)
exceeds the maximum scan area of the scanner, the original is copied in
the range of the maximum scan area. The scanned area is placed in the
center of the guaranteed printable area with the area beyond the
maximum range cut off.
Table 1-29. Paper Size and Print Area (unit: mm)
Paper Type
Paper Size:
(H x V)
Print Area
a1 b a2 c1 d c2
A4 297 x 210 5 200 5 5 287 5
B5 257 x 182 5 172 5 5 247 5
LGL 215.9 x 355.6 5 205.9 5 5 345.6 5
LT 279.4 x 215.9 5 205.9 5 5 269.4 5
a1 a2 b
c1
c2
d
Guaranteed
Printing Area
44
1.2.5.2 Copy Accuracy
ENLARGEMENT PERFORMANCE
Definition
Enlargement performance is obtained by multiplying magnification error of the
optical scanner read by that of the printer.
Scanner: Main scanning 1.5 % /216mm
Sub scanning 0.5 % /100mm
Printer : Main scanning 100 0.5 % /190mm
Sub scanning 100 0.5 % /234mm
ADF : Main scanning 0.5 % /216mm
Sub scanning 0.5 % /356mm
Specification Values
Copy using ADF : Main scanning 100 2.0% /190mm
Sub scanning 100 1.5% /277mm
Copy using document table: Main scanning 100 2.0% /190mm
Sub scanning 100 1.0% /277mm
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY
Figure 1-7. Printing Start Position Accuracy
SKEW (T.B.D)
Table 1-30. Printing Start Position Accuracy
A4 Document table ADF
Main scanning direction Reference point (c) 3.5mm 4.5mm
Sub-scanning direction Reference point (a) 3.0mm 4.5mm
Table 1-31. Skew
A4 Document table ADF
Main scanning direction (| a-b |) 2.2mm 3.1mm
Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |) 3.4mm 4.8mm
Table 1-32. Length standard of measurement
A4 Simplex printing
Main scanning direction (e) 190 mm
Sub scanning direction (f) 277 mm
c
a b
f
e
d
Feed direction
Guaranteed
Printing Area
45
1.2.6 Fax Performance
1.2.6.1 Basic Specifications
RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION MODES
Color : 8 bits for each RGB
Monochrome : 1 bit
DATA COMPRESSION
Color : JPEG
Monochrome : MH, MR, MMR
RECEIVING/TRANSMITTING DENSITY
Color : 200 x 200 (dpi)
Monochrome : 8 x 15.4, 8 x 7.7, 8 x 3.85 [dot/mm]
PAPER SIZE
Color : A4, LT, LGL*
Monochrome : A4, LT, LGL*
NOTE"*": LGL sized papers only become available when using the ADF
PRINT PAPER SIZE
Color : A4, B5, LT, LGL
Monochrome : A4, B5, LT, LGL
SUPPORTED LINES
Selecting the country and the line type using the control panel enables the
communication in response to the FAX standards of each country.
Supported lines : PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network),
PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
Earth start/Flash start compatible (For German models only)
TRANSMISSION SPEED
The communication speed is determined automatically by negotiating with the other
party according to the fax protocol.
Transmission speed:
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200
16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
PROTOCOL
Protocol : G3, G3ECM
Supported Countries
Supports the following 36 countries
Japan Austria Spain
Taiwan Belgium Sweden
China Denmark England
Korea Finland Russia
Hong Kong France Poland
Singapore Germany Czechoslovakia
Australia Greek Hungary
New Zealand Netherlands Swiss
Thailand Ireland Norway
Malaysia Italia Argentine
America Luxembourg Brazil
Canada Portugal Mexico
CAUTION
7
Using the product in countries or regions other than the above
supported countries is not guaranteed.
46
1.2.7 Controller Specifications
1.2.7.1 Basic Specifications
CPU : TX4955 (192MHz)
RAM
Standard : 128 MB (P slot= 64 MB + SO slot =64 MB)
Extension : Up to 576 MB with additional memories as follows;
(SO slot=256MB-DIMM + S1 slot=256 MB-DIMM)
DIMM Specification: 90 pin SDRAM (128 bit)
Capacity = 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB
Program ROM : 8 MB Flash (Mirror type)
Panel : LCD 22 characters x 1 line
Seven LEDs
22 buttons (Base model)
32 buttons (FAX model)
Interface
Host I/F : USB 2.0 HS
Network (Cobalt)
FAX I/F : External board compatible (manufactured by NJRC)
Laser-FAX
Scanner I/F : CCD I/F
Moter I/F
ADF I/F
Engine I/F : UART (same as AcuLaser C1100)
1.2.7.2 Host interface specifications
The printer provides the following host interfaces.
USB (Rev.2.0 HS) interface
Network interface
Fax interface (Fax model only)
Phone line
Attached telephone
The locations of the interfaces are shown below.
Figure 1-8. Location of Interfaces
NOTE"*":The base model is not equipped with the fax interfaces.
USB interface
Network interface
Fax interface* (phone line)
Fax interface* (attached telephone)
47
1.3 Control Panel
1.3.1 Panel Specifications
EXTERIOR
Figure 1-9. External View of Control Panel

5 lines x 22 characters (132 x 65 dots)
Data LED (Orange)
Print LED (green)
Error LED (Red)
One-Touch button A, B, C
Asterisk button Hash button
Ten-key Reset button
FAX button
Advanced/Menu
button
Right button Left button Up button
Down button
B/W Start button
Color Start button
Cancel button Speed dial button Redial button
Scan button
Scan LED (green)
Copy button Setup button
Copy LED (green)
Setup LED (green) FAX LED (green)
Buzzer
FAX model
Base model
48
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Note *1: Once the push-scan mode is started and the local PC is selected,
the printer exits the scan mode after a certain period of time (one minute).
Wait for the printer to completely exit the scan mode before switching to any other
modes.
*2: Setup mode doubles with engine stop mode. In the setup mode,
the engine is stopped.
*3: The status of data LED is either OFF or flashing, not ON.
*4: Flashing/Flashing 1 indicates 0.3 sec ON, 0.3 sec OFF
*5: Flashing 2 indicates 0.6 sec ON, 0.6 sec OFF.
*6: If auto error clear is set to ON, errors are automatically cleared
in a given time without pressing the Start button.
*7: Automatically restored by clearing the error.
*8: Not affected by auto error clear set to ON.
*9: Error LED turns on or flashes whenever an error has occurred in any of the operation
modes. An initialization error due to printer, scanner, fax, or ADF failure disables
switching mode to the mode relating to the failured part. Errors ohter than the
initialzation errors allow to switch mode and continue operating without displaying
the error message (depends on the mode selected). If the error disables some
operation, the error message is displayed when the operation is selected.
If scanner error occurs, copy, fax and scan modes become invalid.(Receiving fax is
available). An error caused by Twain is displayed. If printer error occurs, copy and
print modes become invalid. Fax errors disables the fax mode and receiving fax also
becomes unavailable. System errors are indicated as Cxxxx Service Req (service
call error), and disables the whole operation. However, when the engine related
service call error (Exxxx) has occurred, functions except printer operation can be
used.
Table 1-33. LCD and LEDs
Name Function
Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD)
LCD (132 x 65 dot matrix) allows max. 22 characters x 5 lines display
Operation mode and guidance are normally displayed on top line.
The default mode is print mode. So, displays printer status when the product is turned on.
Print LED (green) On : Printer is in print mode / Off: Printer is in modes other than print mode (copy, fax, scan, setup modes)
Copy LED (green) On : Printer is in copy mode / Off: Printer is in modes other than copy mode (print, fax, scan, setup modes)
FAX LED (green)
(Fax model only)
On : Fax mode
Off : Other than fax mode (print, copy, scan, setup modes)
Scan LED *
1
(green) On : Scan mode (Push-scan)
Off : Other than scan mode (print, copy, fax, setup modes)
Setup LED *
2
(green) On : Setup mode
Off : Other than setup mode (print, copy, fax, scan modes)
Data LED *
3
(orange) Off : No print data exists.
Flashing : Currently receiving print data, copying, sending/receiving fax job, scanning, processing data, or printing.
Error LED *
9
(red) Flashing 1*
4
: An error has occurred which permits continuing to print by pressing the B/W Start or Color Start button.*
6
Flashing : An error has occurred which requires the user to remove the cause of the error.*
7
Flashing 2 *
5
: An error has occurred which requires the user to press the B/W Star or Color Start button after removing the cause of the error.*
8
Off : Indicates no error.
49
Table 1-34. List of Button Functions
Button name Function
Copy button Switches the modes. Each time the button is pressed, the current mode is switched. Pressing the button twice turns the current mode to printer mode.
FAX button
Scan button
Setup button
One touch speed dial A
One touch speed dial B
One touch speed dial C
Pressing the button immediately sends the fax data to the registered fax number.
Advanced/Menu button Displays advanced menu.
Reset button Resets the copy parameter
Resets the scan parameter.
Resets the fax transmission parameter.
Returns the menu screen on the LCD to the previous level.
Up/Down buttons Used when proceeding through menu items, or selecting the parameters.
Left/Right buttons
Speed dial button Entering numbers after pressing this button immediately send the fax data to the registered fax number.
Redial button Inserts a pause into the number or dials the number that was last entered.
Cancel button Cancels copy, fax transmission, and print job.
Asterisk/Hash buttons Enters numeric characters such as the number of copy, magnification, and fax number (fax model only).
Ten-key
Start Buttons Starts monochrome/color copy, monochrome/color scan, or monochrome/color fax transmission. Also used to clear error/warning.
50
LCD DISPLAY AFTER THE SYSTEM START-UP
Moves to print mode initial screen after displaying start-up screen for 2 seconds.
Figure 1-10. LCD Display after the System Start-up
Contents of the Initial Screen
Top line: Status, Guidance
Upper right: toner remaining amount, fax reception data accumulation icon
Four lines from the bottom: Messages appears as follows
1st line : Warning message
2nd line : Operation, status message
3rd line : Operator guidance, time display
4th line : Paper size, paper remaining amount
Size of paper loaded on the paper feeder is displayed with two or three letters
as shown in the table below.
Alert screen
An alert screen displays warning, guidance or any other message informing
restricted function.
Toner remaining
amount icon
Fax reception data
accumulation icon
After 2 Seconds
Start-up screen
Print mode initial
screen
Display Description
Top line Left status, guidance Displays mode and status
Right Toner remaining amount icon Displays 11 levels to indicate 0 to 100 % by
10% in the order of K, C, M, and Y.
Fax reception data
accumulation icon
Only displayed when there are received fax
jobs remaining unprinted in the memory. It is
not displayed for accumulated sending jobs.
Four
lines
from the
bottom
1st line Warning message Only displayed when warnings occurred.
2nd
line
Operation, status messages Statuses such as ready-to-print, unable to
print, or sleep mode are displayed.
3rd line Operator guidance, time
display
Only displayed when the time is set.
4th line Paper size, paper remaining
amount
Indicates four levels (0, 33, 66, 100 %) in the
order of MP tray and the cassette.
Only displayed when they are installed.
Paper size: Program Paper size: Program
A4 A4 Executive EXE
A5 A5 F4 F4
B5 B5 Monarch MON
Letter LT C10 C10
Half Letter HLT DL DL
Legal LGL C5 C5
Government Letter GLT C6 C6
Government Legal GLG ISO B5 IB5
51
Displayed for certain period of time (normally three seconds) without any
user intervention.
Displayed when the status is ongoing without any user intervention.
User intervention is possible or required.
Figure 1-11. Alert Screen
If the job cancel alert occurs, press the Cancel button again to cancel the job. Press the
Start button to void the cancel.
Error Screen
If an error has occurred, error screen appears. Guidance is displayed as long as the
error can be cleared and the job is continuable.
Figure 1-12. Error Screen
To clear the error, press the Start button. Press the Cancel button to cancel the job that
caused the error.
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
52
1.3.2 Basic Functions
1.3.2.1 Print Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Note *1: All the modes become inoperative when system error occurred.
*2: If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot switch modes until they cancel the error.
If there is an error concerning device that is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
Button name Idling During printing Twain Fax printing Error
*1,2
Copy button Moves to copy mode Invalid Invalid Warning is displayed when receiving data
from the fax board. After receiving the data,
the current mode can be switched.
Unable to move to copy mode. In
copy mode, switches to print mode.
FAX button Moves to fax mode Moves to fax mode Invalid Moves to fax mode Moves to fax mode. In fax mode,
switch to print mode.
Scan button Moves to scan mode Moves to scan mode Invalid Moves to scan mode Moves to scan mode. In scan mode,
Setup button Moves to setup mode Waits for the engine to stop,
and moves to setup mode.
Invalid Waits for the engine to stop, and moves to
setup mode.
Moves to setup mode. In setup mode,
One touch speed dial A/
One touch speed dial B/
Moves to fax mode,
and dials the registered
number.
Moves to fax mode, and
dials the registered number.
Invalid Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered
number.
Moves to fax mode, and dials the
registered number.
Advanced/Menu button Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Reset button Invalid Invalid Invalid Multiple warnings detected Invalid
Up button/
Down button
Multiple warnings
detected
Multiple warnings detected Invalid Invalid Invalid
Left button/
Right button
Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Speed dial button Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Redial button Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Cancel button Invalid 1. Short press:
Cancels Job
2. Long press (hold for
more than three
seconds)Cancels all jobs
Local: Invalid
Network: Turns the power off when scanning
is NOT in progress. During scanning, cancels
the scanning while keeping the power on.
When scanning and printing occur at the same
time, the former has priority.
1. Short press: Cancels Job
2. Long press (hold for more than three
seconds)Cancels all jobs
Invalid
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Ten-key Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Start Buttons Invalid Invalid Local: InvalidStarts scanning when scanning is
NOT in progress. Invalid during scanning.
Invalid 1. Recoverable error: Clears the error
2. Unrecoverable error:
Displays [Error cannot be cleared].
53
STATUS DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE
Guidance Message
STATUS DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE
List of Warnings
Operation, status messages
Operator guidance message
Display Descriptions
Print mode ---
Sccanner is in use ---
Could not print ---
Check paper size ---
Image optimum ---
Check paper type ---
Color mismatch ---
CMYK toner low ---
Worn photoconductor ---
Worn fixer ---
Worn CMYK developer soon ---
Non-genuine toner ---
Reset ---
Please wait ---
Warming up ---
Calibrating printer ---
Cancel the job Remote job cancellation
Standby ---
Ready ---
Printing Including processing the job
Printing test sheet ---
Scanning locked ---
Scanning ---
Reset all ---
Cancel all jobs ---
Cancel the job ---
Writing to ROM module ---
Using fax tool ---
Printing tast sheet ---
Cancel to stop ---
Start to continue ---
54
Date and Time Display
Note: Initial values for time messages depend on the destination. Products for other than Noth
America are European destination spec.
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE
1/23/2004 13:59 MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM-Noth
American destinations
23/ 1/2004 DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM-
European destinations
Printing
Please wait
---
Scanning
Please wait
---
Manual Duplex Manual duplex printing
Check paper Manual feed
Using networked TWAIN
Please wait
TWAIN is being used
Cancel printing?
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancellation of print job
Cancel all print jobs?
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancellation of all print jobs
Cancel scanning?
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancellation of scan job
Scanner Trouble
Unable to Copy
Dont Change mode
Printer Error
Unable to Copy
Dont Change mode
Scanner Trouble
Unable to Scan
Dont Change mode
Fax Trouble
Unable to Fax
Dont Change mode
55
1.3.2.2 Fax Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Note *1: Switching operation mode is available while sending fax, waiting for sending fax,
and polling.
*2: Depending on the receiver, fax data transmitted in color may be converted into
monochrome.
*3: All the modes become inoperative when system error occurred.
*4: If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot
switch modes until they cancel the error. If there is an error concerning device that
is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
Button name Idling Scanning FAX
Copy button Moves to copy mode Invalid Moves to copy mode. In copy mode, switch to
print mode.
FAX button Moves to print mode Invalid Unable to move to fax mode.
In fax mode, switch to print mode.
Scan button Moves to print mode Invalid Moves to scan mode
In scan mode, switch to print mode.
Setup button Moves to setup mode Invalid Moves to setup mode.
In setup mode, switch to print mode.
1. Short press: Dials the registered number.
2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Prompts the user to register new numbers.
Invalid Does not shift to fax mode and dial
Advanced/Menu button When verifying speed dial numbers: Displays details on speed dial numbers. Invalid Invalid
Reset button 1. Short press: Performs initialization
2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Perform initialization for all the settings
3. Cursor function: Deletes one character
4. Selecting speed dial numbers: Moves to fax initial screen
Invalid Invalid
Up button
/Down button
Changes setup items Invalid Invalid
Left button
/Right button
1. Menu: Changes setup items
2. Cursor function: Moves cursor
Invalid Invalid
Speed dial button Fax mode initial screen - Speed dial transmission - Group dial transmission - Fax mode initial screen Invalid Invalid
Redial button 1. During dialing: inserts a pause
2. Before dialing: dials the number that was last entered
Invalid Invalid
Cancel button Invalid When scanning is in progress, the job is
canceled and already scanned and
temporarily stored pages are deleted.
Invalid
Asterisk/Hash buttons Dial setup Invalid Invalid
Ten-key Dial setup Invalid Invalid
Start Buttons Starts scanning. Starts receiving fax when the fax is send during using the attached phone
with the reception mode set to auto switch or phone only.
Other conditions: starts scanning
Invalid Clears the error
Fax initialization
56
SETUP ITEMS
Fax Mode Setup Items
Display Menu when Unregistered
Advanced Fax Mode setup items
Fax Job Information
Setup menu Setup item Remarks
Destination Numeric values/speed dial numbers 50 digits
If the numbers are
NOT the speed dial
numbers, they can be
edited (speed dial
numbers can only be
deleted).
Paper size A4/B5/LT/LGL LGL sized papers can
be used when the
ADF is installed.
Density -3 - 3 7 levels
Image quality (monochrome) Standard, Quality, High quality, Photo Monochrom only
Polling reception On, Off ---
Overseas Mode On, Off ---
Display Remarks
Not Registerd ---
Item Setup menu/item Remarks
Activity Report Speed Dial List Print of Speed Dial List
Activity Report Print of Fax Activity Report
Fax Setting List Print of Fax Setting List
Memory Job Info Print of Fax Memory Job Informations
Fax job information Memory Info Display Displays the amount of the memory used for the
fax module
Fax Transmssn Job Fax transmission jobs (currently transmitted job
and stored jobs) are listed. .
Fax Reception Job Fax reception jobs (currently received job and
stored jobs) are listed.
Item Setup menu/item Remarks
Memory Info
Display
Used Memory = xxx% xxx is 0 to 100
Fax Transmssn Job TT : MM Start time
Waiting/Transmission Status of job
Dial Number/Speed Dial Address ---
Fax Reception Job TT:MM Start Time
Receiving/Waiting/Printing Status of job
Dial Number/Speed Dial Address ---
Fax Transmssn Job
detailed information
item
Time = YY/MM/DD TT:MM Start Time
Sender = (Speed Dial Name) Registered Name
Number = (Dial Number) Dial Number
Color Mode = Color/B&W Fax mode
Fax Quality = Standard/Qlty/HghQ/
Photo
Monochrome only
Pages = (number of pages) ---
Fax Reception Job
detailed information
Time = YY/MM/DD TT:MM Start Time
Destination = (Speed Dial Name) Registered Name
Number = (Dial Number) Destination Dial Number
Color Mode = Color/B&W Fax type
Pages = (number of pages) Number of document pages
Fax Job deletion Delete?
No
Yes
---
57
STATUS DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE
Guidance Messages
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE
List of Warnings
Operation, Status Messages
Control instruction Messages
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE
Display Remarks
Press start to transmit ---
Using external phone Press start to receive
Polling Rcption On ---
Speed Dial ---
Group Dial ---
Speed Dial List ---
Activity Report ---
Fax Setting List ---
Memory Job Info ---
Fax Menu Advanced Fax Menu
Display Remarks
Image optimum ---
Color mismatch ---
CMKY toner low ---
Worn fixer ---
Worn developer ---
Display Remarks
Reset ---
Please wait ---
Warming up ---
Standby ---
Fax scanning ---
Transmitting Fax Only Color Fax
Printing Fax report printing
Display Remarks
Cancel Fax Job Press Cancel to Canc. or Start to
Continue
---
Display Remarks
Receiving fax ---
Need More Memory ---
58
1.3.2.3 Copy Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
SETUP ITEMS
Setup Items in Copy Mode
Button name Idling Scanning Printing
Copy Moves to print mode Invalid Moves to print mode
Fax Moves to fax mode Invalid Moves to fax mode
Scan button Moves to scan mode Invalid Moves to scan mode
Setup Moves to setup mode Invalid Waits for the engine to
stop, and moves to setup
mode.
Moves to fax mode, and
dials the registered number.
Invalid Invalid
Advanced Shifts from scan mode
initial screen to advanced
scan menu screen
Invalid Invalid
Reset button Short press: Cancels the
current setting
Long press (hold for more
than three seconds):
Returns all copy settings to
their default
Invalid Invalid
Up/Down Scrolls up/down in the
setting items
Invalid Scrolls up/down in the
setting items
Left/Right Selects and changes the
setting
Invalid Selects and changes the
setting
Speed dial Invalid Invalid Invalid
Redial Invalid Invalid Invalid
Stop Invalid Cancels the
Job
Cancels the Job
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid Invalid Invalid
Ten-key Enters number of pages,
magnification
Invalid Enters number of pages,
magnification
Start Start Invalid Start
Setup menu Setup items Remarks
Copies 1 - 99 ---
Zoom 25 - 400% In increments of 1 %
LGL>LT
A4>B5
100%
B5>A4
HLT>LGL
LGL>LT (78%)
A4>B5 (86%)
100 %
B5>A4 (115%)
HLT>LGL (154%)
Full Copy On/Off ---
Paper Size MP A4, MP B5, MP LGL,
MP LT, LC A4, LC LT
MP tray supports the all paper size.
Lower cassette (LC) supports
selected paper.
B&W DocType Txt/Ph
Photo
Text
Hgh Ql
Text/Photo
Photo
Stndrd
Fine
S.Fine
This strings is used in for US
ColorDocType Txt/Ph
Photo
Text
Hgh Ql
Text/Photo
Photo
Stndrd
Fine
S.Fine
This strings is used in for US
Density -3 - 3 7 levels
Contrast -3 - 3 7 levels
R -3 - 3 7 levels
G -3 - 3 7 levels
B -3 - 3 7 levels
59
Details on Monochrome/Color Copy Settings
Details on Image Adjustment Settings
Advanced Copy Mode Setup Items
Document
type
Target document Mode characteristics
Image data processing Resolution
Moire
removal
Background
noise reducing
Outline
emphasizing
Scan
resolution
Print
resolution
Text/Photos Color documents printed by offset printing such as
magazines (moire normally occurs) and everyday office
documents.
Suitable for copying documents consisting black
characters and photographic images. Yes Yes Yes 300dpi 600dpi
Photos Photos, printed materials that contains a lot of photos
and any other documents with images that need tone
reproduction.
Emphasizes color and density reproducibility. (High
quality mode that stresses gradation and contrast for
reproducing photo images.)
Yes NO 300dpi 600dpi
Text Documents mainly consist of black text. Performs black text enhancement process in order to
obtain best quality for the documents.
--- Yes --- 300dpi 600dpi
High
resolution
Technical drawings or any other detailed drawings that
consist of a lot of fine lines.
Performs black text enhancement process reducing the
background noise. Scan resolution is set to 600 dpi, the
maximum image quality mode for emphasis
reproducibility of the technical drawing, fine lines.
--- Yes --- 600dpi 600dpi
Adjustment
Item
Set contents Description
Setup value coverage
(-) side (+) side
Density Adjust the density of whole area of the image. Increase the density (darken the image): to + sideReduce the density (lighten the image): to - side -3 3
Contrast Adjust the contrast (difference between lights and
darks) applied to whole area of the image
Difference is small: to + side (increases contrast) Difference is large: to - side (decreases contrast)
-3 3
R Fine adjusts blue (deep blue) components Blue is weak: to - side (Increases G/B relatively by lowering R) Blue is strong: to + side (Decreases G/
B relatively by increasing R)
-3 3
G Fine adjusts red (purplish red) components Red is weak: to - side (Increases R/B relatively by lowering G) Red is strong: to + side (Decreases R/B
relatively by increasing G)
-3 3
B Fine adjusts yellow components Yellow is weak: to - side (Increases R/G relatively by lowering B)
Yellow is strong: to + side (Decreases R/G relatively by increasing B)
-3 3
Setup menu Remarks
Standard copy ---
2 Pages per Sheet ---
60
Additional Menu Items
STATUS DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE
Guidance message
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE
List of Warnings
Control instruction Messages
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE
Docu size A4, B5, LGL, LT ---
Display Remarks
Press Start to copy ---
2 Pages per Sheet ---
No matching Ppr sze ---
Copy menu Advanced copy menu
Display Remarks
Could not print ---
Image oputimum ---
Color mismatch ---
CMYK toner low ---
Worn fixer ---
Worn developer ---
Display Remarks
Please wait ---
Warming printer ---
Standby ---
Copying ---
Scanning 1
st
page ---
Scanning 2
nd
page ---
Display Remarks
Press Cancel to stop ---
Display Remarks
Insufficient memory ---
Cancelling ---
Copying
Please wait
---
Cancel Copy Job
Press Cancel to Canc.
or Start to Cantinue
Cancellation of copy job
ScanCompletePage1
Set Page2
Press Start to Scan
Press to Finish
---
61
1.3.2.4 Scan Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Note *1: All the modes become inoperative when system error occurred.
*2: If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot switch modes until they cancel the error.
If there is an error concerning device that is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
Button name Idling Running Error LED
Copy Moves to copy mode Invalid Unable to move to copy mode.
In copy mode, switch to print mode.
Fax Moves to fax mode Invalid Moves to fax modeIn fax mode, switch to print
mode.
Scan Moves to print mode Invalid Unable to move to scan mode.
In scan mode, switch to print mode.
Setup Moves to setup mode Invalid Moves to setup modeIn setup mode, switch to print
mode.
Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered number. Invalid Does not shift to fax mode and dial
Advanced/Menu button Shifts from scan mode initial screen to advanced scan menu
screen
Invalid Invalid
Reset button 1. Short press: Performs initialization
2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Perform
initialization for all the settings
Invalid Invalid
Up/Down Scrolls up/down in the setting items Invalid Invalid
Left/Right Opens subsequent menus or backs to previous menu, or
exits the menu
Selects and changes the setting
Invalid Invalid
Speed dial Invalid Invalid Invalid
Redial Invalid Invalid Invalid
Cancel button Invalid Local PC: Invalid
Network: Cancels scanner job
Invalid
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid Invalid Invalid
Ten-key Invalid Invalid Invalid
Start Standard scanning using the document table: Auto select
Other than the above: Start
Invalid Clears the errorFax initialization
62
SETUP ITEMS
Scan Mode Setup Items
Network PC selection items
Push-scan Setup Items
Advanced Scan Mode Setup Items
Menu added when performing manual scan
STATUS DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE
Guidance Messages
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE
List of Warnings
Display Remarks
Local PC ---
Network PC ---
Display Remarks
PC name Up to 10 PC names are
displayedCharacters that cannot be
displayed are replaced with blanks
(spaces).
File format PDF/TIFF/JPG ---
Display Remarks
Standard scan ---
Manual scan Not for Auto scan
Paper size A4/B5/LT/LGL LGL sized papers can be
used when the ADF is
installed.
Display Remarks
Scan To PC ---
Press Start: scan ---
Using local PC ---
Select Network PC ---
Scan menu Advanced scan menu
Display Remarks
Could not print ---
Check Paper size ---
Resolution reduce ---
Check color adjustment ---
CMYK toner low ---
Replacephotoconductor soon ---
Replace fixer soon ---
Replace developer soon ---
63
Control instruction messages
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE
Display Remarks
Reset ---
Please wait ---
Warming up ---
Standby ---
Scanning ---
Waiting to Connect PC ---
Display Remarks
Press Cancel to stop ---
Display Remarks
Canceling ---
Scanning
Please wait
---
Cancel Scan Job
Press Cancel to Canc.
or Start to Continue
Cancellation of scan job
PC Connection failed ---
Net Connection failed Not concluded normally because of
the cable breakage or other reasons.
64
1.3.3 Setup Functions
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
SETUP MODE SETUP ITEMS
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN SETUP MODE
Button name Setup mode
Copy Moves to copy mode
Fax Moves to fax mode
Scan Moves to scan mode
Setup Moves to print mode
Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered number.
Advanced Invalid
Reset Invalid
Up/Down Selects and changes the setting
Left/Right Selects and changes the setting
Speed dial button Invalid
Redial button Invalid
Cancel button Invalid
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid
Ten-key Invalid
Start Invalid
Setup menu Remarks
Printer settings Information Menu (p65)
Tray menu (p65)
Setup Menu (p65)
Reset Menu (p66)
Support Menu When started in support mode (p66)
Printer Adjust Menu When started in support mode (p66)
Maintenance Menu When started in maintenance mode (p69)
Host I/F settings USB Menu (p66)
Network Menu (p67)
Fax settings Basic Settings (p67)
Transmssn Settings (p67)
Reception Settings (p68)
Speed Dial Settings (p68)
Report Setup (p68)
Fax Factory settings (p68)
Copy Settings Copy Function Settings (p68)
Copy Factory Settings (p68)
Scanner settings Carriage lock ---
Display Explanation
Clear Speed Dial
Press Cancel to Clear
or Start to Continue
---
Faxing
Please Wait
Processing Fax job
Please Wait Processing Scanner carriage lock sequence.
65
1.3.3.1 Print Mode
PRINTER INFORMATION SETUP ITEMS
Note *1: Only displayed when the network interface board is installed, and "network menu" -
"network I/F=ON"
*2: Only displayed when a D4-compliant USB external device is connected, and USB
Menu - USB I/F=On.
*3: This item is only for display, not changeable.
PAPER FEEDER SETUP ITEMS
DEVICE SETUP ITEMS
Setup menu Setup items
Status
Sheets
---
Network
Status Sheet
*1
---
USB Ext I/F
Status Sheet
*2
---
C toner =
*3
E F ~ E F
M toner =
*3
E F ~ E F
Y toner =
*3
E F ~ E F
K toner =
*3
E F ~ E F
Photo con =
*3
E F ~ E F
Total pages =
*3
0 - 99999999
Color pages =
*3
0 - 99999999
B/W pages =
*3
0 - 99999999
MP Tray size LT, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6,
ISO B5
Cassette paper size A4/LT
MP Tray Plain, Semithk, Letterhead, Recycled, Colored
LC Type Plain paper, semi thick paper, letterhead, recycled paper, colored
paper
Lang Lang English
Lang Franais
Sprache Deutsch
Lingua Italiano
IDIOMA ESPAOL
SPRK SVENSKA
Sprog Dansk
Taal Neder lands
Kieli SUOMI
Lng. Portugues
---
Time to Sleep 5, 15, 30, 60, 120 and
180minutes
---
MP Mode Normal, Last ---
Size Ignore On, Off ---
Auto Cont On, Off ---
LCD contrast 0 - 15 ---
Time Setting YYYY/MM/DD HH/MM For fax models only, format is as
below.
Date Format DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/
YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD
For fax models, format depends on
destination as follow:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM-
Domestic destinations MM/DD/
YYYY HH:MM-North American
destinations DD/MM/YYYY
HH:MM-European destinations
66
PRINTER RESET ITEMS
SUPPORT FUNCTION ITEM
PRINTER ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION ITEMS
USB I/F SETUP ITEMS
Note *1: After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the
power is turned on again. While it is reflected in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back,
the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.
*2: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected.Changed to
USB Config=No automatically when exitting the setup mode.
*3: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected, and USB
external device=Yes. Content of the setting depends on the USB external device
settings.
*4: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when Get IPAddress =
Auto.
*5: When the IP Adress - Panel or PING is changed to Auto, the setting value of
the Panel or PING is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
when the setting is changed back to Panel or PING. The printer displays
192.168.192.168 if the settings are not made from the panel.
Setup menu Remarks
Clear warning ---
Clear all warning ---
Reset ---
Restart Unit Reboot
Factory Settings ---
Change Toner C ---
Change Toner M ---
Change Toner Y ---
Change Toner K ---
Reset Fuser Counter Overseas destinations only
LCD Backlight Auto, On, Off ---
Normal 0 - 5 - 15 ---
SemiThk 0 - 5 - 15 ---
Thick 0 - 5 - 15 ---
ExtraThk 0 - 5 - 15 ---
Card 0 - 5 - 15 ---
Envelope 0 - 5 - 15 ---
Feed offset -3.5 - 0.0 - 3.5 mm (mm) The printer reboots.
Scan offset -3.5 - 0.0 - 3.5 mm (mm) The printer reboots.
Calibration --- ---
Setup menu Remarks
USB I/F
*1
Yes, No
USB speed
*1
HS, FS
USB Extl/FConfg
*2
Yes, No
Get IPAddress
*3
Panel, Auto, Ping
IP
*3, 4, 5
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
SM
*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
GW
*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
NetWare
*3
On, Off
AppleTalk
*3
On, Off
MS Network
*3
On, Off
Rendezvous
*3
On, Off
USB Extl/F Init
*3
---
67
NETWORK SETUP ITEMS
Note *1: Only displayed when the network interface board is installed. After this item is
changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned
on again. While it is reflected in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual
change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.
*2: Only displayed when a network interface board is installed. Changed to Network
Config=No automatically when exitting the setup mode.
*3: Only displayed when a network interface board is installed and Network Config is
set to Yes.
*4: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when Get IPAddress =
Auto.
*5: When the IP Adress - Panel or PING is changed to Auto, the setting value of
the Panel or PING is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
when the setting is changed back to Panel or PING. The printer displays
192.168.192.168 if the settings are not made from the panel.
1.3.3.2 Fax Mode
BASIC SETUP ITEMS
Note *: Fax basic settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the memory.
TRANSMISSION SETUP ITEMS
Note *: Fax transmission settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
memory.
Network I/F
*1
On, Off ---
Network Config
*2
A ---
Get IPAddress
*3
Panel, Auto, Ping Default values vary according to
the destination.
IP
*3, 4 5
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 ---
SM
*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 ---
GW
*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 ---
AppleTalk
*3
On, Off ---
MS Network
*3
On, Off ---
Rendezvous
*3
On, Off ---
Link Speed
*3
Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10
Full, 10 Half
Default values vary according to
the destination.
Line type PSTN, PBX, FlashStart FlashStart is only available in
Germany and France.
Adds the FlashStart function to
PBX to support FlashStart
Dial type Tone, 10 pps, 20 pps When the country setting is set to
Australia, 20 pps is not displayed.
Personal Number User name and fax number Numbers: 20 digits, names: 32
characters, name can only be set
with the tool.
Speaker volume OFF, 1, 2, 3 4 levels
Country/Area Set. Austria, Belgium, Denmark,
Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Holland, Ireland, Italy,
Luxemburg, Portugal, Spain,
Sweden, U.K., Russia, Poland,
Czech, Hungary, Switzerland,
Norway, Argentine, Brazil,
Mexico, Taiwan, China, Korea,
Hong Kong, Singapore, Australia,
New Zealand, Thailand, Malaysia,
U.S.A., Canada
---
Report printing Setup English, Francais, Deutsch,
Italiano, Espanol, SVENSKA,
Dansk, Nederlands, SUOMI,
Portugues, ,
Default values vary according to
the country setting.
Auto Redial Tries 0 - 99 Times
It set to 14 times in Australia, and it
set to 9 times in New Zealand.
Print Sender Info. On, Off ---
68
RECEPTION SETUP ITEMS
Note *1: Fax reception settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
memory.
*2: Auto reducing function works all the time.
*3: - DRPD=Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
- North America only
SPEED DIAL SETUP ITEMS
Note *1: Displays the list of all the registered fax numbers, and indicates the speed dial
numbers not in use. If you wish to change the speed dial number, press Up/Down or
Ten-key until desired number shows up. Press the Right button to select the number.
If unregistered number is chosen, then you can register new fax number. If registered
number is selected, the registered information will be deleted. The registered
information cannot be edited nor corrected. Adding new numbers and deleting the
registered information are possible. In the speed dial register process, fax numbers
should be entered using the Ten-key. To delete the information, press the Right
button after confirmation screens appears. When the information is either deleted or
cleared, the alert screen appears for confirmation.
*2: Fax speed dial settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
memory.
FAX COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SETUP ITEMS
Note *: Fax communication management setting cannot be changed as long as there are jobs
stored in the memory.
FAX FACTORY DEFAULT SETUP ITEMS
Note *1: This function returns all fax settings stored on the fax board and reboots the product.
*2: And deletes all unfinished fax jobs stored on the memory.
1.3.3.3 Copy Mode
COPY OPERATION SETUP ITEMS
COPY FACTORY DEFAULT SETUP ITEMS
Paper Cassette Auto, MPtray, Cassette ---
Incomming Mode Auto switching, Fax only,
Phone only, TAM
---
Timeout 1 - 99 unit: second(s)
DRPD*3 Normal, All ---
Individual Speed Dial Register, Delete 1 - 60
One-touch Dial Register, Delete A - C
Clear Speed Sial No, Yes Clears all the speed dial numbers.
Activity Report On, Off
Transmission Report At each transmission, On error, Off
Multipie Trans report At each transmission, On error, Off
Factory Settings
---
Returns the current settings to
factory default.
Standard Settings
---
Sets the current value as a copy job
standard value.
Factory Settings
---
Returns the current settings to
factory default.
69
1.3.4 Special Operations
1.3.4.1 Printer Related Special Operations
LIST OF OPERATING FUNCTIONS
The following is a list of the special operating functions supported by this printer.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
The following are items specific to this printer.
EEPROM Initialization
The information concerning usage amount for each of the toner cartridges, photoconductor unit, and fuser unit are not cleared as they are stored on the engine controller.
CAUTION
7
Do not make these functions (except Support mode and panel
setting value initialization) available to users.
Table 1-35. List of Operating Functions
Function Operating procedure
Support mode Hold [Down ] and turn the printer ON.
Initialization of EEPROM Hold [Color], [Reset], and [Left ] and turn the power ON (Check for all of the RAM area is performed).
Initialization of panel settings Hold [Reset] and turn the printer ON.
Update program ROM Hold [Color], [Reset], and [Down ] and turn the printer ON.
Maintenance mode Hold [Left ], [Up ], [Down ], and [Right ] and turn the printer ON.
Update engine program Hold [Color], [Reset], [Up ], and [Down ] and turn the printer ON.
RAM check for all areas [Hold [Color], [Up ], [Left ], and [Right ] and turn the printer ON.
MFP Maintenance Mode Hold [Color], [Up ], [Down ], and [Right ] and turn the printer ON.
Reset CPU when a Service Call occurs When a service call error occurs, hold down [Reset], [Left ], [Up ], [Down ], and [Right ] simultaneously.
Display detailed information when a Service
Call occurs
Press [Reset] , [Left ], and [Right ] when a service call error occurs.
70
Maintenance mode
After entering maintenance mode, the engine process control is executed forcibly.
After the printer enters the Maintenance mode, engine process control (Calibrating
Printer) is performed after printing since the process control is a cycle process
control.
1.3.4.2 Other Special Operations
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION SETUP ITEMS
MFP MAINTENANCE MODE
In MFP maintenance mode, self diagnosis and fax maintenance can be executed.
Initiation method and functions are described below. For details, refer to Chapter 3
Troubleshooting.
Initiation method
Hold [Color], [Up], [Down], and [Right] and turn the printer ON.
List of functions
Setup menu Remarks
Engine Status Sheet Exits setup mode and returns to printer mode.
Print Log Report Exits setup mode and returns to printer mode.
Reset 2ndBTRCounter The printer reboots.
Reset C DvlpCounter The printer reboots.
Reset M DvlpCounter The printer reboots.
Reset Y DvlpCounter The printer reboots.
Reset K DvlpCounter The printer reboots.
Reset Fuser Counter The printer reboots.
Clear Error Log ---
MCU DATA Backup ---
MCU DATA Restore ---
Table 1-36. Self diagnosis
Setup menu Reference
Printer 3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis (p134)
Scanner 3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis (p134)
Fax 3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis (p135)
Panel 3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis (p135)
B unit 3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis (p136)
Table 1-37. Fax maintenance
Setup menu Reference
Memory clear ALL
3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
FAX user area
Fax system area
Fax system counter area
Fax error history area
Fax system parameter area
Memory check Read data
3.3.2.2 Memory Check (p139)
Write data
Parameter check Read data
Write data
Module check Whole
Image memory
Modem
Gate array
Flash memory
Signal check Parameter 3.3.2.5 Signal Check (p142)
71
1.4 Status Sheet
This section describes Status Sheet that enables you to check current setups for printing
and faxing, and operating history.
STATUS SHEET
Status sheet is available in abridged and complete version.
Full Status Sheet
Printing a full status sheet is made using the printer driver. It is not printed out if
the driver fails to get information on the printer.
Abridged Status Sheet
An abridged status sheet is printed under the conditions described below.
Displayed characters vary according to the language setting and are printed in
monochrome.
Selecting printer information from the control panel.
When a full status sheet cannot be printed out using the printer driver.
Example of these status sheets are shown in Figure1-14 (p73) and Figure1-13 (p72).
The following consumables information is also printed on the status sheet.
Note *: 1,500 page capacity cartridge for K toner is included with shipment and is not
available separately.
The last line printed on the status sheet contains the following information.
1. Firmware version in DDYM format that starts with IA.
2. Type of the device of code ROM.
* : F lash
Space : Mask
3. 4-digit CMTD (Color Matching Table Data) version that starts with A.
4. Mechanical controller version expressed by 10-digit numbers that start with MC.
(Refer to 6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet (p555))
5. Space
6. USB ID (31PXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX)
7. Latest connection status of the USB communication mode.
H : HS
F : FS
Space : no connection with USB
CAUTION
7
Aside from the printer driver for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F,
EPW!3 (EPSON Printer Window! 3) needs to be installed to print a
full status sheet.
Information on Consumables Model number
Toner cartridge (C) 1,500 page capacity LP CA4ETC4C
4000 page capacity LP CA4ETC5C
Toner cartridge (M) 1,500 page capacity LP CA4ETC4M
4000 page capacity LP CA4ETC5M
Toner cartridge (Y) 1,500 page capacity LP CA4ETC4Y
4000 page capacity LP CA4ETC5Y
Toner cartridge (K) 4000 page capacity LP CA4ETC5K
*
Photoconductor Unit LPCA4KUT3
72
8. USB communication mode
D: D4 compatible device
Space:Non D4 compliant device
9. Number of occurrences of jams indicated by JC and 6 figures
10. Number of replacements of Toner Cartridge indicated by IC and 12 figures, and
number of recoveries from errors (Toner Cartridge) indicated by 12 figures.
Maximum number of times: 255
There is a space between the number of replacements and the number of error
recoveries.
Both numbers are indicated in order of C, M, Y, K with 3 figures for each.
When options are installed, the following information on them are added.
1. RAM DIMM : Total amount of memory including the standard RAM is indicated
as Installed Memory.
2. Network/IF Board
Settings in "Network Menu" - "Host I/F Settings" are listed.
"Network" is added in the "Interface"
"LAN HW Address", "LAN HW Revision", and "LAN FW Revision" are
added in the "Hardware Configuration".
NOTE: "LAN HW Address" is the Mac address.
"LAN HW Revision" is always 0 (zero).
"LAN FW Revision" is a version of the Planet.
3. 500-sheet Cassette
"Cassette" appears beside "Input Unit" under "Hardware Configuration".
(Complete status sheet and Abridged status sheet)
Figure 1-13. Full Status Sheet
73
Figure 1-14. Simplified Status Sheet (1) Figure 1-15. Simplified Status Sheet (2)
74
ENGINE STATUS SHEET
It can be output from the Maintenance Menu. Refer to Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
for the details on the Engine Status Sheet.
CAUTION
7
Do not disclose this information to users.
75
1.4.2 Fax Section
The following information sheets are available from the "Printing Report" menu which
is activated by pressing the [Advanced] button in fax mode.
SPEED DIAL LIST
The following stored information lists can be printed out.
One-Touch Dial List
Fax numbers assigned to the one-touch buttons (with their codes)
Speed-Dial List
Code
Name of the fax number
Fax number
Group Dial List
Group-dial code
Name of the group
Fax number (with the code)
ACTIVITY REPORT
The Activity Report provides a chronological history of the fax jobs stored in the
product (fax unit). The history is listed with the following items.
Information in the fax header
Information on each of the fax jobs
Start time
Fax number (sender or recipient)
Duration of the fax job
Pages
Mode
Result
Contents
Table 1-38. Items in "Printing Report"
Menu Item
Printing Report Speed Dial List
Activity Report
Fax Setting List
Memory Job Info
CHECK
POINT
7
If no numbers is stored in the above Dial Lists, the product displays
a message; "Report Print Error" on the LCD.
CHECK
POINT
7
If an error has occurred when starting up the product in
"Maintenance Mode", the error code (XXX-XXX) will be displayed
in the "Result" column.
76
FAX SETTING LIST
Current settings for the items shown in the table below are printed out in a list.
MEMORY JOB INFO
Information on fax jobs currently stored in the memory are printed out in a list.
Information in the fax header
Requested date/time
Sender or recipient fax number
Status (waiting to send, waiting to print, and so on)
Pages
Table 1-39. Fax Setting List Contents
No. Item
1 Line type
2 Dial type
3 Personal number
4 Personal name
5 Speaker volume
6 Country
7 Auto Redial Tries
8 Sender Record
9 Reception Mode
10 Attached Phone Call Time Out
11 DRPD (US model only)
12 Activity Report
13 Transmission Report
14 Multi Trans. Report
15
Software Version
Fax
Model
CHECK
POINT
7
When the product is in "Maintenance Mode", the following items
are added in the Fax Setting List.
Job Counter Information (counts of transmitted/received
pages)
System Error History (error code and occurrence date/time)
See 3.6.4.2 Log Information (p295) for details on the Fax Setting
List.
CHECK
POINT
7
"Report Print Error" message is displayed if no job is remaining in
the memory.
CHAP T E R
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLES Overview 78
2.1 Overview
The AcuLaser CX11/CX11F is an all-in-one laser printer equipped with scanner, copy
and fax functions (The AcuLaser CX11 does not have fax function). A4 full-color 4
cycle engine and a new controller which includes control circuits for scanner, ADF and
fax are employed on this product. The main controller is incorporated in the printer
mechanism and controls all of the functions.
The diagram below shows the basic configuration of the product.
Figure 2-1. Basic Configuration of the Product
MAIN FEATURES
Host-based controller using ESC/Page-S Printing System
Engine specifications
A4, Color 5 ppm / Monochrome 25 ppm, 600 dpi
TOSHIBA TX4955 CPU is employed
MFC is employed as new memory, I/O, and ASIC with an image processing
function.
64 MB RAM
Can be expanded up to 512 MB with option RAM
Two Built-in Interfaces
USB2.0HS
Ethernet (10Base/100Base-T)
Fax modular (The AcuLaser CX11F only)
Contorl Panel with LCD
ADF
Scanner
Panel Unit
Main Controller
Printer Section
Fax Unit
2.1.1 Outline Specifications
The following shows the outline specifications of the controller.
Table 2-1. List of Controller Outline Specifications
Item Description
Controller specifications Host-based controller
Engine Item A4 4 cycles
Printing speed
5/25 ppm (Color/Monochrome)
Scanner UA2510 Scanner (manufactured by Teco)
CPU
Item
TMPR4955BFG-200MHz
Bus frequency 96 [MHz]
Internal core frequency 192 [MHz] (96 [MHz] x 2)
ASIC Memory+I / O MFC (E05C20BA) Manufactured by NEC
484PBGA 0.13 [um]
Custom I/C ASIC for counterfeiting
prevention
N3R (B5B-7000) manufactured by OMRON
176QFP
ASIC for USB 2.0 HS E05C22AA Manufactured by EPSON 100PQFP
(SIX56014F00A)
Clock Clock wiring ASIC distribution (CPU, RAM, USB, FAX, N3R)
Clock frequency
96 [MHz]
USB (Synchronized DMA
operation)
24 [MHz] (distributed from ASIC)
FAX 48 [MHz]
N3R 48 [MHz]
UART (generated inside ASIC) 48 [MHz] (No SSCG modulation)
Crystal
oscillator
Clock oscillating frequency
48 [MHz] (MA-406 4 [pF])
USB 12 [MHz] (MA-406 10 [pF])
Video
27.779 [MHz] (MA-406 10 [pF])
Reset 3.3V (M51957BFP-C61J)
RAM
Standard capacity
128 [MB] SDRAM
Configuration C567PROG 64[MB]+C585RAM 64[MB]
Connector configuration
90pin DIMM
Device MT48LC16M16A2P-75
(Micron,256[Mbit] (x16))
Slot 2Slots (including standard one slot)
Max. capacity
576 [MB]
ROM Capacity 8 [MB] FLASH ROM Mirror type
Configuration
C567RROG
Connector configuration 90pin DIMM
Device
MBM29PL32BM-90TN-A5E1
(FUJITSU,32[Mbit] (x16))
Slot 1 slot (fixed for standard, no vacancy)
EEPROM Capacity 256[Kbit] SPI serial formula
Device M95256-WMW6T (ST micro)
Host I/F USB Item USB2.0HS
Device E05C22AA (Manufactured by EPSON 100PQFP)
Network Cobalt
FAX I/F External board compatible (manufactured by
NJRC) Laser-FAX
Scanner I/F
CCD I/F UA2510 (Teco) For Scanner connection
Moter I/F Motor
Driver
LB1946-K (SANYO,28pin-DIP)
ADF I/F Sheet feed type
Engine I/F UART(same as LP-V500)
Panel LCD section RCM6106B-A (132 x 65dot)
Backlight Installed
Switch section 6 x 6 switch matrix
LED section
Seven LEDs are driven by the panel board
RTC Configurations RTC-4543SA + Super capacitor
Backup capability 10 days (because of restriction of the circuit
configuration specification)
Power Supply
24 [V]
Printer engine 1.0 [A]
12 [V] Series regulator (PQ12DZ5UJ00H) 0.1 [A]
5 [V]
Printer engine 1.0 [A]
3.3 [V] Printer engine 4.0 [A]
2.5 [V]
Series regulator (PQ025EZ5MZPH) 0.5 [A]
1.5 [V] Series regulator (PQ015EZ1HZPH)
1.5 [A] (for internal MFC)
Series regulator (PQ015EZ01ZPH)
1.5 [A] (for internal CPU)
Debugging Tool SIF3 Board
Table 2-1. List of Controller Outline Specifications
Item Description
Figure 2-2. C588Block Diagram of the Main Board
Note *1: Base model does not implement CN704.
*2: Fax model does not implement CN705/CN410.
CN701 CN702
CN703
CN405
CN402
CN410
CN407
CN705
CN502
CN704
IC701 IC701
IC401 IC401
JP3
J
P
1
J
P
2
J
P
4
R
4
2
2
IC101 IC101
IC103 IC103 CN602
C
N
6
0
1
C588MAIN
IC102 IC102
C
N
3
0
0

R
O
M
/
R
A
M

D
I
M
M

(
9
0
p
i
n
)
C
N
2
0
1

R
A
M

D
I
M
M

A

(
9
0
p
i
n
)
C
N
2
0
2

R
A
M

D
I
M
M

B

(
9
0
p
i
n
)
CN501
ADF I/F
*1
(12Pin)
Sensor I/F
*2
(2Pin)
Panel I/F
(30Pin)
CCD_A I/F
(14Pin)
CCD_B I/F
(13Pin)
Motor I/F
(4Pin)
Engine I/F
(16Pin)
Viedo I/F
(2Pin)
P S0 S1
Power (24V)
(2Pin)
FAX I/F
*2
(40Pin)
USB I/F
(2Pin)
Power (5V, 3.3V)
(2Pin)
Cobalt I/F
(30Pin)
Figure 2-3. Block Diagram of the Controller
C
5
6
7
P
R
O
G

(
6
4
M
B
)
R
O
M
/
R
A
M

D
I
M
M
_
9
0
p
i
n
C
5
8
5
R
A
M

(
6
4
M
B
)
R
A
M

D
I
M
M
_
9
0
p
i
n
O
p
t
i
o
n
_
R
A
M

R
A
M

D
I
M
M
_
9
0
p
i
n
D
a
t
a
A
d
d
r
e
s
s
O
t
h
e
r

s
i
g
n
a
l
s
E
n
g
i
n
e
S
S
C
G

o
s
c
i
l
l
a
t
o
r

4
8
[
M
H
z
]
V
I
D
E
O
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
V
I
D
E
O
X
L
V
D
S
U
A
R
T
P
i
x
e
l
c
o
u
n
t
O
s
c
i
l
l
a
t
o
r

f
o
r

V
I
D
E
O

2
7
.
7
7
9
[
M
H
z
]
3
.
3
V
5
V
R
e
g
.
R
e
g
.
R
e
g
.
2
.
5
V
1
.
5
V
1
.
5
V
R
e
g
.
C N
2
4
V
1
2
V
S
D
C
L
K
[
0
]
9
6
[
M
H
z
]
D
a
t
a
:
3
2
b
i
t
S
D
C
L
K
[
1
]
9
6
[
M
H
z
]
A
d
r
:
2
0
b
i
t
9
6
[
M
H
z
]
S
D
C
L
K
[
2
]
P
o
w
e
r

S
u
p
p
l
y

C N
R S T X
3
2
C O L D R S T X
V C C O K
C
P
U
C
L
K
9
6
[
M
H
z
]
C
P
U
(
T
X
4
9
5
5
B
F
G

1
9
2
M
H
z
)
M
F
C
V
I
P
3
S
P
L
L

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

m
u
l
t
i
p
l
i
e
r
B
u
i
l
t
-
i
n

S
S
C
G
B
u
i
l
t
-
i
n

P
W
M
I
N
T
X
[
4
:
0
]
R
e
s
e
t

I
C
E
E
P
R
O
M
N
3
R
U
S
B

(
E
0
5
C
2
2
A
A
)
O
s
c
i
l
l
a
t
o
r

f
o
r

U
S
B
1
2
[
M
H
z
]
M
C
L
K
O
U
T
4
8
[
M
H
z
]
P
C
L
K
2
4
[
M
H
z
]
F
B
_
C
L
K
4
8
[
M
H
z
]
A
D
C
L
K
D
r
i
v
e
r
C
o
b
a
l
t
M
o
t
o
r
C
C
D
A
D
F
R
T
C
D
e
b
u
g
F
a
x
(
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
o
a
r
d
)
P
a
n
e
l
S
c
a
n
n
e
r
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
2.1.2 Detection Mechanisms
The following shows a list of detection functions.
Table 2-2. Sensor (printer section)
Unit Detection Item Availability Detection Method Remarks
MP tray Paper presence detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor
---
Paper size detection Not available
---
Enter the paper size from control panel or printer driver
Remaining paper detection Not available
--- ---
500-sheet cassette Mounting detection at power ON Not available Electrical continuity Not detected unless the main power is turned off and back on.
Unit detection Available Electrical continuity
---
Cassette presence detection Available Also functions as paper presence. Cassette presence and paper presence are judged by the same
sensor.
Paper presence detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor
Remaining paper detection Not available
--- ---
Paper size detection Not available
---
Enter the paper size from control panel or printer driver
MAIN UNIT Paper eject capacity Full detection Not available
--- ---
Others OHP sensor Available Reflective photosensor
---
Temperature detection
(reference)
Available Environment sensor
---
Humidity detection (reference) Available Environment sensor
---
Density detection (reference) Available Reflective density sensor
---
Toner Cartridge New part detection Available
CRUM
---
Presence Detection Available
CRUM
---
Color detection Available
CRUM
Cannot be incorrectly installed as the location of the holes are
different for each color.
Remaining amount detection Available Software counter
---
Near-end detection Available Software counter
---
End detection Available Software counter
---
Photoconductor Unit
(with Transfer Belt and Waste Toner
Box)
New part detection Available CRUM
---
Unit detection Available CRUM
---
Home position detection Available Optical type (reflective) sensor
---
Life detection Waste toner detection Available Optical type (interruptive) sensor ---
Near-end detection Available Software counter ---
End detection Available Software counter ---
Fuser unit New part detection Not available --- Enter Reset from the control panel.
Unit detection Available Electrical continuity ---
Life detection Near-end detection Available Software counter ---
Developer unit New part detection Not available --- Enter Reset from the control panel.
Unit detection
Not available
--- When not installed, Install xxxx TnrCart is displayed on the
panel.
Color detection
Available
Recognized by rib Cannot be incorrectly installed as the location of the holes are
different for each color.
Life detection Near-end detection Available Software counter ---
Secondary transfer unit New part detection Not available --- Reset from the Control Panel.
Unit detection Not available --- ---
Life detection Near-end detection Available Software counter Not displayed on the panel as it is supposed to be replaced at the
same time as the Fuser unit.
End detection Available Software counter
Table 2-3. Sensor (Scanner/ADF)
Scanner unit Opening/Closing of the DOC/
ADF covers Available
Magnet sensor Connected directly to the controller with a cableDetection part on
the upper housing
Magnet on the cover side
CR home sensor Available Photosensor CR home position detection
ADF unit ADF document presence
detection
Available
Photosensor+Actuator Make sure to insert papers to the correct position
B5/LT detection
Available
Micro SW Sets to A4 if not detected properly
Detects by the operation of the side guideSW on the backside of
the tray
AS sensor
Available
Photosensor+Actuator Detects paper presence between the place where documents are
picked up and the separation roller
RS sensor Available Photosensor+Actuator Detects paper presence on the turning roller
Opening/Closing of the ADF
cover
Available
Micro SW Cover sensor to be opened for clearing paper jam
No interlock function
Table 2-2. Sensor (printer section)
OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLES Printer Section Operating Principle 84
2.2 Printer Section Operating Principle
This section describes printer functions and operating principles of AcuLaser CX11/
CX11F.
2.2.1 Print Process
2.2.1.1 Print Process Overview
This printer is a "full color laser printer" that uses the principle of electrophotographic
recording. The printer contains a drum that forms toner images by four colors of toner
"Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black (simply called YMCK from here on)." The toner
image of each color is formed on the drum, and the toner images formed on the drum is
transferred to the Belt (secondary transfer roller). Full color printing is performed by
overlaying each of the colors on the belt.
The major steps of the print process are described below.
(1) Charging : The drum surface is charged.
(2) Exposure : Image areas are exposed on the drum by a laser beam.
(3) Developing : Image areas on the drum are developed with toner.
(4) Primary transfer : The toner image on the drum is transferred to the Belt.
(5) Cleaning : The drum is cleaned.
(6) Repeat : In the full color mode, steps (1) to (5) are repeated for
each toner.
(7) Secondary transfer : The toner image on the Belt is transferred to the
paper.
(8) Discharging : The electrical charge of the paper is removed.
(9) Cleaning : The Belt is cleaned.
(10) Fusing : Toner on the paper is fixed with heat and pressure.
Figure 2-4. Print Process Overview
2.2.1.2 Print Process Diagram
The diagram below illustrates the entire print process.
Figure 2-5. Total Print Process Schematic Diagram
Leg_06_002RA
2.2.1.3 Technical Explanation of Print Process
CHARGING
At the "Charging" process, BCR (Bias Charge Roll) applies a uniform negative
potential to the drum which rotates at a fixed speed.
BCR keeps contact with the drum and moves together with it.
BCR is a conductive roller, that is negatively charged by HVPS, applies a negative
charge to the drum.
The drum surface is uniformly charged to a negative potential with DC bias
voltage.
The drum is made of conductive material (aluminum cylinder) coated with a
photosensitive material which becomes insulating material in darkness and
becomes conductive when it is subjected to light.
Figure 2-6. Charging Process
EXPOSURE
At the "Exposure" process, a laser beam is applied to the negatively charged surface of
the drum to form an invisible electrostatic latent image onto the drum.
The laser beam is emitted from a laser diode in the ROS ASSY, and directed by
the polygon mirror, fixed mirror and lens of the Scanner Assy in the ROS ASSY.
A single laser beam is output from the laser diode.
The laser beam is irradiated according to the print data (image data) from the
printer controller. The laser beam is output only when a pixel data (minute dot
composing the print data) exists. (On parts to be developed by toner, the laser
diode turns ON, and on parts not to be developed, the laser diode turns OFF.)
The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, the negative
charge on the drum flows to the positive side, and the potential on the surface of
the drum is reduced in the result. The section of the drum surface where the
potential has reduced becomes the electrostatic latent image.
Figure 2-7. Path followed by the Laser Beam
Figure 2-8. Exposure Process
Leg_Sec06_008FA
Drum
Mirror
Lens COL
Lens CYL
Lens L1
Polygon Mirror
PWBA SOS
SOS Sensor
Scanner Assy
PWBA LD
Mirror SOS
Window
DEVELOPING
At the "Developing" process, toner is electrically applied to the invisible electrostatic
latent image on the drum, to form a visible image on it.
This printer uses two developing systems: a "rotary developing system" that
successively rotates four Developer Assys, and a "trickle developing system" that
uses developers composed of two components, a carrier and toner.
Developer in the Developer Assy is stirred by a spiral-shaped stirrer called
"Auger", and is supplied to the Magnet Roll located near the drum surface. The
developer is charged by the friction of stirring (toner: negative charge, carrier:
positive charge), and the charges are electrically attracted each other.
As the carrier is a magnetic body, it is attracted to the magnetized Magnet Roll,
and a uniform layer of carrier is formed on the Magnet Roll by passing through a
Trimmer Blade.
A minus voltage is applied to the Magnet Roll together with AC voltage from the
HVPS.
As the electrostatic latent image on the drum that is formed by exposure is charged
positively compared to the other sections on the drum, the toner charged
negatively on the Magnet Roll is attracted only to the image sections on the drum.
Figure 2-9. Development Process (1)
Toner in the Developer Assy is consumed as the number of prints increases. To
maintain the appropriate development density, the equivalent amount of consumed
toner must be replenished to the Developer Assy from the Toner Cartridge. This
replenishment is called "toner dispense."
Two types of control ("PCDC" and "ADC") are used in combination for toner
dispense.
To obtain a full color image by the four toner colors, a toner image for each of the
Y, M, C and K colors must be formed on the drum.
On this printer, four Developer Assys are located at 90 degree intervals on the
circumference of the Rotary Frame Assy, and by rotating the Rotary Frame Assy,
the Developer Assy of each color is made to face the drum on which the toner
image of each color is formed. This is called the "rotary developing system".
The charging characteristics of the carrier is depleted due to dirt caused by the
toner or due to scratches caused by stirring.
To maintain charging characteristics, a minute amount of carrier is mixed into the
toner in the Toner Cartridge. While toner and carrier are supplied during toner
dispense, depleted carrier in the Developer Assy is collected in a separate chamber
in the Toner Cartridge. This is called the "trickle developing system". Trickle
developing is performed using the rotation of the Rotary Frame Assy during rotary
developing.
The following shows the mechanism of trickle developing.
(1) A pipe is inserted into the carrier in the Developer Assy.
(2) A minute amount of carrier is put into the pipe.
(3) The carrier is skimmed and move farther into the pipe.
(4) The carrier is collected to inside the Toner Cartridge.
PRIMARY TRANSFER (DRUMBELT)
At the Primary transfer process, the toner image formed on the drum surface is
transferred to the Belt surface in Photoconductor Unit by 1st BTR (First Bias Transfer
Roll).
The 1st BTR is a conductive roller, and is positively charged by the HVPS. The 1st
BTR contacts the back side of the Belt and charge the back side to positive.
The negatively charged toner image on the drum surface is attracted to the positive
charge on the back side of the Belt, and is transferred to the Belt from the drum.
Figure 2-12. Primary transfer (DrumBelt)
CLEANING (DRUM)
At the "Cleaning (drum)" process, residual toner is removed from the drum surface.
Cleaning the drum
Toner that was not transferred to the Belt at the "Primary transfer" process remains
on the drum surface. Since the remaining toner hinder subsequent processes, it is
scraped off by a Cleaning Blade that contacts with the drum, and is collected in the
Waste Toner Box.
Figure 2-13. Cleaning (drum)
REPEAT (FORMATION OF COMPLETE TONER IMAGE)
At the "Repeat (formation of complete toner image)" process, the toner images of each
color formed on the drum surface are successively transferred to the Belt to form a
complete toner image composed of the four colors on the Belt surface.
Figure 2-14. Repeat (1)
Figure 2-15. Repeat (2)
SECONDARY TRANSFER (BELTPAPER)
At the "Secondary transfer" process, the complete toner image formed on the Belt
surface is transferred to paper by the 2nd BTR (Second Bias Transfer Roll).
The 2nd BTR comes in contact with the Belt only when transferring the image to
paper to prevent the toner image formed on the Belt surface from being destroyed.
Normally, the 2nd BTR is located at its home position where is detected by the 2nd
BTR Retract Sensor. And the 2nd BTR Retract Motor moves the 2nd BTR to
contact with the paper.
The 2nd BTR is a conductive roller. It contacts with the back side of the paper (the
opposite side of the side to be printed), and charged positively by the HVPS.
The Back Up Roll, located on the opposite side of the Belt from the 2nd BTR, is a
conductive roller and earthed to the Frame ground.
By positively charging the back side of the paper by the 2nd BTR, the negatively
charged toner image on the Belt is attracted to the paper and the image appears on
the paper.
Figure 2-16. Secondary transfer (BeltPaper) (1)
Figure 2-17. Secondary transfer (BeltPaper) (2)
2ND BTR ASSY
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
MOT ASSY MICRO
DISCHARGING
At the "Discharging" process, the charge on the paper is neutralized/removed by the
Detack Saw.
The Detack Saw contacts the back side of the paper. The charge created at the
"Secondary transfer" process is neutralized/removed to prevent the toner from
splattering around the metal parts.
CLEANING
At the "Cleaning (belt)" process, the toner remaining on the Belt surface is removed
after the toner image is transferred to the paper.
The Belt Cleaner contacts the Belt only when cleaning the Belt to prevent the toner
image formed on the Belt surface from being destroyed. The IBT Retract Motor
moves the Belt Cleaner to contact the Belt.
Toner remaining on the Belt surface is absorbed by the Cleaning Roll. Then, the
toner is absorbed by the brush and collected in the Waste Toner Box.
Figure 2-18. Cleaning
FUSING
At the "Fusing" process, toner is fixed on paper with heat and pressure.
Fuser Assy does not have a pressure roll, but has a Fuser Belt instead.
By MOT ASSY FSR drive, Heat Roll rotates and Fuser Belt is driven by the
friction. The inner structure of the Fuser Belt is, as shown in the figure below,
designed to generate a pressure on the Belt and the Heat Roll (Nip Part) to contact
them firmly each other.
The toner melts by the Heat Roll heated by the Heater Lamp in the Fuser Assy, and
then the toner is fixed on the paper by the pressure of the Fuser Belt.
Figure 2-19. Fusing
2.2.2 Flow of Print Data
2.2.2.1 Data Flow
Print data (electric signals) from the Printer Controller follows the flow shown below
to become a print image.
Figure 2-20. Overview of Producing Print Image
NOTE 1: Formation of 2-D print image:
One line of the dot image is formed by turning the laser beam from the laser
diode ON and OFF in accordance with the electric signals (VIDEO signal:
expresses the image data by voltage levels) from the printer controller.
2: A single-color image (2-D dot image) is completed by performing the
above operation repeatedly over the entire surface of the image. To
obtain a full color image, formation of 2-D dot images is performed for
each of the four colors.
Resolution is determined as follows:
Main direction : dots/inch
Sub direction : Lines/inch
Figure 2-21. Formation of 2-D Print Image
Leg_Sec06_033FA
Host (electric signal)
Printer controller (electric signal)
ROS ASSY (laser beam)
Electrostatic latent image on drum
(invisible image)
Toner image on drum (toner image)
Toner image on Belt (secondary transfer roller)
Toner image on paper
Print image on paper
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
2.2.3 Drive Transmission Path
2.2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY FEED
Rotation of DRIVE ASSY FEED is transmitted as follows:
Figure 2-22. Drive Transmission Flow
Figure 2-23. Diagram of Drive Transmission Path
DRIVE ASSY FEED
CLUTCH ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY TURN 500
GEAR FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
500 FEEDER ASSY
Leg_Sec06_035EB
DRIVE ASSY FEED
GEAR FEED CLUTCH ASSY FEED
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_042EB
2.2.3.2 MOTOR ASSY P/R, DRIVE ASSY PRO
Rotation of MOTOR ASSY P/R and DRIVE ASSY PRO is transmitted as follows:
DRIVE ASSY PRO MOT ASSY P/R
FLANGE
GEAR INPUT
GEAR BRUSH 22/30
CAM ASSY
DRUM
GEAR BRUSH 32
GEAR DRIVE BRUSH
ROLL ASSY BRUSH IBT
GEAR-19
CAM ASSY-IBT CL
GEAR IDLE 26/40
GEAR DTR 23
ROLL DTN
Leg_Sec06_036EB
MOT ASSY P/R
DRIVE ASSY PRO
GEAR-19
GEAR INPUT
GEAR BRUSH 32
GEAR IDLE 26/40
GEAR DTR 23
GEAR DRIVE BRUSH
GEAR BRUSH 22/30
IBT ASSY
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_045EC
2.2.3.3 MOTOR ASSY MAG, MOTOR ASSY ROT
Rotation of MOTOR ASSY MAG and MOTOR ASSY ROT is transmitted as follows:
MOT ASSY MAG MOT ASSY ROT
GEAR IDLE DISP
GEAR AUGER DISPENCE
INPUT GEAR
Developer ASSY-DEVE
DEVE ASSY
AUGER DISPENCE
GEAR AUGER ADMIX
GEAR MAG
ROLL MAG GEAR IDLE GEAR AUGER SUPPLY
FRAM ASSY-ROTARY
AUGER SUPPLY
AUGER ADMIX
Leg_Sec06_037FB
GEAR AGITATOR
AGITATOR
INPUT GEAR(K)
INPUT GEAR(Y)
INPUT GEAR(M)
INPUT GEAR(C)
MOT ASSY MAG
MOT ASSY ROT FRAM ASSY-ROTARY
GEAR IDLE DISP(K)
GEAR IDLE DISP(C)
GEAR IDLE DISP(Y)
GEAR IDLE DISP(M)
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_044FC
2.2.3.4 MOTOR ASSY DUP
Rotation of MOTOR ASSY DUP is transmitted as follows:
MOTOR ASSY DUP MOTOR ASSY DUP INV
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 36
GEAR 48H
GEAR 40/42
TRANSPORT ASSY DUP
INVERTER ASSY DUP
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
GEAR 30 OW
GEAR 36
ROLLER ASSY DUP OUT
GEAR 30
ROLLER ASSY DUP
GEAR 48H
GEAR 20/21H
GEAR 36
GEAR 30
ROLLER ASSY INVERTER
Leg_Sec06_038FB
GEAR 30
GEAR 30
GEAR 36
GEAR 20/21H
GEAR 48H
MOTOR ASSY DUP INV
INVERTER ASSY DUP
TRANSPORT ASSY DUP
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 48H
MOTOR ASSY DUP
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
GEAR 30 OW
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_041FC
2.2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY FSR
Rotation of MOTOR ASSY FSR is transmitted as follows:
MOTOR ASSY FSR (Fuser Motor)
GEAR-IDLER EXIT
GEAR EXIT
GEAR HR
ROLL ASSY FUSER
FUSER ASSY
TRANSFER ASSY
EXIT ROLLER BELT ASSY
GEAR 2ND
GEAR-IDLER GEAR-27
2ND BTR ASSY
MOT ASSY MICRO
DRIVE ASSY BTR
GEAR-28
CAM ASSY-2ND
Leg_Sec06_039EB
GEAR EXIT
GEAR-IDLER EXIT
GEAR-IDLER
GEAR-27
GEAR 2ND
FUSER ASSY
DRIVE ASSY BTR
TRANSFER ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
MOTOR ASSY FSR
BELT ASSY
ROLL ASSY FUSER
GEAR HR
GEAR-28
MOT ASSY MICRO
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_043EC
2.2.3.6 MOTOR-PH
Rotation of MOTOR-PH is transmitted as follows:
GEAR 43
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
GEAR 43
CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
PH ASSY
MSI
ROLL REGI METAL ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
ROLL REGI RUBBER
GEAR 28/40
MOTOR-PH
GEAR 21/104
GEAR PICK UP
ROLL ASSY MSI
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
Leg_Sec06_040EB
GEAR 21/104
MOTOR -PH
GEAR 28/40
GEAR PICK UP
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI MSI
PH ASSY
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
GEAR 43
GEAR 43
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_046EC
2.2.4 Paper Feed
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that make up the
paper feed section. The components are divided into four blocks as follows based on
the basic configuration.
MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)
Registration & FUSER
500 Paper Feeder
Figure 2-34. Paper Feed Path Layout
Leg_06_004RA
2.2.4.1 MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)
MAIN FUNCTIONS
GUIDE SIDE L/GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R move crossways of the paper feed
direction, and true up the left and right edges of sheets of paper.
SOLENOID PICK UP
The SOLENOID PICK UP controls rotation of GEAR PICK UP. When the
Solenoid is excited, GEAR PICK UP is unlocked, and ROLL MSI rotates by drive
of the MOTOR-PH.
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI is normally pressed down by the Cam attached to
the shaft. During paper feed, the shaft rotates, releasing the clamping action of the
cam, and the paper is pressed against the ROLL MSI by spring pressure.
ROLL MSI
Paper that is pressed down by the PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI is fed by the
frictional force of the ROLL MSI.
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
The SENSOR PAPER EMPTY detects the presence of paper. When the printer
runs out paper, the actuator of the sensor comes down by its own weight and
shields the sensor, and the no paper state is detected. (No paper state : Shielding
the sensor)
Figure 2-35. Main Components of MSI (1)
Figure 2-36. Main Components of MSI (2)
Figure 2-37. Operation of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
ROLL MSI
SOLENOID PICK UP
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
GUIDE SIDE L
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI Leg_06_047RC
ROLL MSI
SOLENOID PICK UP
Leg_Sec06_048FB
ROLL MSI
CAM
CAM
Leg_Sec06_049FB
2.2.4.2 Registration & FUSER
MAIN FUNCTIONS
The drive from the MOTOR-PH is transmitted to the ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI,
and paper is fed to the registration section.
SENSOR OHP
This reflective sensor detects whether the print media is plain paper or
transparencies. If the light emitted from the light emitter of the sensor is reflected
by the media, the sensor judges that the media is plain paper.
SENSOR REGI
This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the Regi
Assy.(No paper state: Light enters the sensor)
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
The drive from the MOTOR-PH is transmitted to the ROLL-REGI METAL, and
paper is fed to the transfer section.
MOTOR-PH
This DC motor drives the MSI and the Rolls in the registration section.
SENSOR FUSER IN
This reflective sensor detects that paper has come to just before the fusing section.
FUSER ASSY
This fixes the completed toner image that was transferred by the 2nd BTR on the
paper, and feeds the paper before and after fixing.
Fuser Exit Sensor (Inside the FUSER ASSY)
This sensor detects that paper has been ejected from the Fuser.
(No paper state : Shielding the sensor)
Figure 2-38. Main Components of Registration & FUSER
Regi Sensor
Fuser Exit Sensor
Fuser In Sensor
FUSER
OHP Sensor
P/H Motor
Pre Regi Clutch
Regi Clutch
Leg_06_050RA
ADJUSTING THE LEADING EDGE OF THE PAPER
If paper is fed up to the toner transfer section from the tray or cassette without
adjusting the alignment of the paper, the image sometimes cannot be transferred at the
correct position. In the registration section, the leading edge of the paper is aligned to
the correct position by the "Roll Loop" system.
The paper, which has passed through the ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI, is pressed against
the stopped ROLL-REGI METAL by the "Roll Loop" system to make the paper
curved. When the ROLL-REGI METAL is rotated with the paper curved, the paper can
be fed from the ROLL-REGI METAL without displacement.
Figure 2-39. Adjusting the leading edge of the paper
ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
Leg_Sec06_051FB
2.2.4.3 500 Paper Feeder
MAIN FUNCTIONS
CONNECTOR (HARNESS-ASSY FEED1)
This is used for performing communications with the main unit and supplying
power to the Paper Feeder.
PWBA TRAY 500
Controls Motors and Sensors in the 500 Paper Feeder.
500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
The Paper Cassette Tray can load 500 sheets of paper.
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 / GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 move crossways
of the paper feed direction, and true up the left and right edges of sheets of paper.
GUIDE END ASSY
The GUIDE END ASSY moves parallel to the paper feed direction, and true up
the top and bottom edges of sheets.
SOLENOID FEED
The SOLENOID FEED controls rotation of the Feed Gear. When the SOLENOID
FEED turns ON, the Feed Gear is unlocked and Feed Roll rotates. The
SOLENOID FEED is repeatedly turned ON/OFF each time a sheet is fed to
control the feeding timing.
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500
The PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 locks on the bottom side when the 500 PAPER
CASETTE ASSY is drawn out of the Paper Feeder. When the 500 PAPER
CASETTE ASSY is inserted into the Paper Feeder, the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM
is unlocked, and paper is pressed against the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 by the force
of the spring.
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
The MOTOR ASSY FEEDER drives the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL
ASSY TURN 500.
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
Paper that is pressed down by the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 is fed by the
frictional force of ROLL ASSY FEED 500. When the 500 PAPER CASETTE
ASSY is drawn out, the nip with the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 is released.
Figure 2-40. Main Components of 500 Paper Feeder (1)
Figure 2-41. Main Components of 500 Paper Feeder (2)
Leg_Sec06_052EB
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500
GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
GUIDE END ASSY
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
CONNECTOR
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
SOLENOID FEED
ROLL ASSY TURN 500
SENSOR T/R
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
SENSOR NO PAPER
PWBA TRAY 500
PWBA MOT
Leg_Sec06_053EB
ROLL ASSY TURN 500
Feeds the paper fed by the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 to the registration section.
SENSOR T/R
This sensor detects that paper is fed from the 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY.
(No paper state : Shielding the sensor)
SENSOR NO PAPERThe SENSOR NO PAPER detects the presence of paper.
When the printer runs out paper, the actuator of the sensor comes down by its own
weight to shield the sensor, and the no paper state is detected. (No paper state :
Shielding the sensor)
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR detects whether the Tray door is opened or closed.
LOCK MC TO FDR
Turn the levers on the left and right to firmly lock the 500 Paper Feeder to the
main unit.
Figure 2-42. Operation of SOLENOID FEED
Figure 2-43. LOCK MC TO FDR
SOLENOID FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
Leg_Sec06_054FB
Leg_06_071RB
LOCK MC TO FDR
2.2.5 Xerographic
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that consist of the
Xerographic.
The Xerographic is divided into the following four blocks based on the basic
configuration.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
Development
2nd BTR
FUSER ASSY
Figure 2-44. Xerographic Structure
ROS ASSY
Development
Leg_06_003RA
2nd BTR
2.2.5.1 Main Functions
ROS ASSY
ROS ASSY
ROS ASSY (Raster Output Scanner Assembly) is the exposure unit that outputs
the laser beam to make the electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. (From
here on, ROS ASSY is simply called "ROS.")
ROS consists of the components shown in Figure 2-45.
The PWBA LD (Laser Diode) converts the image data (electric signal), to
laser light ON/OFF signals.
PWBA LD constantly monitors the laser light intensity so that laser intensity
stabilizes to the appropriate level when making the electrostatic latent image.
This is called " APC (Automatic Power Control".
The Scanner Assy consists of a Scanner Motor that operates at a fixed speed
and a polygon mirror attached to the Motor's rotary shaft.
The laser beam emitted from the PWDA LD is irradiated on the polygon
mirror.
The polygon mirror has six reflecting mirror surfaces, and the angle of the
reflected laser beam changes by rotation of the Scanner Motor. This lets the
laser beam scan across on the Drum from side to side. The laser beam makes a
single line on the Drum with one reflective mirror.
The laser beam reflected by the polygon mirror passes through the lens,
mirror and window to reach the drum surface. The lens functions to
compensate for aberration, the mirror to ensure an optical path, and the
window to prevent the entry of foreign bodies into ROS.
The timing to start writing image data must synchronize exactly with the
beginning of laser scanning in order to properly form an electrostatic latent
image on the drum surface. When the SOS sensor on the PWBA SOS (Start
Of Scan) receives the laser beam, it converts the laser into an electric signal
(SOS signal) for detecting the initial position (start of scan reference point) for
scanning the various lines.
Figure 2-45. Main Functional Components of ROS
Leg_Sec06_008FA
Drum
Mirror
Lens COL
Lens CYL
Lens L1
Polygon Mirror
PWBA SOS
SOS Sensor
Scanner Assy
PWBA LD
Mirror SOS
Window
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Photoconductor Unit consists of the Belt, Belt Cleaner, Drum, Drum Cleaner, 1st BTR,
and Waste Toner Boxes for each cleaner. And ANTENNA ASSY, SENSOR TR-0,
SENSOR ASSY ADC, SENSOR IBT RETRACT, SENSOR HUM & TEMP, MOT
ASSY P/R, IBT Brush Motor, and IBT Cleaner Retract Motor are installed inside the
printer for control of Photoconductor Unit operation.
Photoconductor Unit
The toner images of each color developed on the drum surface are transferred
to the IBT Belt one color at a time from 1st BTR, and the full color toner
image is formed by overlaying the four colors. The full color toner image is
transferred to paper by positively charging the paper with the 2nd BTR.
Toner remaining on the Belt surface is collected in the Waste Toner Box by
the Cleaning Blade and brush in the Belt Cleaner.
The Drum is made of conductive material (aluminum cylinder) coated with a
photosensitive material which becomes insulating material in darkness and
becomes conductive when it is subjected to light. The Drum Cleaner consists
of a Cleaning Blade and Waste Toner Box, and scrapes off toner remaining on
the drum surface by the Cleaning Blade that contacts with the drum.The
Waste Toner Box contains an actuator for SENSOR TNER FULL. This
actuator operates as the amount of collected waste toner increases to block
light entering the sensor to detect a full toner state.
The 1st BTR is a conductive roller, and is charged positively by the HVPS.
The 1st BTR contacts the back side of the belt to positively charge it.
Specific data relating to Photoconductor Unit is stored in CRUM XERO.
IBT Brush Motor (DRIVE ASSY PRO)
IBT Brush Motor drives the brush in the Belt Cleaner.
IBT Cleaner Retract Motor (DRIVE ASSY PRO)
The IBT Cleaner Retract Motor drives the cam to make the Belt Cleaner to contact
with the IBT Belt.
SENSOR IBT RETRACT
The SENSOR IBT RETRACT detects the position of the cam for retracting the
Belt Cleaner.
MOT ASSY P/R
MOT ASSY P/R drives the Drum. The Motor is connected to the Drum via a
coupling.
SENSOR TR-0
Sensor TR-0 detects the position of the Belt by reading the silver sticker on the
Belt surface outside the toner image formation area.
SENSOR ASSY ADC
SENSOR ASSY ADC reads the toner patch densities on the Belt immediately
before secondary transfer, and converts the read densities to voltage values. These
voltage value are used for controlling toner density.
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects the temperature and humidity inside the printer,
and converts these to voltage values. These voltage value are used for controlling
toner density.
Figure 2-46. Main Functional Components of Photoconductor Unit
IBT Cleaner
Retract Motor
ANTENNA ASSY
IBT Brush Motor
SENSOR TR-0
MOT ASSY P/R
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
SENSOR ASSY ADC
SENSOR TNER FULL
Drum Cleaner
1ST BTR
Drum
Belt
Leg_06_056RC
Cleaning Sheet
Cleaner Brush Cleaning Roll
SENSOR IBT RETRACT
SENSOR TNER FULL
SENSOR TNER FULL detects the full state of the Waste Toner Box. Toner
remaining on the drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade, and collected in the
Waste Toner Box. The Waste Toner Box is provided with an actuator for blocking
light entering the sensing element on the SENSOR TNER FULL. The actuator is
supported by a spring, and is designed to gradually fall by the weight of the toner.
When the actuator falls and blocks the SENSOR TNER FULL, the printer detects
that the Waste Toner Box is full.
Figure 2-47. SENSOR TONER FULL Mechanism
Leg_Sec06_068FB
SENSOR TNER FULL
Actuator
DEVELOPMENT
The Rotary Developer consists of four (four colors) Toner Cartridges, ANTENNA
CTRG, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, and FRAME ASSY ROTARY. And Dispense
Clutch, MOT ASSY MAG, MOT ASSY ROT, and SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
are installed inside the printer for control of Rotary Developer operation.
Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridge supplies toner and carrier. And it has a separate chamber for
collecting depleted carrier. This is called "Trickle Developing System".
Specific data relating to the Toner Cartridge is stored on the ANTENNA
CTRG. Writing of data to the ANTENNA CTRG is performed by wireless
communications.
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
The HOUSING ASSY-DEVE is provided for each of the Y, M, C and K colors.
Each HOUSING ASSY-DEVE consists of a special Auger for stirring and
supplying Toner, a Magnet Roll for attracting magnetic carrier, forming the
development layer and supplying toner to the drum, and a Trimmer Blade for
making a uniform development layer on the Magnet Roll.
The Frame Assy-Rotary has holes for inserting the bosses of the HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE. To prevent inserting another color's by mistake, the location of the
holes are different from each other.
Figure 2-48. Main Components of Development
Figure 2-49. Structure of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent wrong insertion
Leg_06_058RA
TNR CRU
ANTENNA CTRG
Dispense Clutch
MOT ASSY ROT
SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
MOT ASSY MAG
Developer
Leg_Sec06_066FA
Y
M
C
K
Dispense Clutch (Inside the MOT ASSY MAG)
The Dispense Clutch is provided to transmit the drive of MOT ASSY MAG to
rotate the Augers for supplying toner.
MOT ASSY MAG
The MOT ASSY MAG rotates the Magnet Roll in the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
MOT ASSY ROT
The MOT ASSY ROT rotates the FRAME ASSY ROTARY that holds the
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
The SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI detects the position of the Rotary
Developer to keep the Developer in the right position. The home position is about
10 degrees CW from the transfer position of the black toner Developer.
LATCH ROTARY
LATCH ROTARY is interlocked with movement of the Front Cover. When the
Front Cover is closed, LATCH ROTARY is pressed by the acutuator on the Front
Cover to lock the Rotary Developer. When the Front Cover is opened, LATCH
ROTARY returns to the release position to unlock the Rotary Developer.
Figure 2-50. LATCH ROTARY
LATCH ROTARY
Front Cover
Leg_06_059RB
Acutuator
SECOND BTR
2ND BTR ASSY
The Second BTR (2ND BTR ASSY) is a conductive roll. It contacts the back of
paper (back of the side to be printed on) and a voltage is applied from the HVPS.
2nd BTR Retract Motor
Brings the BTR to contact the paper during 2nd transfer process, and moves the
BTR away from the paper after the transfer is finished. The motor drive rotates the
shaft and the eccentric cam attached on the shaft. The eccentric cam pushes the
lever for the BTR to bring it contact with the paper for transferring toner image on
the BTR to the paper. When the transferring is finished, the motor starts to rotate
again and the lever is returned to its original position by spring force, causing the
BTR to move away from the paper.
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
The position of BTR is detected by the SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. The shaft
with the cam for contacting/releasing BTR is provided with a Sensor actuator. The
non-contact state of BTR is detected by the actuator shielding the Sensor, and the
contact state of the BTR is detected when the Sensor is subjected to light.
Replacing the 2ND BTR is required when the life count (printed pages) exceeds
the prescribed value.
Figure 2-51. SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
Leg_Sec06_070FB
2ND BTR ASSY
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
MOT ASSY MICRO
FUSER ASSY
FUSER ASSY
The FUSER ASSY fixes the completed toner image transferred on the paper by
heat and pressure. It also functions to feed paper before and after fixing, and feed
paper to the eject tray or Duplex by switching the gate inside the Fuser.
The Fuser consists of the following parts:
Heat Roll
Belt
Heater Lamp
Exit Roll
Thermostat
Temp. Sensor
Exit Sensor
Thermostat
Shuts off the circuit for the Heater Lamp when the temperature of the Heat Roll
exceeds a certain level.
Temp. Sensor (Contact type/Non-contact type)
Non-contact type: Monitors the surface temperature of the Heat Roll and turns the
Heat Roll on and off according to the temperature.
Contact type : Monitors the surface temperature of the Heat Roll and shuts off
the power supply for the Heat Roll when an abnormal high
temperature is detected.
Replacing the FUSER ASSY is required when the life count (printed pages)
exceeds the prescribed value.
Figure 2-52. Main Components of FUSER
Exit Roll
Exit Sensor
Leg_06_060RB
Fuser Belt
Heater Lamp
Heat Roll
Thermostat
Temp. Sensor
2.2.5.2 Process control
To ensure a stable image quality, parameters relating to image generation need to be
corrected on a timely basis. Control of the entire print process including the correction
of parameters is called "process control."
TC (Toner Content) control
Toner patches for TC control are created on the Belt surface to measure the density
by the SENSOR ASSY ADC. According to the measured result, the amount of
toner supply, the amount of laser radiation, and the applied high voltage are
controlled. The execution sequence of the TC control is given on the next page.
Figure 2-53. Process control mechanism
Laser
Power
Control
Voltage/Current
Control
Toner Dispense Control
Toner Density
Life Counter
Temp.
Humidity
BCR
1st BTR
LV/HVPS
ROS ASSY
PWBA CRUM
MCU PWB
SENSOR
ASSY ADC
SENSOR
HUM&TEMP
Motor/
Clutch
Leg_Sec06_064EB
Calculation of
compensation value
Calculation of
parameters for
creating ADC toner
patches
Execution Sequence of TC control
1. Adjustment of SENSOR ASSY ADC
The SENSOR ASSY ADC has two LEDs, one for black and the other for color. To
read each color's patch density, the light emitted from the LED for black is
reflected directly to the Common light receiving element, and the light emitted
from the other LED for color does diffuse reflection and also received by the
element. The SENSOR ASSY ADC has a built-in solenoid which drives the
shutter of the detection window and the part for switching the optical path to the
reference plate.
2. Adjustment according to surrounding environment and deterioration of parts
Printed image quality is adversely affected by temperature and humidity that
change daily, and deterioration of the IBT Belt, drum and other parts. For this
reason, parameters are corrected by capturing temperature/humidity data from
SENSOR HUM & TEMP and printer usage data from CRUM.
3. Creation of toner patches
The output value of HVPS, laser light intensity value, and toner supply amount are
determined from the parameters calculated from various information sources, and
four toner patches, one for each color, are created on the Belt surface.
4. Reading the toner patches
SENSOR ASSY ADC reads the density of the toner patches created on the Belt
surface, and compares the read values with ideal values. When there is a difference
between the read values and the ideal values, the parameters are recalculated and
toner patches are created again.When the printer judges that the toner patches
density is extremely low or high, it performs the following controls.
Admix control
When the patch density that is read by SENSOR ASSY ADC is extremely
low, the toner will be supplied into the Developer. This is called "Admix
control".
Sweep control
When the patch density that is read by SENSOR ASSY ADC is extremely
high, toner is transferred to the drum, and is scraped off in the Drum Cleaner
to forcibly discharge toner in the Developer. This is called "Sweep control".
Figure 2-54. Sensor ADC mechanism
5. Adjustment during a print job
Toner in the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE is consumed as print jobs are processed. To
obtain consistent image quality during printing, toner must be supplied to the
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. The following control is performed to supply
appropriate amount of toner.
PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control)
The amount of toner that will be consumed is predicted from the count value
of the image data, that is input from the controller, to control the toner supply
amount to the Developer. The supply amount is controlled according to the
Toner Dispense time.
6. Adjustment after end of printing
When a total of 20 or more sheets have been printed, the image quality
adjustments in 1) to 4) are repeated after completion of printing.
Figure 2-55. PCDC Mechanism
Control of Toner Cartridge
7. Near-End Detection
Counts the operating time of the Dispense Clutch that operates to supply toner
from the cartridges, and causes a Near-End warning when the counted time
exceeds the prescribed value.
8. Detection of Empty status
The judgement of the Empty status of Toner Cartridges is made based on toner
patch density values (read by ADC sensor). When toner patch density is extremely
low, the printer executes forced supply of toner (Admix operation), and it judges
that the cartridge is empty if the density of toner patches created after the forced
supply is still low.
9. Reset of the Empty status
The printer judges that the empty Toner Cartridge is replaced with a new one when
the power is turned off and back on, and the cover is opened and then closed
during the Empty status. Then the printer executes forced supply of toner from the
newly attached cartridge.
ROS ASSY
Toner Cartridge
Developer Assy
Dispense
Clutch
MOT ASSY MAG
Auger
(MCU PWB)
Leg_Sec06_062FB
2.2.6 Electrical
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components making up the
Electrical system.
MAIN FUNCTIONS
PWBA MCU
PWBA MCU performs communication with the printer controller, and controls the
parts to perform printing operations.
LV/HVPS
LV/HVPS supplies +24 VDC, + 5VDC and +3.3 VDC to each of the parts from
the AC power supply, and supplies high voltage to the parts for transferring and
discharging.
PWBA HVPS
PWBA HVPS supplies high voltage to IBT Cleaner, 2nd BTR, and Cleaning
Sheet.
PWBA HVPS
PWBA HVPS supplies high voltage to IBT Cleaner, 2nd BTR, and Cleaning
Sheet.
PWB ASSY ROT
PWB ASSY ROT creates the pulse for the motors according to input signal from
the PWBA MCU and supplies the pulse signal to the motors.
PWBA ESS
Converts print data transmitted via a network, USB, parallel port or etc., and
communicates with a host computer. The memory can be expanded up to 512 MB
with an optionally available additional memory.
OP PANEL
OP PANEL displays the printer status on the LCD or by LEDs. Printer operations
are performed by the buttons on OP PANEL.
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR detects whether the COVER FUSER is opened or
closed.
Figure 2-56. Main Functional Components of Electrical
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
SWITCH 2BTR COVER
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH ASSY TOP
PWBA HVPS
PWB ASSY ROT
PWBA MCU
LV / HVPS
PWBA CRUM
PWBA FUSER CONT
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
SWITCH-PH DOOR
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
Leg_06_061RA
Main Board
SWITCH-PH DOOR
SWITCH-PH DOOR detects whether the CHUTE ASSY REAR is opened or
closed.
PWBA CRUM
This non-volatile memory saves printer information. (Non-Volatile Memory)
SWITCH 2BTR COVER
SWITCH 2BTR COVER detects whether the COVER-PR 2ND is opened or
closed.
SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH ASSY TOP is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER TOP is opened. Detection of opening/
closing is performed by detecting a change in voltage caused +24 VDC being
conversed to +3.3 VDD by the +24 VDC dividing circuit in MCU.
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH-INLK FUSER is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER FUSER is opened.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH-INLK FRONT is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER FRONT ASSY U is opened.
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR detects whether the COVER FRONT ASSY is opened
or closed.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
This printer is equipped with a FUSER LOCK SWITCH for detecting the
mounting state of the FUSER ASSY. When the FUSER ASSY is not locked or not
adequately locked by the latch lever, the FUSER LOCK SWITCH cuts the coil
power supply for the Fuser Lamp power supply relay inside PWBA FUSER
CONT. This causes the printer a service call error "E537 FUSER ASSY error" to
prevent the printer from operating.
Figure 2-57. FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Leg_Sec06_072EB
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
FUSER ASSY
LATCH LEVER
2.2.7 Operating Modes
The printer has the following six operating modes:
WARM UP mode : The printer is warming up (until the printer is ready
for printing).
READY mode : The printer has finished the warm-up and is ready
for printing.
PRINTING mode : The printer is currently printing.
LIGHT SLEEP mode:FUSER is turned OFF to save power.ERROR mode:
DEEP SLEEP mode : In addition to the Fuser, +24VDC is also turned OFF to save
more power.
ERROR mode : The printer has detected an error.
The following are not defined as the ERROR mode.
No paper
(when the printer detects there is no paper in the tray or cassette)
No paper tray
(when the printer detects there is no papercassette)
Warnings relating to service life of consumables
Figure 2-58. Operating Modes Overview
2.2.8 Flying-start printing
This printer improves performance when printing full-color images by performing
flying-start printing.
Sequence
1. The printer starts printing as soon as it finishes to receive Yellow data of one page.
2. While the Yellow image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the
next data, Magenta, is received.
3. While the Magenta image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the
next data, Cyan, is received.
4. While the Cyan image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the next
data, Black, is received.
5. When the Black image has been developed and transferred to the IBT Belt,
formation of the full color toner image is completed.
OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLES Scanner Operating Principles 124
2.3 Scanner Operating Principles
This section describes operating principles of the scanner and ADF of the AcuLaser
CX11/CX11F.
2.3.1 Scanner Mechanism Overview
The scanner is a flatbed scanner with 600 dpi optical resolution and supports up to A4
or Letter/Legal document size. The internal mechanism is broadly divided into two
parts; Carriage Unit that includes the light source and CCD sensor, and Carriage Drive
Mechanism.
CARRIAGE UNIT
CCD Sensor Board : Includes a Color CCD line sensor and a control circuit for
the sensor.
Light source : White cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL)
Inverter Board : Generates a voltage for the light source (Rises positive 24
VDC, and converts it to AC Voltage).
Mirror/Lens : Leads the light reflected from document to the CCD sensor.
CARRIAGE DRIVE MECHANISM
CR Motor : A four-phase pulse motor with 96 poles. Driven and
controlled by the driver circuit which uses PWM (pulse-
width modulation) current control system.
Carriage Mechanism:Moves the Carriage Unit to the sub scanning direction by
driving of the CR motor on the Carriage Shaft which
supports one side of the Carriage Unit.
Home sensor : A transparent sensor attached to the bottom of the Carriage
Unit. Detects the carriage home position by detecting the
flag located near the home position in the lower case of the
scanner unit.
OTHERS
Magnet sensor : Detects the open/close status of the document cover or
the ADF. It is attached on the backside of the upper
case of the scanner unit. When the sensor detects that
the document cover or the ADF is opened while the
scanner is in standby mode, the scanner lamp is turned
on and the Carriage Unit moves to its home position.
Carriage Lock Mechanism: Locks the Carriage Unit to protect it during
transportation. To lock the Carriage Unit, set the
sliding lock lever on the upper case of the scanner unit
to LOCK position.
Figure 2-59. Key Components of the Scanner Mechanism
CHECK
POINT
Make sure to unlock the Carriage Unit (set the sliding lock
lever to unlock position) before turning the power on.
When the product should be transported for some reason,
move the Carriage Unit to the lock position using the control
panel Printer Engine Restrictions (p39) and then lock the
unit with the sliding lock lever.
Home Sensor CR Motor Timing Belt CR Guide Shaft (one-side support)
Flag for detecting
home position
Carriage Unit
2.3.1.1 Electric Circuit
As the scanner mechanism is powered and controlled directly by the main controller, it
does not have its own control circuit.
The power supply and the control signals to the scanner unit from the main controller
are as follows.
Power Supply
+24VDC (to drive the CR Motor and power the Inverter Circuit)
+12VDC and +5VDC (for the CCD Sensor)
+3.3VDC (for the Home Sensor and the Magnet Sensor)
Control Signals
CCD Sensor drive control
CR Motor drive control
ADF drive control
2.3.2 ADF Mechanism Overview
The ADF of this product is designed to feed original document to be scanned by the
fixed CCD Sensor in the scanner unit and allows up to 50 sheets of document (when
the paper basic weight is 80g/m
2
) to be loaded and scanned automatically. The
documents are scanned in paper feed direction while they are fed by the ADF. The key
mechanisms of the ADF are as follows.
PAPER FEED MECHANISM
ADF Motor : The four-phase pulse motor with 96 poles drives the paper
feed mechanism that transports document loaded on the
document tray to scanning section.
Clutch : Switches on and off the Pick up Roller by transmitting or not
transmitting the ADF Motor drive. The clutch is turned on to
transmit the motor drive to the Pick up Roller when the DOC
sensor is ON at the point of starting scanning operation.
Pick up Roller : Picks up document one by one and transports it to the next
mechanism.The roller lowers and contacts with document to
feed it by ADF Motor drive when scanning operation is
started with the DOC sensor ON. When the leading edge of
the document is detected by the RS Sensor, the roller moves
upward to return to its standby position.
Separation Roller : Located under the Pick up Roller to prevent multi-feed of
documents.
Turning Roller : Transports document fed by the Separation Roller to the
scanning position. This roller turns at a speed according to
the print resolution so that scanning in paper feed direction
can be performed properly.
Exit Roller : Transports document that has been scanned and transported
by the Turning Roller to the eject tray. Also changes the
position of the document stopper lever inside the document
tray.
SENSORS
DOC Sensor : Detects whether document is loaded on the document
tray or not. The document should be loaded with its
leading edge contacting with the guide for it, or the
sensor cannot detect the document.
AS Sensor : Detects that document is transported to the Separation
Roller after starting scanning operation.The sensor turns
ON when it detects the leading edge of the document,
and turns OFF when it detects the posterior end of the
document. Scanning operation for the next document is
started if the DOC Sensor is ON when the AS Sensor
becomes OFF.
RS Sensor : Detects whether document is on the Turning Roller or
not. Scanning document is started when the document is
transported by prescribed steps from when its leading
edge is detected by the RS Sensor.
ADF Cover Sensor : Detects whether the ADF cover is opened or closed. The
sensor turns ON when the ADF Cover is opened and
stops the ADF Motor and turns off the clutch.
Document Width Sensor: Detects the positions of the side edge guides on the
document tray. The two Document Width Sensors,
located at the position different from each other, detects
document size (width) by combination action of them as
follows.
Table 2-4. Document Size Detection by Two Document Width Sensors
Edge Guide Position B5 Sensor LT Sensor
Letter size
OFF ON
A4 size
OFF OFF
B5 size
ON OFF
A magnet is attached on the bottom surface of the ADF Unit. The Magnet Sensor
installed in the scanner unit detects the ADF open/close status by detecting the position
of the magnet.
ADF Close Status
The sensor turns OFF upon detecting that the magnet is in close proximity to the
sensor.
ADF Open Status
The sensor turns ON upon detecting that the magnet moved away from the sensor.
When the sensor turns ON during the scanner is in standby mode, the lamp is turned on
and the Carriage Unit moves to its home position after scanner initialization operation.
ADF Open Status: The product judges that scanning operation using the document
table will be performed.
Figure 2-60. Key Components of the ADF Mechanism
Separation Roller
DOC Sensor AS Sensor
Pick up Roller
Exit Roller
Document Stopper Lever
Carriage (Scanner)
RS Sensor
Turning Roller
CHAP T E R
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTI NG Overview 129
3.1 Overview
For efficient troubleshooting, verify the condition of the trouble carefully using FIP
(Fault Isolation Procedures) with reference to Chapter7 Wiring Connection Diagrams
(p.571) and Chapter2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES (p.77).
3.1.1 Procedure for troubleshooting
Perform troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart.
Figure 3-1. Procedure for troubleshooting
3.1.2 Checking Installation Status
Before starting troubleshooting, make sure that the following conditions are all met.
1. The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits. Measure the
voltage at the wall socket.)
2. The POWER CORD must be free from damage, short circuit or brokenage, or
miswiring in the POWER CORD.
3. The printer must be grounded properly.
4. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to too high or
low temperature, too high or low humidity, or abrupt temperature change.
5. The printer should not be located near waterworks, near humidifiers, near heaters
or near flames, in a dusty atmosphere, or in a place where the printer can be
exposed to air blasts from an air conditioner.
6. The printer should not be located in a place where volatile or inflammable gases
are produced.
7. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to direct
sunlight.
8. The printer must be located in a well-ventilated place.
9. The printer must be placed on a solid, stable and flat surface.
10. The paper used must conform to the specifications.
(Standard paper is recommended.)
11. There should be no errors in handling of the printer.
12. The Regular Replacement Parts must have been replaced every time their
respective specified number of sheets has been printed.
Verify the condition
of the trouble
Preliminary Check
Start
Execute FIP
Finish
Check if the trouble
returns to normal
Preventative
maintenance
* Clean the Feed Roller. And check if there is any
other part which is likely to cause another error.
Chapter2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES (p.77)
Chapter7 Wiring Connection Diagrams (p.571)
TROUBLESHOOTI NG Overview 130
3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work
1. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD before starting troubleshooting work except
when turning power ON is needed.
2. If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock
and safety switches turned ON, be sure to disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/
J601), except when its connection is required.
3. If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock
and safety switches turned ON, be careful of a high voltage from HVPS.
4. When touching any hot surfaces, take care not to burn yourself.
5. Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from your body.
6. When replacing the PWBA MCU in accordance with the FIP, be sure to perform
MCU DATA Backup and MCU DATA Restore operations to maintain the set
of information specific to the subject engine.
WARNING
Never touch any live parts unnecessarily when the power is on.
The power switch/inlet part of the LVPS is alive even when the
power switch is turned OFF. Take care not to touch any live parts.
WARNING
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed,
and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, there is a danger
of the laser beam being emitted from ROS ASSY. Be sure to
disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/J601), except when its
connection is required.
WARNING
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed,
and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, never touch
HVPS and any other high voltage output part as a high voltage may
be output from HVPS.
CAUTION
Refer to 4.2.11.5 PWBA MCU (p432) for all the details about the
PWBA MCU replacement.
CAUTION
Extra caution is required when performing work with the scanner
or the ADF opened, as the product becomes unstable and may easily
fall over.
TROUBLESHOOTI NG Errors/Warnings Display 131
3.2 Errors/Warnings Display
As this product is an all in one printer, it is necessary to figure out which function has
caused the error or the warning displayed on the panel. This section explains principal
erros and warnings by each mechanism and function. See references for details on
errors and warnings.
SYSTEM-DEPENDENT ERROR
PRINTER-DEPENDENT ERROR
Table 3-1. System-Dependent Error
Panel Message Description
Service Req Cffff Controller related service request
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p149)
Optional RAM Error
Invalid N/W Module
Service Req C2010 Fax uninstalled (for fax model only)
Service Req C2011 ADF uninstalled (for fax model only) (p.286)
Service Req C2012 N3R Asic Error
ROM writing error Failed to update the data
Fax Error Start up initialization could not be performed nomally,
however, the product can recover from the error.
Scanner Error Start up initialization could not be performed nomally,
however, the product can recover from the error.
(Motor error, Scanner error)
Table 3-2. Printer-Dependent Error
Service Req Eggg Engine related service request
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p149)
Check Transparency Error list related to paper jam (p146)
Papaer Jam WWWWW Error list related to paper jam (p146)
Irregular Density Other errors and warnings (p147)
Remove Photoconductor
Install uuuu TnrCart Other errors and warnings (p147)
Wrong Toner Other errors and warnings (p147)
Toner Cart Error uuuu Other errors and warnings (p147)
Install Photoconductor Other errors and warnings (p147)
Wrong Photoconductor Other errors and warnings (p147)
Photoconductor Trouble Other errors and warnings (p147)
Replace Toner uuuu Other errors and warnings (p147)
Replace Photoconductor Other errors and warnings (p147)
wwwww open Other errors and warnings (p147)
Print Overrun
Need more Memory
Invalid Data
uuuu Toner Low Other errors and warnings (p147)
Worn Photoconductor Other errors and warnings (p147)
Worn Fuser
TROUBLESHOOTI NG Errors/Warnings Display 132
SCANNER-DEPENDENT ERROR
FAX-DEPENDENT ERROR
COPY MODE-DEPENDENT ERROR
Table 3-3. Scanner-Dependent Error
Scanner cover open error (p.285)
PC connection failed The computer is not connected directly to the
product.
Reauired application has not been installed.
Net connection failed
ADF Jam (p.286)
Release Cariage Lock (p.285)
Table 3-4. Fax-Dependent Error
Fax error Fax unit failure. (p.288)
Set Document to ADF When Legal is selected by Fax mode (p.288)
Fax Communication Error An error occurred during transitting/receiving faxes.
(p.288)
No Report Print Info. (p.288)
Cannot Send when Receiving Fax cannot be transmit during Fax reception. (p.288)
Unable to Transmit Color Fax At the time of color Fax transmission, if the telephone
line is used, it decides that color transmission is
impossible. For this reason, transmitting does not
become " Cannot Send when Receiving ".
Cannot Fax cause of Power Off Report Transmitting a fax is attempted during the product is
printing out a power off report. (p.288)
Table 3-5. Copy mode-Dependent Error
Document Error For counterfeit prevention
TROUBLESHOOTI NG MFP Maintenance Mode 133
3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode
To enter the MFP maintenance mode, hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down] and
[Right] buttons, and turn the printer on. There are two items in the MFP maintenance
mode; self-diagnosis and fax maintenance. Self diagnosis confirms error status, on the
other hand, fax maintenance provides maintenance for the fax unit.
Menu levels of the MFP maintenance mode is shown below.
3.3.1 Self diagnosis
In self diagnosis mode, the product automatically makes the diagnosis of each part
(scanner, printer, fax, panel, and B unit) and displays the result on the panel.
Procedures and details on the diagnosis are described below.
PROCEDURES TO ACCESS THE SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down], and [Right] buttons and turn the
printer on. When the screen shown below appears, select (highlight) "Self
Diagnosis" and press [Start] to enter the screen for selecting tha part to be
diagnosed.
2. The [Up] and [Down] buttons allow you to select (highlight) the part to be
diagnosed, then press [Right] to start the self diagnosis.
Upward (downward) arrow on the left of the item indicates that there are more
items on the topside (downside) to be displayed. In this case, press the [Up] and
[Down] buttons to scroll the display.
[MFP Maintenance Mode Initial Screen]
[Self Diagnosis Initial Screen]
DETAILS ON SELF DIAGNOSIS ITEMS
Details on self diagnosis classified by item are described below.
Scanner : 3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis (p134)
Printer : 3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis (p134)
Fax : 3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis (p135)
Panel : 3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis (p135)
B Unit : 3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis (p136)
3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis
The error code of the engine related service call error that is currently happening in the
printer section is displayed on the panel. The panel also displays if the RTC
malfunction is emerging or not. For descriptions of the service request errors, refer to
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p149).
When you select Printer Unit and press [Right], the result is shown as described
below after Running is displayed for a while.
Note : Once displayed, press [Left] to return to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial
screen).
As the base model is not equipped with the RTC, the diagnosis for the RTC is replaced
with - (hyphen).
3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis
The error that is currently happening in the scanner section and the status concerning
the ADF is displayed on the panel. When you select "Scanner Unit" and press [Right],
the result is displayed as shown below after "Running" is displayed for a while.
Diagnosed items and the descriptions are shown in Table 3-6.
screen).
When the ADF is not installed, the diagnosis for "ADF cover open", "ADF jam", and
"ADF paper detection" are replaced with "-"(hyphen).
Note : The diagnoses for ADF cover open, ADF jam, and ADF paper detection are
performed every one second and the displayed results are updated each time the
diagnoses are made. As for Origin correction, Warm up, and Motor, the statuses
diagnosed during start-up operation are always displayed.
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal Diagnosed as Normal
(Base Model)
Displays engine related error code
Table 3-6. Scanner Self Diagnosis Items
Displayed
Characters
(1 byte)
Displayed Characters
(1 byte)
Description
Correct OK (Normal)
NG (Abnormal)
Origin Correction
(The difference between the actual origin position
detected when correcting it and the origin
position specified by spec is 2 mm or more.)
Warm up Same as above Warm up (Unable to warm up)
Motor Same as above Motor (motor driving failure)
Cover OPEN (Cover is open)
CLOSE (Cover is
closed)
ADF cover open (ADF cover is open)
Jam NONE (Undetected)
ON (Detected)
ADF paper jam (ADF jam error occurred)
Paper NONE (No paper)
ON (Paper present)
ADF paper detection
(Paper is loaded on the ADF)
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal When the ADF is not installed
3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis
All the modules on the fax unit listed below are checked if they are operating normally
and the results are displayed on the panel. When any abnormality is detected, NG is
displayed with an error code. For details on the error code, refer to 3.6.1
Troubleshooting by Panel Message (p288).
When you select Fax Unit and press [Right], the result is displayed as shown below
after Running is displayed for a while.
screen).
3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis
Operations for all the buttons on the control panel can be checked. Select the Panel
Unit and press the [Right] button. Within six seconds after the screen below is
displayed, press the button you wish to check. If the pressed button is working
normally, the button name is displayed with 1-byte alpha numeric characters as shown
in Table 3-7.
Note : The button name is displayed while pressing the button, and disappears when the button
is released. If no button is pressed for more than six seconds, the screen automatically
returns to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial screen).
Diagnosed button names are displayed as shown in the table below.
Image memory
Modem
Gate array
Flash memory
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal
Numbers that indicate
the detected error
[Right] Button
Diagnosed as Normal
When the Button is Released
Table 3-7. Button Names Displayed in Panel Self Diagnosis
Button Name Displayed Button Name (2 byte)
Copy COPY
Fax FAX
Scan SCAN
Setup SETUP
One Touch Dial A ONE TOUCH A
One Touch Dial B ONE TOUCH B
One Touch Dial C ONE TOUCH C
Advanced/Menu MENU
Reset RESET
Up UP
Down DOWN
Left LEFT
Right RIGHT
Speed Dial SPEED DIAL
Pause/Redial REDIAL
Cancel CANCEL
Asterisk *
Hash #
Numeric keypad Numbers that correspond to the button
pressed
B/W Start B&W START
Color start COLOR START
3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis
B unit (ASIC for counterfeiting prevention) is checked if it is operating normally, and
the result is displayed on the panel.When you select B Unit and press [Right], the
diagnosed result; OK or NG will appear after Running is displayed for a whole.
screen).
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal
3.3.2 Fax Maintenance
Fax Maintenance is provided for controlling memory including destination addresses
and for checking if there are any problems with the fax unit. Procedures to access the
items of the Fax Maintenance are shown below.
PROCEDURES TO ACCESS THE FAX MAINTENANCE
1. Hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down], and [Right] buttons and turn the
printer on. Select (highlight) Fax Maintenance and press [Right] to enter the Fax
Maintenance menu screen.
2. Select (Highlight) a target item in the Fax Maintenance menu, and press [Right] to
enter the menu screen of the selected item.
DETAILS ON FAX MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Details on each item in the Fax Maintenance menu are described in the following
sections.
Memory Clear : 3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
Memory Check : 3.3.2.2 Memory Check (p139)
Parameter Check : 3.3.2.3 Parameter Check (p140)
Module Check : 3.3.2.4 Module Check (p141)
Signal Check : 3.3.2.5 Signal Check (p142)
[MFP Maintenance Mode Initial Screen]
[Fax Maintenance Initial Screen]
CAUTION
Some of the functions provided in the Fax Maintenance menu
involve fax basic operation settings. Improper operation or setting
using the functions may cause fax malfunction.
Do not change the settings unless instructed to do so, or need for
doing it arises.
3.3.2.1 Memory Clear
Address memory used for the speed dials and other information memory concerning fax transmission/reception can be cleared at once. Six items are provided and memory areas to
be cleared are preset by the items as shown in Table 3-8.
When you select Memory Clear and press [Right], the Memory Clear menu screen as shown below will be displayed. Select a target item and press [Right] to clear the memory
areas. Be sure to check which memory areas will be cleared by the selected item with reference to Table 3-8 before executing the operation.
Note O : Cleared
X : Cannot be cleared
Example of Memory Clear Screen
Note : OK is displayed when the process is completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the error when failed to complete the process. Once the process is over, press [Stop]
to return to the previous screen (Memory Clear menu screen).
Table 3-8. Memory Areas to be Cleared by Item in Memory Clear
Item
(Memory Area Category)
Panel Indication
Speed Dial
Group Dial
One Touch Dial
Personal Number/Name
Communication Report
Memorized Unfinished
Sending Job Info
Print Data Info
Receiving Job Info
System Counter
System Error
History
Internal Error
History
System Parameter
ALL All area O O X O O O
Fax user User area O X X X X O
Fax system System area X O X O O O
Fax system counter Counter area X X O X X X
Fax error history Error area X X X O O X
Fax system parameter Parameter area X X X X X O
Processing All area Clear Clearing User area
Completed
When Error Occurs (Failed
to clear System area)
3.3.2.2 Memory Check
Memory contents of the fax unit can be displayed (Read) on the panel and can be
changed (Write).
When you select Memory Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will
be displayed. Select (Highlight) either Read or Write and press [Right] to proceed to
the entry screen.
MEMORY CHECK: READ
When an address in the memory is input with the numeric keypad, 64-byte data is
retrieved from the specified address. If the data is read properly, last four digits of the
specified address and 4 byte of data set to the address are displayed in a line. When
failed to read the memory, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the error.
Memory Check: Example of the Read Screen
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the Memory Read, the display returns to the
previous screen (Memory Check initial screen).
MEMORY CHECK: WRITE
When an address is input with the numeric keypad, current setting values in the address
are displayed beside CURRENT. When new setting values are entered beside
NEW, overwrite process is executed. OK is displayed when the process is
completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the error when
failed to overwrite the specified memory area.
Memory Check: Example of the Write Screen
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the Memory Write, the display returns to the
previous screen (Memory Write initial screen).
When Address is Entered Display of the Read Data When Failed to Read Data
When Address is Entered Display of Current Setting When Failed to Read
Current Data
When New Setting is Entered Overwriting Completed
Normally
When Failed to Overwrite
Current Setting Values
Enter new setting
Numbers that indicate
error contents
Numbers that indicate the error
3.3.2.3 Parameter Check
Specifies main and sub codes of the system parameter for the fax unit, and reads/writes
the parameter values.
When you select Parameter Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will
be displayed.Select (Highlight) either Read or Write and press [Right] to proceed to the
entry screen.
PARAMETER CHECK: READ
When the main and the sub codes of the parameter to be read are entered with the
numeric keypad, the current setting of the parameter are displayed. OK and
readout data are displayed when the process is completed normally, NG is
displayed with numbers that indicate the error when failed to read the data.
Parameter Check: Example of the Read Screen
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the parameter check (Read), the display
returns to the previous screen (Parameter Check initial screen).
PARAMETER CHECK: WRITE
When main/sub codes of the parameter and a new setting are entered with the
numeric keypad, the overwriting process is started. OK is displayed when the
process is completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the
error when failed to overwrite.
Parameter Check: Example of the Write Screen
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the parameter check (Write), the display
returns to the previous screen (Parameter Check initial screen).
When Main/Sub Codes
are Entered
Display of Current Setting When Failed to Read Data
Current Setting
Numbers that
indicate the error
When Main/Sub Codes and
New Setting is Entered
When Overwriting
Completed
When Failed to
Overwrite
Enter new setting
3.3.2.4 Module Check
Modules on the fax unit is checked individually or all at once if they are operating
normally, and the result is displayed on the panel.
When you select Module Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will be
displayed. Select (Highlight) the module you wish to check and press [Right] to start
the diagnosis.
Example of the Module Check Screen
Note : Once the process is over, press [Stop] to return to the previous screen (Module Check
initial screen).
Module Check in Progress Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal
Numbers that indicate the error
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
3.3.2.5 Signal Check
Relay ON/OFF test and the signal transmission test of the fax unit are performed by
entering the check code and the parameter with the numeric keypad.
When you select Signal Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will be
displayed. Select (Highlight) Parameter and press [Right] to proceed to the entry
screen. When the check is in progress, Running is displayed on the panel. OK is
displayed when the process is completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers
that indicate the error when failed to perform the process.
Example of Signal Check Result Screen
Note : For items other than Sub Code=103 (relay 1-2 setting) and Sub Code=104 (phone line
initialization), the process is continued in the fax unit until the [Stop] button is pressed.
Press the [Stop] button to cancel the process. Once the process is over, press [Stop]
button to return to the Fax Maintenance initial screen.
CAUTION
This function is intended for use in the paticular purpose; filing
application for the use of the fax machine, machine test or license
test with a common carrier present.
When a Check Code and
Setting is Entered
When the Check Result
is Normal
When the Check Result
is Abnormal
Signal Check in
Progress
TROUBLESHOOTI NG Printer 143
3.4 Printer
3.4.1 Notes on Using FIP
1. The troubleshooting method described here assumes that there is no
malfunction in the printer controller (PWBA ESS). If you cannot fix a
problem even by following the troubleshooting procedure, replace the
printer controller with a normal one and then follow the same procedure. If
you cannot recover the printer from the trouble even with the printer
controller replaced, replace the Possible parts that caused the error
shown in FIP and related parts with new ones in order one by one, and
repeat operation checks.
2. Some normal parts such as MCU, LV/HVPS, FUSER ASSY, 2ND BTR
ASSY may be required as FIP troubleshooting tools to identify the cause of
the trouble. So, you need to have those spares in advance.
3. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD before starting troubleshooting work
except when turning power ON is needed. Never touch any live parts
unnecessarily with the power cord connected.
4. Conventions used to represent connectors are as follows:
P/J12 = The connector (P/J12) in a connected state.
P12 = The plug side in connector (P/J12) disconnected state.
(except when the jack is directly mounted on the board)
J12 = The jack side in connector (P/J12) disconnected state.
(except when the jack is directly mounted on the board)
5. When, for example, P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN is indicated in FIP for the
voltage check, set the plus side of a measuring tool to 2PIN on P/J1
and set the minus side of the tool to 4PIN on P/J3.
6. When, for example, P/J1 P/J2 is indicated in FIP for the voltage
check, check for the all relating terminals between P/J1 and P/J2 with
reference to Chapter7 Wiring Connection Diagrams (p.571).
7. Taking P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN as an example, the minus side P/J3-
4PIN is AG (Analog Ground), SG (Signal Ground), or RTN (Return).
Therefore it is possible to connect to another AG, SG, or RTN pin as the
minus side instead of P/J3-4PIN. Before doing so, check that each AG-
to-AG, SG-to-SG, or RTN-to-RTN has continuity properly. Be careful not
to connect to a wrong pin since the level of AG, SG and RTN are different
from each other.
8. When measuring the voltage, perform measurement with the
Photoconductor Unit, 2ND BTR ASSY, and paper cassette loaded, covers
closed, and power ON.
9. All voltage values given in the FIP are approximate values. So actually
measured values should not be completely the same as those given in the
FIP.
10. Note that FIP does not provide any description on removal of parts which
are supposed to be removed to remove the target part, and the procedures.
11. Any parts listed in Possible parts that caused the error in the FIP are
regarded as the source of the trouble and signifies that the parts or the
assemblies (HIGH ASSY) containing those parts should be replaced with
normal ones one by one, and checking should be repeated.
12. In the FIP, the optional paper feeder of the printer is called Tray1.
13. FIP may contain descriptions that distinguish between certain
specifications. Be sure to follow such instructions properly to remedy the
problem.
3.4.2 Warming-Up Flowchart at Power-ON
The following flowchart (outline) shows the printers warm-up operation, from power-on to when the printer is ready to print.
Figure 3-2. Warming-up flowchart at power-on
L
e
g
_
S
e
c
0
0
1
_
0
3
1
F
A
P
o
w
e
r

O
N
E
r
r
o
r

d
i
s
p
l
a
y
e
d
?

W
h
e
n

D
e
v
e

H
o
m
e

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
S
e
n
s
o
r

E
r
r
o
r

o
c
c
u
r
s
:

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
4
1

W
h
e
n

a
n

I
D

E
r
r
o
r

o
c
c
u
r
s
:

X
E
R
O

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
9

Y

T
o
n
e
r

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
1
3

M

T
o
n
e
r

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
1
7

C

T
o
n
e
r

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
2
1

K

T
o
n
e
r

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
2
5

W
h
e
n

D
e
v
e

H
o
m
e

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r

E
r
r
o
r

o
c
c
u
r
s
:

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
4
1

P
L
C

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
*
3
(
3
0

s
e
c
s

o
r

m
o
r
e
)
*
1

:

R
o
t
a
r
y

r
o
t
a
t
e
s

3
6
0

p
l
u
s

a

l
i
t
t
l
e

m
o
r
e

d
u
r
i
n
g

H
o
m
e

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

7
2
0

d
u
r
i
n
g
e
x
e
c
u
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

P
L
C

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
.
*
2

:

B
y

A
D
C

T
C

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
,

t
h
e

t
a
r
g
e
t

d
e
n
s
i
t
y
v
a
l
u
e

o
f

T
C

i
s

b
e
i
n
g

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
e
d

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g

t
o

t
h
e

d
e
v
e
l
o
p
i
n
g

m
a
c
h
i
n
e

d
r
i
v
e

t
i
m
e
.
*
3

:

T
h
e

P
L
C

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
r
e
a
t
e
s

a
n
d

r
e
a
d
s

A
D
C
p
a
t
c
h
e
s

t
o

a
d
j
u
s
t

t
o
n
e
r

a
n
d

i
m
a
g
e

d
e
n
s
i
t
y
.
Y
e
s
N
o
E
r
r
o
r

r
e
c
o
v
e
r
y

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
(
S
e
e

L
i
s
t

o
f

E
r
r
o
r
s

a
n
d

W
a
r
n
i
n
g
s
)

W
h
e
n

I
B
T

C
L
N

F
a
i
l

o
c
c
u
r
s

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
4
8
F
u
s
e
r

w
a
r
m
-
u
p
(
t
i
m
e

o
u
t

w
i
t
h
i
n

4
5

s
e
c
s
)
H
e
a
t
e
r

r
e
d
-
h
o
t

W
h
e
n

I
B
T

C
L
N

F
a
i
l

o
c
c
u
r
s

G
o

t
o

F
I
P
-
1
.
5
2
T
o
t
a
l

3
7

t
o

8
4
0

s
e
c
o
n
d
s
(
d
e
p
e
n
d
i
n
g

o
n

a
m
b
i
e
n
t

e
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
)
E
n
d

o
f

c
l
e
a
n
i
n
g

a
n
d

F
U
S
E
R

w
a
r
m
-
u
p
?
Y
e
s
N
o
R
e
a
d
y

(
r
e
a
d
y

t
o

p
r
i
n
t
)
B
T
R
/
I
B
T

c
l
e
a
n
i
n
g

(
1
1

s
e
c
s
)
I
B
T

B
r
u
s
h

M
o
t
o
r

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
Y
e
s
Y
e
s
N
o
N
o
F
u
s
e
r

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
a
t

P
o
w
e
r

O
N

l
o
w
e
r

t
h
a
n

t
h
e

F
u
s
e
r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

t
h
r
e
s
h
o
l
d

v
a
l
u
e
?
D
e
t
e
c
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e
o
f

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

s
e
n
s
o
r

o
f

a

f
i
x
e
d
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

w
i
t
h

v
a
l
u
e

a
t

p
r
e
v
i
o
u
s

p
r
i
n
t
i
n
g
?
M
O
T

A
S
S
Y

R
O
T

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
*
1
C
R
U
M

c
h
e
c
k

a
n
d

A
D
C

T
C

t
a
r
g
e
t
d
e
n
s
i
t
y

v
a
l
u
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
*
2
(
1
6

s
e
c
s
)
M
O
T

A
S
S
Y

R
O
T

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
*
1
R
o
t
a
r
y

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

c
h
e
c
k

a
n
d

H
o
m
e

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
8

s
e
c
s
)

I
B
T

B
r
u
s
h

M
o
t
o
r

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
3.4.3 FIP
FIP is provided as the first step to identify the cause of trouble. FIP is a guide for
proceeding with troubleshooting while checking error codes and for various other
symptoms of trouble.
3.4.3.1 FIP Procedure
Is an error code displayed on the panel?
Teach the operator the right way.
Ask the operator about the conditions of the trouble.
Was the operator operating the printer correctly?
Is the printer jammed?
Is it an image quality problem?
Is the printer making abnormal noise?
Have the F/W version of main controller and mechanical controller been updated ?
Fix the trouble with reference to the FIP.
Perform troubleshooting with reference to
7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams
Ask the operator again to verify the condition at the time of jamming, and
execute a print job in the same conditions. Is the printer jammed again?
Recheck the trouble condition, and execute preventive maintenance
by using 7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams (p.571), doing proper
adjustment when disassembled, or according to various information.
Write the Jam code down.
Fix the trouble with reference to the FIP.
Fix the trouble with reference to
3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble (p.280).
Fix the trouble with reference to
3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble (p.248).
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y N
3.4.4 FIP by Message Display
3.4.4.1 List of Errors and Warnings
ERROR LIST RELATED TO PAPER JAM
Figure 3-3. Jammed Location
Leg_001_040FA
SENSOR T/R
SENSOR OHP
SENSOR REGI
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser)
FUSER ASSY
SENSOR FUSER IN
2ND BTR ASSY
SOLENOID FEED
SOLENOID PICK UP
Table 3-9. List of Paper Jam Error
Panel
Message
Jammed
Location
Description See FIP
Jam LC, G
(1)
The SENSOR T/R did not turn ON within the specified
time from SOLENOID FEED - ON.
26
(p.178)
Jam MP, E
(2)
The SENSOR REGI did not turn ON within the
specified time from SOLENOID PICK UP - ON.
27
(p.181)
Jam E
(3)
The SENSOR REGI did not turn ON within the
specified time from SENSOR T/R - ON.
28
(p.183)
Jam E
(3)(4)
The SENSOR REGI did not turn OFF within the
specified time from CLUTCH ASSY REGI - ON.
29
(p.186)
Jam E, F
(4)(5)
The Exit Sensor did not turn ON and SENSOR FUSER
IN turned OFF within the specified time from CLUTCH
ASSY REGI - ON.
30
(p.188)
Jam C, E, F
(4)(5)
The Exit Sensor did not turn ON and SENSOR FUSER
IN turned ON within the specified time from CLUTCH
ASSY REGI - ON.
31
(p.192)
Check
Transparency (3)
SENSOR OHP detected media other than OHP at the
OHP setting or detected OHP at a setting other than
OHP.
32
(p.196)
Jam E
(4)
The SENSOR FUSER IN did not turn ON within the
specified time from CLUTCH ASSY REGI - ON.
33
(p.197)
Jam C
(4)(5)(6)
Exit Sensor did not turn OFF within the specified time
from SENSOR REGI - OFF.
34
(p.200)
Jam LC, G
---
SENSOR T/R was ON at Power ON or when I/L was
closed. (Static Jam)
35
(p.202)
Jam E
---
SENSOR OHP was ON at Power ON or when I/L was
Jam E
---
SENSOR REGI was ON at Power ON or when I/L was
Jam C, E, F
---
SENSOR FUSER IN was ON at Power ON or when I/L
was closed. (Static Jam)
Jam C
---
Exit Sensor was ON at Power ON or when I/L was
OTHER ERRORS AND WARNINGS
Table 3-10. List of Errors and Warnings
Class Panel Message Error LED Description See FIP
W
a
r
n
i
n
g
Y Toner Low --- The toner supply time of the Yellow toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
64 (p.237)
M Toner Low
---
The toner supply time of the Magenta toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
65 (p.238)
C Toner Low --- The toner supply time of the Cyan toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
66 (p.239)
K Toner Low --- The toner supply time of the Black toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
67 (p.240)
Worn Photoconductor
---
SENSOR TNER FULL of the Waste Toner Box has detected a toner full state. The printer, however, can operated.
68 (p.241)
--- The number of drum rotations has exceeded the specified value. The printer, however, can be operated.
69 (p.242)
E
r
r
o
r
Install Y TnrCart ON The Yellow toner cartridge is not mounted.
1 (p.153)
Install M TnrCart
ON
The Magenta toner cartridge is not mounted.
2 (p.154)
Install C TnrCart ON The Cyan toner cartridge is not mounted.
3 (p.155)
Install K TnrCart ON The Black toner cartridge is not mounted.
4 (p.156)
Install Photocondctr
ON
The photoconductor unit is not mounted.
5 (p.157)
Photocondctr Trouble
ON
A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA ASSY (CRUM XERO).
6 (p.158)
An error occurred when writing data to ANTENNA ASSY (CRUM XERO).
7 (p.159)
A photoconductor unit with a memory of different specification device is attached.
8 (p.160)
Wrong Photocondctr
ON
A drum cartridge of a different specification is attached.
9 (p.161)
TonerCart Error Y
ON
A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG).
10 (p.162)
An error occurred when writing data to ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG).
11 (p.163)
A Yellow toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
12 (p.164)
Wrong Toner Y ON A Yellow toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
13 (p.165)
E
r
r
o
r
TonerCart Error M
ON
14 (p.166)
15 (p.167)
A Magenta toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
16 (p.168)
Wrong Toner M ON A Magenta toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
17 (p.169)
TonerCart Error C
ON
18 (p.170)
19 (p.171)
A Cyan toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
20 (p.172)
Wrong Toner C
ON
A Cyan toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
21 (p.173)
TonerCart Error K
ON
22 (p.174)
23 (p.175)
A Black toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
24 (p.176)
Wrong Toner K ON A Black toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
25 (p.177)
Irregular Density ON The Coverage for 500msec of the image exceeds the limit.
45 (p.215)
Replace Toner Y
ON
It is time to replace the Yellow toner cartridge.
53 (p.225)
Replace Toner M ON It is time to replace the Magenta toner cartridge.
54 (p.226)
Replace Toner C ON It is time to replace the Cyan toner cartridge.
55 (p.227)
Replace Toner K
ON
It is time to replace the Black toner cartridge.
56 (p.228)
Replace Photocondctr ON It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
57 (p.229)
Blink The number of drum rotations has exceeded the specified value.
69 (p.242)
A Open
ON
COVER FRONT ASSY U is open.
58 (p.230)
E Open ON CHUTE ASSY-REAR is open.
59 (p.231)
F Open ON CHUTE ASSY-FSR is open.
60 (p.232)
C Open
ON
COVER FUSER is open.
61 (p.233)
G Open ON The Cover of Tray 1 is open.
62 (p.234)
B Open ON COVER TOP is open.
63 (p.235)
Table 3-10. List of Errors and Warnings
Class Panel Message Error LED Description See FIP
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request
Table 3-11. List of Service Request
Class Panel Messaeg Description See FIP
E
n
g
i
n
e

R
e
l
a
t
e
d

(
E
)
Service Req E510 ROS Motor Failure
40 (p.208)
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from SOS Sensor in ROS within the specified time.
Service Req E511 TR0 Failure
39 (p.206)
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from SENSOR TR-0 (TR0 Sensor) at the specified timing.
Service Req E513 NVRAM Error
38 (p.205)
An error occurred in NVRAM on PWBA MCU.
Service Req E514 PAGE Timeout
37 (p.204)
The PAGEC/PAGE signal was not received within 60sec after transmitting PFA.
Service Req E517 Communication Error Feeder
36 (p.203)
A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and Feeder.
Service Req E520 BTR 2 Advance Error
47 (p.217)
The 2nd BTR Retract Sensor does not turn ON within the specified time.
Service Req E521 BTR 2 Error
46 (p.216)
The input of 2nd BTR Retract Sensor does not change when 2nd BTR is initialized.
Service Req E524 Low Density
44 (p.213)
The output value of SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) is below the specified value.
Service Req E525 High Density
43 (p.211)
The output value of SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) exceeds the specified value.
Service Req E526 ADC Contamination
42 (p.210)
SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) error
E
n
g
i
n
e

R
e
l
a
t
e
d

(
E
)
Service Req E527 Deve Home Position Sensor Error
41 (p.209)
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from Rotary Home Position Sensor within the specified time after rotation of Rotary
Developer.
Service Req E530 Humidity Sensor Error
50 (p.221)
When the Input from SENSOR HUM & TEMP is out of specification.
Service Req E533 Temp Sensor Error
49 (p.221)
SENSOR HUM & TEMP detected a temperature below -7C or over 55C.
Service Req E537 Fuser Fail
48 (p.219)
Control Thermistor detected a temperature exceeding the specified temperature.
Safety Thermistor detected a temperature exceeding the specified temperature.
The Control Thermistor did not detect a Ready even though the specified time elapsed from Main Lamp ON at Warm Up.
The Main Lamp continues to stay lit even after time specified for the Main Lamp elapsed after the Control Thermistor detected a
Ready.
The Control Thermistor detected a temperature below the specified temperature even after the specified time elapsed from Main
Lamp ON at Warm Up.
The latch lever of FUSER ASSY is set incorrectly.
Service Req E542 IBT CLN Fail
52 (p.224)
SENSOR IBT RETRACT cannot detect Advance/Retract of CAM ASSY-IBT CL.
Service Req E547 Feed Motor Failure
51 (p.222)
DRIVE ASSY FEED (Feed Motor) of the Feeder is not rotating at the specified speed.
Service Req E998 Engine Communication Error
70 (p.243)
Acommunication error between the controller and the PWBA MCU via the video I/F occured
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

R
e
l
a
t
e
d

(
C
)
Service Req C0017 CPU error (undefined interruption)
C1 (p.245)
Service Req C0081 CPU error (TLB modification exception)
Service Req C0082 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch])
Service Req C0083 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store])
Service Req C0084 CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch])
Service Req C0085 CPU error (address error exception [Store])
Service Req C0086 CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch])
Service Req C0087 CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store])
Service Req C0088 CPU error (SYSCALL exception)
Service Req C0089 CPU error (Break exception)
Service Req C0090 CPU error (reserving command exception)
Service Req C0091 CPU error (unused coprocessor exception)
Service Req C0092 CPU error (FPU exception)
Service Req C0093 CPU error (TLB exception)
Service Req C0094 CPU error (XTLB exception)
Service Req C0095 CPU error (cache exception)
Service Req C0096 CPU error (Trap exception)
Service Req C0097 CPU error (FPU exception)
Service Req C0098 CPU error (watch exception)
Service Req C0128 ~ 0254 CPU error (undefined trap)
Service Req C0255 CPU error (NMI exception)
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

R
e
l
a
t
e
d

(
C
)
Service Req C0256 CPU error (divide by 0)
C1 (p.245)
Service Req C0257 CPU error (arithmetic overflow)
Service Req C0258 CPU error (break occurrence)
Service Req C0800 IPL error (controller defect)
Service Req C0998 Engine communication error (only when power-on)
Service Req C0999 Engine flash ROM has no program data
C2 (p.246) Service Req C1002 Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.)
Service Req C1010 Verification error
Service Req C1020 RAM error (slot 0)
C3 (p.246)
Service Req C1021 RAM error (slot 1)
Service Req C1120 ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 7) (program)
C4 (p.247)
Service Req C1200 EEPROM writing error
C1 (p.245)
Service Req C1210 EEPROM writing times limit
Service Req C1400 Engine initialization error
Service Req C1500 CCNV hardware error
Service Req C1550 Initialization hardware error for SRAM for compression
Service Req C1600 Video series hardware error (including PWM IC calibration error)
Service Req C1610 Video series hardware error (VCNV error)
Service Req C1800 Illegal SPD
Service Req C1999 Other hardware errors
Service Req C2000 Software error C5 (p.247)
3.4.4.3 Error Code FIP
3.4.4.3.1 Engine related error
FIP-1
Panel Message
Install Y TnrCart
Possible parts that caused the error
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge Y HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y
ANTENNA CTRG HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Model check of Toner Cartridge Y
Is a Toner Cartridge Y that complies with the
specifications attached?
Go to Step[2]. Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge Y
Is the Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
Go to Step[3]. After re-
attachment
Go to Step[3].
3
Does the error recur even if the power is
turned ON/OFF several times?
Go to Step[4]. End of procedure
4
Attachment check of HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE Y
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y attached
correctly?
attachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge Y
Replace Toner Cartridge Y.
Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
7
ANTENNA CTRG operation check
Disconnect and then re-connect P/J415 on
PWBA MCU.
ON?
Go to Step[8]. Go to Step[9].
8
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Disconnect the P/J415 from PWBA MCU.
Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Go to Step[9]. Repair broken or
shorted part.
9
Check after replacement of HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE Y
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y. (p.410)
ON?
10
Check after replacement of ANTENNA
ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA CTRG
Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or
ANTENNA CTRG. (p.405) or (p.407)
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-2
Panel Message
Install M TnrCart
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge M HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M
Step Check Yes No
1
Model check of Toner Cartridge M
Is a Toner Cartridge M that complies with the
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge M
Is the Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
attachment
Go to Step[3].
3
4
DEVE M
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M attached
correctly?
attachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge M
Replace Toner Cartridge M.
ON?
7
PWBA MCU.
ON?
8
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
9
ASSY-DEVE M
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M. (p.410)
ON?
10
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-3
Panel Message
Install C TnrCart
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge C HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
Step Check Yes No
1
Model check of Toner Cartridge C
Is a Toner Cartridge C that complies with the
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge C
Is the Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
attachment
Go to Step[3].
3
4
DEVE C
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C attached
correctly?
attachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge C
Replace Toner Cartridge C.
ON?
7
PWBA MCU.
ON?
8
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
9
ASSY-DEVE C
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C. (p.410)
ON?
10
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-4
Panel Message
Install K TnrCart
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge K HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K
Step Check Yes No
1
Model check of Toner Cartridge K
Is a Toner Cartridge K that complies with the
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge K
Is the Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
attachment
Go to Step[3].
3
4
DEVE K
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K attached
correctly?
attachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge K
Replace Toner Cartridge K.
ON?
7
PWBA MCU.
ON?
8
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
9
ASSY-DEVE K
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K. (p.410)
ON?
10
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-5
Panel Message
Install Photocondctr
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit HARNESS-ASSY
XERO
GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Model check of Photoconductor Unit
Is a Photoconductor Unit that complies with the
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.
2
Attachment check of Photoconductor Unit
Re-attach Photoconductor Unit.
ON?
3
Disconnect and the re-connect P/J416 on
PWBA MCU.
ON?
4
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY
XERO
continuity?
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
Go to Step[5]. Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY XERO.
5
Check after replacement of Photoconductor
Unit
Replace Photoconductor Unit.
ON?
Go to Step [6]. End of procedure
6
Check after replacement of GUIDE CRU
ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY
Replace GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA
ASSY. (p.388) or (p.391)
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-6
Panel Message
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY
HARNESS-ASSY XERO PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Go to Step [2]. Replace with a
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
Unit
ON?
4
Check of ANTENNA ASSY
Is ANTENNA ASSY dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
ASSY, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [6].
5
Does the error recur when the power is
turned ON?
6
XERO
Disconnect P/J416 from PWBA MCU.
continuity.
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
Go to Step [7]. Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY XERO.
7
ASSY. (p.388) or (p.391)
ON?
8
Power supply check to PWBA MCU
Are the following power voltages being
supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-7
Panel Message
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA
ASSY
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
ON?
2
Unit
ON?
3
Check of ANTENNA ASSY
Is ANTENNA ASSY dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
ASSY, and then
proceed to step
[4].
Go to Step [5].
4
turned ON?
5
XERO
continuity?
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
HARNESS-
ASSY XERO.
6
ASSY. (p.388) or (p.391)
ON?
7
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-8
Panel Message
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
Unit
ON?
4
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-9
Panel Message
Wrong Photocondctr
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.
2
Unit
ON?
3
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [4].
4
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-10
Panel Message
TonerCart Error Y
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge Y ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Re-attach Toner Cartridge Y.
ON?
3
ON?
4
Check of ANTENNA CTRG
Is ANTENNA CTRG dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [6].
5
turned ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Go to Step [7]. Repair broken or
shorted part.
7
ON?
8
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-11
Panel Message
TonerCart Error Y
Troubleshooting
CTRG
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
ON?
2
ON?
3
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
Go to Step [5].
4
turned ON?
5
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
6
ON?
7
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-12
Panel Message
TonerCart Error Y
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge Y PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
ON?
4
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-13
Panel Message
Wrong Toner Y
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge Y PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [4].
4
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-14
Panel Message
TonerCart Error M
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA CTRG
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Re-attach Toner Cartridge M.
ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [6].
5
turned ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
8
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-15
Panel Message
TonerCart Error M
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
CTRG
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
ON?
2
ON?
3
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
Go to Step [5].
4
turned ON?
5
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
6
ON?
7
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-16
Panel Message
TonerCart Error M
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge M PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
ON?
4
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-17
Panel Message
Wrong Toner M
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge M PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [4].
4
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-18
Panel Message
TonerCart Error C
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge C ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
CTRG
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Re-attach Toner Cartridge C.
ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [6].
5
turned ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
8
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-19
Panel Message
TonerCart Error C
Troubleshooting
CTRG
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
ON?
2
ON?
3
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
Go to Step [5].
4
turned ON?
5
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
6
ON?
7
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
Continuity check between PWBA MCU and
LV/HVPS of HARNESS ASSY MAIN
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-20
Panel Message
TonerCart Error C
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge C PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
ON?
4
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-21
Panel Message
Wrong Toner C
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge C PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [4].
4
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-22
Panel Message
TonerCart Error K
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge K ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
CTRG
HARNESS ASSY
MAIN
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.
2
Re-attach Toner Cartridge K.
ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [6].
5
turned ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
8
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-23
Panel Message
TonerCart Error K
Troubleshooting
CTRG
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
ON?
2
ON?
3
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
Go to Step [5].
4
turned ON?
5
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
6
ON?
7
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-24
Panel Message
TonerCart Error K
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge K PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
ON?
4
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-25
Panel Message
Wrong Toner K
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge K PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.
2
ON?
3
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [4].
4
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-26
Panel Message
Jam LC, G
Troubleshooting

ROLL ASSY TURN 500 ROLL ASSY FEED 500
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 SOLENOID FEED
HARNESS ASSY MAIN DRIVE ASSY FEED
PWBA TRAY 500 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
ACTUATOR T/R SENSOR T/R
HARNESS ASSY FEED 3 PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS CLUTCH ASSY FEED
HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN DRIVE ASSY FEED
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of the paper
Is the paper loaded in the paper tray wrinkled or
torn?
Replace with
new, dry paper.
Go to Step [2].
2
Paper size setting check
Does the size of the paper in use match the size
of the paper set on the control panel?
Go to Step [4]. Change the paper
size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
Does the error recur when a test print is
made?
4
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY
of Feeder section
Open COVER-REAR 500 of Feeder.
Are ROLL ASSY TURN 500, HOLDER ASSY
RETARD 500, ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and
other parts attached correctly?
Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without
any dirt or damage?
Turn by hand to check.
Go to Step [5]. Replace the
ROLL in
question.
5
made?
6
Operation check of SOLENOID FEED
Does SOLENOID FEED operate correctly?
Make a test print and confirm.
Go to Step [12]. Go to Step [7].
7
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED
MAIN
Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY 500.
continuity?
J437-16 P610-2
J437-17 P610-1
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED
MAIN.
8
Check after replacement of DRIVE ASSY
FEED
Replace DRIVE ASSY FEED 250. (p.454)
Does the error recur when a test print is made?
9
Check after replacement of PWBA TRAY 500
Replace PWBA TRAY 500. (p.452)
10
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
Disconnect P/J435 from PWBA TRAY CONT.
continuity?
J435-2 P608-9
J435-3 P608-8
J435-4 P608-7
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
(p.458)
11
continuity?
J421-7 J608-4
J421-8 J608-3
J421-9 J608-2
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
12
Operation check of ACTUATOR T/R
Does ACTUATOR T/R move smoothly
without any damage? Does it leave the sensing
area of Tray Path Sensor when there is paper?
Does it enter the sensing area when there is no
paper?
ACTUATOR
T/R. (p.477)
13
Operation check of SENSOR T/R
The voltage of P437-15 P437-14 on PWBA
TRAY CONT is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR T/
R enters the sensing area of SENSOR T/R, and
is 5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
14
5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR T/R
Remove COVER LEFT 500.
TRAY 500 is 5 VDC?
15
MAIN
Disconnect P/J437 and P/J618 from PWBA
TRAY CONT.
continuity?
J437-13 J618-3
J437-14 J618-2
J437-15 J618-1
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED
MAIN.
16
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY FEED 3
Disconnect P/J618.
continuity?
P618-4 J120-3
P618-5 J120-2
P618-6 J120-1
Replace
SENSOR
T/R. (p.478)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
17
5 VDC power supply check to PWBA TRAY
500
TRAY 500 is 5 VDC?
Step Check Yes No
18
continuity?
J435-6 P608-5
J435-5 P608-6
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
(p.458)
19
continuity?
J421-5 J608-6
J421-6 J608-5
shorted part.
20
5 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [21].
21
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
22
Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY FEED
Does CLUTCH ASSY FEED operate
normally?
Make a test print and confirm by the operating
noise.
23
MAIN
continuity?
J437-6 P609-2
J437-7 P609-1
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED
MAIN.
Step Check Yes No
24
Check of resistance value of CLUTCH ASSY
FEED
The winding resistance between the terminals
of CLUTCH ASSY FEED is 144 10%
(20C)?
CLUTCH ASSY
FEED. (p.457)
25
24 VDC power supply check to PWBA
TRAY 500
The voltage of P435-9/10 435-7/8 on
PWBA TRAY 500 is 24 VDC?
26
continuity?
J435-7 P608-4
J435-8 P608-3
J435-9 P608-2
J435-10 P608-1
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
(p.458)
27
continuity?
J421-1 J608-10
J421-2 J608-9
J421-3 J608-8
J421-4 J608-7
shorted part.
28
The voltage of P410-5/6 P410-7/8 P410-7/8
on PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [29].
Step Check Yes No
29
MAIN
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
30
Check of 24 VDC power supply to DRIVE
ASSY FEED
TRAY CONT is 24 VDC?
31
MAIN
continuity?
J437-5 CN1-1
J437-4 CN1-2
J437-2 CN1-4
J437-1 CN1-5
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED
MAIN.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-27
Panel Message
Jam MP, E
Troubleshooting
ROLL MSI HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
ROLL-PINCH ACTUATOR-REGI.
SENSOR REGI HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS MOTOR-PH
HARNESS ASSY MAIN CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of the paper
torn?
Replace with
new, dry paper.
Go to Step [2].
2
size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
made?
4
of MSI section
Remove MSI. (p.329)
Are ROLL MSI, HOLDER ASSY RETARD
MSI, CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE, and
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [5]. Replace ROLL
ASSY in
question.
5
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY-
PRE REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
Are ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI and ROLL-
PINCH attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [6]. Replace ROLL in
question.
6
made?
7
Check of the paper position
Is the leading edge of the paper passing through
PRE REGI ROLL?
8
Operation check of ACTUATOR-REGI
Does ACTUATOR-REGI move smoothly
without any damage? Does it enter the sensor
sensing area when there is paper? Does it leave
the sensor sensing area when there is no paper?
ACTUATOR-
REGI. (p.360)
9
Operation check of SENSOR REGI
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR REGI
enters the sensor sensing area, and is 5 VDC
when it leaves the sensing area?
10
5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR
REGI
MCU is 5 VDC?
11
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
continuity?
J408-10 J603-3
J408-11 J603-2
J408-12 J603-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
Step Check Yes No
12
MCU.
continuity.
P603-10 J102-3
P603-11 J102-2
P603-12 J102-1
Replace
SENSOR REGI.
(p.361)
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
13
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [14].
14
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
15
24 VDC power supply check to P/H MOTOR
MCU is 24 VDC?
16
continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
17
Check after replacement of MOTOR-PH
Replace MOTOR-PH. (p.362)
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
18
The voltage of P410-5/6 P410-7/8 on
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [19].
19
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
20
continuity?
J408-1 J603-12
J408-2 J603-11
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
21
Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-1 P202-2
P603-2 P202-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
22
PRE REGI
Disconnect P/J202.
of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI is 144 10%
(20C)?
CLUTCH ASSY
PRE REGI.
(p.363)
Step Check Yes No
FIP-28
Panel Message
Jam E
Troubleshooting
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
ROLL ASSY FEED 500 ROLL PINCH A
ROLL PINCH B ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
ROLL-PINCH ACTUATOR-REGI
SENSOR REGI HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
LV/HVPS MOTOR-PH
HARNESS ASSY MAIN CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Feeder attachment on printer
Remove the Feeder and re-attach, then made a
test print.
Does the error recur?
2
Check of the paper
torn?
Replace with
new, dry paper.
Go to Step [3].
3
size setting, and
proceed to step
[4].
4
made?
5
of Feeder section
Open COVER-REAR 500 of Feeder.
Are ROLL ASSY TURN 500, HOLDER ASSY
RETARD 500, ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and
any dirt or damage?
ASSY in
question.
6
Shape and operation check of ROLL PINCH
A and ROLL PINCH B of Tray1 Feeder
Open COVER-REAR 500.
Are ROLL PINCH A and ROLL PINCH B
attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
PINCH in
question.
7
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY-
PRE REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Are ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI and ROLL-
any dirt or damage?
question.
8
made?
9
Check of paper position
PRE REGI ROLL?
10
without any damage? Does it enter the sensor
sensing area when there is paper? Does it leave
the sensor sensing area when there is no paper?
ACTUATOR-
REGI. (p.360)
Step Check Yes No
11
enters the sensor sensing area, and is 5 VDC
12
REGI
MCU is 5 VDC?
13
continuity?
J408-10 J603-3
J408-11 J603-2
J408-12 J603-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
14
MCU.
continuity?
P603-10 J102-3
P603-11 J102-2
P603-12 J102-1
Replace
SENSOR REGI.
(p.361)
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
15
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [16].
16
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
17
24 VDC power supply check to P/H MOTOR
MCU is 24 VDC?
18
continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
19
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
20
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [21].
21
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
22
continuity?
J408-1 J603-12
J408-2 J603-11
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
Step Check Yes No
23
Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-1 P202-2
P603-2 P202-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
24
PRE REGI
Disconnect P/J202.
of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
is 144 10% (20C)?
CLUTCH ASSY
PRE REGI.
(p.363)
Step Check Yes No
FIP-29
Panel Message
Jam E
Troubleshooting
ROLL ASSY PRE-REGI ROLL-PINCH
ROLL-REGI METAL ROLL REGI RUBBER
ACTUATOR-REGI SENSOR REGI
MOTOR-PH HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
LV/HVPS HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Step Check Yes No
1
Paper size check
Is the paper size compliant with the
specifications?
Go to Step[2]. Use paper of size
compliant with
the
specifications.
2
Go to Step[4]. Change the paper
size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
made by dialog operations?
4
PRE-REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Are ROLL ASSY PRE-REGI and ROLL-
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step[5]. Replace or re-
attach ROLL in
question.
5
Shape and operation check of ROLL-REGI
METAL and ROLL REGI RUBBER
Are the ROLL-REGI and ROLL REGI
RUBBER attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step[6]. Replace or re-
attach ROLL in
question.
6
without any damage? Does ACTUATOR-
REGI enter the sensor sensing area when there
is paper? Does it leave the sensor sensing area
when there is no paper?
ACTUATOR-
REGI. (p.360)
7
enters the sensing area of SENSOR REGI, and
is 5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
8
24 VDC power supply check to MOTOR-PH
MCU is 24 VDC?
9
MCU.
continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
10
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
11
REGI
MCU is 5 VDC?
12
continuity?
J408-10 J603-3
J408-11 J603-2
J408-12 J603-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
13
continuity?
P603-10 J102-3
P603-11 J102-2
P603-12 J102-1
Replace SENSOR
REGI. (p.361)
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
14
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [15].
15
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
16
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [17].
17
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-30
Panel Message
Jam E, F
Troubleshooting
FUSER ASSY ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL REGI RUBBER CLUTCH ASSY REGI
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
MOTOR-PH PWBA MCU
2ND BTR ASSY SHAFT-CENT 2ND
FRAME ASSY BTR BEARING-BRUSH CAM
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR FUSER IN
HARNESS ASSY ADC HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
CAM ASSY-2ND SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT ASSY MICRO
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser) MOT ASSY FSR
LV/HVPS HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of the paper
torn?
Replace with
new, dry paper.
Go to Step [2].
2
size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
made?
4
Paper check at Gate section inside FUSER
ASSY
Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down
before performing work.
Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.415)
Is there any paper remaining at the Gate section
inside FUSER ASSY.
Remove the
remaining paper
and proceed to
step [5].
Go to Step [6].
5
turned ON?
6
METAL
Is ROLL REGI RUBBER attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
question.
7
made?
8
Is the leading edge of the paper stopping before
REGI-ROLL?
9
Has the leading edge of the paper passed
through REGI-ROLL, and stopped before Fuser
Roll inside FUSER ASSY?
10
Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY REGI
Does CLUTCH ASSY REGI operate normally?
noise.
11
continuity?
J408-3 J603-10
J408-4 J603-9
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
12
Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-3 P203-2
P603-4 P203-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
13
REGI
Disconnect P/J203.
of CLUTCH ASSY REGI is 144 10%
(20C)?
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI. (p.354)
14
Check of 24 VDC power supply to MOTOR-
PH
MCU is 24 VDC?
15
Continuity check HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
continuity?
Is the continuity normal between all terminals
of J409 P604?
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
16
Replace MOTOR-PH.
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
17
Shape and operation check of 2ND BTR
ASSY
Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p.374)
Is 2ND BTR ASSY damaged?
Are the SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY
BTR and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged?
Does any of them operate abnormally?
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
other relevant
parts.
Go to Step [18].
18
Unit
Step Check Yes No
19
Operation check of SENSOR FUSER IN
MCU is 5 VDC when white paper is brought to
the sensor sensing area, and is 0 VDC when
paper is removed?
20
FUSER IN
MCU is 5 VDC?
21
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC
MCU.
continuity?
J418-1 J620-3
J418-2 J620-2
J418-3 J620-1
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
22
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY 2BTR
SENS
Disconnect P/J620 from HARNESS ASSY
2BTR SENS.
continuity?
P620-1 J111-3
P620-2 J111-2
P620-3 J111-1
Replace
SENSOR
FUSER IN.
(p.369)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SENS.
23
Shape and operation check of CAM ASSY-
2ND
Does CAM ASSY-2ND move smoothly
without any damage, and does it enter the
sensor sensing area?
Go to Step [24]. Replace CAM
ASSY-2ND.
(p.376)
Step Check Yes No
24
Operation check of SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT
MCU is 0 VDC when CAM ASSY-2ND enters
the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT, and is 5 VDC when it leaves the
sensing area?
25
2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
26
continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
(p.382)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
27
continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
shorted part.
28
24 VDC power supply check to MOT ASSY
MICRO (2ND BTR Retract Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
29
Check after replacement of MOT ASSY
MICRO
Replace MOT ASSY MICRO. (p.427)
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
30
Operation check of EXIT SENSOR in
FUSER ASSY
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR enters the
sensing area of EXIT SENSOR, and is
5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
31
5 VDC power supply check to EXIT
SENSOR in FUSER ASSY
The voltage of connector J614A-7 J614A-6
that connects FUSER ASSY on the printer is 5
VDC?
32
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY
FUSER SENS and HARNESS ASSY FUSER
in FUSER ASSY
Disconnect P/J619 and P/J110 in FUSER
ASSY.
continuity?
P619-1 J110-3
P619-2 J110-2
P619-3 J110-1
J619-3 P614A-7
J619-2 P614A-8
J619-1 P614A-9
Replace EXIT
SENSOR.
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
WARNING
33
Shape and operation check of FUSER ASSY
parts
Are the gears, FUSER ROLL, EXIT ROLL,
PINCH ROLL and other parts in FUSER ASSY
attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [34]. Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
34
FSR (Fuser Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
35
Check after replacement of MOT ASSY FSR
Replace MOT ASSY FSR. (p.422)
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
36
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [37].
37
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
38
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MCU
C/L
continuity?
J417-6 J614A-7
J417-7 J614A-6
shorted part.
39
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [40].
40
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-31
Panel Message
Jam C, E, F
Troubleshooting
FUSER ASSY ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL REGI RUBBER CLUTCH ASSY REGI
MOTOR-PH PWBA MCU
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser) MOT ASSY FSR
LV/HVPS HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of the paper
torn?
Replace with
new, dry paper.
Go to Step [2].
2
size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
made?
4
ASSY
inside FUSER ASSY.
Remove the
remaining paper
and proceed to
step [5].
Go to Step [6].
5
turned ON?
6
METAL
any dirt or damage?
question.
7
made?
8
Is the leading edge of the paper stopping before
REGI-ROLL?
9
Has the leading edge of the paper passed
through REGI-ROLL, and stopped before Fuser
Roll inside FUSER ASSY?
10
noise.
11
continuity?
J408-3 J603-10
J408-4 J603-9
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
12
Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-3 P203-2
P603-4 P203-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
13
REGI
Disconnect P/J203.
Is the winding resistance between the terminals
(20C)?
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI.
(p.354)
14
PH
MCU is 24 VDC?
15
Continuity check HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
continuity?
of J409 P604?
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
16
Replace MOTOR-PH.
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
17
ASSY
Are SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY BTR
and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged? Does
any of them operate abnormally?
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
other relevant
parts.
Go to Step [18].
18
Unit
Step Check Yes No
19
the sensor sensing area, and is
0 VDC when paper is removed?
20
FUSER IN
MCU is 5 VDC?
21
MCU.
continuity?
J418-1 J620-3
J418-2 J620-2
J418-3 J620-1
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
22
SENS
2BTR SENS.
continuity?
P620-1 J111-3
P620-2 J111-2
P620-3 J111-1
Replace
SENSOR
FUSER IN.
(p.369)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SENS.
23
2ND
Does CAM ASSY-2ND move smoothly
ASSY-2ND.
(p.376)
Step Check Yes No
24
RETRACT
MCU is 0 VDC when CAM ASSY-2ND enters
the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR
sensing area?
25
2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
26
continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
(p.382)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
27
continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
shorted part.
28
MICRO (2ND BTR Retract Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
29
MICRO
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
30
FUSER ASSY
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR enters the
sensing area of EXIT SENSOR, and is 5 VDC
31
that connects FUSER ASSY on the printer is 5
VDC?
32
in FUSER ASSY
ASSY.
continuity?
P619-1 J110-3
P619-2 J110-2
P619-3 J110-1
J619-3 P614A-7
J619-2 P614A-8
J619-1 P614A-9
Replace EXIT
SENSOR.
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
WARNING
33
parts
Are the gears, FUSER ROLL, EXIT ROLL,
PINCH ROLL and other parts in FUSER ASSY
attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
ASSY. (p.415)
34
FSR (Fuser Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
35
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
36
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [37].
37
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
38
C/L
continuity?
J417-6 J614A-7
J417-7 J614A-6
shorted part.
39
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [40].
40
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
FIP-32
Panel Message
Check Transparency
Troubleshooting
SENSOR OHP HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of transparency setting
Does the transparency in use match the
NVRAM setting (which type of transparency
(with or without white margin) is enabled or
disabled.)
transparency in
use with a one
that matches the
NVRAM
settings, or
change the
NVRAM setting
and go to [2].
2
made?
3
Check of dirt and foreign bodies on surface
of SENSOR OHP
Open COVER-P/H.
Are there any dirt or foreign bodies on the
SENSOR surface?
Clean to remove
any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[4].
Go to Step [5].
4
made?
5
Operation check of SENSOR OHP
the sensor sensing area (transparency must not
be used), and becomes 0 VDC when paper is
removed?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [6].
6
Power supply check to SENSOR OHP
MCU is 5 VDC?
7
continuity?
J408-7 J603-6
J408-8 J603-5
J408-9 J603-4
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
8
continuity?
P603-7 J101-3
P603-8 J101-2
P603-9 J101-1
Replace
SENSOR OHP.
(p.359)
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
9
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [10].
10
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-33
Panel Message
Jam E
Troubleshooting
ROLL-REGI METAL ROLL REGI RUBBER
PWBA MCU HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS MOT ASSY MICRO
CLUTCH ASSY REGI HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 MOTOR-PH
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of the paper
torn?
Replace with
new, dry paper.
Go to Step [2].
2
size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
made?
4
METAL
Also, does this part rotate smoothly without any
dirt or damage?
question.
5
made?
6
REGI ROLL?
7
ASSY
Are SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY BTR
and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged? Does
any of them operate abnormally?
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
other relevant
parts.
Go to Step [8].
8
Unit
9
the sensor sensing area, and becomes 0 VDC
when paper is removed?
10
FUSER IN
MCU is 5 VDC?
11
MCU.
continuity?
J418-1 J620-3
J418-2 J620-2
J418-3 J620-1
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
Step Check Yes No
12
SENS
2BTR SENS.
continuity?
P620-1 J111-3
P620-2 J111-2
P620-3 J111-1
Replace
SENSOR
FUSER IN.
(p.369)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SENS.
13
2ND
Does CAM ASSY 2ND move smoothly
ASSY-2ND.
(p.376)
14
RETRACT
MCU is 0 VDC when Actuator of CAM ASSY-
2ND enters the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR
sensing area?
15
2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
16
continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
(p.382)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
17
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [18].
Step Check Yes No
18
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
19
continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
shorted part.
20
MICRO (2nd BTR Retract Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
21
MICRO
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
22
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [23].
23
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
24
noise.
25
continuity?
J408-3 J603-10
J408-4 J603-9
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
26
Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-3 P203-2
P603-4 P203-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
27
REGI
Disconnect P/J203.
(20C)?
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI.
(p.354)
28
PH
MCU is 24 VDC?
Step Check Yes No
29
continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
30
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-34
Panel Message
Jam C
Troubleshooting
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser) FUSER ASSY
HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS MOT ASSY FSR
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of the paper
torn?
Replace with
new, dry paper.
Go to Step [2].
2
size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
made?
4
ASSY
inside FUSER ASSY.
Remove the
paper, and go to
[5].
Go to Step [6].
5
made?
6
Shape and operation check of ACTUATOR
in EXIT SENSOR
Does ACTUATOR move smoothly and enter
the sensing area of EXIT SENSOR?
ASSY. (p.415)
WARNING
7
FUSER ASSY
The voltage of P417-8 P417-7 on PABW
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR on EXIT
SENSOR is moved and entered the sensing area
of EXIT SENSOR (when there is no paper),
and is 5 VDC when the actuator leaves the
sensing area (when there is paper)?
8
on the printer (connected to FUSER ASSY) is 5
VDC?
Go to Step [9]. Go to step [10]
9
in FUSER ASSY
ASSY.
continuity?
P619-1 J110-3
P619-2 J110-2
P619-3 J110-1
J619-3 P614A-7
J619-2 P614A-8
J619-1 P614A-9
Replace EXIT
SENSOR.
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
WARNING
10
C/L
continuity?
J417-6 J614A-7
J417-7 J614A-6
shorted part.
11
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [12].
12
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
13
parts
Are the gears, Fuser Roll, Exit Roll, Pinch Roll
and other parts in FUSER ASSY attached
correctly?
any dirt or damage?
ASSY. (p.415)
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
WARNING
14
FSR (Fuser Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
15
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
16
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [17].
17
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-35
Panel Message
Jam C
Jam LC, G
Jam E
Jam C, E, F
Troubleshooting
SENSOR T/R SENSOR OHP
SENSOR REGI SENSOR FUSER IN
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of error/status code
Specify the problem Sensor by the error/status
code:
Jam LC, G:
SENSOR T/R
Jam E:
SENSOR OHP
Jam E:
REGI
Jam C, E, F:
SENSOR FUSER IN
Jam C:
Is there paper remaining on the problem
Sensor?
Remove the
remaining paper
and proceed to
Step [2].
Go to Step [3].
2
made?
3
Operation check (1) of problem Sensor
Does the ACTUATOR move smoothly without
any damage?
Or, is the light emitter of the Sensor clean?
Go to Step [4]. Re-attach or
replace the
actuator, or clean
the light emitter.
4
Operation check (2) of problem Sensor
The voltage of the common line and signal line
to each Sensor on PWBA MCU is 0 VDC in a
sensor detecting state, or is 5 VDC in a sensor
non-sensing state?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Replace the
problem Sensor.
FIP-36
Panel Message
Service Req E517
Troubleshooting
HARNESS ASSY MAIN HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 PWBA TRAY 500
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Feeder attachment on printer
Remove and re-attach Feeder.
ON?
2
Remove Feeder from the printer.
of J421 J608 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)?
shorted part.
3
1 of Feeder
Remove Feeder.
of J435 P608 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)?
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
(p.458)
4
Check after replacement of PWBA TRAY 500
Replace PWBA TRAY 500. (p.452)
ON?
5
Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
Replace PWBA MCU. (p.432)
ON?
6
J502 from LV/HVPS.
of J410 J502?
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-37
Panel Message
Service Req E514
Troubleshooting
FFC-ASSY ESS PWBA MCU
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of connection of FFC-ASSY ESS
Re-connect FFC-ASSY ESS of PWBA ESS to
PWBA MCU. Does the error recur when a test
print is made?
2
Check of connection of FFC-ASSY ESS
Is FFC-ASSY ESS damaged or broken?
Replace FFC-
ASSY ESS.
(p.437)
Go to Step [3].
3
Replace PWBA
ESS. (p.437)
End of procedure
FIP-38
Panel Message
Service Req E513
Troubleshooting
NOTE: It is assumed to be due to external noise.
Proceed to FIP-71 Electrical Noise to check to be sure.
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
turned off and back on?
2
Does the error recur even when the power
is turned off and back on again?
3
Does the error recur even after the power
has been switched several times?
Go to Step[4]. End of
procedure*
4
Disconnect and re-connect all connectors
connected to PWBA MCU.
turned ON?
5
turned ON?
Go to FIP-71
Electrical Noise.
(p.244)
End of procedure
CAUTION
If NVRAM Error (Service Req E513) occurs soon after replacing
the PWBA MCU, the installed PWBA MCU may be previously used
for another product.
Be sure to replace it with a new one.
Note that once the PWBA MCU is installed and the product is
turned on, the PWBA MCU cannot be used for another product
anymore.
FIP-39
Panel Message
Service Req E511
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR TR-0
HARNESS-ASSY XERO MOTOR ASSY P/R
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Photoconductor Unit attachment
ON?
2
Operation check of Photoconductor Unit
Is the Drum of Photoconductor Unit rotating?
3
Check for dirt on silver seal on Belt in
Photoconductor Unit
Remove Photoconductor Unit.
Turn gear of Photoconductor Unit until silver
seal attached to Belt can be seen.
Is silver seal dirty?
Replace
Photoconductor
Unit.
Go to Step [4].
4
Check of SENSOR TR-0 (TR0 Sensor)
attachment
Is SENSOR TR-0 attached securely?
Go to Step [5]. Re-attach
the SENSOR TR-
0, and go to step
[5].
5
of SENSOR TR-0
SENSOR TR-0 surface?
Clean to remove
any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[6].
Go to Step [7].
6
turned ON?
7
Operation check of SENSOR TR-0
MCU is 5 VDC when silver paper or other
reflective object comes close to the sensing area
of SENSOR TR-0, and is 0 VDC when the
object is released?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
Check of 5 VDC power supply to SENSOR
TR-0
MCU is 5 VDC?
9
XERO
continuity?
J416-1 J108-3
J416-2 J108-2
J416-3 J108-1
Replace
SENSOR TR-0.
(p.387)
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY XERO.
10
Check after replacement of MOTOR ASSY
P/R
Replace MOTOR ASSY P/R. (p.426)
ON?
11
24 VDC power supply check to MOTOR
ASSY P/R
Disconnect P/J201 from MOTOR ASSY P/R.
The voltage of J201-1 J201-2 is 24 VDC?
12
of J403 J200?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
13
Disconnect P/J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J502-9 J201-1
J502-10 J201-2
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
14
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [15].
15
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-40
Panel Message
Service Req E510
Troubleshooting
ROS ASSY HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of ROS ASSY attachment
Re-attach ROS ASSY. (p.401)
ON?
2
Remove ROS ASSY. (p.401)
of J407 J601?
shorted part.
3
5 VDC power supply check to ROS and
PWB SOS
MCU is 5 VDC?
4
ON?
5
Check after replacement of ROS ASSY
Replace ROS ASSY. (p.401)
ON?
Go to FIP-1 81
Electrical noise.
End of procedure
6
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [7].
7
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-41
Panel Message
Service Req E527
Troubleshooting
MOTOR ASSY MAG SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and
MOTOR ASSY MAG attachment
Are FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and MOTOR
ASSY MAG attached correctly?
Go to Step [2]. Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
Rotation check of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
and MOTOR ASSY MAG
Do FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and MOTOR
ASSY MAG rotate smoothly?
Go to Step [3]. Remove any
items that hinder
rotation.
3
Check of SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
attachment
Is SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI attached
correctly?
to step [4].
4
Operation check of SENSOR ROTARY
HOME POSI
MCU is 0 VDC when FRAME ASSY
ROTARY enters the sensing area, and is 5
VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
ROTARY HOME POSI
MCU is 5 VDC?
6
continuity?
J413-5 J105-3
J413-6 J105-2
J413-7 J105-1
Replace
SENSOR
ROTARY
HOME POSI.
(p.409)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
7
The voltage of J410-3 J410-4 on PWBA
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-42
Panel Message
Service Req E526
Troubleshooting
SENSOR ASSY ADC HARNESS ASSY ADC
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
of SENSOR ASSY ADC
SENSOR ASSY ADC surface?
Clean to remove
any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[2].
Go to Step [2].
2
Check of SENSOR ASSY ADC attachment
Is SENSOR ASSY ADC attached correctly?
to step [3].
3
turned ON?
4
5 VDC and 24 VDC power supply check to
SENSOR ASSY ADC
MCU is 24 VDC?
And the voltage of P422-8 P422-4 is 5
VDC?
5
continuity?
J422-8 J431-1
J422-4 J431-5
J422-2 J431-7
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
6
Check after replacement of SENSOR ASSY
ADC
Replace SENSOR ASSY ADC. (p.379)
ON?
7
Are each of the power voltages being supplied
to the following terminals on PWBA MCU
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [8].
8
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-43
Panel Message
Service Req E525
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR ASSY ADC
Toner Cartridge K Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M Toner Cartridge C
HARNESS ASSY ADC SENSOR HUM & TEMP
HARNESS ASSY MAIN ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of connection between
Photoconductor Unit and CONDUCTOR
attached to frame
Is the contact surface of Photoconductor Unit
and CONDUCTOR attached to the frame
deformed or are there foreign objects on the
surface?
Clean, and go to
Step [2].
Go to Step [2].
2
of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean, and go to
Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
3
turned ON?
4
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge
Replace Toner Cartridge of each color.
ON?
5
Unit
ON?
6
SENSOR ASSY ADC
MCU is 24 VDC?
VDC?
7
continuity?
J422-8 J431-1
J422-4 J431-5
J422-2 J431-7
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
8
ADC
ON?
9
Check of 5 VDC power supply to SENSOR
ASSY HUM & TEMP
MCU is 5 VDC?
10
continuity?
J413-1 J104-4
J413-2 J104-3
J413-3 J104-2
J413-4 J104-1
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
11
Check after replacement of SENSOR HUM
& TEMP
Replace SENSOR HUM & TEMP. (p.428)
ON?
12
ON?
13
ON?
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
End of procedure
14
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [15].
15
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-44
Panel Message
Service Req E524
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR ASSY ADC
Toner Cartridge K Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M Toner Cartridge C
HARNESS ASSY ADC SENSOR HUM & TEMP
HARNESS ASSY MAIN ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of connection between
Photoconductor Unit and CONDUCTOR
attached to frame
and CONDUCTOR attached to the frame
deformed or are there foreign objects on the
surface?
Clean, and go to
Step [2].
Go to Step [2].
2
of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean, and go to
Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
3
turned ON?
4
Replace Toner Cartridge of each color.
ON?
5
Unit
ON?
6
SENSOR ASSY ADC
MCU is 24 VDC?
VDC?
7
continuity?
J422-8 J431-1
J422-4 J431-5
J422-2 J431-7
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
8
ADC
ON?
9
HUM & TEMP
MCU is 5 VDC?
10
continuity?
J413-1 J104-4
J413-2 J104-3
J413-3 J104-2
J413-4 J104-1
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
11
& TEMP
ON?
12
ON?
13
ON?
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
End of procedure
14
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [15].
15
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-45
Panel Message
Irregular Density
Troubleshooting
SENSOR ASSY ADC Photoconductor Unit
PWBA MCU Toner Cartridge K
Toner Cartridge Y Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C ROS ASSY
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean to remove
any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[2].
Go to Step [2].
2
Check of SENSOR ASSY ADC attachment
Is SENSOR ASSY ADC attached correctly?
to step [3].
3
turned ON?
4
ADC
ON?
5
Unit
ON?
6
ON?
7
Replace Toner Cartridge K/Y/M/C.
ON?
8
ON?
9
Check after replacement of LV/HVPS
Replace LV/HVPS. (p.435)
ON?
Go to FIP-71
Electrical Noise.
(p.244)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-46
Panel Message
Service Req E521
Troubleshooting

SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT HARNESS ASSY ADC
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of 2ND BTR ASSY attachment
Is 2ND BTR ASSY attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
Does the error recur when restarting the
printer?
3
continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
shorted part.
4
MCU is 24 VDC?
5
MICRO
printer?
6
2BTR RETRACT.
MCU is 5 VDC?
7
continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
8
Check after replacement of SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT
Replace SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
printer?
9
printer?
10
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [11].
11
from LV/HVPS?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-47
Panel Message
Service Req E520
Troubleshooting
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT HARNESS ASSY ADC
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of DRIVE ASSY BTR attachment
Is the DRIVE ASSY BTR attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
Check of 2ND BTR ASSY attachment
Is 2ND BTR ASSY attached correctly?
to step [3].
3
made?
4
continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
shorted part.
5
MCU is 24 VDC?
6
MICRO
7
2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
8
continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
9
Check after replacement of SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT
Replace SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p.382)
10
Step Check Yes No
11
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [12].
12
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-48
Panel Message
Service Req E537
Troubleshooting
FUSER ASSY HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
FFC-ASSY LV/MCU HARNESS ASSY AC
PWBA FUSER CONT LV/HVPS
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of FUSER ASSY attachment
Is the FUSER ASSY attached correctly to the
printer?
In particular, is the connector connected firmly
to the printer?
Is the connector latched normally?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
Operation Check of the FUSER LOCK
SWITCH
Disconnect P/J128 from the FUSER LOCK
SWITCH
Is there continuity on P128-1 P128-2 when
FUSER LOCK SWITCH is pressed, and does
the continuity stop when FUSER LOCK
SWITCH is released?
LOCK SWITCH
4
Operation Check of the HARNESS ASSY
MAIN
continuity?
J410-10 J1-1
J410-9 J128-1
J1-3 J128-2
shorted part.
5
Check after replacement of the FUSER
ASSY
Replace FUSER ASSY. (p.415)
ON?
6
C/L
of J614A J417 and J614 J3?
HARNESS
ASSY MCU
C/L.
7
Continuity check of FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
J500 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
P401-21 J500-2
P401-22 J500-1
Go to Step [8]. Replace FFC-
ASSY LV/MCU.
8
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY AC
Disconnect P/J503 from LV/HVPS and P/J2
from PWBA FUSER CONT.
continuity?
J503-5 J2-5
J503-6 J2-6
HARNESS
ASSY AC.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
9
Check after replacement of PWBA FUSER
CONT
Replace PWBA FUSER CONT. (p.439)
Does the error occur when the power is turned
ON?
10
ON?
11
Disconnect P/J1 from PWBA FUSER CONT,
and P/J410 from PWBA MCU.
continuity?
P/J1-1 P/J410-10
P/J1-3 P/J410-9
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY MAIN
Step Check Yes No
FIP-49
Panel Message
Service Req E533
Troubleshooting
FIP-50
Panel Message
Service Req E530
Troubleshooting
SENSOR HUM & TEMP HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Temperature check of printer installation site
Has the ambient temperature where the printer
is installed fallen to -7C or below or reached or
risen to 55C or more.
Ask the customer
to improve the
installation
environment for
the printer.
Go to Step [2].
2
Check of SENSOR HUM & TEMP
thermistor resistance value
The resistance value of P104-4 P104-3 is
10k 1k (approx. 20C)?
SENSOR HUM
& TEMP.
(p.428)
3
of J413 J104?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
HARNESS ASSY MAIN SENSOR HUM & TEMP
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
of J413 J104?
shorted part.
2
& TEMP
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
FIP-51
Panel Message
Service Req E547
Troubleshooting
HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN DRIVE ASSY FEED
PWBA TRAY 500 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of DRIVE ASSY FEED attachment
Is DRIVE ASSY FEED attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
MAIN
continuity?
J437-1 CN1-5
J437-2 CN1-4
J437-4 CN1-2
J437-5 CN1-1
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED
MAIN.
3
24 VDC power supply check to DRIVE
ASSY FEED
FEED DRV is 24 VDC?
4
Check of FEED MOTOR START signal
FEED DRV is xx VDC when FEED MOTOR
START signal is ON?
Replace DRIVE
ASSY FEED.
(p.454)
Go to Step [10].
5
24 VDC power supply check to PWBA
TRAY 500
PWBA TRAY 500 is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
TRAY 500.
(p.452)
Go to Step [6].
6
continuity?
J435-10 P608-1 (connector on Feeder to
be connected to the printer)
J435-9 P608-2
J435-8 P608-3
J435-7 P608-4
Go to Step [7]. Replace PWBA
TRAY 500.
(p.452)
7
continuity?
J421-1 J608-10 (connector on the printer
to connect Feeder)
J421-2 J608-9
J421-3 J608-8
J421-4 J608-7
shorted part.
8
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
10
5 VDC power supply check to PWBA TRAY
500
TRAY CONT is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
TRAY 500.
(p.452)
Go to Step [11].
Step Check Yes No
11
continuity?
J435-6 P608-5 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)
J435-5 P608-6
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
(p.458)
12
continuity?
J421-5 J608-6 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)
J421-6 J608-5
shorted part.
13
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [14].
14
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-52
Panel Message
Service Req E542
Troubleshooting
DRIVE ASSY PRO SENSOR IBT RETRACT
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of connection of DRIVE ASSY PRO
(IBT Cleaner Retract Motor)
Is connector P/J414 connected firmly to PWBA
MCU?
Go to Step [2]. Re-connect the
connector.
2
24 VDC power supply check to DRIVE
ASSY PRO (IBT Cleaner Retract Motor)
MCU 2 is 4 VDC?
3
Check after replacement of DRIVE ASSY
PRO
Replace DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p.421)
4
5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR IBT
RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
5
continuity?
J415-3 J107-3
J415-4 J107-2
J415-5 J107-1
HARNESS
ASSY MAIN.
6
Check after replacement of SENSOR IBT
RETRACT
Replace SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p.383)
7
8
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-53
Panel Message
Replace Toner Y
Troubleshooting
CTRG
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge Y attachment
Is Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
Operation check of ANTENNA CTRG
Disconnect the P/J415 from PWBA MCU and
reconnect it.
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-54
Panel Message
Replace Toner M
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
CTRG
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge M attachment
Is Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
reconnect it.
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-55
Panel Message
Replace Toner C
Troubleshooting
CTRG
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge C attachment
Is Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
reconnect it.
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-56
Panel Message
Replace Toner K
Troubleshooting
CTRG
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge K attachment
Is Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
reconnect it.
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-57
Panel Message
Replace Photocondctr
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR TNER FULL
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Is Photoconductor Unit attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
Unit
ON?
4
Operation check of SENSOR TNER FULL
(Toner Full Sensor)
MCU is 0 VDC when the sensor sensing area is
blocked, and is 5 VDC when the sensing area is
not blocked?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
TNER FULL
MCU is 5 VDC?
6
continuity?
J413-10 J617-3
J413-11 J617-2
J413-12 J617-1
shorted part.
7
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY TNR
FULL
Disconnect P/J617.
continuity?
P617-1 J126-3
P617-2 J126-2
P617-3 J126-1
Replace
SENSOR TNER
FULL. (p.400)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
8
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-58
Panel Message
A Open
Troubleshooting
COVER FRONT ASSY U SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of open/close state of COVER
Is COVER FRONT ASSY U closed?
Go to Step [3]. Close the cover.
Go to Step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
Shape check of COVER FRONT ASSY U
Is the actuator of COVER FRONT ASSY U
that presses SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
deformed or damaged?
Replace COVER
FRONT
ASSY U. (p.318)
Go to Step [4].
4
Operation check of SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
Disconnect SWITCH-FRONT DOOR P/J125.
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR is pressed, and does
the continuity stop when SWITCH-FRONT
DOOR is released?
SWITCH-
FRONT DOOR.
(p.325)
Actuator
5
continuity?
J415-10 J125-2
J415-11 J125-1
shorted part.
6
Is the specified DC voltage being supplied to
the following terminals on PWBA MCU?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [7].
7
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-59
Panel Message
E Open
Troubleshooting
CHUTE ASSY-REAR SWITCH-PH DOOR
PWBA MCU HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Shape check of CHUTE ASSY-REAR
Is the actuator of CHUTE ASSY-REAR that
presses SWITCH I/L CAB (P/H Cover Switch)
damaged?
Replace CHUTE
ASSY-REAR.
(p.350)
Go to Step [2].
2
Operation check of SWITCH-PH DOOR
Disconnect the P/J408 from the PWBA MCU.
Is there continuity on J408-5 J408-6 when
SWITCH-I/L CAB is pressed, and does the
continuity stop when the switch is released?
3
continuity?
J408-5 J603-8
J408-6 J603-7
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1.
Actuator
4
Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-5 J100-2
P603-6 J100-1
Replace
SWITCH-PH
DOOR. (p.364)
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H2.
5
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [6].
6
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-60
Panel Message
F Open
Troubleshooting
CHUTE ASSY-FSR SWITCH 2BTR COVER
HARNESS ASSY ADC HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Shape check of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
Is the actuator of CHUTE ASSY-FSR that
presses SWITCH 2BTR COVER damaged?
Replace CHUTE
ASSY-FSR.
(p.366)
Go to Step [2].
2
Operation check of SWITCH 2BTR COVER
SWITCH 2BTR COVER is pressed, and does
the continuity stop when the switch is released?
3
continuity?
J418-7 J621-2
J418-8 J621-1
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
Actuator
4
SW
continuity?
P621-1 J113-2
P621-2 J113-1
Replace
SWITCH 2BTR
COVER. (p.378)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SW.
5
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [6].
6
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-61
Panel Message
C Open
Troubleshooting
COVER FUSER SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Is COVER FUSER closed?
Go to Step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
Shape check of COVER FUSER
Is the actuator of COVER FUSER that presses
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR deformed or
damaged?
Replace COVER
FUSER. (p.311)
Go to Step [4].
4
Operation check of SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
Disconnect SWITCH-FUSER DOOR P/J114.
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR is pressed, and does
SWITCH-
FUSER DOOR.
(p.323)
5
continuity?
J403-11 J114-2
J403-12 J114-1
shorted part.
Actuator
6
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [7].
7
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-62
Panel Message
G Open
Troubleshooting
CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Shape check of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
Is the actuator of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 that
presses SWITCH FEEDER DOOR damaged?
Replace CHUTE
FDR ASSY 500.
(p.450)
Go to Step [2].
2
Operation check of SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR is pressed, and does
3
MAIN
continuity?
J437-8 J121-2
J437-9 J121-1
Replace
SWITCH
FEEDER DOOR.
(p.460)
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED
MAIN.
Actuator
4
of J435 P608 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)?
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
(p.458)
5
of J421 J608 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)?
shorted part.
6
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [7].
7
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-63
Panel Message
B Open
Troubleshooting
COVER TOP COVER FRONT ASSY U
COVER FUSER SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH-INLK FRONT SWITCH-INLK FUSER
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Are all the COVER TOP, COVER FRONT
ASSY U, and COVER FUSER closed?
Go to Step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
Shape check of COVER TOP
Is the actuator of COVER TOP that presses
SWITCH ASSY TOP deformed or damaged?
Replace COVER
ASSY TOP.
(p.308)
Go to Step [4].
Actuator
4
Shape check of COVER FRONT ASSY U
Is the actuator of COVER FRONT ASSY U
that presses SWITCH-INLK FRONT deformed
or damaged?
Replace COVER
FRONT
ASSY U. (p.318)
Go to Step [5].
5
Shape check of COVER FUSER
Is the actuator of COVER FUSER that presses
SWITCH-INLK FUSER deformed or
damaged?
Replace COVER
FUSER. (p.311)
Go to Step [6].
6
Operation check of SWITCH ASSY TOP
Disconnect P/J116 from SWITCH ASSY TOP.
SWITCH ASSY TOP is pressed, and does the
continuity stop when the switch is released?
SWITCH ASSY
TOP. (p.314)
7
Operation check of SWITCH-INLK FRONT
Disconnect P/J115 from SWITCH-INLK
FRONT.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT is pressed, and does
SWITCH-INLK
FRONT. (p.325)
Step Check Yes No
Actuator
Actuator
8
Operation check of SWITCH-INLK FUSER
Disconnect P/J117 from SWITCH-INLK
FUSER.
SWITCH-INLK FUSER is pressed, and does
SWITCH-INLK
FUSER. (p.328)
9
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [10].
10
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-64
Panel Message
Y Toner Low
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge Y ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN ANTENNA CTRG
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge Y attachment
Is Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
FIP-65
Panel Message
M Toner Low
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge M attachment
Is Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
reconnect it.
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-66
Panel Message
C Toner Low
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge C ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge C attachment
Is Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-67
Panel Message
K Toner Low
Troubleshooting
Toner Cartridge K ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Toner Cartridge K attachment
Is Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
ON?
4
Clean
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [5].
5
reconnect it.
ON?
6
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
shorted part.
7
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-68
Panel Message
Worn Photoconductor
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR TNER FULL
HARNESS ASSY MAIN HARNESS-ASSY TNER FULL
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
Unit
ON?
4
Operation check of SONSOR TNER FULL
(Toner Full Sensor)
MCU is 0 VDC when the sensor sensing area is
blocked, and is 5 VDC when the sensing area is
not blocked?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [5].
5
TNER FULL
MCU is 5 VDC?
6
continuity.
J413-10 J617-3
J413-11 J617-2
J413-12 J617-1
shorted part.
7
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY TNR
FULL
Disconnect P/J617.
continuity?
P617-1 J126-3
P617-2 J126-2
P617-3 J126-1
Replace
SENSOR TNER
FULL. (p.400)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
8
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
Go to Step [9].
9
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-69
Panel Message
Worn Photoconductor
Troubleshooting

Photoconductor Unit GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
to step [2].
2
turned ON?
3
Unit
ON?
4
ON?
5
XERO
Disconnect the J416 from PWBA MCU.
continuity?
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
HARNESS-
ASSY XERO.
6
ASSY. (p.388) or (p.391)
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
FIP-70
Panel Message
Service Req E998
Troubleshooting

FFC-ASSY ESS PWBA MCU
BOARD ASSY., MAIN
Step Check Yes No
1
Check if the firmware version of the PWBA
MCU
Check the firmware version of the PWBA
MCU.
Is the version latest ?
Go to Step [2]. Update the
firmware.
2
Check if the firmware version of the printer
controller
Check the firmware version of the printer
controller
Is the version latest ?
Go to Step [3]. Update the
firmware.
3
Continuity check of FFC-ASSY ESS
1. Disconnect the P/J400 on the PWBA
MCU.
2. Disconnect the CN601 on the BOARD
ASSY., MAIN
3. Check each wiring for continuity.
Do all of the wiring have continuity ?
FFC-ASSY
ESS.
4
Replacement of the BOARD ASSY., MAIN
Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN.
Does the error occur ?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
End of
procedure
FIP-71 ELECTRICAL NOISE
Troubleshooting
Photoconductor Unit HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD
FUSER ASSY PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of external noise
Are there any other electrical apparatus (e. g.
generators, wireless transmitters, or equipment
that use motors) within 3 m of the printer?
Either turn the other electrical apparatus OFF,
or reposition the printer at least 6 m away from
other electrical apparatus.
Does the electrical noise problem still
continue?
2
Check of AC ground
Is the AC power outlet wired and grounded
correctly?
Go to Step [3]. Ask the customer
to repair the AC
power outlet.
3
Unit
Replace DRU ASSY.
Does the electrical noise problem still continue
after replacement?
4
Check of contact between Photoconductor
Unit and HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD
and CONDUCTOR attached to HOUSING
ASSY-GUIDE AD deformed or are there
foreign objects on the surface?
HOUSING
ASSY-GUIDE
AD.
5
Check of grounding of boards
Are all screws fastening PWBA MCU and LV/
HVPS to the frame tightened firmly?
Also, are all screws fastening the PWBA
TRAY 500 of Feeder to the frame tightened
firmly?
Go to Step [6]. Tighten the
screws.
6
Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY
Replace FUSER. (p.415)
after replacement?
7
after replacement?
Replace all
related parts.
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
3.4.4.3.2 Controller related error
FIP-C1
Panel Message
PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
CHECK
POINT
Since a controller-related service call error may occur due to the
print data structure sent by the host/application, make operation
check while simultaneously changing the operating environment,
print data, etc.
Service Req C0017 Service Req C0097
Service Req C0082 Service Req C0128-0254
Service Req C0096
Step Check Yes No
1
External noise
1. Check the surrounding of the printer for
electrical equipment.
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the
printer, except the AC cable, and make
operation check.
Does the error occur?
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.437)
End of procedure
FIP-C2
Panel Message
Troubleshooting
FIP-C3
Panel Message
Troubleshooting
Service Req C1120
PWBA ESS Standard ROM-DIMM
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Standard ROM-DIMM
1. Check whether the installed ROM-DIMM is
the specified one and is securely connected.
(Remove it once and reinstall it again.)
To Step [2] End of procedure
2
Replace the Standard ROM-DIMM
1. Replace the Standard ROM-DIMM.
3
External noise
operation check.
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.437)
End of procedure
PWBA ESS RAM-DIMM
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of RAM-DIMM
Check whether the installed RAM-DIMM is the
specified one and is securely connected.
(Remove it once and reinstall it again.)
2
Replace the RAM-DIMM
1. Replace the Standard RAM-DIMM.
3
External noise
operation check.
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.437)
End of procedure
FIP-C4
Panel Message
PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
FIP-C5
Panel Message
Service Req C2000
PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of EEPROM
Initialize the EEPROM. Refer to Initialization
of EEPROM (p.69)
2
External noise
operation check.
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.437)
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of host PC
Restart the host PC.
2
Check of Printer Driver
Reinstall the Printer Driver.
3
External noise
operation check.
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.437)
End of procedure
3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble
Perform troubleshooting for print quality troubles following the flow chart below.

Figure 3-4. Printing-quality troubleshooting Entry Chart
The printing-quality troubleshooting described here is based on a condition that the
printer controller has no problems.
However, making a test print with only the engine side, allows you to find out roughly
which side (controller side or engine side) is causing the trouble, except for cases that
cannot be checked by the test print.
Test print with the engine alone is normal Printer controller trouble
Test print on engine alone is abnormal Printer engine trouble
If the probable cause is printer controller trouble, replace with a normal printer
controller and interface cable, and check.
If the trouble recurs after replacing with the normal parts, check on the host side, and
use the printer quality FIPs to perform efficient troubleshooting.
Leg_Sec001_001FA
END
END
Trouble restored?
Perform the appropriate troubleshooting
START
Make a sample test print
Is there an applicable FIP?
No
Yes
No No
Yes Yes
Trouble restored?
Replace Photoconductor Unit and
FUSER ASSY in that order
3.4.5.1 Engine Test Print
To check the IOT operation, it is possible to print PWBA MCU built-in sample
continuously without being routed through the controller. If the problem does not occur
on the PWBA MCU built-in sample, the cause of the problem may be controller.
PRINTING METHOD
1. Remove the COVER ASSY LH. (p.321)
2. Set paper into MSI and turn the power on.
3. In Ready mode, short-circuit the pad for test print on the PWBA MCU with
a small screwdriver or a similar tool. The pad is located at upper right of
the interface connector .

Figure 3-5. The Pad for Test Print
CAUTION
The test print cannot be made if an engine-related error has
occurred.
WARNING
Never touch the energized or driving part when performing the
following procedure.
WARNING
When short-circuiting the pad, be careful not to contact the other
elements by hand or tool.
CAUTION
1 sheet of test print is printed out by 1 time of short-circuiting.
As for Ready mode, refer to 2.2.7 Operating Modes (p.122)
Leg_002_003RB
PWBA MCU
TEST PRINT PATTERN
Figure 3-6. Test Print Pattern
400 dot line
(400dpi)
1 dot line
127 dot
508 dot
(400dpi)
3.4.5.2 Print Quality-related FIP Table
To reliably judge and understand the details of trouble, and perform the correct remedy
efficiently when printing quality-related trouble occurs, make a test print, and use the
FIP tables corresponding to the phenomena.
When trouble cannot be restored by the printing quality-related FIP, check again using
the FIP, and then replace all parts indicated in the ESS and possible parts that caused
the error one by one to check the parts and perform troubleshooting.
The printing quality-related FIPs describe typical troubles as below.
Table 3-12. Print Quality-related FIP Table
Symptom See FIP
Printing is Faint (Weak Tones) FIP-P1
Blank Print FIP-P2
Solid Black Print FIP-P3
Vertical White Bands or Lines FIP-P4
Horizontal White Bands or Lines FIP-P5
Vertical Black Lines FIP-P6
Horizontal Black Lines FIP-P7
Image is Partially Not Printed FIP-P8
Toner Smudges FIP-P9
Residual Image FIP-P10
Dark or Dirty Background FIP-P11
Skew Print FIP-P12
Print Paper Damage FIP-P13
Image Not Fixed FIP-P14
Color Shift FIP-P15
Uneven Density/Thin-Spot FIP-P16
Entirely Faint FIP-P17
Entirely Fogged in Black FIP-P18
Entirely Thin FIP-P19
Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction FIP-P20
Vertical White Lines (Location of the lines are same between Y, M, C and K) FIP-P21
Vertical White Lines (Locations of the lines are different between Y, M, C and K) FIP-P22
Horizontal Lines FIP-P23
Stain FIP-P24
Colored Dots at 150mm Pitch FIP-P25
Vertical Two Lustered Streaks on the Center of OHP FIP-P26
5mm-width Horizontal Bands at 84.5mm Intaervals FIP-P27
3.4.5.3 Uniformly Spaced Print Troubles (bands, smudges, etc.)
When horizontal stripes and spots appear at fixed intervals, it is highly possible that a
specific roll has caused the trouble. If this happens, you might be able to easily solve
the problem by measuring the interval between the stripes or spots on a test print, and
checking the relationship between the pitches shown in the table below (note that the
pitch does not necessarily match the perimeter of the roller).
Part (Roller) Name Outside Diameter Pitch (mm)
FUSER FUSER ASSY EXIT ROLL 15.6 49.1
PINCH ROLL 8.0 25.1
H/R 26.2 84.5
BELT 30.1 94.5
XERO CRU Photoconductor Unit DRUM 47.0 147.7
BCR 12.0 37.7
1st BTR 10.0 31.4
BUR 15.7 49.3
IDLE ROLL 11.8 36.9
CNL BRUCH 19.0 24.1
TRANSFER 2ND BTR ASSY 2nd BTR 16.3 51.1
DEVE HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE
MAG ROLL 16.0 24.9
AUGGER SUPPLY 17.0 38.1
AUGGER ADMIX 17.0 38.1
PR MOTER MOT ASSY P/R - - 7.5
3.4.5.4 Printing quality-related FIP
FIP-P1 Printing is Faint (Weak Tones)
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter.
Problems
Overall density of image is too weak.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error
Photoconductor Unit
ROS ASSY
Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
Toner Cartridge K
2ND BTR ASSY
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD
MOT ASSY MAG
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Paper
Load new, dry recommended paper, and
execute a test print.
Is the image printed normally?
End of procedure Go to Step [2].
2
Check of laser beam path
Are there any obstructions between ROS ASSY
and Photoconductor Unit?
Remove
obstacles.
Go to Step [3].
3
Check of ROS window
Is ROS window dirty?
Clean the ROS
window with
CLEANER
ASSY.
Go to Step [4].
4
Check of toner cartridge attachment
Re-attach the toner cartridge, and make a test
print of the problem image.
5
Check of 2ND BTR ASSY
Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt,
damage or wear?
Go to Step [6]. Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY.
(p.374)
6
Unit and frame
Are the contacts of Photoconductor Unit and
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD dirty or
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [7].
7
Unit
Make a test print of the problem image.
8
Replace Toner Cartridge Y/M/C/K.
9
10
11
Check after replacement of the MOT ASSY
MAG
Replace MOT ASSY MAG. (p.423)
Step Check Yes No
12
Check of image primary transfer process
Is the toner image on the drum transferred
normally to IBT BELT?
Execute a test print, turn the power OFF when
you think that the primary transfer process is in
progress during printing, and check the toner
image on IBT BELT.
Go to Step [13]. Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
13
Check of image secondary transfer process
Is the toner image on IBT BELT transferred
normally to the paper?
you think that the image transfer process is in
progress during printing, and check the paper.
Replace ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error.
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Step Check Yes No
FIP-P2 Blank Print
Problems
Completely blank pages are printed.
Photoconductor Unit
ROS ASSY
Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
Toner Cartridge K
2ND BTR ASSY
MOTOR ASSY MAG
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
Step Check Yes No
1
Are there any obstructions between ROS ASSY
and Photoconductor Unit?
Remove
obstacles.
Go to Step [2].
2
Is ROS window completely covered by
obstacles, or is it dirty?
Remove
obstacles, and
clean ROS
window with
CLEANER
ASSY.
Go to Step [3].
3
Check connection of ROS ASSY connector
Is the connector firmly connected to ROS
ASSY?
Go to Step [4]. Connect the
connector.
4
Check of toner cartridge attachment
Re-attach the toner cartridge, and make a test
print of the problem image.
5
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY.
(p.374)
6
Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [7].
7
Unit
8
Replace Toner Cartridge Y/M/C/K.
End of procedure Go to step [9]
9
10
11
MAG
Replace MOT ASSY MAG. (p.423)
Step Check Yes No
12
image on IBT BELT.
HVPS. (p.435)
13
HVPS. (p.435)
14
Check after replacement of ESS
Replace ESS.
End of procedure Replace ESS
and possible parts
that caused the
error.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-P3 Solid Black Print
Problems
Completely black pages are printed.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check connection of ROS ASSY connector
ASSY?
connector.
2
Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [3].
3
Cover the entire window of ROS ASSY and
Is the print completely black?
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.435)
Go to Step [4].
4
Cover half of the window of ROS ASSY and
Is the print, half white and half black?
Go to Step [5]. Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.432)
5
End of procedure Replace ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error.
FIP-P4 Vertical White Bands or Lines
Problems
Vertical (along the paper feed direction) white
bands or lines appear almost all over the
printout. Some bands or lines are extremely
faint and some are completely white (blank)
missing the part of the image which should be
printed.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Paper
execute a test print of the problem image.
2
Check of the paper feed path
Are there any dirt or obstacles on the paper feed
path from feeding section to the ejecting
section?
Remove
obstacles.
Go to Step [3].
3
Are there any obstructions between ROS
ASSY and Photoconductor Unit?
Remove
obstacles.
Go to Step [4].
4
Check of ROS window
Is ROS window dirty?
Clean the ROS
window with
CLEANER
ASSY.
Go to Step [5].
5
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY
(p.374)
6
Unit
7
8
Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll
Turn the Gear by hand, and inspect Heat Roll
and Pressure Roll.
Are Heat Roll and Pressure Roll scratched or
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Replace ESS
and possible parts
that caused the
error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P5 Horizontal White Bands or Lines
Problems
Horizontal (vertical to the paper feed
direction) white bands or lines appear almost
all over the printout. Some bands or lines are
extremely faint and some are completely white
(blank) missing the part of the image which
should be printed.
ROS ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Paper
execute a test print of the problem image.
2
Check of Rollers on the paper feed path
Are Rollers on the paper feed path normal
without any dirt, damage or wear?
Go to Step [4]. After cleaning or
replacing the
relevant Rollers,
go to step [3].
3
Execution of a test print
4
Connection check of ROS ASSY connector
ASSY?
connector.
5
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY.
(p.374)
6
Unit
7
8
9
normally to IBT BELT? Also, are there any
horizontal white bands?
image on IBT BELT.
HVPS. (p.435)
Step Check Yes No
10
HVPS. (p.435)
11
and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Replace ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P6 Vertical Black Lines
Problems
Vertical (along the paper feed direction) black
lines appear on printout.
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Go to Step [3]. After cleaning or
replacing the
relevant Rollers,
go to step [2].
2
3
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY
(p.374)
4
Unit
5
End of
procedure
Go to Step [6].
6
7
and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Replace ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P7 Horizontal Black Lines
Problems
Horizontal (vertical to the paper feed
direction) black lines appear on printout.
ROS ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA MCU
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
ASSY?
connector.
2
Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to step [3]
3
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY
(p.374)
4
Unit
5
6
image on IBT BELT.
HVPS. (p.435)
7
HVPS. (p.435)
8
and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Replace ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P8 Image is Partially Not Printed
Problems
Some areas of the printed image are missing or
extremely faint.
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA MCU
ROS ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Paper
2
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY
(p.374)
3
Unit
4
image on IBT BELT.
HVPS. (p.435)
5
HVPS. (p.435)
6
and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Go to Step [7].
7
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P9 Toner Smudges
Problems
Toner smudges appear randomly over the
entire surface of the paper.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Go to Step [2]. After cleaning
and replacing the
relevant Rollers,
go to step [2].
2
ASSY?
connector.
3
Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or
replace relevant
parts.
Go to Step [4].
4
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY.
(p.374)
5
Unit
6
7
8
and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Replace ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P10 Residual Image
Problems
A ghost image appears on the printout. An
image of the previous page or part of the
currently printing page lap over like a ghost.
Photoconductor Unit
HOUSING ASSY- GUIDE AD
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
ROS ASSY
MOT ASSY MAG
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of repeated printing
Check the residual image
Is the customer printing lots of the same
images?
2
Check of the residual image.
Print out 30 pages of various images.
Did any residual images appear?
(Advise the
customer not to
print same image
in large quantities
at a time.)
3
Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.$
Go to Step [4].
4
Unit
5
damage or wear?
BTR ASSY.
(p.374)
6
and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Replace ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P11 Dark or Dirty Background
Problems
The entire page or part of the page is dirtied
with toner. It appears as extremely light gray
dirt.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
SENSOR ASSY ADC
LV/HVPS
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
ASSY?
connector.
2
Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [3].
3
Unit
End of
procedure
Go to Step [4].
4
of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean to remove
any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[5].
Go to Step [6].
5
6
ADC
7
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-P12 Skew Print
Problems
The printed image is not parallel to both sides
of the paper.
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of printer installation surface
Is the printer installed on level surface?
Also, are the printer's feet attached correctly?
Go to Step [2]. Correct the
inappropriate
installation.
2
Check of paper feed
Remove the Paper Cassette, and load paper
correctly.
Attach the Paper Cassette correctly into the
printer.
3
Operation check of PLATE ASSY
BOTTOM 500 in the Paper Cassette
Remove the Paper Cassette.
Does the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 in the
Paper Cassette rise up correctly without any
inclination on the left or right sides?
Go to Step [4]. Re-attach
PLATE ASSY
BOTTOM.
(p.444)
4
Check the Rollers on the paper feed path for
damage and wear, and check attachment.
Also, are those Rollers attached correctly?
Go to Step [5]. Clean and re-
attach, or replace
the Roller in
question, and go
to Step [5].
5
Check of Photoconductor Unit attachment
to step [6].
6
7
Unit
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-P13 Print Paper Damage
Problems
Is the printed out paper wrinkled, folded or
frayed?
FUSER ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Paper
2
Check of paper feed path
Are there any dirt or obstacles on the paper feed
path from the paper feed tray to the output
section?
Remove dirt and
obstacles.
Go to Step [3].
3
Check of all Rollers on the paper feed path
Are all Rollers on the paper feed path normal
Go to Step [4]. Clean the
relevant Rollers.
4
Attachment check of FUSER ASSY
Is FUSER ASSY attached correctly?
Go to Step [5]. Re-attach.
5
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P14 Image Not Fixed
Problems
The printed image is not sufficiently fixed to
the paper. The image is easily removed by
rubbing it with your fingers.
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of Paper
2
Check of print setup mode
Is the printer set to a Transfer Voltage suited to
the type of paper in use?
Go to Step [3]. Adjust the
Transfer Voltage.
3
and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.415)
Go to Step [4].
WARNING
4
5
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
WARNING
FIP-P15 Color Shift
Problems
The printed Yellow or Black image does not
accurately overlap the Cyan or Magenta
image, and is out of position.
SENSOR TR-0
Photoconductor Unit
MOT ASSY P/R
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of SENSOR TR-0 attachment
Is SENSOR TR-0 attached correctly?
to step [3].
2
Unit
3
Check after replacement of MOT ASSY P/R
Replace MOT ASSY P/R. (p.426)
4
Check after replacement of PWBA ESS
Replace PWBA ESS. (p.437)
possible parts that
caused the error.
FIP-P16 Uneven Density/Thin-Spot
Connecting location of the connectors
Problems
Uneven density/thin-spots appear on entire
surface. This occurs due to disconnection of
connector (D) from LV/HVPS.
WIRE ASSY BTR
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check the connectors for LV/HVPS.
Make sure that the connector (P/J504) on LV/
HVPS and the connector (P/J512) on 1st BTR
are connected properly.
Print the problem image. Or, execute the test
print.
Was the trouble fixed?
possible parts that
caused the error.
D
P/J 512
(1BTR)
FIP-P17 Entirely Faint
Problems
The color over the entire surface is faint. This
occurs due to disconnection of connector (C)
from LV/HVPS.
WIRE ASSY DEVE
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
HVPS and the connector (P/J510) on DEVE are
connected properly.
print.
possible parts that
caused the error.
C
P/J 510
(DEVE)
FIP-P18 Entirely Fogged in Black
Problems
All of the four colors are printed all over the
page resulting in completely black printout.
This occurs due to disconnection of connector
(A) from LV/HVPS.
WIRE ASSY BCR
LV/HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
HVPS and connector (P/J514) on BCR are
connected properly.
print.
possible parts that
caused the error.
A
P/J 514
(BCR)
FIP-P19 Entirely Thin
Problems
Strong faintness occurs on entire surface. This
occurs due to disconnection of connector
(F) from PWBA HVPS.
WIRE ASSY 2BTR
PWBA HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check connector of PWBA HVPS.
Check connection of connector (P/J505) of
PWBA. Also, make sure that 2ND BTR ASSY
that contacts with T2 shown in the figure left is
correctly attached.
print.
possible parts that
caused the error.
F
T2
(2BTR)
FIP-P20 Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction
Problems
Uneven density in the horizontal direction in
high-density color areas (color is faint in a
stripe pattern) is occurring. This occurs due to
disconnection of connector (G) from PWBA
HVPS.
WIRE ASSY IBT
PWBA HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1
Check the connectors for PWBA HVPS.
Make sure that the connector (P/J506) on
PWBA and the connector (P/J513) on IBT are
connected properly.
print.
possible parts that
caused the error.
G
P/J 513
(IBT)
FIP-P21 Vertical White Lines
(Location of the lines are same between Y, M, C and K)
Problems
Vertical white lines appear on each of C, M and Y printout printed in solid 30%
half tone, and the location of the lines are same between the three printouts.
It is caused by dirt on the ROS ASSY window, dust or foreign material inside the
ROS ASSY, or a scratch on the Photoconductor drum.
1. Photoconductor Unit
2. ROS ASSY
Step Check Yes No
1
Clean the ROS ASSY window.
Clean ti using ROS-CLEANER.
Print the problem image, or execute a test print.
2
Unit .
Replace the Photoconductor Unit.
3
Replace the ROS ASSY
possible parts that
caused the error.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-P22 Vertical White Lines
(Locations of the lines are different between Y, M, C and K)
Problems
Vertical white lines appear on each of C, M and Y printout printed in solid 30%
half tone, and the location of the lines are different between the three printouts.
1. HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (Y, M, C, K)
FIP-P23 Horizontal Lines
Problems
Horizontal lines appear on the same position every time a color print is made. On a
B/W print, the position is different from a color print. It is caused by dirt on the
Photoconductor Unit.
Step Check Yes No
1
Check of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
Replace the corresponding HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE.
End of procedure Replace "ESS and
possible parts that
caused the error".
Step Check Yes No
1
Unit .
possible parts that
caused the error".
FIP-P24 Stain
Problems
Stains appear on the same position every time a color print is made.
The position changes when a B/W print is made.
It is caused by dirt on the Photoconductor Unit.
FIP-P25 Colored Dots at 150mm Pitch
Problems
Colored dots appear spacing 150mm between them.
On a color printout, all the Y, M, C and K colored dots appear in a line and
position of them shift by page.
It is caused by a scratch on the Photoconductor Unit.
Step Check Yes No
1
Unit .
possible parts that
caused the error".
Step Check Yes No
1
Unit .
possible parts that
caused the error".
FIP-P26 Vertical Two Lustered Streaks on the Center of OHP
Problems
On a printed tranceparency two vertical white lines appear on a printed
tranceparency.
It is caused by Kick Roll failure in the FUSER ASSY.
1. FUSER ASSY
FIP-P27 5mm-width Horizontal Bands at 84.5mm Intaervals
Problems
When the product has not been used for a month or longer, 5mm-width lustered
vertical bands appear especially when printing a high resolution image on a
trasparency or coated paper.
NOTE: Do not replace the FUSER ASSY immediately.
The symptom may disappear as the printer is used for while.
1. FUSER ASSY
Step Check Yes No
1
Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY.
Replace the FUSER ASSY.
possible parts that
caused the error".
WARNING
Step Check Yes No
1
Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY.
Replace the FUSER ASSY.
possible parts that
caused the error".
WARNING
3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble
3.4.6.1 Abnormal noise-related troubleshooting entry chart
3.4.6.2 Abnormal Noise-ralated FIP
FIP-N1 At Power On
Troubleshooting
MOT ASSY ROT FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
MOT ASSY MICRO 2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit MOT ASSY P/R
FRAME ASSY-PH ROLL MSI
Step Check Yes No
1
Is abnormal noise being generated by MOT
ASSY ROT?
Replace MOT
ASSY ROT.
Go to Step [2].
2
Is abnormal noise being generated by
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY that is driven by
MOT ASSY ROT?
Clean or replace
FRAME ASSY-
ROTARY.
Go to Step [3].
3
ASSY MICRO?
Replace MOT
ASSY MICRO.
Go to Step [4].
4
Is abnormal noise being generated by 2ND
BTR ASSY that is driven by MOT ASSY
MICRO?
Clean or replace
2ND BTR
ASSY.
Go to Step [5].
5
ASSY P/R?
Replace MOT
ASSY P/R.
Go to Step [6].
6
Is abnormal noise being generated from
inside Photoconductor Unit?
Replace
Photoconductor
Unit.
Go to Step [7].
7
MOTOR-PH inside FRAME ASSY-PH?
Replace FRAME
ASSY-PH.
Go to Step [8].
8
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI in FRAME ASSY-
PH that is driven by MOTOR-PH?
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY-
PRE REGI.
Go to Step [9].
9
ROLL REGI RUBBER in FRAME ASSY-
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY-
REGI.
Go to Step [10].
10
ROLL MSI that is driven by MOTOR-PH?
Clean or replace
ROLL MSI.
Step Check Yes No
FIP-N2 At Standby
Troubleshooting
MOT ASY FSR FUSER ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
Step Check Yes No
1
MOT ASSY FSR?
(It rotates when the temperature of FUSER
ASSY reaches the specified value)
Replace MOT
ASSY FSR.
Go to Step [2].
2
FUSER ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is
driven by MOT ASSY FSR?
Clean or replace
FUSER ROLL.
Go to Step [3].
3
Is abnormal noise being generated from 2ND
FSR?
Clean or replace
2ND BTR
ASSY.
FIP-N3 At Printing (One Side)
Troubleshooting
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION FRAME ASSY-PH
ROLL MSI MOT ASY FSR
FUSER ASSY 2ND BTR ASSY
MOT ASSY P/R Photoconductor Unit
MOT ASSY MAG HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C MOT ASSY ROT
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY MOT ASSY MICRO
FRAME ASSY-2ND ROS ASSY
Step Check Yes No
1
DRIVE ASSY FEED in 500 FEEDER ASSY
OPTION?
Replace 500
FEEDER ASSY
OPTION.
Go to Step [2].
2
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 that is driven by
OPTION?
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY
TURN 500.
Go to Step [3].
3
ROLL ASSY FEED 500 that is driven by
OPTION?
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY
FEED 500.
Go to Step [4].
4
MOTOR-PH inside FRAME ASSY-PH?
Replace FRAME
ASSY-PH.
Go to Step [5].
5
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI in FRAME ASSY-
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY-
PRE REGI.
Go to Step [6].
6
ROLL REGI RUBBER in FRAME ASSY-
Clean or replace
ROLL REGI
RUBBER.
Go to Step [7].
7
ROLL MSI that is driven by MOTOR-PH?
Clean or replace
ROLL MSI.
Go to Step [8].
8
GEAR ASSY DRIVE that is driven by
MOTOR-PH?
Replace FRAME
ASSY-PH.
Go to Step [9].
9
MOT ASSY FSR?
Replace MOT
ASSY FSR.
Go to Step [10].
10
FUSER ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is
driven by MOT ASSY FSR?
Replace FUSER
ASSY.
Go to Step [11].
11
Is abnormal noise being generated from 2ND
FSR?
Clean or replace
2ND BTR
ASSY.
Go to Step [12].
12
Is abnormal noise being generated by EXIT
ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is driven by
MOT ASSY FSR?
Clean or replace
FUSER ASSY.
Go to Step [13].
13
ASSY P/R?
Replace MOT
ASSY P/R.
Go to Step [14].
14
inside Photoconductor Unit?
Replace
Photoconductor
Unit.
Go to Step [15].
15
ASSY MAG?
Replace MOT
ASSY MAG.
Go to Step [16].
16
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K, HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE Y, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
M, or HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C that are
driven by MOT ASSY MAG?
Replace
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE K,
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE Y,
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE M,
or HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE C.
Go to Step [17].
17
ASSY ROT?
Replace MOT
ASSY ROT.
Go to Step [18].
18
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY that is driven by
MOT ASSY ROT?
Replace FRAME
ASSY-
ROTARY.
Go to Step [19].
Step Check Yes No
19
ASSY MICRO?
Replace MOT
ASSY MICRO.
Go to Step [20].
20
FRAME ASSY-2ND that is driven by MOT
ASSY MICRO?
Replace FRAME
ASSY-2ND.
Go to Step [21].
21
Is abnormal noise being generated by ROS
ASSY?
Replace ROS
ASSY.
Step Check Yes No
TROUBLESHOOTI NG Scanner/ADF Section 285
3.5 Scanner/ADF Section
This section explains about troubleshooting concerning scanner/ADF sections by
dividing them into two categories; error messages and surface phenomena.
3.5.1 FIP by Message Display
FIP-1
Panel Message
Release Cariage Lock
1. Carriage Lock Lever for transportation
Troubleshooting
FIP-2
Panel Message
Cover Open Error
1. ADF cover
2. Cover open sensor
Troubleshooting
Table 3-13. List of Scanner/ADF Section Errors
Panel Message Description FIP
Release Cariage Lock The carriage does not move to the predefined
position when turning on the scanner or performing
initialization to start scanning.
1 (p.285)
Cover Open Error 2 (p.285)
ADF Jam Paper loaded in the ADF could not be fed properly. 3 (p.286)
Service Req C2011 The ADF is not installed (Fax model only). 4 (p.286)
Step Point to be checked Yes No
1
Is the Carriage Unit in the scanner
still locked by the Carriage Lock
Lever?
Move the lever to
unlock position and
follow the description
displayed on the panel.
Go to Step [2].
2
Is the Carriage Lock Lever in the
lock position despite the carriage
is not in the position to be locked?
Move the lever to
unlock position and
1
Is the ADF cover of the ADF
section open?
Close the cover and
Go to Step [2].
2
If the error still occurs even after
closing the cover, start the MFP
maintenance mode and perform
Self Diagnos - Scanner. Does
opening/closing the cover change
the status (OPEN/CLOSE)
indicated beside the Cover:?
3
Is the ADF cover protrusion
(designed to activate the Cover
Open sensor) damaged?
Replace the ADF cover
(p.492)
Replace the Cover Open
sensor incorporated in
the ADF unit.
FIP-3
Panel Message
ADF Jam
1. Edge guide
2. Pick-up roller
Troubleshooting
FIP-4
Panel Message
Service Req C2011
1. The cable that connects ADF unit to the scanner main unit.
2. FFC cable
Troubleshooting
1
Is the document skewed because the
edge guide is not set along the paper
correctly?
Place the edge guide in
the right position.
Go to Step [2].
2
Is the document nonstandard? If possible, place the
document not in the
ADF but on the
document glass directly
and start scanning.
Go to Step [3].
3
Are there any paper dust, labels, or
foreign materials in the paper path?
Remove the foreign
materials.
Go to Step [4].
4
Is there any accumulation of paper
dust on the Pick-up roller surface of
the ADF?
Clean the roller surface
(wipe the roller surface
with soft cloth wrung
out of water).
Go to Step [5].
5
Does the paper slip when being
transferred because the Pick-up
roller of the ADF is worn out?
Replace the Pick-up
roller (p.504)
1
Is the cable that connects ADF unit
to the scanner main unit
disconnected?
Connect the cable
correctly.
Go to Step [2].
2
Is the FFC cable disconnected from
CN704 connector on the main
board?
Connect the cable
correctly.
3.5.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms
This section explains about troubleshooting for typical troubles relating to the scanner/
ADF sections.
SCANNER/ADF SECTION DOES NOT OPERATE
1. HP detection plate
2. Carriage motor
Troubleshooting
Start the MFP Maintenance mode, and perform Self diagnosis -
Scanner to see if there are any problems with the listed items below.
Note *: If CN701 connection failure occurs, NG is displayed for Motor:. (Due to the
connection failure, the carriage motor does not operate, and the carriage cannot
move and failed to detect its home position during HP seek operation. As a result, the
malfunction is judged as motor failure.)
Table 3-14. Troubleshooting for Scanner/ADF by Symptom
Trouble Description Remedy
Operation failure Scanner/ADF section does not
operate
(p.287)
Image is not scanned
correctly
Vertical bands appear when
scanning the document on the
document glass.
(vertical=carriage scanning
direction)
Clean the reflecting light receiving
window on the carriage removing
dust or any foreign material on it. If
the foreign materials are inside the
carriage and cannot be removed,
replace the carriage itself.
Vertical bands (paper feeding
direction) appear when scanning
the document using the ADF.
Clean the ADF scanning window
located beside the document table
and remove dust or any foreign
material on it. If the foreign
materials are inside the carriage and
cannot be removed, replace the
carriage itself.
Black dots and white dots appear
when scanning the document on the
document glass.
Clean the document glass surface
(both front and back side) and
remove the foreign materials.
Image is not copied
correctly
Image failure as shown below
occurs
Too light or dark
(too much density)
Odd colors
Dark/Too bright
Letters and figures cannot be
copied clearly
Check the panel settings below and
change them according to the paper
characteristics.
Document type
Density
Contrast
R/G/B
Refer to 1.2.2.5 Consumables/
Periodic Replacement Unit (p37)
Step Point to be checked Remedy
1
Warm up operation
failure
Is NG displayed
beside Warm up:?
The possible cause of this error may be fluorescent lamp trouble
and the steps below should be followed.
1. Confirm if CN702 connector on the main board is connected
properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
2. Confirm if the FFC cable is connected to the CCD sensor
board on the carriage unit properly (reconnect the cable as
necessary).
2
Origin correction
failure
Is NG displayed
beside Correct:?
The possible cause of this error may be home position detection
trouble and the steps below should be followed.
1. Confirm if there are any problems with the HP detection board
that is mounted on the HP side of the scanner unit lower case
(displacement, damage), and replace the HP detection board if a
defect is found .
2. Confirm if the cable is connected to the HP sensor board on the
carriage unit properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
properly (reconnect the cable as necessary)*.
3
Scanner carriage
motor driving failure
Is NG displayed
beside Motor:?
The possible cause of this error may be carriage motor operation
trouble and the steps below should be followed.
1. Confirm if the timing belt is strained correctly as well as the
carriage moves smoothly (Fix them as necessary)
properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
3. Confirm if there are any problems with the carriage motor
(replace the motor if a defect is found) Motor coil resistance
value: 10.9 7% (10.1-11.7 ).
TROUBLESHOOTI NG Fax Function 288
3.6 Fax Function
3.6.1 Troubleshooting by Panel Message
Table 3-15. Fax Error Messages and the Remedies
Error Message Description Remedy
Fax Error Fax unit failure
An error occurs while performing R/W check of SDRAM at power-on
Failed to write into Flash Memory for fax unit.
An error occurs while performing SUM check of Flash Memory at
power-on
Detects an error in MODEM of fax unit
Reboot the product to check if the error recurs. If the error recurs, the fax unit is faulty and servicing
is required.
Fax Communication
Error
This message is displayed when the product failed to send/receive a fax
normally for some reason.
Check the followings for any problem and perform corrective actions if required.
Connection status of the telephone line
Current Fax Settings in Setup Mode
If the error still occurs frequently even after checking and performing corrective actions for the above
items, reboot the product in "Maintenance mode" with reference to 3.6.4.2 Log Information
(p295), and print "Activity Report" or "Fax Setting List". Check the error code printed on the report
or list. See Section 7.7.2 Error List (p659) for the information on the error, and perform
corresponding corrective actions.
Set Document to ADF This error occurs if paper size is set to "Legal" when sending a fax with
the ADF is in the conditions listed below. Because feeding/scanning the
"Legal" size is available only with the ADF due to the specification.
No document is loaded on the ADF
The ADF is open
The ADF Cover is open
Check the condition of the ADF Unit, or load the document on the ADF and resume the sending
operation.If the error occurs even when the ADF unit condition and paper setting are correct, it may
be caused by sensor failure. Check the following sensors and replace them if necessary.
ADF COVER Sensor
ADF Sensor
DOC Sensor
Report Print Error When one of the following items in "Printing Report" menu, which is
activated by pressing [Advanced] button in fax mode, is executed, the
message is displayed if no corresponding information exist.
Speed Dial List
Memory Job Info
---
Cannot Send when
Receiving
This message is displayed when attempting to send a fax during receiving
a fax is in progress.
Send the fax after the receiving job is finished.
Cannot Fax cause of
Power Off Report
This message is displayed if an unprinted power-off report exists when
attempting to send a fax.
Wait for the power-off report to be printed out and then resume the sending operaion.
If the power is turned off with unprinted data stored in the memory, a power-off report is
printed out automatically the next time the power is turned on.
CHECK
POINT
3.6.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms
This section describes troubleshooting for fax function troubles by symptom.
Dialing is not performed
The product does not start to dial by pressing [Color Start] or [B/W Start] after
specifying the recipient.
Cannot receive a fax
The product does not receive faxes at all.
Communication errors occur
Communication errors occur frequently regardless of recipient or destination
Communication errors occur with a specific recipient or destination.
Check Point Corrective Action
1
Check the setting of phone line type
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] - [Basic
Settings] - [Line type] in Setup mode.
Correct the setting.
PBX (Private Branch Exchange):
Accesses to public line via private
branch exchange
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone
Network): Accesses to public line
directly
2
Check the setting of dial type
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] - [Basic
Settings] - [Dial type] in Setup mode.
Correct the dial type setting.
Tone: Push-button (digital phone
signal)
10 pps or 20 pps: Dial pulse (analog
phone signal)
1
Check the setting of reception mode.
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] -
[Reception Settings] - [Reception mode] in
Setup mode if it is set to phone only.
Change the setting to auto switch or fax
only.
2
Check the ring frequency setting.
When using PBX, check if the minimum/
maximum setting values for ring frequency
is appropriate.
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN (300-015)
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX (300-016)
Reboot the product in MFP Maintenance
mode, and change the settings using the
[Fax Maintenance] - [Parameter Check]-
[Parameter write] function.
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN:
14 mx (default) => XX
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX:
100 ms (default) => XX
1
Check the GND connection status.
Check if the product is properly grounded
(GND connection).
Correct the GND connection properly.
2
Check the signal output level.
Check if changing the following system
parameter setting works.
COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL (300-006)
Reboot the product in MFP Maintenance
mode, and change the settings using the
[Fax Maintenance] - [Parameter Check]-
[Parameter write] function.
-10dBm (default) => XX
Changing the following parameter settings
also may work.
COM_TX_CABLE_EQU (310-056)
COM_RX_CABLE_EQU (310-057)
1
Collect information on the
communication errors.
1. Print an Activity Report using [Printing
Report] menu (In fax mode, press
[Advanced] button to access the menu).
2. Get the backup data (retrieve it using
Fax Maintenance Tool).
Report the collected information to the
predetermined contact point to be analyzed.
See 3.6.4.1 MFP Maintenance Tool
(p293)
Fax function operation is unstable.
1
Unstable operation of fax function may be
caused by improper system parameter
settings (they might have been overwritten
incorrectly).
Initialize the system parameter settings. Be
sure to follow the procedure given below
not to erase the user-defined information.
1. Backup the information set by the user
using the Fax Maintenance Tool.
2. Initialize the system parameter settings
using the menu in the MFP Maintenance
mode.
3. Download the backup copy of the user
information.
3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies
Table 3-16. List of Troubles and Remedies
Trouble Symptom Possible Cause Check Point Remedy
Dialing troubles using
PBX system
The product does not start dialing. The dial tone setting is not appropriate. Check the PBX setup and system
parameter setting of the product.
(To see the system parameter setting,
execute Read backup data using the
Fax Maintenance Tool.)
Change the corresponding system
parameter settings according to the
PBX setup.
The product fails to dial despite the fact
there is no trouble on the receiving end.
The parameter settings for pulse dialing (Make
time/Break time) to be recognized by a PBX are
not appropriate.
The parameter settings for tone dialing (Tone time)
to be recognized by a PBX are not appropriate.
The product does not receive a fax. The parameter settings relating to Ring (frequency,
cadence, etc.) are not appropriate.
The product cannot achieve high-speed
communication.
It is attributed to the PBX characteristic.
Communication errors and incorrect
printing of faxes occur frequently.
Occurrence of a specific tone at regular intervals
by the PBX causes the symptom.
Communication errors
with overseas recipient
Communication errors and incorrect
printing of faxes occur frequently.
It is attributed to the line quality.
(echo, noise)
Call the recipient to check the line
quality.
(Use another communication
method)
The fax-signal level is too low. Get the communication protocols log
and analyze it.
parameter settings.
Transmitting troubles
from other fax
machines to the product
Cannot establish the communication with
the product.
The protocols do not meet the ITU-T standard. Get the communication protocols log
and analyze it.
parameter settings.
Occurrence of a particular tone
Multiple pages cannot be transmitted at a
time (one page only)
The protocols do not meet the ITU-T standard.
A complex fax, such as one with many
graphics, cannot be transmitted.
The protocols do not meet the ITU-T standard.
Troubles depend on
environment
configurations
Cannot establish the communication. The recipient is using a signal analyzer, coder, or
any other special devices to receive a fax.
Get the communication protocols log
and analyze it.
parameter settings.
Abnormal operation occurs when receiving
faxes and dialing.
A phone/fax auto switch device is used.
Troubles depend on the
installation status
Abnormal operation occurs when receiving
faxes and dialing.
Too many devices are parallel-connected. Check the connection status. Correct the improper connection
method.
Accessing to phone line cannot be made. The interior wiring is not correct (improper
connection).
The product gets disconnected upon starting
to receive a fax.
The LINE/TEL is connected reversely.
Troubles depend on the
printer/scanner section
When receiving a fax from a certain fax
machine, one page of the fax is always
divided into two or more pages.
The sending fax machine has trouble to feed the
documents.
(miss-feed, skew-feed)
Confirm the condition of the sending
fax machine.
Ask the sender to fix the trouble.
The document scanning range of the sending fax
machine is too wide.
Number of lines/page setting of the sending fax
machine exceeds a standard level due to additional
header.
Regular-sized one page transmitted from
the product is divided into two or more
pages on the receiving fax machine.
The product has trouble to feed the documents.
(miss-feed, skew-feed)
Check the scanner and ADF if they
operate normally.
If any problems are found, fix them.
Table 3-16. List of Troubles and Remedies
Trouble Symptom Possible Cause Check Point Remedy
3.6.4 Collecting Error Information
The AcuLaser CX11F has functions to monitor fax jobs and store detailed job and error
histories that are important to analyze fax-relating troubles. The stored information can
be printed out in a variety of forms using the menu function and can be retrieved using
a special tool. According to the facing trouble, select the functions to be used to get
enough information to analyze the trouble.
3.6.4.1 MFP Maintenance Tool
The MFP Maintenance Tool allows fax-relating user-established data stored on the
product to be retrieved and stored into a computer and rewritten into the product. The
intended purpose of the tool is to backup the user data in case of product failure which
requires a replacement unit.
TOOL FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW
[User data] Menu
Downloads the user data into a computer.
Retrieves the user-established setups and data stored on the product and writes
them into a computer.
Uploads the user data into the product (fax unit).
Rewrites the user data into the product.
[Trouble Info Collection] Menu
Retrieves a backup data.
This function is intended to collect error information on the product. The error
information can be retrieved and stored into a computer as a file.
When fax troubles especially due to environment configuration occur, get the error
information using [Trouble Info Collection] function to provide it to the analyzing
department. For details on the tool, refer to 5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data
(p541). The table below shows the information that can be obtained using the function.
Table 3-17. List of Information Obtained by the Tool
Info Name Description
System error history Date and time of error occurrence and the error codes (Hex).
Internal error history Date and time of error occurrence and the error codes (Hex).
System parameter settings Prints out a list of current system parameter settings.
Communication jobs Fax jobs stored in the backup data (up to 54 jobs) are sorted by
the parameter and printed out as a list.
Counter Prints out a list of counter label names and counter settings
SW version The current S/W version installed on the fax unit is displayed.
TROUBLE INFO COLLECTION (OBTAINING BACKUP DATA)
PROCEDURE
1. Click on the Trouble Info Collection tab and click the [Start] button.
2. Specify the destination to save and enter a name for the file.
3. When retrieving the backup data is finished, a message notifying the completion of
the task is displayed.
A backup data file is stored on the specified destination when the process is completed
normally.
Figure 3-7. Trouble Info Collection Screen
Figure 3-8. Backup Data
Specify the
destination to save
and file name
:
:
:
Repeats number of
times same as the
number of fax jobs
3.6.4.2 Log Information
Detailed information about troubles on transmitting/receiving faxes also can be
obtained by the following method.
FAX SETTING LIST
In fax mode, press the [Advanced] button to enter the Printing Report menu. Select
the Fax Setting List in the menu and execute it. Current fax settings for the items
indicated in Table 3-18 are listed and printed out.
The product (fax unit) can be started up in Maintenance Mode by changing a certain
parameter setting. If the above operation is performed in Maintenance Mode, the
following items are added to the Fax Setting List. See 3.6.4.3 System Parameter
Settings (p298) on how to change the parameter setting.
Job Counter Information
Total counts of transmitted pages
Total counts of received pages
Total counts of transmitted pages in G3 mode (successful jobs)
Total counts of transmitted pages in G3 mode (Unsuccessful jobs)
Total counts of received pages in G3 mode (successful jobs)
Total counts of received pages in G3 mode (Unsuccessful jobs)
System Error History
Number of error occurrences
Date and time of error occurrence
Error code
Table 3-18. Contents of the Fax Setting List (in fax mode)
NO. Item
1 Line Type
2 Dial Mode
3 Personal Number
4 Personal Name
5 Speaker Volume
6 Country
7 Auto Redialing Times
8 Sender Record
9 Answering Mode
10 Ring Response Time
11 Activity Report
12 Transmission Report
13 Multi. Trans. Report
14 Software Version
Fax
Modem
The product can be started up in [Maintenance Mode] by changing the parameter
setting as follows.
The system parameter: SYS_MACHINE_MODE
Maintenance code (Main-Sub): 300-028
Setting value: 0 = Normal mode (default)
1 = Maintenance mode
Figure 3-9. Sample of Fax Setting List
Note : The Job Counter and the Error History are added in the Maintenance Mode.
Fax Setting List
Fax/Report Settings
Line Type PSTN
Dial Mode
10PPS
Personal Number 0XXXXXXXXX
Personal Name EPSON
Speaker Volume 1
Country Japan
Auto Redialing Times 5times
Sender Record ON
Answering Mode Fax Only
Ring Response Time 10sec.
DRPD Normal
Activity Report Never Output
Transmission Report OFF
Multi Trans. Report only when an error occurs
Software Version
FAX Ver. 0003 (BOOT1)
Ver. 0004 (BOOT2)
Ver. 0003 (User)
Modem 5K6E6E01
Corresp. Counter
Total Pages Sent 12443
Total Pages Received 3456
G3 Pages Sent (OK) 780
G3 Pages Rcvd (OK) 23
G3 Pages Sent (Prblm) 3
G3 Pages Rcvd (Prblm) 0
Error History
No Time Occurred Error Code
1 03/05/04 10:33 006-350
2 03/05/05 21:09 006-350
3 03/05/05 23:45 006-350
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
PROTOCOL MONITOR LIST
Changing a certain system parameter setting is required to print the Protocol Monitor
List.
When a fax transmitting/receiving job is performed with the list printing enabled,
control protocols (ITU-T.30 protocols) used for the jobs are monitored and printed out
for every job.Verifying the protocols (signals, commands) printed on the list enables to
analyze an error occurrence timing and status.
The contents of the list are as follows.
Common header
Fax job result information
Software version
Trace data
Lap time
Transmitted signal names
Direction (transmitting or receiving)
Received signal names
FCF (Facsimile Control Field)
FIF (Facsimile Information Field)
The [Protocol Monitor List] can be printed out by changing the parameter setting as
follows.
The system parameter: REP_PROTOCOL_OUT
Maintenance code (Main-Sub): 330-001
Setting value: 0 = Not print (default)
1 = Only when an error occurs
2 = Print always
Figure 3-10. Sample of Protocol Monitor List
Protocol Monitor
Date/Time : 03/05/06 11:33
Personal Number : 0XXXXXXXXX
Personal Name : EPSON
Transmission Information
Start Time Destination Station TtlTime Pages Mode Result Comm. Contents
05/03 11:36 0XXXXXXXXX 145 1/1 SG3 0000
Software Version
FAX Ver.0003 (BOOT1)
Ver.0003 (BOOT2)
Ver.0003 (User)
Modem 5K6E6E01
Trace Data
LAPTIME LOCAL REMOTE FCF FIF
002 ANSam
010 CSI 40 30323632383531323136
01:6 DIS 80 xxxxxxxx
048 TSI 43 xxxxxxxx
051 DCS 83 xxxxxxxx
064 TCF
074 CFR 84 xxxxxxxx
084 PIN
100 PPS. NULL BF00
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
144592 DCN
3.6.4.3 System Parameter Settings
When changing system parameter settings is required to print Fax Setting List or
Protocol Monitor List as described on the previous section, and when changing the
settings is required for troubleshooting as indicated in 3.6.2 Troubleshooting by
Symptoms (p289) and 3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies (p291) , follow the
procedure given below.
STEP
1. Start up the product in MFP Maintenance Mode.
See 3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode (p133)
2. Select Fax Maintenance.
See 3.3.2 Fax Maintenance (p137)
3. Select Parameter Check and execute Write data.
See 3.3.2.3 Parameter Check (p140)
4. See 7.7.1 List of System Parameter (p635) to find a target system parameter
name (label).
5. Enter the Maintenance Code; Main code and Sub code of the target parameter in
the entry screen as shown in Step 3..
6. Confirm the setting values for the target system parameter, and enter a proper
value beside the VALUE (HEX):.
7. After confirming OK is displayed beside the Result:, turn the product off.
8. Reboot the product and perform required operaions.
SETTING EXAMPLE
When changing Tone level to fix frequent communication errors (Communication
errors occur (p.289)).
Corresponding parameter name: COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL
Maintenance Code: MAIN = 300
SUB = 006
Setting value: 5 through 15
(Default = 10)
CAUTION
Some of the system parameter settings are restricted according
to the regulations or standards of the country or region. To
prevent those settings from being changed by mistake,
changing system parameter settings that are not described in
this manual is prohibited.
Be sure to observe the specified setting range for the system
parameter. Setting a value out of the range is not guaranteed.
If a malfunction of the fax operation occurs due to the
improper setting, the system parameter should be initialized.
See 3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
MAIN
SUB
CHAP T E R
4
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
DI SASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 300
4.1 Overview
This section describes procedures for disassembling the main components of the
product. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure.
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are described
under the heading WARNING.
CAUTION signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to
equipment.
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading CHECK POINT.
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, the
correct procedure is described under the heading REASSEMBLY.
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described under
the heading ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED.
When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer
to the exploded diagrams in the appendix.
4.1.1 Precautions
The precautions below (WARNING and CAUTION), must always be followed during
disassembly and assembly.
WARNING
Disconnect the power cable before disassembling or assembling
the printer. If you need to work on the printer with power
applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual.
Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid
injury from sharp metal edges.
To protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static
discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when
accessing internal components.
Never replace the fuse on the Power Supply Board in any
circumstances.
Be aware that letting the laser beam get into your eye directly
could result in loss of vision.
Never open any cover on which a Warning Label for Laser
Beam is attached.
Use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone
around you with a clear understanding of hazardous nature of
the laser beam.
The Fuser unit and other high-temperature parts remain at
hazardous temperature for a certain period of time even after
stop of operation and turning off of the power. To prevent
suffering a burn, be sure to wait after power turning off until
the temperature of the parts cool down to a safe level, and then
start working on the printer.
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring any
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
When developer or oil stuck to your skin or clothes, wipe it off
with a dry cloth carefully and wash it off with water
immediately.
WARNING
Be careful not to let the developer or toner get into your eye or
mouth, and not to inhale it. And also care should be taken for
people around you to prevent them from the same thing.
(Spread a sheet of paper inside and around the printer to
prevent soiling.)
Since there are many different screws, use them in correct
positions. Be extremely careful of the difference between the
screws for resin and those for sheet metal. If the screw for resin
is mistaken for the screw for sheet metal, its threads will be
broken, leading to a crushed screw hole or trouble.
Do not pick up the spilt toner with a vacuum cleaner (for home
use). To do so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire
by sparks of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the
floor, etc., clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth
moistened with neural detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot
of spilt toner with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed
for toner.
Leg_Sec001_014EA
WARNING
Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or
adjusting the printer.
Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the
printer. (Refer to Chapter5 for details.)
4.1.2 Before you start work
This chapter describes the procedures for removing and attaching the main parts of the
printer with the printer broken down into 12 main components according to the parts
list.
Turn the printer OFF, and disconnect the power cord before starting work.
Before disassembling the printer, remove Photoconductor Unit.
Before performing work around FUSER ASSY, allow the FUSER ASSY and its
surrounding area to sufficiently cool down.
Take sufficient care during work as exerting unnecessary force may damage parts
or cause them to malfunction.
Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet when servicing.
Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from the human body, whenever
possible. When must work without an antistatic wrist band or any other goods for
static protection, touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth before
getting started.
After work is finished, use CLEANER ASSY to clean the window of ROS ASSY.
Category
Disassembly/Reassembly
Reference Page (Section No.)
COVER p.308 (4.2.2)
MSI p.329 (4.2.3)
PH ASSY p.349 (4.2.4)
TRANSFER p.366 (4.2.5)
XERO p.387 (4.2.6)
ROS p.401 (4.2.7)
DEVE p.404 (4.2.8)
FUSER p.415 (4.2.9)
DRIVE p.420 (4.2.10)
ELECTRICAL p.428 (4.2.11)
500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER p.442 (4.2.12)
SCANNER p.481 (4.3)
CAUTION
When performing work on parts controlled as spare parts
which the disassembling procedures are not given in this
manual, fully observe how they are attached before starting
work.
In principle, options must already have been removed before
starting work. However, if there is no need to remove them, it is
allowed to service with them attached.
4.1.3 List of Screws
Many types of screws are used on this printer. Do not mistakenly attach them at the wrong positions. Pay special attention when handling screws for plastic and screws for metal
plates. If you mix up these screws, screw holes will be damaged. Screw threads also will be damaged, which may cause further trouble.
Printer Section
CAUTION
Positions inscribed with the letter T on the frame indicate screws
for plastic.
Table 4-1. List of screws (Printer)
No. Type Application Shape How to Recognize Screw Type Cautions
1 For plastic
Screw
Silver tapping
Plastic Silver colored
Screw threads are rougher than metal plate
TYPE
Screw tip is fine.
This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the screw hole, so
take care not to screw it diagonally.
2 For plastic
Screw
Silver tapping with flange
With flange
TYPE
Screw tip is fine.
take care not to screw it diagonally
3 For plastic
Screw
Silver tapping with washer
With washer
TYPE
Screw tip is fine.
4 For metal plate Screw
Metal
plate
Silver colored
With flange
Screw tip is slightly fine.
Part,
etc.
Plastic
Rough
Part,
etc.
Plastic
Rough
Part,
etc.
Plastic
Rough
Part,
etc.
Metal
plate
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
Scanner Section
4.1.4 Tools
Use only specified tools to avoid damaging the printer.
Metal
plate
Silver colored
With flange
Uniform screw diameter
Silver
Metal
plate
Silver colored
Silver with external toothed washer
Metal
plate
Silver colored
With external toothed washer
Table 4-2. List of screws (Scanner, ADF)
No. Type No. Type No. Type
1 M3x6mm, S-type, A-head 6 M3x8mm, S-type, B-head 11 M2x10mm, G-type, P-head
2 M3x8mm, P-type, A-head 7 M3x6mm, G-type, C-head,
W/spring washer, W/5 flat washer
12 M3x12mm, P-type, P-head
3 M3x8mm, S-type, A-head 8 M3x10mm, B-type, F-head 13 M1.7x6mm, B-Type, F-head
4 M3x8mm, P-type, B-head 9 M2x8mm, B-type, P-head
5 M3x10mm, P-type, B-head 10 M3x6mm, B-type, P-head
Name Commercial Availability Code Name Commercial Availability Code
Phillips screwdriver No.1 Available B743800100 Cutting pliers Available B740400100
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Available B743800500 Tweezers Available ---
Slotted screwdriver Available B743000100 E-Ring holder Available ---
Table 4-1. List of screws (Printer)
No. Type Application Shape How to Recognize Screw Type Cautions
Part,
etc.
Metal
plate
Part,
etc.
Metal
plate
Part,
etc.
Metal
plate
4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures
Expressions relating to directions in procedures are defined as follows:
FRONT : Front direction facing the front side of the printer
REAR : Rear direction facing the front side of the printer
LEFT : Left direction facing the front side of the printer
RIGHT : Right direction facing the front side of the printer
Figure 4-1. Definition of Printer Orientation
Sections in procedures described as In the case of the specification refer to
work to be performed on printers of a specific specification. (Work is not to be
performed on printers that do not fall under this specification.)
Screws in illustrations are to be loosened and removed using a Phillips screwdriver
unless otherwise specified.
Black arrows in illustrations indicate that the part should be moved in the indicated
direction.
When black arrows are given a consecutive number, this indicates that they should
be moved in the indicated order.
For details on positions of connectors (P/J), refer to APPENDIX (p564)
REAR
FRONT
LEFT
RIGHT
Leg_Sec03_001RA
DI SASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Printer 306
4.2 Printer
4.2.1 SCANNER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the accordion shaped rubber covers (HINGE COVER L, HINGE COVER
R) from the left and right hinge sections.
2. Remove the COVER ASSY LH. (p321)
3. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the COVER LEG
LH OUTER to the main unit, and remove the COVER LEG LH OUTER from the
main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
4. Disconnect the five connectors (CN701 to CN705) on the PWBA ESS.
5. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secures the WIRE GROUND of
the SCANNER.
6. Release the harnesses of the SCANNER from the clamp.
7. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the SPRING SC
FFC to the main unit, and remove the SPRING SC FFC from the main unit.
8. Remove the five screws (silver-with flange-8mm x 4, silver-no flange-8mm x 1)
that secure the SCANNER to the main unit.
9. Lift the SCANNER straight above the main unit to remove the SCANNER from
the main unit.
.
Figure 4-2. Removal of SCANNER
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the cable by getting it stuck or hitting it in/
against the components inside the printer when pulling out the cable
from the printer main unit to remove the scanner.
Leg_03_600RD
CN705 CN704
CN703
CN701
CN702
FERRITE CORE
Black Tape
CN704(12 pin)
CN701(14 pin)
CN702(13 pin)
NOTE
7)
4)
8)
7)
3)
6)-1
6)-1
6)-2
6)-2
2)-1
2)-1
2)-2
5)
HINGE
COVER L
REINSTALLATION
1. Install the SCANNER on the main unit.
2. Secure the SCANNER to the main unit with five screws (silver-with flange-8mm x 4,
silver-no flange-8mm x 1).
3. Secure the SPRING SC FFC to the main unit with the two screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
4. Secure the harnesses of the SCANNER with the clamp.
5. Secure the WIRE GROUND of the SCANNER with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
6. Connect the five connectors (CN701 to CN705) to the PWBA ESS.
7. Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm)
to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
8. Attach the COVER ASSY LH.(p321)
9. Attach the accordion shaped rubber covers (HINGE COVER L, HINGE COVER
R) to the left and right hinge sections.
CAUTION
When securing the two SPRING SC FFCs, make sure that the part
of the SCANNER harnesses with black tape are located between the
two SPRING SC FFCs.
CHECK
POINT
When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model), removing the
fax module in advance make it easier to connect CN701, CN702, and
CN704 to the PWBA ESS.
CAUTION
The CN701, CN702, and CN704 FFCs are resemble each other
in shape as their pin numbers are so close; 14, 13, and 12
respectively. Be careful not to connect them wrongly.
When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model), make
sure to put CN701 (14-pin) and CN702 (13-pin) FFCs through
the FERRITE CORE.
4.2.2 COVER
4.2.2.1 COVER ASSY TOP
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p321)
2. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p326)
3. Remove Fuser ASSY. (p415)
4. Loosen the two screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening the COVER LEG RH
OUTER to the main unit.
5. Remove COVER LEG RH OUTER from the main unit.
6. Slide COVER LEG LH INNER upward and remove it.
7. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm), and remove the STOPPER PLATE.
8. Remove the 2 E-rings fastening the COVER ASSY TOP to the main unit.
9. Open COVER ASSY TOP and silde it to the right to remove it.
Figure 4-3. Removal of COVER ASSY TOP
Leg_Sec03_002RC
8)
5)
9)
8)
6)
4)
4)
7)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach COVER ASSY TOP to the main unit with the COVER ASSY TOP opened.
2. Secure STOPPER PLATE to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm).
3. Fasten COVER ASSY TOP with the 2 E-rings.
4. Fit COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit.
5. Secure COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
6. Fit COVER LEG LH OUTER to the main unit.
7. Secure COVER SIDE LH ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
8. Install Fuser ASSY. (p415)
9. Attach COVER ASSY RH.. (p326)
10. Attach COVER ASSY RH.. (p321)
CAUTION
When performing the following work, use the outer of the two
grooves located on the stud.
4.2.2.2 TRAY EXTENSION, COVER TRAY
REMOVAL
1. Draw out COVER TRAY until it comes to a stop.
2. Open COVER ASSY TOP.
3. Unhook the hook fastening COVER TRAY to COVER ASSY TOP, and remove
COVER TRAY together with TRAY EXTENSION.
4. Open TRAY EXTENSION.
5. Bend the TRAY EXTENSION boss with a small screw driver or similar tool, and
draw out and remove the TRAY EXTENSION boss from the hole on COVER
TRAY.
REINSTALLATION
1. With TRAY EXTENSION opened, insert the boss on one side of the TRAY
EXTENSION into the hole on COVER TRAY, and attach the TRAY
EXTENSION boss on the other side into the hole on COVER TRAY while
bending down the TRAY EXTENSION boss.
2. Close TRAY EXTENSION.
3. Align COVER TRAY with the attachment position on COVER ASSY TOP, and
attach COVER TRAY together with TRAY EXTENSION.
4. Close COVER ASSY TOP.
5. Push in COVER TRAY gently until it comes to a stop.
Figure 4-4. Removal of TRAY EXTENSION and COVER TRAY (1)
Figure 4-5. Removal of TRAY EXTENSION and COVER TRAY (2)
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to damage the
TRAY EXTENSION boss.
CAUTION
TRAY EXTENSION boss.
Leg_Sec03_003EC
2)
3)-2
3)-1
3)-1
Leg_Sec03_501EB
5)-2
4)
5)-1
4.2.2.3 COVER FUSER
REMOVAL
1. Open COVER FUSER.
2. Bow COVER FUSER to pull out its right and left convex potions, and remove the
COVER FUSER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the right and left convex potions of the COVER FUSER.
2. Close COVER FUSER.
Figure 4-6. Removal of COVER FUSER
Leg_Sec03_005EB
2)-1
2)-2
1)
LEFT
Protrusion
4.2.2.4 COVER TOP SIDE L
REMOVAL
2. Remove Fuser ASSY. (p415)
3. Slide COVER LEG RH INNER upward and remove it.
4. Loosen the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening the COVER LEG LH
INNER to the main unit.
5. Remove COVER TOP SIDE L together with the COVER FUSER GUIDE from
the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on the COVER TOP SIDE L with the boss on the main unit.
2. Fasten COVER TOP SIDE L to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3. Fit COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit.
4. Secure COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8mm).
5. Install Fuser ASSY. (p415)
6. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p321)
Figure 4-7. Removal of COVER TOP SIDE L
CAUTION
The screw fastening the COVER TOP SIDE L is designed not to
come loose from the COVER TOP SIDE L.
Leg_Sec03_502RC
3)
5)
4)
4.2.2.5 COVER TOP SIDE R
REMOVAL
1. Open the COVER FUSER. (p311)
2. Open the COVER ASSY TOP.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER TOP SIDE R
to the main unit.
4. Remove the COVER TOP SIDE R from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on the COVER TOP SIDE R with the boss on the main unit.
2. Fasten COVER TOP SIDE R to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
4. Close COVER FUSER. (p321)
Figure 4-8. Removal of COVER TOP SIDE R
Leg_Sec03_503EA
4)
3)
4.2.2.6 SWITCH ASSY TOP
REMOVAL
2. Unclamp the two clamps fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY TOP, and
remove the harness.
3. Disconnect connector (P/J116, blue) of SWITCH ASSY TOP.
4. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY TOP to
the main unit.
5. Remove SWITCH ASSY TOP from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on SWITCH ASSY TOP with the boss on the main unit, and
attach.
2. Fasten SWITCH ASSY TOP to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J116, blue) of SWITCH ASSY TOP.
4. Clamp the harness of SWITCH ASSY TOP with the two clamps.
5. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p326)
Figure 4-9. Removal of SWITCH ASSY TOP
CAUTION
When performing the following work, leave the intermediate
connector (blue) on the harness side.
Table 4-3. Symptoms when the connector is loose
Connector No. Panel Indication Symptom
Error Caused by Connector
Disconnection
P/J116 B Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
Leg_03_006EC
Intermediate
connector (Blue)
4)
2)
3)
(Blue)
4.2.2.7 SWITCH ASSY FRONT
REMOVAL
2. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY FRONT and remove
the harness.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY FRONT
to the main unit.
4. Remove SWITCH ASSY FRONT from the main unit.
5. Disconnect connector (P/J115, white) and connector (P/J125) from SWITCH
ASSY FRONT.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J115, white) and connector (P/J125) to SWITCH ASSY
FRONT.
2. Match the hole on SWITCH ASSY FRONT with the boss on the main unit.
3. Fasten SWITCH ASSY FRONT to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
4. Fasten the harness of SWITCH ASSY FRONT with the clamp.
Figure 4-10. Removal of SWITCH ASSY FRONT
CAUTION
connector (white) on the harness side.
Disconnection
P/J115 B Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
P/J116 B Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
Leg_03_504ED
Intermediate
connector (White)
4)
3)
5)
5) (White)
2)
4.2.2.8 COVER RH, SLIDE BAR, COVER ROS WINDOW
REMOVAL
2. Unhook the four hooks fastening GUIDE BAR to COVER RH, and remove
GUIDE BAR.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER ROS
WINDOW to SLIDE BAR.
4. Slide COVER ROS WINDOW along the rib of COVER RH, and remove COVER
ROS WINDOW from the protrusion on COVER RH.
5. Remove SLIDE BAR from COVER RH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SLIDE BAR at the attachment position on the rear side of COVER RH.
2. Match COVER ROS WINDOW with the attachment position on the rear of
COVER RH, slide COVER ROS WINDOW along the ribs on COVER RH, and
attach COVER ROS WINDOW to SLIDE BAR.
3. Fasten COVER ROS WINDOW to SLIDE BAR with the screw (silver, with
flange, tapping, 8 mm).
4. Match the holes on GUIDE BAR with the boss of COVER RH, attach GUIDE
BAR, and fasten by the four hooks.
Figure 4-11. Removal of COVER RH, SLIDE BAR and COVER ROS WINDOW
CAUTION
When performing the following work, be sure to insert the top and
bottom of COVER ROS WINDOW inside the protrusions on
COVER RH.
CAUTION
After performing the above work, move SLIDE BAR to make sure
that COVER ROS WINDOW can be opened/closed smoothly.
Leg_Sec03_007EA
CAUTION
5)
4)
3)
2)
2)
4.2.2.9 COVER MSI
REMOVAL
2. Slide COVER MSI in a slightly open state to the right to remove from the main
unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on COVER MSI with the boss on the main unit with COVER MSI
in a slightly open state, and slide COVER MSI to the left to attach.
Figure 4-12. Removal of COVER MSI
Leg_Sec03_008EA
2)-1
2)-2
4.2.2.10 COVER FRONT L, COVER FRONT ASSY U
REMOVAL
3. Remove COVER MSI. (p317)
4. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER FRONT L to
the main unit.
5. Slide COVER FRONT L to the right, unhook the two hooks on the rear of COVER
FRONT L from the holes on the main unit, and remove COVER FRONT L
together with COVER FRONT ASSY U.
6. Press the bosses on the left and right of COVER FRONT ASSY U by inserting a
screwdriver, and draw out from the holes on COVER FRONT L to remove
COVER FRONT ASSY U from COVER FRONT L.
Figure 4-13. Removal of COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U (1)
Figure 4-14. Removal of COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U (2)
CAUTION
COVER FRONT ASSY U boss.
Leg_Sec03_009RB
5)-1
5)-2
4)
4)
4)
Leg_Sec03_010EB
6)-1
6)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on COVER FRONT ASSY U with the holes on COVER FRONT
L while bending down COVER FRONT ASSY U, and attach COVER FRONT
ASSY U to COVER FRONT L.
2. Match the two hooks on the rear of COVER FRONT L with the holes on the main
unit, and attach COVER FRONT L together with COVER FRONT ASSY U.
3. Fasten COVER FRONT L to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
4. Attach COVER MSI. (p317)
CAUTION
COVER FRONT ASSY U boss.
4.2.2.11 OP PANEL (CONTROL, PANEL)
REMOVAL
2. Open COVER FRONT ASSY U.
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening OP PANEL to the main
unit.
4. Remove the protrusions on the left and right of OP PANEL from COVER RH and
COVER LH while pushing them outward, and slightly remove OP PANEL from
the main unit.
5. Disconnect connector CN1 and the terminal connected to OP PANEL to remove
OP PANEL.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector CN1 and the terminal to OP PANEL.
2. While extending COVER RH and COVER LH each to the left and right, put the
protrusions on the left and right of OP PANEL inside COVER RH and COVER
LH, and attach OP PANEL to the main unit.
3. Fasten OP PANEL to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
4. Close COVER FRONT ASSY U.
Figure 4-15. Removal of OP PANEL
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to remove OP
PANEL too far as it is connected by a harness.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care to prevent the
harness from being caught between the main unit and OP PANEL.
Leg_Sec03_184RB
4)-1
4)-1
3)
3)
3)
4)-2
4.2.2.12 COVER ASSY LH
REMOVAL
3. Open COVER MSI.
4. Remove COVER ESS. (p322)
5. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER ASSY LH
to the main unit.
6. Lift up the COVER ASSY LH, and unhook the 4 hooks on the rear of the COVER
ASSY LH from the holes on the main unit, and remove the COVER ASSY LH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the 4 hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY LH with the holes on the
main unit while inserting the protrusion on the front side of the COVER ASSY LH
into the concave portion on the COVER FRONT L, and attach the COVER ASSY
LH.
2. Fasten the COVER ASSY LH to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
3. Attach COVER ESS. (p322)
4. Close COVER MSI.
Figure 4-16. Removal of COVER ASSY LH
CAUTION
When performing the following work, firmly insert the protrusion
on the front side of the COVER ASSY LH into the indent on the
COVER FRONT L.
Leg_Sec03_011RC
CAUTION
6)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
3)
Protrusion
4.2.2.13 COVER ESS
REMOVAL
1. Loosen the screw fastening COVER ESS to the main unit.
2. Remove COVER ESS from the main unit.
EINSTALLATION
1. Match the two protrusions on the bottom side of COVER ESS with the holes on
COVER LH, and attach COVER ESS.
2. Fasten COVER ESS to the main unit with the screw.
Figure 4-17. Removal of COVER ESS
Leg_Sec03_188RA
1)
2)
4.2.2.14 SWITCH ASSY FUSER, SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
REMOVAL
3. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER LEG
4. Unclamp clamp fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY FUSER and remove the
harness.
5. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY FUSER
to the main unit.
6. Remove SWITCH ASSY FUSER from the main unit.
7. Disconnect the connector (P/J117, blue) from the SWITCH ASSY FUSER.
8. Unhook the two hooks fastening the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR to BRACKET SW
FUSER, and remove the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR.
9. Disconnect the connector (P/J114) from the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR.
EINSTALLATION
1. Connect the connector (P/J114) to the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR.
2. Match the hooks on the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR with the attachment position,
and attach to the BRACKET SW FUSER.
3. Connect the connector (P/J117, blue) to the SWITCH ASSY FUSER.
4. Match the hole on the SWITCH ASSY FUSER with the boss on the main unit.
5. Fasten the SWITCH ASSY FUSER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
6. Fasten the harness of the SWITCH ASSY FUSER with the clamp.
7. Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm) to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
8. Close the COVER FUSER.
Figure 4-18. Removal of SWITCH ASSY FUSER and SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
CAUTION
connector on the harness side.
Disconnection
P/J114 C Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
P/J117 C Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
Leg_Sec03_012RB
7)
3)-1
3)-1
3)-2
8)-2
5)
8)-1
9)
6)
7)
4.2.2.15 COVER INNER TOP
REMOVAL
1. Remove OP PANEL. (p320)
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening COVER INNER TOP
to the main unit.
3. Remove COVER INNER TOP from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on COVER INNER TOP with the boss on the main unit.
2. Fasten COVER INNER TOP to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
3. Attach OP PANEL. (p320)
Figure 4-19. Removal of COVER INNER TOP
Leg_Sec03_187EB
3)
2)
2)
4.2.2.16 SWITCH-FRONT DOOR, SWITCH-INLK FRONT
REMOVAL
2. Remove SWITCH ASSY FRONT. (p315)
3. Remove the screw (gold, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH-INLK FRONT to BRACKET
INLK FRONT.
4. Remove SWITCH-INLK FRONT from BRACKET INLK FRONT.
5. Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH-FRONT DOOR to BRACKET INLK
FRONT, and remove SWITCH-FRONT DOOR.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SWITCH-FRONT DOOR with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET INLK FRONT.
2. Match the hole on SWITCH-INLK FRONT with the boss on BRACKET INLK
FRONT.
3. Fasten SWITCH-INLK FRONT to BRACKET INLK FRONT with the screw
(gold, 8 mm).
4. Attach SWITCH ASSY FRONT. (p315)
Figure 4-20. Removal of SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and SWITCH-INLK FRONT
CHECK
POINT
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and SWITCH-INLK FRONT can each
be removed separately.
Leg_Sec03_505EB
5)-1
5)-2
4) 3)
4.2.2.17 COVER ASSY RH
REMOVAL
3. Open COVER MSI.
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER ASSY RH
to the main unit.
5. Lift up the COVER ASSY RH, and unhook the 4 hooks on the rear of the COVER
ASSY RH from the holes on the main unit, and remove the COVER ASSY RH.
REINSTALLATION
1. While inserting the protrusion on the COVER ASSY RH into the concave portion
on the COVER FRONT L, place the "A" section of the COVER ASSY RH under
the COVER FRONT L as shown in Figure 4-21, and attach the COVER ASSY RH
to the COVER FRONT L with four tabs.
2. Secure the COVER ASSY RH with the four screws (silver, with flange, 8mm).
3. Close COVER MSI.
Figure 4-21. Removal of COVER ASSY RH
CAUTION
When performing the following work, be sure to insert the
protrusion on the front side of the COVER ASSY RH into the
concave portion on the COVER FRONT L.
Leg_Sec03_185RB
CAUTION
3)
5)-1
5)-2
4)
4)
4)
4)
Section A
Protrusion
4.2.2.18 COVER INNER LOW
REMOVAL
4. Remove COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p318)
5. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER INNER L to
the main unit.
6. Unhook the hook on the rear of COVER INNER L from the hole on the main unit,
and remove COVER INNER L.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hook on the rear of COVER INNER L with the hole on the main unit,
and attach COVER INNER L.
2. Fasten COVER INNER L to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3. Attach COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p318)
Figure 4-22. Removal of COVER INNER LOW
Leg_Sec03_186RB
5)
6)
5)
4.2.2.19 SWITCH-INLK FUSER
REMOVAL
2. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the COVER LEG
3. Remove SWITCH ASSY FUSER. (p323)
4. Remove the screw (silver, 8 mm) that secures the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the
BRACKET SW FUSER.
5. Remove the SWITCH-INLK FUSER from the BRACKET SW FUSER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the BRACKET SW FUSER matching the
boss on the BRACKET SW FUSER with the hole of the SWITCH-INLK FUSER.
2. Secure the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the BRACKET SW FUSER with the screw
(silver, 8 mm).
3. Attach SWITCH ASSY FUSER. (p323)
4. Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm) to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
Figure 4-23. Removal of SWITCH-INLK FUSER
Leg_Sec03_506RA
4)
4.2.3 MSI
4.2.3.1
MSI ASSY
REMOVAL
5. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH. (p352)
6. Disconnect connector (P/J408) and connector (P/J409) from PWBA MCU.
7. Unclamp the two clamps on CHASSIS ESS, and disconnect the harness from
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1.
8. When a 500-sheet Cassette Unit is installed, turn the LOCK MC TO FDR that is
attached to the unit 90 degrees as shown in Figure 4-24 to unlock the unit from the
main unit.
9. Remove the 6 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening MSI ASSY to
the main unit.
10. Draw out MSI ASSY slightly toward you, lift up MSI ASSY slightly to avoid TIE
PLATE under the main unit, gently draw out MSI ASSY forward again and draw
out HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the hole on the main unit to remove MSI ASSY.
Figure 4-24. Removal of MSI ASSY
CAUTION
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step of
reinstallation.
CAUTION
cable tie that bundles the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1
from being caught on the holes, etc. on the main unit.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from being sandwiched between the
main unit and MSI ASSY.
Leg_Sec03_042EC
CAUTION
LOCK MC TO FDR
Unlock Lock
6)
6)
7)
7)
9)
9)
9)
9)
9)
9)
10)-1
8)
10)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Gently insert HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 along the left side of MSI ASSY together
with MSI ASSY from the front of the main unit.
2. Insert MSI ASSY about halfway with the front of MSI ASSY lifted slightly to
avoid TIE PLATE under the main unit, and then bring out the connector of
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the hole on the main unit.
3. After matching MSI ASSY to the main unit attachment position, gently pull
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the outside to take up any slack inside the main
unit.
4. Fasten MSI ASSY to the main unit with the 6 screws (silver, with flange, tapping,
8 mm).
5. When a 500-sheet Cassette Unit is installed, turn the LOCK MC TO FDR 90
degrees to the opposite side of the arrow shown in Figure 4-24 to secure the 500-
sheet Cassette Unit to the main unit.
6. Connect connector (P/J408) and connector (P/J409) to PWBA MCU.
7. Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 with the two clamps on CHASSIS
ESS.
8. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p352)
Figure 4-25. Reinstallation of MSI ASSY
CAUTION
cable tie that bundles the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1
from being caught on the holes, etc. on the main unit.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from being sandwiched between the
main unit and MSI ASSY.
Disconnection
P/J408 E Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
P/J409 Service Req E547
Printing is not
possible.
Feeder Moter error
Leg_Sec03_507EC
CAUTION
[2)-1]
[2)-2]
[3)]
[1)]
4.2.3.2 ROLL ASSY MSI
REMOVAL
6. Remove MSI ASSY. (p329)
7. Remove SOLENOID PICK UP. (p344)
8. Remove the left and right SPRING-N/F MSI hooked on the left and right
BEARING MSI from MSI ASSY.
9. Remove the E-rings fastening the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI on SHAFT
ASSY MSI from MSI ASSY.
10. Match the notch of CAM PICK UP MSI with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI to the inside.
11. Match the notch of BEARING MSI with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide the left and right BEARING MSIs to the inside from the left and
right holes of MSI ASSY.
12. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY MSI to the left, and draw out the shaft of ROLL
ASSY MSI from the right-side bearing of MSI ASSY to remove ROLL ASSY
MSI.
Figure 4-26. Removal of ROLL ASSY MSI
CHECK
POINT
When performing the following work, work can be performed more
easily by turning ROLL ASSY MSI in the direction of the arrow to
release CAM PICK UP MSI and to set PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to a raised state.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_054FB
CAUTION
CHECK POINT
Oval
side
Semi-
circular
side
9)
11)
10)
10)
11)
9)
12)
8)
8)
D cut surface
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the left side of the shaft on ROLL ASSY MSI into the left-side bearing of
MSI ASSY, and then slide ROLL ASSY MSI to the right and attach ROLL ASSY
MSI.
2. Match the notch of left and right BEARING MSI on ROLL ASSY MSI with the
positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI, and insert BEARING MSI into the left and
right bearings of MSI ASSY to fasten ROLL ASSY MSI in place.
3. Match the notch of the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI on ROLL ASSY MSI
with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI, and slide the left and right CAM
PICK UP MSI to the outside.
4. Fasten the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI to SHAFT ASSY MSI with E-rings
5. Attach SPRING-N/F MSI to the left and right BEARING MSI.
6. Attach SOLENOID PICK UP. (p344)
7. Attach MSI ASSY. (p329)
CAUTION
When performing the following work, attach with the retainer of
PAPER GUIDE facing down.
CAUTION
The notch of CAM PICK UP MSI must be properly matched with
the positioning pin of ROLL ASSY MSI.
CHECK
POINT
easily by turning ROLL ASSY MSI in the direction of the arrow to
release CAM PICK UP MSI and to set PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to a raised state.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, pay attention to the
attachment direction of SPRING-N/F MSI.
he oval side of the attachment section of SPRING-N/F MSI is
attached to BEARING MSI.
The semi-circular side of the attachment section of SPRING-N/
F MSI is attached to PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
4.2.3.3 ROLL MSI
REMOVAL
2. Unhook the hook on the right-side CORE fastening SHAFT ASSY MSI, and slide
to the right.
3. Slide ROLL MSI to the right, and draw out the attachment groove of ROLL MSI
from the pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI to remove ROLL MSI from SHAFT ASSY
MSI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Place the U cut section of ROLL MSI on SHAFT ASSY MSI and slide to the left,
and insert the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI into the notch of ROLL
ASSY to attach ROLL ASSY to SHAFT ASSY MSI.
2. Slide the right-side CORE to the left, and fasten the CORE hook to the groove on
SHAFT ASSY MSI.
Figure 4-27. Removal of ROLL MSI
CAUTION
Pay attention to the attachment orientation of ROLL MSI. (Attach
with the direction of the arrows indicated on ROLL MSI aligned
with the directions in the illustration.)
Leg_Sec03_043EA
3)
Arrow
2)-2
2)-1
4.2.3.4 CHUTE MSI
REMOVAL
2. Bend down CHUTE MSI, and draw out the right-side boss on CHUTE MSI from
the right-side hole on MSI ASSY to remove CHUTE MSI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the left-side boss on CHUTE MSI into the left-side hole of MSI ASSY, then
bend down CHUTE MSI, insert the right-side boss of CHUTE MSI, and attach
CHUTE MSI.
Figure 4-28. Removal of CHUTE MSI
Leg_Sec03_044EB
2)-1
2)-2
RIGHT
4.2.3.5 GUIDE SIDE L, GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
REMOVAL
1. Open COVER MSI.
2. Unhook the hooks fastening the holes at the center of GUIDE SIDE COVER and
the hooks at the left and right of GUIDE SIDE COVER from the holes on FRAME
ASSY BOTTOM, and remove GUIDE SIDE COVER.
3. Remove GEAR MANUAL from FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
4. Slide GUIDE SIDE L to the right, remove the protrusion on GUIDE SIDE L from
the attachment section of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and remove GUIDE SIDE L.
5. Slide the lever of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R to the left, remove the protrusion of
GUIDE ASSY SIDE R from the attachment section of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM,
and remove GUIDE ASSY SIDE R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the protrusion of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R with the attachment section of
FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, insert the tension section of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
into the groove of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and slide the lever of GUIDE ASSY
SIDE R to attach.
2. Match the protrusion of GUIDE SIDE L with the attachment section of FRAME
ASSY BOTTOM, insert the tension section of GUIDE ASSY SIDE L into the
groove of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and slide GUIDE ASSY SIDE L to the left
to attach.
3. Open GUIDE ASSY SIDE R and GUIDE ASSY SIDE L as far as possible, and
attach GEAR MANUAL to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
4. Attach GUIDE SIDE COVER to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, fasten the hooks on
the left and right of GUIDE SIDE COVER, and fasten the hole at the center of
GUIDE SIDE COVER by the hook on FRAME ASSY BOTTOM to attach
GUIDE SIDE COVER.
5. Close COVER MSI.
Figure 4-29. Removal of GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R (1)
Figure 4-30. Removal of GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R (2)
Leg_Sec03_045EA
2)-1
2)-1
2)-2
2)-1
3)
Leg_Sec03_046EA
4)
5)-1
5)-2
4.2.3.6 PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
REMOVAL
7. Remove SOLENOID PICK UP. (p344)
8. Remove ROLL ASSY MSI. (p331)
9. Remove the holes on PLATE BOTTOM 2 from the boss on PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI while extending the attachment sections on the left and right of
PLATE BOTTOM 2.
10. Lift up PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI, and remove the holes on the left and right
of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI from the left and right shafts of MSI ASSY.
11. Remove the right side of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI from the right-side notch
of MSI ASSY, and remove PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
Figure 4-31. Removal of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
CAUTION
reinstallation.
Leg_Sec03_047FA
CHECK POINT
10)-2
11)-1
11)-2
10)-1
9)
9)
[2)]
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the left side of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI with the attachment position
on the left side of MSI ASSY, and insert the right side of PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI from the notch on the right side of MSI ASSY.
2. nsert the left and right holes of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI into the shafts on
the left and right of MSI ASSY, and attach PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
3. Insert the holes of PLATE BOTTOM 2 into the boss on PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to attach while extending the left and right attachment sections of PLATE
BOTTOM 2.
4. Attach ROLL ASSY MSI. (p331)
5. Attach SOLENOID PICK UP. (p344)
CHECK
POINT
easily by slightly lifting up the rear of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI.
4.2.3.7 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
REMOVAL
2. Remove CHUTE MSI. (p334)
3. Unhook the hooks of the PAPER GUIDEs on the left and right sides fastened to
SHAFT ASSY MSI, slide each PAPER GUIDE to the outside, and remove
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE.
4. Unhook the hooks of CORE on the left and right sides fastening SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide each to the outside.
5. Remove ROLL MSI. (p333)
6. Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI from FRAME ASSY BOTTOM while
bending down the boss on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI.
Figure 4-32. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (1)
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPRING
RETARD MSI.
Leg_Sec03_508EB
4)-1
3)-2
3)-1
4)-2
4)-2
4)-1
3)-1
3)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Match SPRING RETARD MSI attached to HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI with
the spring bearing of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and attach the bosses on both
sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM while
bending down the bosses.
2. Attach ROLL MSI. (p333)
3. Slide each of the left- and right-side COREs to the inside, and fasten the CORE
hook to the groove on SHAFT ASSY MSI.
4. Slide each of the PAPER GUIDEs on the left and right sides to inside, attach
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE, and fasten the hooks on the PAPER GUIDEs to
the grooves on the SHAFT ASSY MSI.
5. Attach CHUTE MSI. (p334)
Figure 4-33. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (2)
CAUTION
When SPRING RETARD MSI has come off from HOLDER ASSY
RETARD MSI, attach SPRING RETARD MSI to the boss on
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI, and then perform the following
work.
CAUTION
SPRING RETARD MSI must be properly matched with the boss on
the spring bearing of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
CAUTION
Make sure to install the FRAME ASSY-PH correctly by referring
the caution described in the REINSTALLATION of the 4.2.4.4
FRAME ASSY-PH (p.352).
Leg_Sec03_048EB
CAUTION
6)
4.2.3.8 PLATE ASSY RETARD
REMOVAL
2. Remove CHUTE MSI. (p334)
3. Remove ROLL MSI. (p333)
4. Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI. (p338) Bend down PLATE ASSY
RETARD, remove the holes on the left and right from the boss on FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM, and remove PLATE ASSY RETARD.
5. Bend down PLATE ASSY RETARD, remove the holes on the left and right from
the boss on FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and remove PLATE ASSY RETARD.
Figure 4-34. Removal of PLATE ASSY RETARD
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, do not fold or bend PLATE
ASSY RETARD.
Leg_Sec03_049EA
5)-1
5)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the left and right U grooves of PLATE ASSY RETARD with the bosses on
the front of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
2. Turn the bosses aligned with the U-grooves as the fulcrum while bending down
PLATE ASSY RETARD, insert the bosses on the rear side of FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM into the left and right holes of PLATE ASSY RETARD, and attach
PLATE ASSY RETARD.
3. Attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI. (p338)
4. Attach ROLL MSI. (p333)
5. Attach CHUTE MSI. (p334)
Figure 4-35. Reinstallation of PLATE ASSY RETARD
CAUTION
When performing the following work, do not fold or bend PLATE
ASSY RETARD.
Leg_Sec03_509EA
[1)]
[2)-1]
[2)-2]
[2)-1]
4.2.3.9 OIL DAMPER
REMOVAL
7. Unhook the hook on GEAR PICK UP fastened to SHAFT ASSY MSI from MSI
ASSY, and remove GEAR PICK UP.
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DAMPER
BRACKET to the MSI ASSY.
9. Remove OIL DAMPER together with DAMPER BRACKET from MSI ASSY.
10. Remove OIL DAMPER from DAMPER BRACKET.
Figure 4-36. Removal of OIL DAMPER
Leg_Sec03_200FA
9)
8)
8)
7)-1
7)-2
10)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on OIL DAMPER with the boss on DAMPER BRACKET, and
attach OIL DAMPER to DAMPER BRACKET.
2. Match the hole on DAMPER BRACKET with the boss on MSI ASSY, and attach
OIL DAMPER together with DAMPER BRACKET.
3. Fasten DAMPER BRACKET to MSI ASSY with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
tapping, 8 mm).
4. Attach GEAR PICK UP to SHAFT ASSY MSI, and fasten the hook on GEAR
PICK UP to the groove on SHAFT ASSY MSI.
CAUTION
attachment direction of OIL DAMPER.
4.2.3.10 SOLENOID PICK UP
REMOVAL
7. Unhook the hook on GEAR PICK UP fastened to SHAFT ASSY MSI from MSI
ASSY, and remove GEAR PICK UP.
8. Disconnect connector (P/J605) from SOLENOID PICK UP, and remove the
harness from the groove on MSI ASSY.
9. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8mm) fastening SOLENOID PICK UP to MSI
ASSY.
10. Remove SOLENOID PICK UP from MSI ASSY.
Figure 4-37. SRemoval of SOLENOID PICK UP
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_050FA
9)
8)
7)-2
7)-1
10)
[3)]
Groove
Notch
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on SOLENOID PICK UP with the boss on MSI ASSY, and attach
SOLENOID PICK UP.
2. Fasten SOLENOID PICK UP to MSI ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping,
8mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J605) to SOLENOID PICK UP, and route the harness in the
notch and groove on MSI ASSY.
4. Attach GEAR PICK UP to SHAFT ASSY MSI while pulling the lever on
SOLENOID PICK UP, and fasten the hook on GEAR PICK UP to the groove on
SHAFT ASSY MSI.
4.2.3.11 SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
REMOVAL
7. Unhook the three hooks on SENSOR PAPER EMPTY fastened to FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM using a small screwdriver or similar tool, and turn ACTUATOR
EMPTY to remove SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
8. Disconnect connector (P/J103) from SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J103) to SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
2. Turn ACTUATOR EMPTY to align the three hooks on SENSOR PAPER
EMPTY to the attachment position, and attach SENSOR PAPER EMPTY to
FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
8. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p326) Figure 4-38. Removal of SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
Leg_Sec03_051FA
8)
7)-3
7)-1
7)-2
4.2.3.12 ACTUATOR EMPTY
REMOVAL
7. Remove GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R. (p335)
8. emove SENSOR PAPER EMPTY. (p346)
9. Remove the holes on PLATE BOTTOM 2 from the boss on PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI while extending the attachment sections on the left and right of
PLATE BOTTOM 2.
10. Turn PLATE BOTTOM 2, remove the bosses on the left and right of PLATE
BOTTOM 2 from the notches of MSI ASSY, and remove PLATE BOTTOM 2.
11. Remove the groove on the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY from the hook
on MSI ASSY, and draw out the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY from
the hole on MSI ASSY.
12. Slide ACTUATOR EMPTY to the left, slide the shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY
along the notch of MSI ASSY, and remove ACTUATOR EMPTY.
Figure 4-39. Removal of ACTUATOR EMPTY (1)
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CHECK
POINT
When performing the following work, connectors need not be
disconnected from SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to fold
ACTUATOR EMPTY.
Leg_Sec03_052FB
9)
10)
9)
REINSTALLATION
1. Slide the actuator of ACTUATOR EMPTY into the clearance of MSI ASSY, slide
the shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY along the notch on MSI ASSY, and attach
ACTUATOR EMPTY.
2. Insert the right-side shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY into the hole on MSI ASSY,
and fasten the groove on the left-side shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY to the hook
on MSI ASSY.
3. Insert the left and right bosses into the notch on MSI ASSY with PLATE
BOTTOM 2 raised 90, and attach PLATE BOTTOM 2.
4. Insert the holes of PLATE BOTTOM 2 into the boss on PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI while extending the left and right attachment sections of PLATE BOTTOM
2.
5. Attach SENSOR PAPER EMPTY. (p346)
6. Attach GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R. (p335)
Figure 4-40. Removal of ACTUATOR EMPTY (2)
CAUTION
Make sure that ACTUATOR EMPTY is firmly fastened to the
hook.
Leg_Sec03_053FB
CAUTION
11)-1
[2)]
12)
11)-2
4.2.4 PH ASSY
4.2.4.1 COVER-PH
REMOVAL
1. Open COVER-PH.
2. Unhook the hooks on both the left and right sides fastening COVER-PH to
CHUTE ASSY-REAR, and remove COVER-PH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the two hooks under COVER-PH with CHUTE ASSY-REAR, attach
COVER-PH, and fasten with the hooks on both the left and right sides.
2. Close COVER-PH.
Figure 4-41. Removal of COVER-PH
Leg_Sec03_142EA
2)-1 2)-1
1)
2)-2
4.2.4.2 CHUTE ASSY-REAR
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER-PH. (p349)
2. Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
3. Press the attaching portion on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY-REAR inward
with a flat-blade screwdriver or a similar tool, and remove the boss on the
attaching portion from the hole on the FRAME-PH to remove the CHUTE ASSY-
REAR.
REINSTALLATION
1. After inserting the boss on the left side of the CHUTE ASSY-REAR into the hole
on the left side of the FRAME-PH, insert the right boss on the CHUTE ASSY-
REAR into the hole on the right side of the FRAME-PH by sliding the right boss
from the obliquely upward.
2. Close CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
3. Attach COVER-PH. (p349)
Figure 4-42. Removal of CHUTE ASSY-REAR
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the boss on the CHUTE ASSY-REAR
when performing the next procedure.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the boss on the CHUTE ASSY-REAR
when performing the next procedure.
Leg_Sec03_055EA
4)-2
[1)] 4)-1
4.2.4.3 CHUTE-REAR UP, CHUTE-REAR LOW
REMOVAL
1. Remove CHUTE ASSY-REAR. (p350)
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE-
REAR LOW to CHUTE-REAR UP.
3. Remove the concave portion on CHUTE-REAR LOW from the protrusion on
CHUTE-REAR UP, and remove CHUTE-REAR LOW from CHUTE-REAR UP.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on CHUTE-REAR LOW with the boss on CHUTE-REAR UP, and
insert the protrusion on CHUTE-REAR UP into the concave portion on CHUTE-
REAR LOW to attach.
2. Fasten CHUTE-REAR LOW to CHUTE-REAR UP with the 2 screws (silver, with
3. Attach CHUTE ASSY-REAR. (p350)
Figure 4-43. Removal of CHUTE-REAR UP and CHUTE-REAR LOW
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
The protrusion on CHUTE REAR UP must be inserted firmly into
the concave portion on CHUTE-REAR LOW.
Leg_Sec03_056FA
CAUTION
2)
3)-2
2)
3)-1
[1)]
4.2.4.4 FRAME ASSY-PH
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER-PH. (p349)
3. Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the FRAME
ASSY-PH to the main unit.
5. Place the FRAME ASSY-PH a little away from the main unit together with the
CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
6. Disconnect P/J603 and P/J604 connectors and remove the FRAME ASSY-PH
together with the CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
Figure 4-44. Removal of FRAME ASSY-PH
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pull the FRAME ASSY-PH too much when
removing it as it is connected with harnesses.
Leg_Sec03_057EA
3)
3)
3)
3)
2)
5)
7)
6)
REINSTALLATION
2. Connect P/J603 and P/J604 connectors with the FRAME ASSY-PH open 90
degrees as shown in the figure.
4. While pushing down the film part of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI, match
FRAME ASSY-PH with the attachment position of the main unit.
5. Fasten FRAME ASSY-PH to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
7. Attach COVER-PH. (p349)
Figure 4-45. Reinstallation of FRAME ASSY-PH
Figure 4-46. Check point after installing FRAME ASSY-PH
CAUTION
When performing the following procedure, be careful not to let the
harness caught between the main unit and the FRAME ASSY-PH.
CAUTION
Make sure to confirm that the film part of the HOLDER ASSY
RETARD MSI is located lateral to the FRAME ASSY-PH after
installing the FRAME ASSY-PH to the main unit. If the film part
gets through the inside of the FRAME ASSY-PH, a paper jam is
occurred by blocking a paper feeding path. (See Figure 4-46)
Leg_03_510EB
[2)]
[4)-1]
[4)-2]
OK
NG
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI Film part
4.2.4.5 CLUTCH ASSY REGI
REMOVAL
2. Remove MOTOR-PH. (p362)
3. Remove DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p365)
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J203) from CLUTCH ASSY REGI, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
5. Remove the E-ring fastening CLUTCH ASSY REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH.
6. Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY REGI with the D cut surface on the
shaft of ROLL-REGI METAL, and attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI so that the
protrusion of FRAME ASSY-PH enters the concave portion on CLUTCH ASSY
REGI.
2. Fasten CLUTCH ASSY REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH with the E-ring.
3. Route the harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI in the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH,
and connect the connector (P/J203) to CLUTCH ASSY REGI.
4. Attach DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p365)
5. Attach MOTOR-PH. (p362)
Figure 4-47. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY REGI
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_058FA
5)
6)
4)
[3)-1]
[3)-2]
4.2.4.6 ROLL-REGI METAL
REMOVAL
4. Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p354)
5. Remove the two E-rings fastening GEAR-REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove the two GEAR-REGIs.
6. Remove the left and right BEARING METALs fastening ROLL-REGI METAL
from FRAME ASSY-PH.
8. Temporarily slide ROLL-REGI METAL to the left, draw out the shaft on ROLL-
REGI METAL from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove
ROLL-REGI METAL.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL-REGI METAL into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL-REGI METAL to the right to attach.
3. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING METAL with the left and right
bearings of FRAME ASSY-PH, attach BEARING METAL, and fasten ROLL-
REGI METAL.
4. Attach GEAR-REGI to the right side of the shaft on ROLL-REGI METAL and the
right side of the shaft on ROLL REGI RUBBER, and fasten with the E-ring.
5. Attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p354)
Figure 4-48. Removal of ROLL-REGI METAL
Leg_Sec03_059FB
6)
5)-2
5)-1
6)
7)
8)
4.2.4.7 ROLL REGI RUBBER
REMOVAL
4. Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p354)
5. Remove the E-ring fastening GEAR-REGI on ROLL REGI RUBBER from
FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove GEAR-REGI.
6. Remove the right-side BEARING RUBBER and SPRING-REGI R (METAL)
fastening ROLL REGI RUBBER from FRAME ASSY-PH.
7. Remove the E-ring fastening ROLL REGI RUBBER from FRAME ASSY-PH,
and BEARING RUBBER and SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) on the left side.
8. Temporarily slide ROLL REGI RUBBER to the left, draw out the shaft on ROLL
REGI RUBBER from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
Figure 4-49. Removal of ROLL REGI RUBBER
Leg_Sec03_060FB
(BLACK)
(METAL)
8)
D cut surface
7)-2
7)-1
RIGHT
6)-1
5)-2
5)-1
6)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL REGI RUBBER into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL REGI RUBBER to the right to attach.
2. Fasten ROLL REGI RUBBER to FRAME ASSY-PH by the left and right
BEARING RUBBER.
3. Attach SPRING-REGI R (METAL) to the boss on the right-side BEARING
RUBBER and the boss on the right-side bearing of FRAME ASSY-PH fastening
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
4. Attach SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) to the boss on the left-side BEARING
RUBBER and the boss on the left-side bearing of FRAME ASSY-PH fastening
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
5. Attach GEAR-REGI to the right side of the shaft on ROLL REGI RUBBER, and
fasten with the two E-rings on the left and right of the shaft.
6. Attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p354)
CAUTION
Attach ROLL REGI RUBBER to FRAME ASSY-PH so that the D
cut surface of the shaft comes to the right side.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to attach
SPRING-REGI R (METAL) and SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) to
the wrong side (not to confuse left and right).
CAUTION
Make sure that SPRING-REGI R (METAL) and SPRING-REGI L
(BLACK) are inserted in the boss on the left and right BEARING
RUBBER and the bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH.
4.2.4.8 ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
REMOVAL
4. Remove CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI. (p363)
5. Remove the E-rings fastening the right side of the shaft on ROLL ASSY-PRE
REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
6. Remove the left and right BEARING METALs fastening ROLL ASSY-PRE
REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
8. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to the left, draw out the shaft on
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to the right to attach.
3. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING METAL with the left and right
bearings of FRAME ASSY-PH, attach BEARING METAL, and fasten ROLL
ASSY-PRE REGI.
4. Fasten the shaft right side of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI with an E-ring.
5. Attach CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI. (p363)
Figure 4-50. Removal of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI CAUTION
Attach ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH so that the
D cut surface of the shaft comes to the left side.
Leg_Sec03_061FB
7)
8)
D cut surface
6)
6)
5)
4.2.4.9 SENSOR OHP
REMOVAL
2. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening BRACKET-
SENSOR OHP to FRAME ASSY-PH.
3. Remove BRACKET-SENSOR OHP together with SENSOR OHP from FRAME
ASSY-PH.
4. Disconnect connector (P/J101) from SENSOR OHP.
5. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR OHP to
BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
6. Remove SENSOR OHP from BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on SENSOR OHP with the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR OHP,
and attach SENSOR OHP to BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
2. Fasten SENSOR OHP to BRACKET-SENSOR OHP with the screw (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J101) to SENSOR OHP.
4. Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR OHP with the boss on FRAME ASSY-
PH, and attach BRACKET-SENSOR OHP together with SENSOR OHP.
5. Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR OHP to FRAME ASSY-PH with the screw (silver,
with flange, tapping, 8 mm).
Figure 4-51. Removal of SENSOR OHP
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to remove
FRAME ASSY-PH and BRACKET-SENSOR OHP too far as they
are connected by harnesses.
Leg_Sec03_062FA
3)
4)
2)
5)
6)
4.2.4.10 ACTUATOR-REGI
REMOVAL
2. Remove the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI from the hook on FRAME
ASSY-PH.
3. Draw out the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI from the hole on FRAME
ASSY-PH, and remove ACTUATOR-REGI together with SPRING-ACTUATOR.
4. Remove SPRING-ACTUATOR from ACTUATOR-REGI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING-ACTUATOR to ACTUATOR-REGI.
2. Insert the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI into the hole on FRAME ASSY-
PH, and hook SPRING-ACTUATOR onto the notch on FRAME ASSY-PH.
3. Fasten the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI by the hook on FRAME ASSY-
PH.
Figure 4-52. Removal of ACTUATOR-REGI
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
SPRING-ACTUATOR must be hooked firmly on ACTUATOR-
REGI and FRAME ASSY-PH.
Leg_Sec03_064FA
CAUTION
2)
3)
4)
[3)]
4.2.4.11 SENSOR REGI
REMOVAL
4. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH, down
ACTUATOR-REGI with your fingers press and remove SENSOR REGI.
5. Disconnect connector (P/J102) from SENSOR REGI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J102) to SENSOR REGI.
2. Press down ACTUATOR-REGI with your fingers, match the hooks on SENSOR
REGI with the attachment position, and attach to FRAME ASSY-PH.
Figure 4-53. Removal of SENSOR REGI
Leg_Sec03_065FB
4)-3
5)
4)-1
4)-2
4.2.4.12 MOTOR-PH
REMOVAL
2. Unhook the two hooks fastening COVER-HARNESS to FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove COVER-HARNESS.
3. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH, and remove the harness of MOTOR-
PH from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening MOTOR-PH to
FRAME ASSY-PH.
5. Remove MOTOR-PH from FRAME ASSY-PH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach MOTOR-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the harness of MOTOR-PH
facing the front.
2. Fasten MOTOR-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
3. Route the harness of MOTOR-PH in the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH, and fasten
with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH.
4. Match the boss and protrusion of COVER-HARNESS with the hole on FRAME
ASSY-PH, attach and fasten with the 2 hooks.
Figure 4-54. Removal of MOTOR-PH
CAUTION
attachment direction of MOTOR-PH.
Leg_Sec03_066FB
5)
Front side
3)
4)
4)
2)-1
2)-2
2)-1
3)
4.2.4.13 CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
REMOVAL
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J202) from CLUTCH ASSY REGI, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
5. Remove the E-rings fastening CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH.
6. Remove CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI from the hole on FRAME ASSY-PH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI into the hole on FRAME ASSY-
PH.
2. Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI with the D cut surface on
the shaft of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI, and attach CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI so
that the protrusion on FRAME ASSY-PH enters the concave portion on CLUTCH
ASSY PRE REGI.
3. Fasten CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH with an E-ring.
4. Route the harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI in the groove on FRAME
ASSY-PH, and connect the connector (P/J202) to CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI.
Figure 4-55. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, do not disconnect the relay
connectors.
Leg_Sec03_067FA
[4)]
4)
6)
5)
4.2.4.14 SWITCH-PH DOOR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J100) from SWITCH-PH DOOR.
4. Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH-PH DOOR to FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove SWITCH-PH DOOR.
REINSTALLATION
2. Match the hooks on SWITCH-PH DOOR with the attachment position, and attach
to FRAME ASSY-PH.
3. Connect connector (P/J100) to SWITCH-PH DOOR.
4. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p352) Figure 4-56. Removal of SWITCH-PH DOOR
Leg_Sec03_068FC
2)
4)-2
4)-1
3)
4.2.4.15 DRIVE ASSY-PH
REMOVAL
3. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH, and remove the harness.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DRIVE
ASSY-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH.
5. Remove DRIVE ASSY-PH from FRAME ASSY-PH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on DRIVE ASSY-PH with the boss on FRAME ASSY-PH, and
attach DRIVE ASSY-PH.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the 2 screws (silver, with
3. Fasten the harness with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH.
Figure 4-57. Removal of DRIVE ASSY-PH
CAUTION
When performing the following work, make sure that the gears on
CLUTCH ASSY REGI and CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI are
correctly engaged.
Leg_Sec03_069FA
5)
4)
4)
3)
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
4.2.5 TRANSFER
4.2.5.1 CHUTE ASSY-FSR, COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
REMOVAL
CHUTE ASSY-FSR
1. Open CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
2. Press the hinge on CHUTE ASSY-FSR to the inside with a flat-blade screwdriver
or a similar tool, and remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR from the main unit.
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J620) from CHUTE ASSY-FSR connected to the
main unit.
Figure 4-58. Removal of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
CAUTION
CHUTE ASSY-FSR too far as it is connected by a harness.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_511RA
2)-1 2)-1
Produsion Produsion
2)-2
3)
1)
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
5. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND, and remove
the harness.
6. Disconnect connector (P/J621) connected to the main unit, and insert the
connector inside through the hole on the main unit.
7. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER ASSY-RR
2ND to the main unit.
8. Remove COVER ASSY-RR 2ND from the main unit.
Figure 4-59. Removal of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
CHECK
POINT
When HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW need not be removed in the
following procedure, COVER ASSY-RR 2ND can be removed
without removing COVER ASSY LH by disconnecting connector
(P/J113) from SWITCH 2BTR COVER instead of connector (P/
J621).
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_143RB
CHECK POINT
6)-2
6)-1
7)
8)
5)
7)
REINSTALLATION
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
1. Lead out the connector of the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND from the hole on
the main unit.
2. Match the boss on COVER ASSY-RR 2ND with the hole on the main unit, and
attach COVER ASSY-RR 2ND.
3. Lead out the relay connector connected to the connector on CHUTE ASSY-FSR to
the outside from the left-side notch on COVER ASSY-RR 2ND.
4. Fasten COVER ASSY-RR 2ND to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
5. Connect connector (P/J621) on the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND to the
main unit, and fasten the harness by the clamp.
CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6. Attach the connector (P/J620) on CHUTE ASSY-FSR connected to the main unit,
and insert the connector into the main unit from the left-side notch on COVER
ASSY-RR 2ND.
7. Fit the U groove on the both the left- and right-side hinges of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
into the shaft on CAM ASSY-2ND, and attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR to the main
unit.
8. Close CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
CAUTION
harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and COVER
ASSY-RR 2ND.
ADJUSTMENT
REQUIRED
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after replacing both the
CHUTE ASSY FSR and the FRAME ASSY 2ND with new ones at a
time.
Refer to Section 6.3.1.2 Lublication (p551).
4.2.5.2 SENSOR FUSER IN
REMOVAL
1. Remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR. (p366)
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DIODE
FUSER to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
3. Remove DIODE FUSER from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
4. Remove the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE-FSR
and PLATE DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
5. Remove PLATE DIS 2ND from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6. Remove CHUTE-FSR from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
7. Disconnect connector (P/J111) from SENSOR FUSER IN.
8. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening SENSOR FUSER IN to
CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
9. Remove SENSOR FUSER IN from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
Figure 4-60. Removal of SENSOR FUSER IN (2)
Figure 4-61. Removal of SENSOR FUSER IN (1)
Leg_Sec03_145FA
9)
7)
8)
Leg_Sec03_144FB
CAUTION
6)
4)
5)
2)
2)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on SENSOR FUSER IN with the hole on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach SENSOR FUSER IN.
2. Fasten SENSOR FUSER IN to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver,
tapping, 6 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J111) to SENSOR FUSER IN.
4. Insert the three protrusions on CHUTE-FSR into the holes on CHUTE ASSY-
FSR, match the holes on CHUTE-FSR with the boss on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach CHUTE-FSR.
5. Attach PLATE DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6. Tighten and fasten both CHUTE-FSR and the right side of PLATE DIS 2ND to
CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
7. Match DIODE FUSER with the concave portion on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach.
8. Fasten the right-side terminal of DIODE FUSER to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the
screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
9. Fasten both the left-side terminal of DIODE FUSER and the left side of PLATE
DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8
mm).
10. Attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR. (p366)
CAUTION
attachment direction of DIODE FUSER.
Attach so that the white painted side of DIODE FUSER is on the
side where DIODE FUSER is screwed together with CHUTE-FSR.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, the terminal on DIODE
FUSER must be attached between the washer and the plate.
4.2.5.3 FRAME ASSY-2ND
REMOVAL
2. Remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR and COVER ASSY-RR 2ND. (p366)
3. Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p374)
4. Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p384)
5. Remove CAM ASSY-2ND. (p376)
6. Remove SPRING-2ND fastening both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-
Figure 4-62. Removal of FRAME ASSY-2ND (1)
CAUTION
reinstallation.
Leg_Sec03_146RB
CAUTION CAUTION
6)
6)
7. Remove the E-ring fastening the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND to the
main unit, and slide BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the left.
8. Temporarily slide FRAME ASSY-2ND to the right, and draw out the shaft on
FRAME ASSY-2ND from the left-side bearing on the main unit, and remove
FRAME ASSY-2ND together with BEARING-BRUSH CAM.
9. Remove BEARING-BRUSH CAM from FRAME ASSY-2ND.
Figure 4-63. Removal of FRAME ASSY-2ND (2)
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to drop or lose
BEARING-BRUSH CAM.
Leg_Sec03_147RB
7)-2
7)-1
9)
8)
[3)]
[1)]
9)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the left-side bearing on the main unit.
2. Attach BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND.
3. Insert the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing on
the main unit, slide FRAME ASSY-2ND to the left, insert the flange of GEAR 27
on FRAME ASSY-2ND as far as possible into the gear of DRIVE ASSY BTR,
and attach FRAME ASSY-2ND.
4. Insert the right-side BEARING-BRUSH CAM on FRAME ASSY-2ND into the
right-side bearing on the main unit, and fasten with an E-ring.
5. Fasten both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-2ND to the main unit with
SPRING-2ND.
6. Attach CAM ASSY-2ND. (p376)
7. Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p384)
8. Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p374)
9. Attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR and COVER ASSY-RR 2ND. (p366)
ADJUSTMENT
REQUIRED
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after replacing both the
CHUTE ASSY FSR and the FRAME ASSY 2ND with new ones at a
time.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, firmly hook SPRING-2ND
onto the concave portion on FRAME ASSY-2ND.
(Refer to Figure 4-63)
4.2.5.4 2ND BTR ASSY
REMOVAL
2. Remove Photoconductor Unit.
3. Turn the levers on both the left and right sides of 2ND BTR ASSY towards you,
and unlock the lever lock from FRAME ASSY-2ND.
4. Hold the lever on 2ND BTR ASSY, draw out the right side of 2ND BTR ASSY
from FRAME ASSY-2ND, and then draw out the left side to remove 2ND BTR
ASSY from the main unit.
Figure 4-64. Removal of 2ND BTR ASSY
CAUTION
Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, press LATCH ROTARY on
LATCH ASSY ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSY-
ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent
it from contacting MAG ROLL.
Leg_Sec03_070RB
CAUTION
3)
3)
4)-2
4)-3
4)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the left-side gear on 2ND BTR ASSY into the main unit, and then fit the left
and right bearings on 2ND BTR ASSY into FRAME ASSY-2ND to attach 2ND
BTR ASSY.
2. Turn the levers on both the left and right sides of 2ND BTR ASSY down, and
make FRAME ASSY-2ND lock the lever.
3. Attach Photoconductor Unit.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, press LATCH ROTARY
on LATCH ASSY ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
to prevent it from contacting MAG ROLL.
When performing the following work, the right-side shaft on
2ND BTR ASSY must be inserted into the bottom side of the
terminal on PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
CAUTION
After attaching 2ND BTR ASSY, make sure that the levers on both
the left and right sides move smoothly up and down.
CAUTION
When replaced 2ND BTR ASSY with a new one, clear the life
counter to zero. (Refer to 6.4.1.1Maintenance Menu Items (p553))
4.2.5.5 CAM ASSY-2ND
REMOVAL
4. Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p384)
5. Remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p382)
6. Remove the E-ring fastening the right-side shaft on CAM ASSY-2ND to the main
unit, and slide BEARING to the left.
7. Temporarily slide CAM ASSY-2ND to the right, and draw out the shaft on CAM
ASSY-2ND from the left-side bearing on the main unit, and remove CAM ASSY-
2ND together with BEARING.
8. Remove BEARING from CAM ASSY-2ND.
Figure 4-65. Removal of CAM ASSY-2ND
CAUTION
When performing the following work, there is no need to remove
WIRE ASSY 2BTR from PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
CAUTION
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT from BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to drop or lose
BEARING.
CHECK
POINT
easily by pressing FRAME ASSY-2ND in the direction of the arrow,
and releasing FRAME ASSY-2ND from the cam on CAM ASSY-
2ND.
Leg_Sec03_148RB
CAUTION
CAUTION
CHECK POINT CHECK POINT
8)
6)-1
6)-2 7)-1 7)-1
7)-2
RIGHT
8)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach BEARING to the left-side bearing on the main unit.
2. Attach BEARING to the right-side bearing on CAM ASSY-2ND.
3. Insert the right-side bearing on CAM ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing on
the main unit, slide CAM ASSY-2ND to the left, and attach CAM ASSY-2ND
together with BEARING.
4. Insert the right-side BEARING on CAM ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing
on the main unit, and fasten with an E-ring.
6. Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p384)
CHECK
POINT
easily by pressing FRAME ASSY-2ND in the direction of the arrow,
and releasing FRAME ASSY-2ND from the cam on CAM ASSY-
2ND. (Refer to Figure 4-65)
CAUTION
Make sure that the cam on CAM ASSY-2ND is matched with the
cam receptacle on FRAME ASSY-2ND. (Refer to Figure 4-65)
4.2.5.6 SWITCH 2BTR COVER
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the connector (P/J113) from SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND to
COVER-RR 2ND.
4. Remove BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND from COVER-RR 2ND together with
SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
5. Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH 2BTR COVER to BRACKET-
SWITCH 2ND, and remove SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SWITCH 2BTR COVER with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND.
2. Match the hole on BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND with the boss on COVER-RR 2ND,
and attach together with SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
3. Fasten BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND to COVER-RR 2ND with the screw (silver,
tapping, 6 mm).
4. Connect the connector (P/J113) to SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
Figure 4-66. Removal of SWITCH 2BTR COVER
Leg_Sec03_071FA
5)-2
2)
3)
5)-1
4)
4.2.5.7 SENSOR ASSY ADC
REMOVAL
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR
ASSY ADC to the main unit.
3. Remove SENSOR ASSY ADC from the main unit.
4. Disconnect connector (P/J431) from SENSOR ASSY ADC.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J431) to SENSOR ASSY ADC.
2. Match the boss on SENSOR ASSY ADC with the hole on the main unit, and
attach SENSOR ASSY ADC.
3. Fasten SENSOR ASSY ADC to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
washer, tapping, 8 mm).
Figure 4-67. Removal of SENSOR ASSY ADC
CAUTION
SENSOR ASSY ADC too far as it is connected by a harness.
Leg_Sec03_072RB
4)
2)
2)
3)
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
4.2.5.8 HOLDER-ADC 2ND
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH.(p326)
2. Remove COVER FUSER. (p311)
5. Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND.(p384)
7. Remove CAM ASSY-2ND. (p376)
8. Remove SPRING-2ND fastening both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-
2ND to the main unit. (p371)
9. Remove FUSER ASSY. (p415)
10. Disconnect connector (P/J431) from SENSOR ASSY ADC.
11. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the HOLDER-ADC
12. Remove the HOLDER-ADC 2ND from the main unit together with the SENSOR ASSY
ADC.
13. Remove the two screws (silver with washer, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the SENSOR
ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
14. Remove the SENSOR ASSY ADC from the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
Figure 4-68. Removal of HOLDER-ADC 2ND
CAUTION
reinstallation.
Leg_Sec03_512RA
14)
13)
13)
12)
[3)]
11)
11)
10)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND matching the
boss on the SENSOR ASSY ADC with the hole on the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
2. Secure the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND with the two
screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
3. Route the harness on the HOLDER-ADC 2ND as shown in Figure 4-67, and
attach the HOLDER-ADC 2ND to the main unit together with the SENSOR
ASSY ADC matching the protrusion of the HOLDER-ADC 2ND with the hole
on the main unit.
4. Secure the HOLDER-ADC 2ND to the main unit with the two screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
5. Connect P/J431 to the SENSOR ASSY ADC.
6. Attach FUSER ASSY. (p415)
7. Fasten both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-2ND to the main unit with
SPRING-2ND. (p371)
8. Attach CAM ASSY-2ND. (p376)
9. Attach SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p382)
10. Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND. (p384)
13. Attach COVER FUSER. (p311)
4.2.5.9 SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J112) from SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening BRACKET-SENSOR
PHOTO to the main unit.
4. Remove BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO from the main unit together with
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
5. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT to BRACKET-
SENSOR PHOTO, and remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO.
2. Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO with the boss on the main unit,
and attach BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO together with SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
3. Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8mm).
4. Connect connector (P/J112) to SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
Figure 4-69. Removal of SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
CAUTION
The shutter of CAM ASSY-2ND must be inserted inside the sensor
on SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
Leg_Sec03_073RB
CAUTION
5)-2
2)
4)
3)
5)-1
4.2.5.10 SENSOR IBT RETRACT
REMOVAL
2. Remove COVER INNER TOP. (p324)
3. Disconnect connector (P/J107) from SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
4. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-SENSOR
CLN to the main unit.
5. Remove BRACKET-SENSOR CLN from the main unit together with SENSOR
IBT RETRACT.
6. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR IBT RETRACT to BRACKET-
SENSOR CLN, and remove SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR IBT RETRACT with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SENSOR CLN.
2. Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR CLN with the boss on the main unit, and
attach BRACKET-SENSOR CLN together with SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
3. Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR CLN to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
4. Connect connector (P/J107) to SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
5. Attach COVER INNER TOP. (p324)
Figure 4-70. Removal of SENSOR IBT RETRACT
CAUTION
The shutter of CAM ASSY-IBT CL must be inserted inside the
sensor on SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
Leg_Sec03_074FA
CAUTION
6)-1
3)
4)
5)
6)-2
4.2.5.11 PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
REMOVAL
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE BIAS-
2ND ASSY to the main unit.
5. Unclamp the clamp fastening WIRE ASSY 2BTR, and slightly release PLATE
BIAS-2ND ASSY from the main unit.
6. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening the terminal of WIRE ASSY
2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
7. Remove WIRE ASSY 2BTR from PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY, and remove
PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
Figure 4-71. Removal of PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
CAUTION
PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY too far as it is connected by WIRE ASSY
2BTR.
Leg_Sec03_150RB
5)-2
4)
4)
E ring
SHAFT-CENT 2ND
7)
6)
5)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach WIRE ASSY 2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
2. Fasten the terminal of WIRE ASSY 2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY with the
screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm).
3. Match the boss on PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and
attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
4. Fasten PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, tapping, 6 mm), and fasten WIRE ASSY 2BTR with the clamp.
CAUTION
When performing the following work, route WIRE ASSY 2BTR
connected to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY so that it does not come into
contact with CAM ASSY-2ND.
CHECK
POINT
When the E-ring on FRAME ASSY-2ND is contacting the PLATE
BIAS-2ND ASSY and is difficult to attach, turn SHAFT-CENT
2ND to facilitate attachment.
4.2.5.12 CAM ASSY-IBT CL
REMOVAL
5. Remove PWBA MCU. (p432)
6. Remove SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p383)
7. Remove the left and right E-rings fastening CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit.
8. Remove the left and right BEARING-BRUSH CAMs fastening CAM ASSY-IBT
CL to the main unit.
9. Temporarily slide CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the left, and draw out the shaft of CAM
ASSY-IBT CL from the right-side bearing on the main unit to remove CAM
ASSY-IBT CL.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side of CAM ASSY-IBT CL into the left-side bearing of the
main unit, slide CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the right, and attach CAM ASSY-IBT CL.
2. Fasten CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit by the left and right BEARING-
BRUSH CAMs.
3. Fasten CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit by the left and right E-rings.
4. Attach SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p383)
5. Attach PWBA MCU. (p432)
Figure 4-72. Removal of CAM ASSY-IBT CL
CAUTION
SENSOR IBT RETRACT from BRACKET-SENSOR CLN.
CAUTION
The shutter of CAM ASSY-IBT CL must be inserted inside the
sensor on SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
Leg_Sec03_075EB
9)
7)
8)
8)
7)
4.2.6 XERO
4.2.6.1 SENSOR TR-0
REMOVAL
2. Remove Photoconductor Unit.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 10mm) fastening SENSOR TR-0 to
PLATE-TR-0.
4. Remove SENSOR TR-0 from PLATE-TR-0.
5. Disconnect connector (P/J108) from SENSOR TR-0.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J108) to SENSOR TR-0.
2. Match the hole on SENSOR TR-0 with the boss on PLATE-TR-0, and attach
SENSOR TR-0.
3. Fasten SENSOR TR-0 to PLATE-TR-0 with the screw (silver, with flange,
10mm).
4. Attach Photoconductor Unit.
Figure 4-73. Removal of SENSOR TR-0
Leg_Sec03_076EA
4)
3)
5)
4.2.6.2 GUIDE CRU ASSY D
REMOVAL
4. Remove CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p440)
6. Remove FUSER LOCK SWITCH. (p417)
7. Remove SENSOR TR-0. (p387)
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE-TR-0
to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
9. Remove PLATE-TR-0 from GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
Figure 4-74. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY D (1)
CHECK
POINT
When performing the following work, connectors need not be
disconnected from PWBA ESS.
Leg_Sec03_077RA
6)
6)
7)
10. Unclamp the clamp fastening HARNESS-ASSY XERO on the left side of the
main unit.
11. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening GUIDE CRU
ASSY D to the main unit.
12. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert HARNESS-ASSY XERO into the hole on the left side of the main unit, and
match the boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY D into the hole on the main unit to attach
GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
2. Fasten GUIDE CRU ASSY D to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with
3. Fasten HARNESS-ASSY XERO on the left side of the main unit with the clamp.
4. Attach PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
5. Fasten PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with
the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
6. Attach SENSOR TR-0. (p387)
7. Attach FUSER LOCK SWITCH. (p417)
9. Attach CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p440)
12. Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p374) Figure 4-75. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY D (2)
CAUTION
Lightly open/close COVER ASSY TOP, and check operation of the
coupling on MOT ASSY P/R.
Leg_Sec03_078RC
MOT ASSY P/R
9)
9)
9)
9)
9)
8)
10)
4.2.6.3 LATCH ASSY D
REMOVAL
6. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p388)
7. Remove ANTENNA ASSY. (p391)
8. Unhook SPRING-TORSION D from the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
9. Slightly rotate LATCH ASSY D together with SPRING-TORSION D in the
direction of the arrow so that they escape the notch on GUIDE CRU ASSY D to
remove.
10. Remove SPRING-TORSION D from LATCH ASSY D.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING-TORSION D to LATCH ASSY D.
2. Attach LATCH ASSY D to GUIDE CRU ASSY D together with SPRING-
TORSION D, and insert the bottom front side of LATCH ASSY D into the notch
on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
3. Hook SPRING-TORSION D onto the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
4. Attach ANTENNA ASSY. (p391)
5. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p388)
Figure 4-76. Removal of LATCH ASSY D
CAUTION
SPRING-TORSION D must be firmly attached onto the hooks on
LATCH ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
Leg_Sec03_201FA
CAUTION
8)
10)
9)
4.2.6.4 ANTENNA ASSY
REMOVAL
7. Unhook the hook fastening ARM-COUPLING to GUIDE CRU ASSY D, and
remove ARM-COUPLING from the shaft on GUIDE CRU ASSY D together with
SPRING-TORSION ARM.
8. Turn ARM-COUPLING 90, and remove ARM-COUPLING.
Figure 4-77. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY (1)
Leg_Sec03_079FB
CAUTION
8)-2
8)-1
7)
9. Unhook the hook fastening ANTENNA ASSY to GUIDE CRU ASSY D, and
remove ANTENNA ASSY.
10. Disconnect connector (P/J109) from ANTENNA ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J109) to ANTENNA ASSY.
2. Match the boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY D with the hole on ANTENNA ASSY,
attach ANTENNA ASSY, and fasten with a hook.
3. Attach SPRING-TORSION ARM to ARM-COUPLING, and insert the shaft on
LINK-COUPLING into the long oblong hole on ARM-COUPLING.
4. Turn ARM-COUPLING 90, attach ARM-COUPLING to the shaft on GUIDE
CRU ASSY D, fasten with a hook, and hook SPRING-TORSION ARM onto the
notch of GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
Figure 4-78. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY (2)
CAUTION
When unhooking the hook fastening ANTENNA ASSY, take care
not to damage the hook.
CAUTION
SPRING-TORSION ARM must be firmly hooked onto the shaft of
ARM-COUPLING and LATCH ASSY D.
Leg_Sec03_080FA
10)
9)-1
9)-2
4.2.6.5 GUIDE CRU ASSY AD
REMOVAL
4. Remove BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p399)
6. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE-TR-0
to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
7. Remove PLATE-TR-0 from GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
Figure 4-79. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY AD (1)
Leg_Sec03_081RA
7)
6)
6)
8. Remove WIRE ASSY BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY BCR from
GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
9. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening WIRE ASSY
DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
10. Remove WIRE ASSY DTN from GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
11. Remove SPRING-LATCH hooked onto the main unit and the stud of GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
12. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening both PLATE-
ASSY GND and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD to the main unit, and remove PLATE-
ASSY GND.
13. Remove the 7 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening GUIDE CRU
ASSY AD to the main unit.
14. Draw out the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD from the hole on the main
unit, and remove GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
Leg_Sec03_082RB
11)
8)
8)
8) 9)
10)
Leg_Sec03_083RB
14)
13)
13)
13)
13)
13)
13)
13)
12)-2
12)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the protrusion and boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with the hole on the
main unit, and attach GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
2. Fasten GUIDE CRU ASSY AD to the main unit with the 7 screws (silver, with
3. Attach PLATE-ASSY GND to the main unit, and tighten together with GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
4. Attach SPRING-LATCH onto the main unit and the stud on GUIDE CRU ASSY
AD.
5. Attach WIRE ASSY DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
6. Fasten WIRE ASSY DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with the screw (silver, with
7. Attach WIRE ASSY BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY BCR to GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
8. Attach PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
9. Fasten PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with
the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
11. Attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p399)
CHECK
POINT
easily with LEVER-LATCH PR on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD closed.
Connector
No.
Panel Indication Symptom
Disconnection
A (508) Ready Entirely Fogged in Black FIP-P18
D (504) Ready
Uneven Density/Thin-
Spot
FIP-P16
G (506) Ready Normal printing ---
4.2.6.6 LEVER-LATCH PR
REMOVAL
6. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. (p393)
7. Turn LEVER-LATCH PR in the direction of the arrow, match the notch on
LEVER-LATCH PR with the protrusion on the boss of GUIDE CRU ASSY AD,
and remove LEVER-LATCH PR.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the notch on LEVER-LATCH PR with the protrusion on the boss of
GUIDE CRU ASSY AD, and attach LEVER-LATCH PR.
2. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. (p393)
Figure 4-82. Removal of LEVER-LATCH PR
Leg_Sec03_202FA
7)
4.2.6.7 CAP-PLATE PR, PLATE-ASSY PR
REMOVAL
7. Remove LEVER-LATCH PR. (p396)
8. Turn PLATE-ASSY PR in the direction of the arrow, match the notch on PLATE-
ASSY PR with the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD, and remove PLATE-
ASSY PR together with CAP-PLATE PR.
9. Unhook the hook on CAP-PLATE PR, and remove CAP-PLATE PR from
PLATE-ASSY PR.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach CAP-PLATE PR to PLATE-ASSY PR.
2. Match the notch on PLATE-ASSY PR with the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY
AD, and attach PLATE-ASSY PR together with CAP-PLATE PR.
3. Attach LEVER-LATCH PR. (p396)
Figure 4-83. Removal of CAP-PLATE PR and PLATE-ASSY PR
CAUTION
attachment direction of CAP-PLATE PR.
Leg_Sec03_203FA
8)
9)-2
9)-1
4.2.6.8 LATCH ASSY AD
REMOVAL
7. Unhook SPRING-TORSION AD from the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
8. Remove LATCH ASSY AD together with SPRING-TORSION AD from GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
9. Remove SPRING-TORSION AD from LATCH ASSY AD.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING-TORSION AD to LATCH ASSY AD.
2. Attach LATCH ASSY AD together with SPRING-TORSION AD to GUIDE CRU
ASSY AD.
3. Hook SPRING-TORSION AD onto the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
Figure 4-84. Removal of LATCH ASSY AD
CAUTION
SPRING-TORSION AD must be firmly attached onto the hooks on
LATCH ASSY AD and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
(Do not attach SPRING-TORSION AD in the reverse direction)
Leg_Sec03_204FA
CAUTION
8)
9)
7)
4.2.6.9 BCR CLN XERO ASSY
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect connector (P/J617) from BCR CLN XERO ASSY on the right side of
the main unit.
4. Unclamp the clamp on the right side of the main unit, and move the harness on
BCR CLN XERO ASSY to inside the main unit from the hole on the right side of
the main unit.
5. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BCR CLN XERO
ASSY to the main unit.
6. Remove BCR CLN XERO ASSY from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on BCR CLN XERO ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and
attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY.
2. Fasten BCR CLN XERO ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
3. Take out the harness of BCR CLN XERO ASSY to the outside from the hole on
the right side of the main unit, and connect connector (P/L617) for BCR CLN
XERO ASSY to the harness.
4. Fasten the harness on BCR CLN XERO ASSY with the clamp on the right side of
the main unit.
Figure 4-85. Removal of BCR CLN XERO ASSY
CAUTION
LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSY-
contact with MAG ROLL.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_084EB
6)
5)
5)
4)
4)
3)
4.2.6.10 SENSOR TNER FULL
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J126) from SENSOR TNER FULL.
3. Unhook the two hooks fastening SENSOR TNER FULL to the main unit, and
remove SENSOR TNER FULL.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hook on SENSOR TNER FULL with the attachment position, and
attach to the main unit.
2. Connect connector (P/J126) to SENSOR TNER FULL.
Figure 4-86. Removal of SENSOR TNER FULL
Leg_Sec03_183EB
2)
3)-1
3)-2
3)-1
4.2.7 ROS
4.2.7.1 ROS ASSY
REMOVAL
5. Remove COVER INNER LOWOW. (p327)
6. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH.(p352)
7. Remove CLEANER ASSY. (p403)
8. Disconnect P/J601 and P/J602 connectors of the ROS ASSY.
9. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) that secure the ROS ASSY to
the main unit.
10. Lift the ROS ASSY a little to remove the boss of the assy. from the hole of the
main unit, and remove the ROS ASSY toward rear of the main unit.
Figure 4-87. Removal of ROS ASSY
CAUTION
When performing the subsequent procedures, be sure to perform
the followings to avoid touching the MAG ROLL; Unlock the
LATCH ROTARY of the LATCH ASSY-ROTARY and turn the
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY with your hand to move the Housing
ASSY-DEVE.
Leg_Sec03_086RC
FRONT REAR
9)
9)
8)
10)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on ROS ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and attach ROS
ASSY.
2. Fasten ROS ASSY to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 10mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J601) and connector (P/J602) to ROS ASSY.
4. Attach CLEANER ASSY. (p403)
6. Attach COVER INNER L. (p327)
CAUTION
4.2.7.2 CLEANER ASSY
REMOVAL
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 10mm) fastening GUIDE-ROS CLN to
the main unit.
3. Remove GUIDE-ROS CLN from the main unit.
4. Remove CLEANER ASSY from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Align CLEANER ASSY with the rails on the main unit, and insert.
2. Match the boss on GUIDE-ROS CLN with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
3. Fasten GUIDE-ROS CLN to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
10mm).
Figure 4-88. Removal of CLEANER ASSY
Leg_Sec03_087RA
4)
3)
2)
2)
4.2.8 DEVE
4.2.8.1 LATCH ASSY-ROTARY
REMOVAL
2. Remove LV/HVPS. (p435)
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening LATCH
ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit.
4. Unhook the three hooks fastening LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit, and
remove LATCH ASSY-ROTARY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hook on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY with the attachment position, and
2. Fasten LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with
3. Attach LV/HVPS. (p435)
Figure 4-89. Removal of LATCH ASSY-ROTARY
CAUTION
Pay attention to the levers and springs inside LATCH ASSY-
ROTARY as they easily come loose.
When a part on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY comes off, referring to
the assembly drawing, assemble the part, and attach LATCH
ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit.
Leg_Sec03_088RA
CAUTION
3)
3)
3)
4)-2
4)-1
4.2.8.2 ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
REMOVAL
2. Remove ANTENNA CTRG. (p407)
3. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening ANTENNA
ASSY-CTRG to the main unit.
4. Press the boss fastening ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG to the main unit, and remove
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG.
REINSTALLATION
1. Remove the toner cartridge overlaying the attachment position of ANTENNA
ASSY-CTRG.
2. Match the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG with the attachment position, and
3. Press ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG from the inside of the main unit (hole on FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY), and firmly insert the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG into
the hole on the main unit.
4. Fasten ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
5. Attach ANTENNA CTRG. (p407)
Figure 4-90. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
CAUTION
reinstallation.
Leg_Sec03_089RA
4)-2
[3)]
4)-1 4)-1
3)
3)
7. Attach the ET Cartridges.
Figure 4-91. LEVER LATCH Position
CAUTION
When installing the ET Cartridge, be careful not to sandwich the
LEVER LATCH between the cartridge and the main unit as shown
in the left figure below. Install the ET cartridges correctly as shown
in the right figure below.
CAUTION
Be sure to clean the ROS ASSY window with the CLEANER ASSY
after installing the ET Cartridges.
4.2.8.3 ANTENNA CTRG
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J106) from ANTENNA CTRG.
3. Unhook the hook fastening ANTENNA CTRG to ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG, and
remove ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG with the hole on ANTENNA CTRG,
attach ANTENNA CTRG, and fasten with a hook.
2. Connect connector (P/J106) to ANTENNA CTRG.
Figure 4-92. Removal of ANTENNA CTRG
Leg_Sec03_091EC
2)
3)-2
3)-1
4.2.8.4 HOLDER ASSY-BIAS
REMOVAL
2. Remove WIRE ASSY DEVE connected to HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
3. Unhook the hook on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS from the main unit, and slide down,
match the protrusion on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS with the notch on the main unit,
and remove HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the protrusion on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS with the notch of the attachment
hole on the main unit, and attach, and slide HOLDER ASSY-BIAS upwards and
fasten with a hook.
2. Attach WIRE ASSY DEVE to HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
Figure 4-93. Removal of HOLDER ASSY-BIAS
Leg_Sec03_092RA
3)-2
3)-1
2)
4.2.8.5 SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
REMOVAL
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET SENSOR to
the main unit.
4. Remove BRACKET SENSOR from the main unit together with SENSOR
ROTARY HOME POSI.
5. Disconnect connector (P/J105) from SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
6. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI to
BRACKET SENSOR, and remove SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI with the attachment
position, and attach to BRACKET SENSOR.
2. Connect connector (P/J105) to SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
3. Match the hole on BRACKET SENSOR with the boss on the main unit, and attach
BRACKET SENSOR together with SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
4. Fasten BRACKET SENSOR to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
Figure 4-94. Removal of SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
Leg_Sec03_093RA
6)-1
6)-2
4)
3)
5)
4.2.8.6 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y,
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Toner Cartridge.
3. Remove COVER ASSY TOP. (p308)
9. Press LATCH ROTARY on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to a
position where is easy to work.
Figure 4-95. Removal of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (1)
CAUTION
When removing the Toner Cartridge, put several sheets of copy
paper on COVER FRONT ASSY U and other parts to prevent
them from getting dirty.
Before removing HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, be sure to wipe off
any residual toner on it.
When wiping off the residual toner on HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE, take care to prevent any toner from static cling to the
sensors on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
WARNING
Do not vacuum off spilled toner using an usual vacuum cleaner
because there is a possibility of taking fire.
CAUTION
After moving HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, make sure that FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY is firmly locked by LATCH ROTARY.
Leg_Sec03_094EB
9)-2
9)-1
10. Unhook the hook on PIVOT AD fastening the right side of HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE to FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, and remove PIVOT AD.
11. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8mm) fastening PIVOT ASSY
fastening the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to FRAME ASSY-ROTARY,
and remove PIVOT ASSY.
12. Lift up the right side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, remove the gear on the left side
of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE from the gear on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, and
remove HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
Figure 4-96. Removal of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (2)
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_095RB
CHECK POINT
Thin
Thick
10)-2
10)-1
11)-2
11)-1
12)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the gear on the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE of the same color as
the indicated color on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY with the gear on FRAME ASSY-
ROTARY, and attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
2. Match the hole on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the attachment hole on the left
side of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, insert the shaft on PIVOT ASSY, and fasten
the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the screw (silver, with flange,
tapping, 8 mm).
3. Match the hole on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the attachment hole on the right
side of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, insert the shaft of PIVOT AD, and fasten the
hook on PIVOT AD to attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
9. Attach COVER ASSY TOP. (p308)
11. Attach the Toner Cartridge.
Figure 4-97. LEVER LATCH Position
CAUTION
Holes are provided in the protrusion portion on FRAME ASSY-
ROTARY for preventing mis-insertion of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
The attachment positions of each color of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
is indicated as K, Y, M, and C on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
CAUTION
The spring under both sides of the bottom of HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE must be placed firmly on the spring receptacle of
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
A spring having a thick right side and a thin left side is used as
the spring under HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
CAUTION
Removed PIVOT ADs should not be re-used; only new PIVOT ADs
in the KIT should be used.
CAUTION
When installing the ET Cartridge, be careful not to sandwich the
LEVER LATCH between the cartridge and the main unit as shown
in the left figure below. Install the ET cartridges correctly as shown
in the right figure below.
CAUTION
Be sure to clean the ROS ASSY window with the CLEANER
ASSY after installing the ET Cartridges.
Be sure to reset the life counter of the Housing ASSY-DEVE
after replacing it with a new one.
(See 6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items (p553))
4.2.8.7 FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
REMOVAL
4. Remove COVER ASSY TOP. (p308)
12. Remove DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p421)
13. Remove MOT ASSY MAG. (p423)
14. Remove LATCH ASSY-ROTARY. (p404)
15. Remove SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI. (p409)
21. Remove HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. (p410)
22. Remove the three screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the BRACKET
ASSY 2ND GEAR to the main unit.
Figure 4-98. Removal of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
Leg_Sec03_096RA
28)
27)
26) 25)
25)
22)
22)
18)
22)
28)
24)
24)
26)
23. Remove the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR and the GEAR 2ND from the main
unit.
24. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the SHAFT ASSY-
ROTARY to the right side of the main unit.
25. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the SHAFT ASSY-
ROTARY to the left side of the main unit.
26. Remove the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY from the both sides of the main unit.
27. Remove the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY upward together with the BEARING
BALL.
28. Remove the BEARING BALL from the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the BEARING BALL to the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
2. Attach the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit placing its gear side to the
left.
3. Attach the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit inserting its shaft into the
hole of the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY (both right and left).
4. Secure the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY attached to the left side of the main unit with
the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
5. Secure the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY attached to the right side of the main unit
with the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
6. Attach the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR and the GEAR 2ND to the main unit.
7. Secure the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR to the main unit with the three screws
(silver, with flange, 6 mm).
8. Attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE . (p410)
14. Attach SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI. (p409)
15. Attach LATCH ASSY-ROTARY.(p404)
16. Attach MOT ASSY MAG. (p423)
17. Attach DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p421)
25. Attach COVER ASSY TOP. (p308)
CAUTION
When performing the following procedure, be careful not to lose the
BEARING BALL as it may come off.
4.2.9 FUSER
4.2.9.1 FUSER ASSY
REMOVAL
FUSER ASSY
2. Release the COVER TOP SIDE L from the hook of the COVER FUSER GUIDE,
and turn the COVER FUSER GUIDE 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow.
3. Move the levers on both sides of the FUSER ASSY upward to unlock and remove
the FUSER ASSY.
Actuator
4. Pull out the shaft of the Actuator with the Chute of the FUSER ASSY opened, and
remove the Actuator together with the Spring.
5. Remove the Spring from the Actuator.
Figure 4-99. Removal of FUSER ASSY
CAUTION
Be extremely careful not to burn your hand when handling the
FUSER section.
COVER TOP
SIDE L
COVER FUSER GUIDE
Hook
3)-2
3)-1
3)-1
2)
REINSTALLATION
Actuator
1. Attach the Spring to the Actuator.
2. Insert the shaft of the Actuator with the Chute of the FUSER ASSY opened, and
attach the Actuator together with the Spring.
FUSER ASSY
3. Attach the FUSER ASSY to the main unit matching the connector and boss of the
FUSER ASSY with the connector and the hole of the main unit, and push the
levers on the both sides of the FUSER ASSY to secure it to the main unit.
4. Return the COVER FUSER GUIDE to its original position, and secure the
COVER TOP SIDE L with the hook of the COVER FUSER GUIDE.
5. Close COVER FUSER.
Figure 4-100. NIP Release Lever Fixing Parts
CAUTION
Be sure to reset the life counter of the FUSER ASSY after replacing
it with a new one.
(See 6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items (p553))
Leg_Sec03_160EA
4)-1
4)-2
5)
4.2.9.2 FUSER LOCK SWITCH
REMOVAL
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J128, blue) from FUSER LOCK SWITCH.
5. Unclamp the two clamps fastening the harness on FUSER LOCK SWITCH to
remove the harness, and put the connector of FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the
inside the main unit from the hole on the main unit.
6. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening FUSER LOCK
SWITCH to the main unit.
7. Slide FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the right, unhook the hook on FUSER LOCK
SWITCH from the hole on the main unit, and remove FUSER LOCK SWITCH.
Figure 4-101. Removal of FUSER LOCK SWITCH
CAUTION
CAUTION
When performing the following, take care not to damage FUSER
LOCK SWITCH by falling or dropping it.
Leg_Sec03_519RB
5)-1
4)
6)
5)-1
5)-2
7)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the protrusion and hook on FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the hole on the
main unit, slide FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the left, and attach FUSER LOCK
SWITCH.
2. Putting your hand beneath FUSER LOCK SWITCH to prevent it from dropping,
fasten FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6
mm).
3. Bring out the connector on FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the outside from the hole
on the main unit.
4. Attach the connector (P/J128, blue) to FUSER LOCK SWITCH, and fasten the
harness on FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the two clamps.
CAUTION
When performing the following, take care not to damage FUSER
LOCK SWITCH by falling or dropping it.
4.2.9.3 HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
REMOVAL
4. Disconnect the connector (black-and-white) from PWBA FUSER CONT.
5. Disconnect connector (P417) from PWBA MCU.
6. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-RIZ to the
main unit, remove the harness from the clamp, and remove BRACKET-RIZ from
the main unit.
7. Draw out HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L from BRACKET-RIZ while pressing the
claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L into the hole on BRACKET-RIZ
to attach.
2. Fasten BRACKET-RIZ to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm), and fasten each harness with the clamps.
3. Attach the harness (yellow) to the connector (P417) on PWBA MCU.
4. Connect the harness (black-and-white) to PWBA FUSER CONT.
Figure 4-102. Removal of HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
CAUTION
The claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L is easily broken. Take
care not to press it too much.
Leg_Sec03_520RB
7)-1
7)-2
6)-2
5)
6)-1
6)-2 4)
4.2.10 DRIVE
4.2.10.1 DRIVE ASSY BTR
REMOVAL
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY BTR to
the main unit.
9. Remove DRIVE ASSY BTR from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the shaft on DRIVE ASSY BTR with the hole on the main unit, and attach
DRIVE ASSY BTR.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY BTR to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
6mm).
Figure 4-103. Removal of DRIVE ASSY BTR
Leg_Sec03_098RB
8)
8)
9)
4.2.10.2 DRIVE ASSY PRO
REMOVAL
4. Disconnect connector (P/J411,P/J414) from the PWBA MCU.
5. Unclamp the harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO on the left side of the main unit from
the clamp. If the harness is difficult to remove, remove PWBA MCU. (p432)
6. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY PRO to
the main unit.
7. Remove DRIVE ASSY PRO from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Inset the motor section and harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO into the hole on the
main unit, match the hole on DRIVE ASSY PRO with the boss on the main unit,
and attach DRIVE ASSY PRO.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY PRO to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
3. Fasten the harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO with the clamp on the left side of the
main unit.
4. Connect connector (P/J411,P/J414) to the PWBA MCU.
Figure 4-104. Removal of DRIVE ASSY PRO
Leg_Sec03_099EA
5)
7)
6)
6)
6)
6)
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
4.2.10.3 MOT ASSY FSR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J404) from the PWBA MCU.
3. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness on MOT ASSY FSR and remove the
harness.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 4mm) fastening MOT ASSY FSR to the
main unit.
5. Remove MOT ASSY FSR from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach MOT ASSY FSR to the main unit.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY FSR to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
4mm).
3. Connect the (P/J404) to the PWBA MCU.
4. Fasten the harness of MOT ASSY FSR with the clamp.
Figure 4-105. Removal of MOT ASSY FSR
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J404 Ready Jam E, F
Paper Jam at 2nd BTR
section
---
Leg_Sec03_100RA
2)
3)
5)
4)
4)
4.2.10.4 MOT ASSY MAG
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect connector (P/J405) and connector (P/J406) from PWBA MCU.
4. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) fastening MOT ASSY MAG to
the main unit.
5. Remove MOT ASSY MAG from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on MOT ASSY MAG with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY MAG to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange,
10 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J405) and connector (P/J406) to PWBA MCU.
Figure 4-106. Removal of MOT ASSY MAG
CHECK
POINT
When performing the following work, the connector of PWBA ESS
does not need to be removed.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J405 Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
P/J406 Ready Normal printing ---
Leg_Sec03_102RA
3)
3)
4)
4)
4)
5)
4.2.10.5 MOT ASSY ROT
REMOVAL
6. Unclamp the clamp fastening WIRE ASSY DEVE, and remove WIRE ASSY
DEVE.
7. Disconnect connector (P/J433) from PWB ASSY ROT.
8. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening MOT ASSY ROT to
the main unit.
9. Remove MOT ASSY ROT from the main unit.
Figure 4-107. Removal of MOT ASSY ROT
Leg_Sec03_101EB
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_101EB
CAUTION
FFC-ASSY
ESS
WIRE ASSY
BTR
WIRE ASSY
DEVE
FFC-ASSY
ESS
6)
9)
8)
8)
8)
8)
7)
FFC-ASSY
ESS
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on MOT ASSY ROT with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY ROT to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J433) to PWB ASSY ROT.
4. Fasten WIRE ASSY DEVE with the clamp.
CAUTION
When doing the following work, take care so that WIRE ASSY
DEVE, WIRE ASSY BTR, and FFC-ASSY ESS are not sandwiched
between the main unit and MOT ASSY ROT.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J433 Service Req E527 All LEDs flash ---
4.2.10.6 MOT ASSY P/R
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J200) and connector (P/J201) from MOT ASSY P/R.
3. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) fastening MOT ASSY P/R to
the main unit.
4. Remove MOT ASSY P/R from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach MOT ASSY P/R to the main unit while lightly pressing LINK-
COUPLING.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY P/R to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 10
mm).
3. Attach connector (P/J200) and connector (P/J201) to MOT ASSY P/R.
Figure 4-108. Removal of MOT ASSY P/R
CAUTION
reinstallation.
CAUTION
Lightly open/close COVER ASSY TOP, and check operation of the
coupling on MOT ASSY P/R.
Leg_Sec03_103RC
2)
3)
3)
3)
3)
4)
[1)-2]
[1)-1]
4.2.10.7 MOT ASSY MICRO
REMOVAL
2. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness on MOT ASSY MICRO.
3. Disconnect connector (P/J600) from MOT ASSY MICRO.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 4mm) fastening MOT ASSY MICRO to
the main unit.
5. Remove MOT ASSY MICRO from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach MOT ASSY MICRO to the main unit with the harness on MOT ASSY
MICRO facing the rear side.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY MICRO to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
4mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J600) to MOT ASSY MICRO.
4. Fasten the harness on MOT ASSY MICRO with the clamp.
Figure 4-109. Removal of MOT ASSY MICRO
CAUTION
attachment direction of MOT ASSY MICRO.
Leg_Sec03_104RB
2)
4)
4)
5)
3)
4.2.11 ELECTRICAL
4.2.11.1 SENSOR HUM & TEMP
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J104) from SENSOR HUM & TEMP.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR HUM
& TEMP to the main unit.
4. Remove SENSOR HUM & TEMP from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SENSOR HUM & TEMP to the main unit.
2. Fasten SENSOR HUM & TEMP to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
3. Connect the connector (P/J104) to SENSOR HUM & TEMP.
Figure 4-110. Removal of SENSOR HUM & TEMP
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J104 Service Req E533 All LEDs flash Sensor HUM & TEMP error
Leg_Sec03_107EA
3)
4)
2)
4.2.11.2 PWBA HVPS
REMOVAL
5. Remove COVER INNER L. (p327)
6. Disconnect connector (P/J516) from PWBA HVPS, and remove WIRE ASSY
2BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY DTN (white).
7. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA HVPS to the
main unit.
8. Remove PWBA HVPS from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach PWBA HVPS to the main unit.
2. Fasten PWBA HVPS to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J516) to PWBA HVPS, and attach WIRE ASSY 2BTR,
WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY DTN (white).
4. Attach COVER INNER L. (p327)
Figure 4-111. Removal of PWBA HVPS
CAUTION
Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet especially when removing
or inserting a Board. Before starting work with the Board, make
sure to touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth
to let your body come out free of static electricity.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J516
Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
F (505)
Ready Entirely Thin FIP-P19
G (506)
Ready Normal printing ---
H (507)
Ready Normal printing ---
Leg_Sec03_105EB
8)
7)
6)
7)
6)
6)
6)
7)
7)
4.2.11.3 PWB ASSY ROT
REMOVAL
5. Disconnect connector (P/J430), connector (P/J432) and connector (P/J433) from
PWB ASSY ROT.
6. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWB ASSY ROT to
the main unit.
7. Remove PWB ASSY ROT from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach PWB ASSY ROT to the main unit.
2. Fasten PWB ASSY ROT to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J430), connector (P/J432) and connector (P/J433) to PWB
ASSY ROT.
Figure 4-112. Removal of PWB ASSY ROT
CAUTION
Connector
No.
Disconnection
Leg_Sec03_106FA
6)
7)
6)
6)
6)
5)
4.2.11.4 PWBA CRUM
REMOVAL
6. Remove MOT ASSY ROT. (p424)
7. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening PWBA CRUM to the main
unit.
8. Disconnect connector (P/J429) from PWBA CRUM.
9. Remove PWBA CRUM from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach PWBA CRUM to the main unit.
2. Connect connector (P/J429) to PWBA CRUM.
3. Fasten PWBA CRUM to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping,
8mm).
4. Attach MOT ASSY ROT. (p424)
Figure 4-113. Removal of PWBA CRUM
CAUTION
When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA
MCU or the PWBA CRUM, the information that specific to each
printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced circuit
board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to specific
printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on another printer
unit. Do not reuse the board that previously installed on another
printer unit.
CAUTION
Do not replace both PWBA CRUM and PWBA MCU at a time.
(Replace one of them first and turn the product ON and OFF, and
then replace the other one if both of them should be replaced.)
Leg_Sec03_108FA
7)
9)
8)
4.2.11.5 PWBA MCU
When using the old PWBA MCU
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA MCU.
3. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening PWBA MCU to the
main unit.
4. Remove PWBA MCU from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach PWBA MCU to the main unit.
2. Fasten PWBA MCU to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
3. Connect all connectors to the PWBA MCU.
Figure 4-114. Removal of PWBA MCU
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_110RB
403 404 417 418 422
414
416
412
415
421
(Unused)
401 400
413
410 407 406
409
408
405
411
420
4)
3)
3)
3)
3)
2)
When replacing PWBA MCU with a new one
The life information of the replacement parts, correction parameters, etc are stored in
EEPROM on the MCU board (PWBA MCU). The EEPROM was mounted in IC
socket of the MCU board on previous models, whereas the EEPROM of this product is
soldered directly on the MCU board and it is quite difficult to replace it. Therefore,
when the PWBA MCU is replaced with a new one, the data in the EEPROM must be
backed-up and re-stored to the EEPROM on the new MCU board.
REMOVAL
1. To enter the maintenance mode, while holding down the [Left( )], [Up( )],
[Down( )] and [Right( )] buttons, turn the printer on.
2. Execute the "MCU DATA BackUp" in the maintenance menu to temporarily store
the data stored in the old EEPROM on PWBA MCU.
4. Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA MCU.
5. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening PWBA MCU to the
main unit.
6. Remove PWBA MCU from the main unit.
CAUTION
When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA
MCU or the PWBA CRUM, the information that specific to each
printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced
circuit board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to
specific printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on
another printer unit. Do not reuse the board that previously
installed on another printer unit.
When replacing the PWBA MCU, verify that the version of
firmware on new PWBA MCU matches the version of previous
PWBA MCU. If not, be sure to make them matches each other
by either upgrading or downgrading the firmware. Make sure to
execute [MCU Data Restore] in the MAINTENANCE menu only
after matching the firmware version.
CAUTION
When printer is in the following condition, [MCU DATA
BackUp] and [MCU DATA Restore] cannot be executed.
During power-save mode
During warming up
During printing
During adjustment
Once the backup has started, do not turn the printer's power off
until the engine stops.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach PWBA MCU to the main unit.
2. Fasten PWBA MCU to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
3. Connect all connectors to the PWBA MCU.
5. To enter the maintenance mode, while holding down the [Left( )], [Up( )],
[Down( )] and [Right( )] buttons, turn the printer on.
6. Execute the MCU DATA Restore in the maintenance menu to write the data
onto a new PWBA MCU.
CAUTION
Once the restoring has started, do not turn the printer's power off
until the engine stops.
Do not replace both PWBA CRUM and PWBA MCU at a time.
(Replace one of them first and turn the product ON and OFF, and
then replace the other one if both of them should be replaced.)
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J400 Service Req C0998 Printing is not possible. ---
P/J401
Ready Service Req
E537
Printing is not possible. Fuser error
P/J403 C Open Printing is not possible. The Cover Fuser is open.
P/J404 Ready Jam E, F Paper Jam at 2nd BTR ---
P/J405 Ready Entirely Faint ---
P/J407
Ready Service Req
E510
All LEDs light ROS Motor error
P/J408 E Open Printing is not possible. ---
P/J409 Service Req E547 Printing is not possible. Feeder Moter error
P/J410 Service Req C0998 Printing is not possible. ---
P/J412 Service Req E513 All LEDs flash NVM error
P/J413 Service Req E533 All LEDs flash Sensor HUM & TEMP error
P/J414
Ready Service Req
E542
All LEDs flash ---
P/J415 EPSON
The display does not
change from "EPSON"
---
P/J416 Install Photocondctr Printing is not possible. Photocondctr error
P/J417 Service Req E537 All LEDs flash Fuser error
P/J418 F Open Printing is not possible. ---
P/J421 Ready
The main unit prints
normally. 500-sheet
Cassette is not recognized.
Paper Feeder error
Connector
No.
Disconnection
4.2.11.6 LV/HVPS
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect all connectors from the LV/HVPS.
3. Remove the 6 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening LV/HVPS to the main
unit.
4. Remove the top part of LV/HVPS from the protrusion of the bracket attached to
the main unit while taking out the front side of LV/HVPS from between the main
unit and COVER FRONT L, and remove LV/HVPS.
REINSTALLATION
1. Put the top part of LV/HVPS inside the protrusion of the bracket while inserting
the front side of LV/HVPS in between the main unit frame and COVER FRONT L
to attach LV/HVPS.
2. Fasten LV/HVPS to the main unit with the 6 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
3. Connect all connectors to the LV/HVPS.
Figure 4-115. Removal of LV/HVPS
CAUTION
Leg_03_111RC
500
515
D
(1BTR)
A
(BCR)
C
(DEVE)
502 501
503
510
(Blue)
2)
3)
3)
3)
3)
3)
3)
4)-2
4)-1
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J500
Ready Service
Req E537
All LEDs flash ---
P/J501 --- Printing is not possible. ---
P/J502 Service Req C0998 All LEDs light ---
P/J503 --- Printed light and faint ---
P/J510
Release Cariage
Lock
Printed light and faint ---
P/J515 Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
A (508) Ready Entirely Fogged in Black FIP-P18
C (509) Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
D (504) Ready
Uneven Density/Thin-
Spot
FIP-P16
4.2.11.7 PWBA ESS (BOARD ASSY., MAIN)
REMOVAL
2. Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA FAX to
the PWBA ESS.
3. Disconnect the connector from the PWBA ESS and remove the PWBA FAX.
4. Remove the four SPACERs on the PWBA ESS.
5. Disconnect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
6. Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA ESS to
the CHASSIS ESS, and remove the three screws that secure the connectors for the
interface.
7. Remove the PWBA ESS taking out the interface connector from the hole on the
CHASSIS ESS.
Figure 4-116. Removal of PWBA ESS
CAUTION
CAUTION
The following Step 2 to 4 are for the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model).
The AcuLaser CX11 (base model) does not have PWBA FAX, and
four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) are attached instead of the
four SPACERs. Remove the four screws when disassembling the
base model.
Leg_03_109RC
CN705 CN502
CN602
CN501
CN601
CN704
CN703
CN701
CN702 CN405
CN410
FERRITE CORE
CN704(12 pin)
CN701(14 pin)
CN702(13 pin)
CAUTION
6)
6)
6)
6)
6)
4)
4)
6)
2)
2)
2)
4)
6)
7)
5)
3)
2) 4)
REINSTALLATION
1. Put the interface connector of the PWBA ESS into the hole of the CHASSIS ESS,
and attach the PWBA ESS.
2. Secure the PWBA ESS to the CHASSIS ESS with the four screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm) and secure the interface connector with the three screws.
3. Connect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
4. Attach the four SPACERs to the PWBA ESS.
5. Connect the PWBA FAX to CN410 on the PWBA ESS.
6. Secure the PWBA FAX to the SPACER with the four screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
CAUTION
the FERRITE CORE as shown in the figure. The following Step
4 to 6 are for the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model).
The AcuLaser CX11 (base model) does not have PWBA FAX,
and four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) are attached instead
of the four SPACERs. Attach the four screws when
reassembling the base model.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
CN405 --- --- ---
CN501 --- --- ---
CN502 Release Cariage Lock Printing is not possible. ---
CN601 Service Req C0998 All LEDs light ---
CN602 Ready Blank Print FIP-P2
CN702 Ready Printing Printing is not possible. ---
CN704
Service Req C0998
Ready
Printing is performed
normally except the
ADF is not recognized.
---
CN705 Ready
Printing is performed
normally except the
ADF is not recognized.
---
4.2.11.8 PWBA FUSER CONT
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA FUSER CONT.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening PWBA FUSER CONT
to the main unit.
5. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) fastening PWBA
FUSER CONT to the main unit.
6. Remove PWBA FUSER CONT from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss and protrusion on PWBA FUSER CONT with the hole on the main
unit, and attach PWBA FUSER CONT.
2. Fasten PWBA FUSER CONT to the main unit with the screw (silver, with external
toothed washer, 5 mm).
3. Fasten PWBA FUSER CONT to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 8mm).
4. Connect all connectors to the PWBA FUSER CONT.
Figure 4-117. Removal of PWBA FUSER CONT
CAUTION
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J1
Ready Service Req
E537
All LEDs flash ---
Leg_Sec03_113FB
3)
3)
6)
3)
4)
5)
4)
4.2.11.9 CHASSIS ASSY ESS (REFERENCE ONLY)
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
3. Pull out the disconnected connectors through the hole on the CHASSIS ESS.
4. Release the harnesses from the clamp on the CHASSIS ASSY ESS.
5. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the CHASSIS
ASSY ESS to the main unit.
6. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secures the HARNESS ASSY
PANEL.
7. Remove the CHASSIS ASSY ESS from the main unit.
Figure 4-118. Removal of CHASSIS ASSY ESS
CAUTION
Leg_03_114RC
CN705 CN502
CN602
CN501
CN601
CN704
CN703
CN701
CN702 CN405
FERRITE CORE
CN704(12 pin)
CN701(14 pin)
CN702(13 pin)
CAUTION
4)
[1]
6)
5)
5)
5)
5)
7)
5)
2)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the CHASSIS ASSY ESS to the main unit matching the protrusion of the
CHASSIS ASSY ESS with the hole of the main unit.
2. Secure the HARNESS ASSY PANEL with the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm).
3. Secure the CHASSIS ASSY ESS with the five screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
4. Put the connectors inside through the hole on the CHASSIS ESS.
5. Connect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
6. Secure the harnesses with the clamp on the CHASSIS ASSY ESS.
CAUTION
harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and
CHASSIS ESS.
CAUTION
the FERRITE CORE as shown in the figure.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
CN405 --- --- ---
CN501 --- --- ---
CN601 Service Req C0998 All LEDs light ---
CN602 Ready Blank Print
FIP-P2
4.2.12 500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER
4.2.12.1 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
REMOVAL
1. Draw out 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY until it comes to a stop, then slightly lift
up the front side, and remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY from 500 PAPER
FEEDER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the front side of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY into 500 PAPER FEEDER
with the front side of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY slightly lifted up, then hold
it horizontal and insert it all the way seated in 500 PAPER FEEDER.
Figure 4-119. Removal of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
Leg_Sec03_013EA
1)
4.2.12.2 GUIDE END ASSY
REMOVAL
1. Remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p442)
2. Remove PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p444)
3. Slide GUIDE END ASSY to the rear, match the 4 protrusions on GUIDE END
ASSY with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to remove.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the 4 protrusions on GUIDE END ASSY with the notches on CASSETTE
500, and attach.
2. Slide GUIDE END ASSY to the front, and insert the protrusion on GUIDE END
ASSY into the groove on PAPER SLIDE 500.
3. Attach PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p444)
4. Attach 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p442)
Figure 4-120. Removal of GUIDE END ASSY
CAUTION
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step during
attachment.
Leg_Sec03_014EA
3)
[2)]
4.2.12.3 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500
REMOVAL
2. Slide LOCK LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L, and unlock the locks.
3. Unhook the hooks on ROLL LINK fastened to the shaft of PLATE ASSY
BOTTOM 500 on both the left and right sides, and remove ROLL LINK, LOCK
LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L.
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 6 mm) (2 each on left and right) fastening
the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPER 500s to 500 PAPER CASSETTE
ASSY.
5. Remove the protrusion on PLATE ROLL STOPPER from the hole on 500 PAPER
CASSETTE ASSY, and remove the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs.
6. Press the two hooks on CASSETTE 500, and release the front side of PLATE
ASSY BOTTOM 500.
7. Remove the protrusion of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 from the indent on
PAPER SLIDE 500.
8. Draw out the shaft on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 from the oblong hole on
CASSETTE 500 while pushing the side of CASSETTE 500 outward, and remove
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
Figure 4-121. Removal of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 (1)
Leg_Sec03_015EA
2) 2)
3)-2
3)-1
3)-1
3)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on the rear of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 with SPRING NF.
2. Insert the shaft on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 into the oblong hole on
CASSETTE 500 while pushing the side of CASSETTE 500 outward, and attach
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
3. Fasten the front side of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 with the two hooks on
CASSETTE 500 while inserting the protrusion on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500
into the concave portion on PAPER SLIDE 500.
4. Match the protrusion on PLATE ROLL STOPPER with the hole on 500 PAPER
CASSETTE ASSY, and attach the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs.
5. Fasten the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs to 500 PAPER CASSETTE
ASSY with the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 6 mm) (2 each on left and right).
6. Attach LOCK LIFT R, LOCK LIFT L and ROLL LINK to the bearing on PLATE
ASSY BOTTOM 500 on both the left and right sides, and fasten the hook on
ROLL LINK to the groove on the shaft of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
7. Press PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 to lock LOCK LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L.
Figure 4-122. Removal of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 (2)
CAUTION
Make sure that the boss on the rear of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM
500 is inserted into SPRING NF.
CAUTION
The protrusion on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 must be inserted
into the concave portion on PAPER SLIDE 500.
Leg_Sec03_016EA
8)-1
4)
4)
5)
5)
4)
4)
8)-1
8)-2
6)
7)
6)
4.2.12.4 GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500AGUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
REMOVAL
2. Remove PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p444)
3. Unhook the hook on CASSETTE 500 fastening PINION 12, and remove PINION
12.
4. Slide GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 to the right, match the 3 protrusions on
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to
remove.
5. Slide GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 to the left, match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE
PAPER R ASSY 500 with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to remove.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 with the notches on
CASSETTE 500, and attach.
2. Match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 with the notches on
CASSETTE 500, and attach.
3. Set GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 to their
maximum open states, attach PINION 12 to CASSETTE 500, and fasten with the
hooks.
4. Attach PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p449)
Figure 4-123. GRemoval of GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R
ASSY 500
Leg_Sec03_515EA
5)
4)
3)-2
3)-1
4.2.12.5 COVER FRONT CST 500
REMOVAL
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER
FRONT CST 500 to 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY.
3. Unhook the hook on the base of COVER FRONT CST 500 using a small
screwdriver or a similar tool, pull down COVER FRONT CST 500 towards you to
release the three protrusions on the rear of COVER FRONT CST 500 from the
hole on the 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY, and remove COVER FRONT CST
500.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the three protrusions on the rear of COVER FRONT CST 500 with the hole
on 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY, attach COVER FRONT CST 500, and fasten
the hook on the base of COVER FRONT CST 500.
2. Fasten COVER FRONT CST 500 to 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY with the 2
screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm).
Figure 4-124. Removal of COVER FRONT CST 500
Leg_Sec03_018EA
3)-1
3)-2
2)
2)
3)-3
4.2.12.6 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)
REMOVAL
2. Turn LOCK MC TO FDR on both the left and right sides CW by 90 to unlock
from the main unit.
3. Holding the pitted area on the lower side of both the left and right sides of the main
unit, lift up the main unit, and remove from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the attachment holes on the main unit with the three bosses on 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and attach the main unit to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2. Turn LOCK MC TO FDR on both the left and right sides CCW by 90 to lock with
the main unit.
Figure 4-125. Removal of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
CAUTION
When performing the following work, the lengthwise direction of
the oval shape (section that enters the attachment hole on the main
unit) on the top of LOCK MC TO FDR must be facing left and
right.
Leg_Sec03_019RA
Unlock Lock
3)
2)
4.2.12.7 COVER LEFT 500
REMOVAL
2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER LEFT 500 to
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3. Remove COVER LEFT 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY while pulling the
rear side of COVER LEFT 500 outward.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on COVER LEFT 500 with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting the metal plate section of the frame at the front and rear of
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the clearance between the rib sections on the
front and rear of COVER LEFT 500, and attach COVER LEFT 500.
2. Fasten COVER LEFT 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws
Figure 4-126. Removal of COVER LEFT 500
Leg_Sec03_020EA
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
3)-1
3)-2
4.2.12.8 CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
REMOVAL
2. Remove COVER RIGHT 500. (p451)
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE FDR
ASSY 500.
4. Open CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
5. Press the attachment section on the right side of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 with
your finger to bend down, draw out the boss on the right side from the hole on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
REINSTALLATION
1. With CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 slightly open, insert the boss on the left side into
the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, then attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 to
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY while bending down the boss on the right side.
2. Close CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
3. Fasten CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8
mm).
4. Attach COVER RIGHT 500. (p451)
Figure 4-127. Removal of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
CAUTION
boss on CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
Leg_Sec03_021EA
3)
5)-2
5)-1
4.2.12.9 COVER RIGHT 500
REMOVAL
2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER RIGHT 500 to
3. Remove COVER RIGHT 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on COVER RIGHT 500 with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting the metal plate section of the frame at the front and rear of
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the clearance between the rib sections on the
front and rear of COVER RIGHT 500, and attach COVER RIGHT 500.
2. Fasten COVER RIGHT 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws
3. Attach 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p442)
Figure 4-128. Removal of COVER RIGHT 500
Leg_Sec03_022EA
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
3)
4.2.12.10 PWBA TRAY 500
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER LEFT 500. (p449)
2. Disconnect connector (P/J435), connector (P/J436) and connector (P/J437) from
PWBA TRAY 500.
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA TRAY 500 to
4. Remove PWBA TRAY 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the notch at the bottom right of PWBA TRAY 500 with the protrusion on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2. Fasten PWBA TRAY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 3 screws
3. Connect connector (P/J435), connector (P/J436) and connector (P/J437) to PWBA
TRAY 500.
4. Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p449)
Figure 4-129. Removal of PWBA TRAY 500
CAUTION
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J435 Ready
The main unit prints
normally. 500-sheet
Cassette is not recognized.
The 500-sheet Cassette
cannot be recognized.
P/J437 G Open Printing is not possible. ---
Leg_Sec03_030EA
3)
3)
3)
4)
4.2.12.11 PWBA MOT
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J440) and connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT.
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA MOT to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
4. Remove PWBA MOT from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the notch at the bottom right of PWBA MOT with the protrusion on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2. Fasten PWBA MOT to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 3 screws (silver,
with flange, 6 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J440) and connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT.
Figure 4-130. Removal of PWBA MOT
CAUTION
Connector
No.
Disconnection
CN1
Ready Paper Jam
LC, G
Paper Jam ---
CN2
Ready Paper Jam
LC, G
Printing is not possible. ---
Leg_Sec03_029EA
4)
3)
3)
3)
4.2.12.12 DRIVE ASSY FEED
REMOVAL
1. COVER LEFT 500OB (p449)
2. CLUTCH ASSY FEEDOB (p457)
3. Disconnect connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT and connector (P/J610) from
SOLENOID FEED.
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, 6 mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY FEED to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
5. Remove the protrusion on the top right of DRIVE ASSY FEED from 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove DRIVE ASSY FEED.
REINSTALLATION
1. Hook the protrusion on the top right of DRIVE ASSY FEED onto the notch on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and match the hole on DRIVE ASSY FEED with
the boss on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 4 screws
(silver, 6 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT and connector (P/J610) to
SOLENOID FEED.
4. Attach CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p457)
Figure 4-131. Removal of DRIVE ASSY FEED
CAUTION
connector of the connector (P/J610) on SOLENOID FEED on the
harness side.
CAUTION
The screws to be removed in the following work are those fastening
the four corners (marked by ) on DRIVE ASSY FEED. Other
screws must not be removed.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
CN2
Ready Paper Jam
LC, G
Paper Jam ---
P/J610 Paper Jam LC, G
Does not perform paper
feeding
No paper is loaded in the 500-
sheet Cassette
Leg_Sec03_023EA
CAUTION
3)
4)
4)
4)
4)
5)-1
5)-2
4.2.12.13 SOLENOID FEED
REMOVAL
2. Remove CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p457)
3. Remove DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p454)
4. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) fastening SOLENOID FEED to DRIVE ASSY
FEED.
5. Remove SOLENOID FEED from DRIVE ASSY FEED.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on SOLENOID FEED with the boss on DRIVE ASSY FEED.
2. Fasten SOLENOID FEED to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the screw (silver, 6 mm).
3. Attach DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p454)
Figure 4-132. Removal of SOLENOID FEED
Leg_Sec03_024FA
3)
5)
4)
4.2.12.14 MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
REMOVAL
2. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY FEED, and remove the harness on MOTOR
ASSY FEEDER.
3. Disconnect connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, 6 mm) fastening MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to
DRIVE ASSY FEED.
5. Remove MOTOR ASSY FEEDER from DRIVE ASSY FEED.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the harness of
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER facing up.
2. Fasten MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the 2 screws
(silver, 6 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT.
4. Fasten the harness on MOTOR ASSY FEEDER with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY
FEED.
Figure 4-133. Removal of MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
CAUTION
attachment direction of MOTOR ASSY FEEDER.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
CN2
Ready Paper Jam
LC, G
Paper Jam ---
Leg_Sec03_516EA
5)
4)
4)
2)
3)
4.2.12.15 CLUTCH ASSY FEED
REMOVAL
2. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY FEED, and remove the harness on
CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
3. Disconnect connector (P/J609) from CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
4. Remove the KL ring fastening CLUTCH ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY.
5. Remove CLUTCH ASSY FEED from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY FEED with the D cut surface on the
shaft of ROLL ASSY TURN 500, and attach CLUTCH ASSY FEED so that the
protrusion of DRIVE ASSY FEED enters the concave portion on CLUTCH ASSY
FEED.
2. Fasten CLUTCH ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the KL ring.
3. Connect connector (P/J609) to CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
4. Fasten the harness on CLUTCH ASSY FEED with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY
FEED.
Figure 4-134. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY FEED
Table 4-23. Symptoms when the connector is Loose
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J609 Ready Paper Jam E Paper Jam
sheet Cassette
Leg_Sec03_025EA
5)
2)
4)
3)
4.2.12.16 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
REMOVAL
1. Remove 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p448)
3. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1.
4. Disconnect connector (P/J435) from PWBA-TRAY 500.
5. Unhook the 2 hooks fastening HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1.
REINSTALLATION
1. Pass the connector (P/J43) on HARNESS-ASSY FEED through the hole on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2. Attach HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and fasten
with the hook.
3. Connect connector (P/J435) to PWBA-TRAY 500.
4. Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 with the clamp.
Figure 4-135. Removal of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J435
Ready
Printing using the 500-
sheet Cassette cannot be
made. The main unit
prints normally.
The 500-sheet Cassette
cannot be recognized.
Leg_Sec03_026FA
5)-2
5)-1
4)
3)
3)
4.2.12.17 ROLL ASSY TURN 500
REMOVAL
1. Remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p450)
6. Remove HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p472)
7. Remove CHUTE ASSY 500. (p462)
8. Remove the E-rings fastening both sides of the shaft on ROLL ASSY TURN 500
from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9. Remove the left and right BEARING FEEDs fastening ROLL ASSY TURN 500
from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
10. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY TURN 500 to the left, and draw out the shaft of
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 from the right-side bearing on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY to remove ROLL ASSY TURN 500.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL ASSY TURN 500 into the left-side bearing on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and slide ROLL ASSY TURN to the right to attach.
2. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING FEED with the left and right
bearings of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, attach BEARING FEED, and fasten
ROLL ASSY TURN 500.
3. Fasten the shafts on both sides on ROLL ASSY TURN to 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY with the E-rings.
4. Attach CHUTE ASSY 500. (p462)
5. Attach HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p472)
10. Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p450)
Figure 4-136. Removal of ROLL ASSY TURN 500
Leg_Sec03_027EA
8)
9)
10)
8)
9)
4.2.12.18 SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
REMOVAL
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
4. Remove CAP FEEDER from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
5. Unhook the 2 hooks fastening SWITCH FEEDER DOOR to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
6. Disconnect connector (P/J121) from SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J121) to SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
2. Match the hook on SWITCH FEEDER DOOR with the attachment position, and
attach to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3. Pull the harness of the connector on SWITCH FEEDER DOOR from the outside
of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and take up any slack from the harness on the
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR side.
4. Match the boss on CAP FEEDER with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY,
and attach CAP FEEDER.
5. Fasten CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
Figure 4-137. Removal of SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
CAUTION
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step during
attachment.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J121
G Open
made. The main unit
prints normally.
500-sheet Cassette Rear
Cover is opened
Leg_Sec03_028FA
4)
3) 5)-2
5)-1
6)
[3)]
4.2.12.19 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
REMOVAL
1. Remove 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p448)
3. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2.
4. Disconnect connector (P/J436) from PWBA-TRAY 500.
5. Unhook the 2 hooks fastening HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and fasten
with the hook.
2. Connect connector (P/J436) to PWBA-TRAY 500.
3. Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 with the clamp.
Figure 4-138. Removal of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
Leg_Sec03_031FA
3)
3)
4)
5)-1
5)-2
4.2.12.20 CHUTE ASSY 500
REMOVAL
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET MAG R to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
10. Remove BRACKET MAG R from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
11. Remove the right-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 from the bearing on GUIDE
CST R.
12. Remove the left-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 from the bearing on GUIDE
CST L, and remove CHUTE ASSY 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
Figure 4-139. Removal of CHUTE ASSY 500 (1)
Leg_Sec03_041EA
8)
8)
9)
10)
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the left-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 into the bearing on GUIDE CST L.
2. Insert the right-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 into the bearing on GUIDE CST
R, and attach CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3. Match the hole on BRACKET MAG R with the boss on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting BRACKET MAG R into the notch on 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and attach BRACKET MAG R.
4. Fasten BRACKET MAG R to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
6 mm).
5. Fasten CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 2 screws
(silver, tapping, 8 mm).
Figure 4-140. Removal of CHUTE ASSY 500 (2)
Leg_Sec03_517EA
11)
12)
4.2.12.21 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
REMOVAL
9. Remove LEVER 500 and SPRING LEVER 500 from CHUTE ASSY 500 while
bending down the bosses on both sides of LEVER 500.
10. Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 from CHUTE ASSY 500 while bending
down the bosses on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
Figure 4-141. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to damage
the LEVER 500 boss.
When performing the following work, take care not to lose
SPRING LEVER 500.
CAUTION
the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 boss.
When performing the following work, take care not to lose
SPRING RETARD.
Leg_Sec03_038FA
CAUTION CAUTION
10)-1
10)-1
10)-2
9)-1
9)-3
9)-1
9)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Match SPRING RETARD with the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500, and attach
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 to CHUTE ASSY 500 while bending down the
bosses on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
2. Attach LEVER 500 to CHUTE ASSY 500 while attaching SPRING LEVER 500
to the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500 and bending down the bosses on both sides of
LEVER 500.
CAUTION
boss of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
CAUTION
Make sure that SPRING RETARD is in the boss on HOLDER
ASSY RETARD 500 and the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500.
the boss of LEVER 500.
attachment direction of LEVER 500.
CAUTION
Make sure that SPRING LEVER 500 is in the boss on LEVER
500 and the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500.
The protrusion on LEVER 500 must be firmly inserted into the
concave portion on the bottom of HOLDER ASSY RETARD
500.
4.2.12.22 FILM ASSY FDR
REMOVAL
1. Open CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
2. Remove the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening FILM ASSY FDR to
CHUTE ASSY 500.
3. Remove FILM ASSY FDR from CHUTE ASSY 500.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on FILM ASSY FDR with the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500, and
attach FILM ASSY FDR while inserting the film base on FILM ASSY FDR to the
inside of CHUTE ASSY 500.
2. Fasten FILM ASSY FDR to CHUTE ASSY 500 with the 4 screws (silver, tapping,
8 mm).
3. Close CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
Figure 4-142. Removal of FILM ASSY FDR
Leg_Sec03_205FB
1)
3)
2)
4.2.12.23 STOPPER CST R
REMOVAL
9. Remove GUIDE CST R. (p468)
10. Remove STOPPER CST R and SPG LOCK CST LL from GUIDE CST R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPG LOCK CST LL to the boss on STOPPER CST R, and attach
STOPPER CST R to GUIDE CST R.
2. Attach GUIDE CST R. (p468)
Figure 4-143. Removal of STOPPER CST R
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPG
LOCK CST LL.
CAUTION
Make sure that SPG LOCK CST LL is inserted into the boss on
STOPPER CST R and the boss on GUIDE CST R.
Leg_Sec03_181FA
10)-2
10)-1
4.2.12.24 GUIDE CST R
REMOVAL
9. Remove the 5 screws (silver, tapping, 6mm) fastening GUIDE CST R to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
10. Remove GUIDE CST R from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY together with SPG
LOCK CST LL and STOPPER CST R.
11. Remove STOPPER CST R. (p467)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach STOPPER CST R. (p467)
2. Match the boss on the GUIDE CST R with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY, and attach GUIDE CST R.
3. Fasten GUIDE CST R to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws (silver,
tapping, 6mm).
Figure 4-144. Removal of GUIDE CST R
Leg_Sec03_039EA
9)
9)
9)
9)
10)
9)
4.2.12.25 GUIDE CST L
REMOVAL
9. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
10. Remove CAP FEEDER from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
11. Remove the 5 screws (silver, tapping, 6mm) fastening GUIDE CST L to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
12. To remove GUIDE CST L from SWITCH FEEDER DOOR, slide GUIDE CST L
slightly to the right, and remove GUIDE CST L from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
together with SPG LOCK CST LL and STOPPER CST L.
13. Remove STOPPER CST L. (p471)
Figure 4-145. Removal of GUIDE CST L
Leg_Sec03_040EA
10)
9)
11)
11)
11)
11)
11)
12)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach STOPPER CST L. (p471)
2. Match the boss on GUIDE CST L with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
while inserting SWITCH FEEDER DOOR into the hole on the rear of GUIDE
CST L, and attach GUIDE CST L.
3. Fasten GUIDE CST L to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws (silver,
tapping, 6mm).
4. Match the boss on CAP FEEDER with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY,
and attach CAP FEEDER.
5. Fasten CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
4.2.12.26 STOPPER CST L
REMOVAL
9. Remove GUIDE CST L. (p469)
10. Remove STOPPER CST L from GUIDE CST L.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPG LOCK CST LL to the boss on STOPPER CST L, and attach
STOPPER CST L to GUIDE CST L.
2. Attach GUIDE CST L. (p469)
Figure 4-146. Removal of STOPPER CST L
CAUTION
When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPG
LOCK CST LL.
CAUTION
Make sure that the boss of STOPPER CST and that of GUIDE CST
L are inserted into SPG LOCK CST LL.
Leg_Sec03_182FA
10)-2
10)-1
4.2.12.27 HOUSING ASSY FEED
REMOVAL
5. Unhook the hook on GEAR FEED fastened to the shaft on HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove GEAR FEED.
6. Disconnect connector (P/J618) from HOUSING ASSY FEED.
7. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening HOUSING ASSY FEED
to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
8. Insert both hands from the front side of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, pull the 2
levers on HOUSING ASSY FEED towards you, and remove the boss on
HOUSING ASSY FEED from the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9. Slide HOUSING ASSY FEED to the front side, unhook the 4 hooks at the top
fastened to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, remove the hole on HOUSING ASSY
FEED from the protrusion at the front side of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and
push down HOUSING ASSY FEED to remove.
Figure 4-147. Removal of HOUSING ASSY FEED
Leg_Sec03_032EB
CAUTION
ROLL ASSY
TURN 500
ACTUATOR
T/R
9)-1 9)-1
5)-1
5)-2
6)
7)
9)-2
8)-2 8)-2
8)-1 8)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the 4 hooks on HOUSING ASSY FEED with the attachment positions, and
attach to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2. Slide HOUSING ASSY FEED to the rear side, insert the boss on HOUSING
ASSY FEED into the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and insert the
protrusion on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the hole at the front side of
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
3. Fasten HOUSING ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw
4. Connect connector (P/J618) to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
5. Attach GEAR FEED to the shaft on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and fasten the hook
on GEAR FEED to the groove on the shaft of HOUSING ASSY FEED.
CAUTION
ACTUATOR T/R attached to HOUSING ASSY FEED. Also, make
sure that ACTUATOR T/R locates at the position above ROLL
ASSY TURN 500.
Connector
No.
Disconnection
P/J618 Ready Paper Out
made. The main unit
prints normally.
sheet Cassette
4.2.12.28 SENSOR NO PAPER
REMOVAL
6. Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER FEED to
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
7. Remove COVER FEED from HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8. Unhook the 3 hooks fastening SENSOR NO PAPER to HOUSING ASSY FEED,
and remove SENSOR NO PAPER.
9. Disconnect connector (P/J119) from SENSOR NO PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J119) to SENSOR NO PAPER.
2. Match the hook on SENSOR NO PAPER with the attachment position while
inserting ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST into the sensor on SENSOR NO PAPER,
and attach to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
3. Attach COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
4. Fasten COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED with the 2 screws (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
Figure 4-148. Removal of SENSOR NO PAPER
CAUTION
positional relationship between SENSOR NO PAPER and
ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST.
Leg_Sec03_033FA
CAUTION
8)-1
6)
6)
7)
8)-2
9)
4.2.12.29 ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST
REMOVAL
6. Unhook the 3 hooks fastening CAP ACTUATOR to HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
remove CAP ACTUATOR.
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
9. Draw out the shaft of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST from the hook on HOUSING
ASSY FEED, slide along the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and remove
Figure 4-149. Removal of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST (1)
Figure 4-150. Removal of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST (2)
Leg_Sec03_206FA
6)-1
6)-2
Leg_Sec03_034FA
CAUTION
7)
7)
8)
9)-2
9)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft on ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST from the notch on HOUSING
ASSY FEED.
2. Fit the shaft on ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST onto the hook on HOUSING
ASSY FEED while inserting ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST into the sensor on
SENSOR NO PAPER, and attach.
tapping, 8 mm).
5. Match the hole on CAP ACTUATOR with the boss on HOUSING ASSY FEED,
and attach CAP ACTUATOR.
CAUTION
positional relationship between SENSOR NO PAPER and
4.2.12.30 ACTUATOR T/R
REMOVAL
6. Remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p479)
7. Remove SPRING ACTUATOR from the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8. Draw out the shaft on ACTUATOR T/R from the hook on HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove ACTUATOR T/R together with SPRING ACTUATOR.
9. Remove SPRING ACTUATOR from ACTUATOR T/R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING ACTUATOR to ACTUATOR T/R.
2. Fit the shaft on ACTUATOR T/R into the hook on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
attach ACTUATOR T/R together with SPRING ACTUATOR.
3. Hook SPRING ACTUATOR onto the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED.
4. Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p479)
Figure 4-151. Removal of ACTUATOR T/R
CAUTION
SPRING ACTUATOR must be firmly hooked onto the notch on
ACTUATOR T/R and HOUSING ASSY FEED.
Leg_Sec03_035FA
CAUTION
9)
8)
7)
4.2.12.31 SENSOR T/R
REMOVAL
6. Remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p479)
7. Remove ACTUATOR T/R. (p477)
8. Disconnect connector (P/J120) from SENSOR T/R.
9. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR T/R to HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
remove SENSOR T/R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR T/R with the attachment positions, and attach to
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
2. Connect connector (P/J120) to SENSOR T/R.
3. Attach ACTUATOR T/R. (p477)
4. Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p479)
Figure 4-152. Removal of SENSOR T/R
Leg_Sec03_036FA
8)
9)-2
9)-1
4.2.12.32 ROLL ASSY FEED 500
REMOVAL
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8. Remove the E-rings fastening both sides of SHAFT FEED from HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove the left and right BEARING SLEEVEs.
9. Temporarily slide SHAFT FEED to the right, draw out SHAFT FEED from the
left-side bearing on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and remove together with ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL SUPPORT 500.
10. Unhook the hook on ROLL SUPPORT 500 on the right side fastened to SHAFT
FEED, and remove ROLL SUPPORT 500.
11. Unhook the hook on ROLL ASSY FEED 500 fastened to SHAFT FEED, and
remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500.
Figure 4-153. Removal of ROLL ASSY FEED 500
Leg_Sec03_037FA
6)
8)-2
8)-1
8)-1
8)-2
11)-2
11)-1
10)-1
10)-2
6)
7)
9)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500 to SHAFT FEED so that the hook on ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 is facing the right side, and fasten the hook on ROLL ASSY
FEED 500 to the groove on SHAFT FEED.
2. Attach ROLL SUPPORT 500 to SHAFT FEED, and fasten the hook on ROLL
SUPPORT 500 to the groove on SHAFT FEED.
3. Insert the right side of SHAFT FEED into the right-side bearing on HOUSING
ASSY FEED, then slide SHAFT FEED to the left, and attach together with ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL SUPPORT 500.
4. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING SLEEVE with the left and right
bearings of HOUSING ASSY FEED, attach BEARING SLEEVE, and fasten both
sides of SHAFT FEED with the E-rings.
tapping, 8 mm).
CAUTION
attachment direction of ROLL ASSY FEED 500.
DI SASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Scanner Section 481
4.3 Scanner Section
4.3.1 ADF Unit
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Scanner. (p306)
2. Disconnect the cable of the ADF Unit from the IR A Assy.
3. Remove the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type, P-head) that secure the ADF Unit
to the IR A Assy.
4. Open the ADF Unit and remove it toward upward.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the ADF HINGE of the ADF Unit into the hole on the IR A Assy, and close
the ADF Unit.
2. Secure the ADF Unit to the IR A Assy with the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type,
P-head).
3. Connect the cable of the ADF Unit to the IR A Assy.
4. Install the Scanner. (p306)
Figure 4-154. Removal of ADF Unit
CABLE
IR A ASSY
3) 3)
4)
4)
2)
ADF HINGE
ADF Unit
ADF HINGE
4.3.2 COVER
4.3.2.1 IR COVER A ASSY
REMOVAL
2. Remove the ADF Unit. (p481)
3. Remove the screw (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the both left and
right HINGE HOLDER 2s to the IR COVER A ASSY.
4. Turn the Scanner over and remove the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head)
that secure the left and right HINNGE HOLDER 2s to the IR BASE A ASSY to
remove the two HINGE HOLDER 2s from the assy.
5. Remove the seven screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the IR
COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY.
Figure 4-155. Removal of IR COVER A ASSY (1)
Obverse Side 3) IR COVER A ASSY
Reverse Side IR BASE A ASSY
5)
4)
HINGE HOLDER 2
6. Turn the Scanner back to normal orientation, and remove the IR COVER A ASSY
from the IR BASE A ASSY. There are two hooks on left and right shorter sides of
the IR BASE A ASSY to secure the IR COVER A ASSY, so push the shorter side
of the IR BASE A ASSY while pulling the IR COVER A ASSY upward to
remove it (do the procedure for both left and right side one by one).
7. Remove a piece of tape that bundles the harness and FFC of the IR COVER A ASSY.
8. Pull out the IR COVER A ASSY harness through the hole on the IR BASE A ASSY.
CHECK
POINT
The two hooks of the IR BASE A ASSY that secure the IR
COVER A ASSY are indicated on the picture below.
If the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY and the ADF IR LOCK ASSY
prevent the IR COVER A ASSY from separating from the IR
BASE A ASSY, access them from the bottom of the IR BASE A
ASSY to set them in position so that they do not interfere the IR
COVER A ASSY.
Hooks
IR BASE A ASSY
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
ADF IR LOCK ASSY
Bottom of the IR BASE A ASSY
IR COVER A ASSY IR BASE A ASSY
6)
8)
IR COVER A ASSY
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
ADF IR LOCK ASSY
Through-hole for the Harness
Harness
REINSTALLATION
1. Draw the IR COVER A ASSY harness through the hole on the IR BASE A ASSY.
2. Bundle the harness and the FFC of the IR COVER A ASSY with a piece of tape.
3. Attach the IR COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY inserting the IR
ENGINE LOCK ASSY and the ADF IR LOCK ASSY into the holes on the
reverse side of the IR COVER A ASSY.
4. Turn the Scanner over and secure the IR COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A
ASSY with seven screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head).
5. Attach the two HINGE HOLDER 2s to left and right grooves on the IR BASE A
ASSY respectively, and secure them with the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-
head) (one screw for one HINGE HOLDER 2).
6. Turn the Scanner back to normal orientation, and secure the left and right HINGE
HOLDER 2s to the IR COVER A ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-
type, B-head) respectively.
7. Attach the ADF Unit. (p481)
Figure 4-159. Reinstallation of IR COVER A ASSY
Figure 4-160. Reinstallation of HINGE HOLDER 2
CHECK
POINT
The IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY may fall off the IR BASE A ASSY
while attaching the IR COVER A ASSY. In such case, reattach it
following the procedure given below.
1. Pass the pintle through the center hole on the IR ENGINE
LOCK ASSY, and hitch one end of the spring to the oblong
hole on the assy.
2. Attach the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY
with the pintle placed on the bearing of the IR BASE A ASSY.
3. Hitch the other end of the spring to the protrusion on the IR
BASE A ASSY.
1) 2) 3)
Protrusion Pintle
Spring
Bottom of the IR BASE A ASSY IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
IR COVER A ASSY
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
ADF IR LOCK ASSY
Through-hole for the Harness
Harness
Through-hole for the ADF IR LOCK ASSY
Through-hole for the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
Groove on
the IR BASE A ASSY
Groove on
the IR BASE A ASSY
IR BASE A ASSY
HINGE HOLDER 2
4.3.3 IR A Assy
4.3.3.1 CCD MODULE ASSY
REMOVAL
3. Remove the IR COVER A ASSY. (p482)
4. Slide the PULLEY ASSY in the direction of an arrow shown in Figure 4-161 to
release the tension of the IR TIMING BELT, and remove the IR TIMING BELT
from the pulley of the PULLEY ASSY.
5. Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the center.
6. Turn the CCD MODULE ASSY upward upon the IR SHAFT, and hold it to
remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, B-type, P-head) that secure the FFC CR to
the CCD MODULE ASSY.
7. Disconnect the FFC CR from the connector on the CCD MODULE ASSY.
8. Release the left end of the IR SHAFT from the bearing of the IR BASE ASSY, and
remove the CCD MODULE ASSY together with the IR SHAFT.
9. Pull out the IR SHAFT from the CCD MODULE ASSY.
Figure 4-161. Releasing the Tension of IR TIMING BELT
Figure 4-162. Removal of FFC CLIP
Figure 4-163. Removal of CCD MODULE ASSY
PULLEY ASSY
4)
IR TIMING BELT
FFC CLIP
FFC CR
5)
6)-2
6)-1
CCD MODULE ASSY
IR SHAFT
CCD MODULE ASSY
8)-2
8)-1
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
REINSTALLATION
1. Put the IR SHAFT through the shaft hole of the CCD MODULE ASSY.
2. Insert the right end of the IR SHAFT into the right bearing of the IR BASE ASSY,
and then push the left end into the left bearing of the assy. See Figure 4-163.
3. Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the center.
4. Attach the PULLEY ASSY to the IR BASE ASSY.
5. Draw the FFC CR through the FFC CLIP, and turn the CCD MODULE ASSY
upward upon the IR SHAFT and hold it to secure the FFC CLIP to the CCD
MODULE ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, B-type, P-head). See Figure
4-162.
6. Connect the FFC CR to the connector on the CCD MODULE ASSY.
7. Hitch the IR TIMING BELT to the gear of the MOTOR ASSY, and to the pulley
of the PULLEY ASSY by sliding the PULLEY ASSY leftward. See Figure 4-161.
8. Attach the IR COVER A ASSY. (p482)
4.3.3.2 MOTOR ASSY
REMOVAL
4. Remove the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p485)
5. Pull the harnesses and the grounding wire of the MOTOR ASSY to the inner side
of the IR BASE A ASSY, and release the MOTOR ASSY harnesses from the
groove on the IR BASE A ASSY.
6. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the harness tie.
7. Cut the harness tie, and remove the ferrite core from the harnesses.
8. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the MOTOR
ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the MOTOR ASSY from the IR
BASE A ASSY.
Figure 4-164. Removal of MOTOR ASSY
CAUTION
When removing/reinstalling the MOTOR ASSY, be careful not to
displace or remove the carriage home position detection flag.
5)-1
5)-2
6)
8)
Harnesses Harness Tie IR BASE A ASSY
Grounding Wire
MOTOR ASSY Ferrite Core HP Flag
REINSTALLATION
1. Wind the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY around the ferrite core once, and secure
them with the harness tie.
2. Draw the grounding wire through the hole of the IR BASE A ASSY.
3. Install the MOTOR ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY matching the guide pins of
the IR BASE A ASSY with the positioning holes of the MOTOR ASSY.
4. Secure the bottom-right corner of the MOTOR ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm,
P-type, B-head), and secure the upper-left corner of the assy. together with the
grounding terminal with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head).
5. Secure the harness tie to the IR BASE A ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-
type, B-head).
6. Put the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY through the hole of the IR BASE A
ASSY, and secure the harnesses on the groove of the IR BASE A ASSY.
7. Attach the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p485)
Figure 4-165. Reinstallation of MOTOR ASSY
CHECK
POINT
When securing the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY on the groove of
the IR BASE A ASSY, arrange them in the prescribed order; brown,
orange, black, and yellow from the top as shown in Figure 4-165.
Place the harnesses in the order of brown,
orange, black, and yellow from the top.
Wind harnesses once around the ferrite core
Ferrite Core
5)
Grounding Wire
6)
MOTOR ASSY
4)
Positioning Holes and Guide Pins
4.3.3.3 PCB ASSY
REMOVAL
4. Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the left side (home position side).
5. Disconnect the FFC BOARD from the connector on the PCB ASSY.
6. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the PCB ASSY
to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the PCB ASSY from the IR BASE A
ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the positioning holes of the PCB ASSY and the guide pins of the IR BASE
A ASSY, and secure the PCB ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head).
2. Connect the FFC BOARD to the P201 connector on the PCB ASSY.
Figure 4-166. Removal of PCB ASSY
CCD MODULE ASSY
4)
6)
Positioning Holes
and Guide Pins
5)
IR BASE A ASSY
PCB ASSY FFC BOARD
4.3.3.4 FFC CR
REMOVAL
4. Remove the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p485)
5. Remove the MOTOR ASSY. (p487)
6. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the PLATE
HARNESS 2 to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the PLATE HARNESS 2
from the IR BASE A ASSY.
7. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secures the PLATE
HARNESS to the IR BASE A ASSY, and slide the PLATE HARNESS in the
direction of an arrow shown in the figure to remove it from the IR BASE A ASSY.
See Figure 4-167.
8. Disconnect the FFC BOARD from the connector on the PCB ASSY.
9. Remove the sponge adhered to the FFC CR, and pull the FFC CR to the inner side
of the IR BASE A ASSY through the hole of the assy.
10. Remove the piece of tape that bundles the FFC CR, and remove the FFC CR from
the ferrite core of the CORE ASSY.
11. Remove the FFC CR from the IR BASE A ASSY.
Figure 4-167. Removal of FFC CR (1)
Figure 4-168. Removal of FFC CR (2)
CHECK
POINT
The FFC CR is secured on the IR BASE A ASSY with two-sided
tapes. Remove the FFC CR slowly and carefully.
Ferrite Core
IR BASE A ASSY
PLATE HARNESS
PLATE HARNESS2
8)
6)
7)-2
7)-1
FFC CR
Tape Sponge
IR BASE A ASSY
11)
10)
9)
REINSTALLATION
1. Put the FFC CR through the ferrite core of the CORE ASSY, and bundle the FFC
CR with a piece of tape.
2. Pull out the FFC CR outward through the hole of the IR BASE A ASSY, and
secure the FFC CR to the IR BASE ASSY with the sponge.
3. Draw the FFC CR under the PLATE-HW, and secure the FFC CR to the IR BASE
A ASSY with two-sided tapes aligning the FFC CR with the reference line on the
IR BASE A ASSY.
4. Hitch the hook of the PLATE HARNESS to the IR PLATE FFC, and secure the
PLATE HARNESS to the IR BASE A ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type,
B-head).
5. Secure the PLATE HARNESS 2 to the IR BASE A ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) matching the positioning holes of the PLATE
HARNESS 2 with the guide pins of the IR BASE A ASSY.
6. Connect the FFC BOARD to the connector on the PCB ASSY.
7. Install the MOTOR ASSY. (p487)
8. Attach the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p485)
Figure 4-169. Reinstallation of FFC CR (1)
Figure 4-170. Reinstallation of FFC CR (2)
CHECK
POINT
Attach the sponge, which secures the FFC CR, to the IR BASE A
ASSY with a two-sided tape.
Sponge
PLATE-HW
Ferrite Core
FFC CR
Two-sided Tapes Attaching Positions Reference Line for attaching the FFC CR
PLATE HARNESS
PLATE HARNESS2
IR PLATE FFC
Hook of the PLATE HARNESS
Positioning Holes and Guide Pins
DI SASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ADF Section 492
4.4 ADF Section
4.4.1 COVER
4.4.1.1 ADF COVER R
REMOVAL
3. Turn the ADF Unit over, remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that
secure the HOOK FIX PLATE to the SDH COVER, and remove the HOOK FIX
PLATE from the SDH COVER. See Figure 4-171.
4. Turn the ADF Unit back to the normal orientation, open the ADF COVER C, and
remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, S-type, A-head) that secures the ADF COVER R.
See Figure 4-172.
5. Release the seven tabs of the ADF COVER R from the SDH COVER in the order
shown in , and remove the ADF COVER R. See Figure 4-173.
Figure 4-171. Removal of HOOK FIX PLATE
Figure 4-172. Removal of ADF COVER R (1)
Figure 4-173. Removal of ADF COVER R (2)
CHECK
POINT
To release the seven tabs, push them with a flat-blade screwdriver or
similar tool toward the direction shown in Figure 4-173.
HOOK FIX PLATE
SDH COVER
3)
ADF COVER C
4)-2
4)-1
7
Notch
Tab
3
Notch
Tab
Obverse Side
ADF COVER R
ADF HINGE Reverse Side ADF HINGE
1 2
5
6
4
Tab
REINSTALLATION
1. Open the ADF COVER C.
2. Put the cable of the ADF Unit into the notch of the ADF COVER R, and attach the
ADF COVER R to the SDH COVER inserting the seven tabs of the ADF COVER
R in the order shown in Figure 4-173.
3. Secure the ADF COVER R to the SDH COVER with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, S-
type, A-head). See Figure 4-172.
4. Match the positioning hole of the HOOK FIX PLATE with the guide pin of the
SDH COVER, and secure the HOOK FIX PLATE to the SDG COVER with the
two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-174.
Figure 4-174. Reinstallation of HOOK FIX PLATE
HOOK FIX PLATE
SDH COVER 3)
Positioning Hole and Guide Pin
4.4.1.2 CABLE
REMOVAL
3. Remove the ADF COVER R. (p492)
4. Disconnect P301 connector from the ADF PCB ASSY.
5. Remove the screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secures the grounding wire
of the CABLE, and remove the CABLE.
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE with the screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-
head).
2. Connect the CABLE connector to P301 connector on the ADF PCB ASSY.
3. Attach the ADF COVER R. (p492)
Figure 4-175. Removal of CABLE
CABLE
4)
Grounding Wire
5)
4.4.1.3 PCB COVER
REMOVAL
4. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the PCB
COVER, and remove the PCB COVER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the longer lateral side of the PCB COVER into the gap between the ADF
PCB ASSY and the SDH COVER, and secure the PCB COVER with the two
screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-176.
Figure 4-176. Removal of PCB COVER
PCB COVER
ADF PCB ASSY
SDH COVER
The Longer Lateral Side
Gap
4)
4.4.1.4 ADF COVER C
REMOVAL
4. Remove the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p515)
5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF
COVER C.
6. Close the ADF COVER C.
7. Lift the paper feeding side of the ADF COVER C, and remove it from the ADF
BASE ASSY toward the direction shown in Figure 4-178.
REINSTALLATION
1. Close the ADF BASE ASSY, and attach the ADF COVER C to the ADF BASE
ASSY matching the hooks of the ADF COVER C with the holes on the ADF
BASE ASSY. See Figure 4-179.
2. Secure the ADF COVER C to the ADF BASE ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head).
Figure 4-177. Removal of ADF COVER C (1)
Figure 4-178. Removal of ADF COVER C (2)
Figure 4-179. Reinstallation of ADF COVER C
ADF COVER C
5)
ADF COVER C
7)-2
7)-1
ADF COVER C Hooks
Hooks
4.4.1.5 ADF HINGE
REMOVAL
4. Remove the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type, P-head) that secure the left and
right ADF HINGEs to the SDH COVER, and remove the two ADF HINGEs.
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the left and right ADF HINGEs to the SDH COVER with the two screws
(M3 x 12mm, P-type, P-head).
Figure 4-180. Removal of ADF HINGE (1)
Figure 4-181. Removal of ADF HINGE (2)
Obverse Side
4)-1
ADF HINGE
SDH COVER
Reverse Side
4)-2
ADF HINGE
SDH COVER
4.4.2 ADF BASE ASSY
4.4.2.1 ADF BASE ASSY
REMOVAL
5. Remove the ADF COVER C. (p496)
6. Disconnect the all connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY.
7. Remove the four screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF
FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER, remove the COVER SPRING ASSY, and
then remove the ADF FRAME ASSY together with the ADF BASE ASSY.
Figure 4-182. Removal of ADF BASE ASSY (1)
7)
COVER SPRING ASSY
8. Cut the tie that secure the ferrite core to the harness of the ADF BASE ASSY, and
remove the ferrite core from the harness.
9. Release the two harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY from the two CABLE TIEs.
10. Release the harnesses of the ADF FRAME ASSY from the notch on the ADF
BASE ASSY.
11. Open the ADF BASE ASSY.
12. Viewed from the direction as shown in Figure 4-184, push the right frame of the
ADF FRAME ASSY outward to remove the right pintle of the ADF BASE ASSY
from the bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY.
13. Pull out the left pintle of the ADF BASE ASSY from the left bearing of the ADF
FRAME ASSY, and remove the ADF BASE ASSY.
10)
Ferrite Core Tie Harnesses
CABLE TIE
ADF FRAME ASSY
ADF BASE ASSY
12)-2
12)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Viewed from the direction as shown in Figure 4-184, insert the left pintle of the
ADF BASE ASSY into the left bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY, and push the
right frame of the ADF FRAME ASSY outward to insert the right pintle into the
right bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY. See Figure 4-184.
2. Secure the harnesses of the ADF FRAME ASSY into the notch of the ADF BASE
ASSY. See Figure 4-183.
3. Secure the harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY with the two CABLE TIEs. See
Figure 4-183.
4. Bundle the harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY, wind them around the ferrite core
once, and then secure the ferrite core to the harnesses with the tie.
5. Install the ADF FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER matching the positioning
hole of the ADF FRAME ASSY with the guide pin of the SDH COVER.
6. Attach the COVER SPRING ASSY to the ADF FRAME ASSY matching the
positioning hole of the COVER SPRING ASSY with the guide pin of the ADF
FRAME ASSY, and secure them to the SDH COVER with the four screws (M3 x
8 mm, P-type, A-head).
7. Connect the CABLE connector of the ADF FRAME ASSY and the ADF BASE
ASSY to the ADF PCB ASSY.
8. Attach the ADF COVER C. (p496)
CHECK
POINT
When attaching the ADF FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER,
make sure to match the positioning hole and the guide pin.
COVER SPRING ASSY
Guide Pin of the SDH COVER and Positioning
Hole of the ADF FRAME ASSY
Guide Pin of the ADF FRAME ASSY and
Positioning Hole of the COVER SPRING ASSY
4.4.2.2 E CLUTCH UNIT
REMOVAL
6. Remove the ADF BASE ASSY. (p498)
7. Release the hook of the GEAR 20T, and remove the GEAR 20T.
8. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the CLUTCH
FIX PLATE.
9. Release the CLUTCH FIX PLATE from the guide pin of the ADF BASE, and
slide the CLUTCH FIX PLATE leftward.
10. Pull out the TRANSFER SHAFT leftward from the hole on the ADF BASE.
11. Pull out the CLUTCH SHAFT from the MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
12. Release the harnesses of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH from the notch of the ADF
BASE, and remove the MAGNETIC CLUTCH. See Figure 4-186.
Figure 4-185. Removal of E CLUTCH UNIT (1)
Figure 4-186. Removal of E CLUTCH UNIT (2)
CLUTCH FIX PLATE
GEAR 20T
ADF BASE
CLUTCH SHAFT MAGNETIC CLUTCH
TRANSFER SHAFT
8) 10)
9)
Positioning Hole
and Guide Pin
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
Notch
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the CLUTCH SHAFT to the bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE, and
insert the CLUTCH SHAFT to the MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
2. Insert the antirotation tab of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH into the hole of the ADF
BASE, and secure the MAGNETIC CLUTCH to the ADF BASE. See Figure
4-187.
3. Attach the TRANSFER SHAFT to the bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE, and
put the TRANSFER SHAFT through the hole of the ADF BASE.
Figure 4-187. Reinstallation of E CLUTCH UNIT
CHECK
POINT
Attach BUSH D4, GEAR 33T M0.8, and BUSH D6 to the CLUTCH
SHAFT before attaching the CLUTCH SHAFT to the bearing of
the CLUTCH FIX PLATE.
CHECK
POINT
After securing the MAGNETIC CLUTCH, make sure that the
antirotation tab is properly inserted into the hole of the ADF BASE.
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
BUSH D6
CLUTCH SHAFT
GEAR 33T M0.8
BUSH D4
CHECK
POINT
Attach BUSH D4, GEAR 12T, E RETAINING RING, and BUSH
D6 to the TRANSFER SHAFT before attaching the shaft to the
bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE.
GEAR 12T
BUSH D4
TRANSFER SHAFT
E RETAINING RING
BUSH D6
GEAR 20T
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
Antirotation Tab
4. Attach the CLUTCH FIX PLATE to the ADF BASE matching the positioning
hole of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE with the guide pin of the ADF BASE, and
secure the CLUTCH FIX PLATE with the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-
head). See Figure 4-188.
5. Secure the harnesses of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH into the notch of the ADF
BASE. See Figure 4-186.
6. Attach the GEAR 20T to the TRANSFER SHAFT. See Figure 4-185.
7. Attach the ADF BASE ASSY. (p498)
Figure 4-188. Reinstallation of E CLUTCH UNIT
CLUTCH FIX PLATE Positioning Hole and Guide Pin
4.4.2.3 PICK UP ASSY
REMOVAL
7. Remove the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p501)
8. Release the TENSION SPRING from the hook of the PICK UP ASSY and the
ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE.
9. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF ROLLER
FIX PLATE, and remove the ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE.
10. Lift the left shaft of the PICK UP ASSY, and pull out the right shaft of the PICK
UP ASSY from the bearing of the ADF BASE, and then remove the PICK UP
ASSY from the ADF BASE.
Figure 4-189. Removal of PICK UP ASSY (1)
Figure 4-190. Removal of PICK UP ASSY (2)
9)
ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE TENSION SPRING PICK UP ASSY
10)-2
10)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the right shaft of the PICK UP ASSY into the bearing of the ADF BASE,
and insert the left shaft of the PICK UP ASSY into the bearing of the ADF BASE.
2. Place the left ADF SHAFT with its flat surface facing upward, and attach the ADF
ROLLER FIX PLATE matching the positioning hole of the ADF ROLLER FIX
PLATE with the guide pin on the ADF BASE.
3. Secure the ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE to the ADF BASE with the screw (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head).
4. Hitch the both ends of the TENSION SPRING to the hook of PICK UP ASSY and
the hook of ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE respectively.
5. Attach the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p501)
CHECK
POINT
Before attaching the ADF Roller FIX PLATE, make sure that the
flat surface of the ADF SHAFT faces upward.
NG OK
Positioning Hole
and Guide Pin
ADF SHAFT
4.4.2.4 AS SENSOR
REMOVAL
7. Release the harnesses of the AS SENSOR from the three hooks, two holes, and
three notches of the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-191.
8. Turn the ADF BASE ASSY over, and remove the AS SENSOR releasing its two
tabs from the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-192.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the AS SENSOR to the ADF BASE inserting the two tabs of the AS
SENSOR into holes on the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-192.
2. Route the harnesses of the AS SENSOR as shown in the figure, and secure them
with three hooks and three notches of the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-191.
5. Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p526)
Figure 4-191. Removal of AS SENSOR (1)
Figure 4-192. Removal of AS SENSOR (2)
7)
ADF BASE
AS SENSOR
8)
4.4.2.5 SENSOR LEVER
REMOVAL
7. Remove the left shaft of the SENSOR LEVER from the bearing and pull out the
other shaft from the bearing to remove the SENSOR LEVER from the ADF
BASE. See Figure 4-193.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the right shaft of the SENSOR LEVER into the right bearing of the ADF
BASE, and push the other shaft into the left bearing of the ADF BASE. See Figure
4-193.
Figure 4-193. Removal of SENSOR LEVER
SENSOR LEVER
7)-2
7)-1
ADF BASE
4.4.2.6 CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
REMOVAL
7. Remove the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p501)
8. Remove the SENSOR LEVER. (p507)
9. Release the harnesses of the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU from the notch of the
ADF BASE.
10. Release the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU from the tab of the ADF BASE to
remove the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU.
REINSTALLATION
1. Push the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU into the place on the ADF BASE and
secure it with the tab of the ADF BASE.
2. Route the harnesses of the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU as shown in the figure,
and secure them with the notch on the ADF BASE.
3. Attach the SENSOR LEVER. (p507)
4. Attach the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p501)
Figure 4-194. Removal of CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
10)
9)
CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU ADF BASE
4.4.3 ADF FRAME ASSY
4.4.3.1 MOTOR
REMOVAL
7. Cut off the tie wrap that bundles the harnesses and the grounding wire of the
MOTOR.
8. Cut the tie wrap that secure the ferrite core to the harnesses of the MOTOR, and
remove the ferrite core from the harnesses.
9. Remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
CUSHION to the ADF FRAME ASSY, and remove the MOTOR CUSHION
together with the MOTOR. See Figure 4-195.
10. Remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, G-type, C-head, W/spring washer, 5 flat
washer) that secure the MOTOR to the MOTOR CUSHION. See Figure 4-196.
11. Move the MOTOR toward the relief hole on the MOTOR CUSHION, and remove
the MOTOR taking the pinion gear out through the hole. See Figure 4-197.
Figure 4-195. Removal of MOTOR (1)
Ferrite Core
Grounding Wire
Harnesses
7) MOTOR CUSHION
Tie wrap MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR CUSHION
8)
MOTOR
MOTOR CUSHION
Relief Hole
Pinion Gear
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the MOTOR to the MOTOR CUSHION with the two screws (M3 x 6 mm,
G-type, C-head, W/spring washer, W/5 flat washer).
2. Secure the MOTOR CUSHION to the ADF FRAME ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head).
3. Wind the harnesses of the MOTOR around the ferrite core once, and secure the
ferrite core to the harness with a tie wrap.
4. Bundle the harnesses and the grounding wire of the MOTOR with a tie wrap.
CAUTION
Make sure to attach the MOTOR CUSHION to the ADF FRAME
ASSY positioning the MOTOR CUSHION as shown in Figure 4-195.
4.4.3.2 GUIDE FRONT ASSY
REMOVAL
7. Remove the MOTOR. (p509)
of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE, and remove the grounding wire of the
CABLE.
9. Remove the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
FIX PLATE to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the two LOCKING CABLE
CLIPs, and then remove the MOTOR FIX PLATE from the ADF BASE ASSY.
10. Remove the five gears attached on the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below.
1. GEAR 60T 18T
2. GEAR 48T
3. GEAR 40T 18T
4. GEAR 30T
5. GEAR 33T M0.5
Figure 4-198. Removal of GUIDE FRONT ASSY (1)
CHECK
POINT
GEAR 33T M0.5 is secured with a hook. When removing GEAR
33T M0.5, release it from the hook with a pair of tweezers or
similar tool.
Grounding Wire 9) 8)
LOCKING CABLE CLIPS
MOTOR FIX PLATE
GEAR 33T M0.5
GEAR 60T 18T
FIX PLATE R
GEAR 48T GEAR 40T 18T GEAR 30T
11. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FIX PLATE
R to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the FIX PLATE R from the ADF
FRAME UNIT.
12. Remove BUSH D6 from the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER and the shaft of the
EXIT ROLL ASSY respectively.
11)
FIX PLATE R
12)
Shaft of EXIT ROLL ASSY Shaft of TURNING ROLLER
13. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FIX PLATE
ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the FIX PLATE ASSY.
14. Remove BUSH D6 from the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER and the shaft of the
EXIT ROLL ASSY respectively.
15. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the GUIDE
FRONT ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the GUIDE FRONT
ASSY.
13)
FIX PLATE ASSY
14)
Shaft of EXIT ROLL ASSY Shaft of TURNING ROLLER
15)
GUIDE FRONT ASSY
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the GUIDE FRONT ASSY to the ADF FRAME ASSY with the two
2. Attach BUSH D6 to the both ends of the TURNING ROLLER and the EXIT
ROLL ASSY respectively. See Figure 4-201 and Figure 4-203.
3. Secure the FIX PLATE ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-204.
4. Secure the FIX PLATE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-200.
5. Attach the five gears to the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below. See Figure
4-199.
1. GEAR 33T M0.5
2. GEAR 30T
3. GEAR 40T 18T
4. GEAR 48T
5. GEAR 60T 18T
6. Secure the MOTOR FIX PLATE and the two LOCKING CABLE CLIPS to the
FIX PLATE with the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure
4-198.
7. Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE with the
screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure 4-198.
8. Attach the MOTOR. (p509)
ADJUSTMENT
REQUIRED
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling GEAR
40T 18T, GEAR 48T, GEAR 60T 18T.
CHECK
POINT
When attaching BUSH D6, match it with the groove of the ADF
FRAME UNIT, and insert it until it clicks.
4.4.3.3 PAPER GUIDE R
REMOVAL
8. Remove the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p511)
9. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the PAPER
GUIDE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the PAPER GUIDE R from the
ADF FRAME UNIT.
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the PAPER GUIDE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws (M3
x 8 mm, P-type, A-head).
2. Attach the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p511)
Figure 4-205. Removal of the PAPER GUIDE R
9)
PAPER GUIDE R
4.4.3.4 FRAME COVER ASSY
REMOVAL
9. Remove the PAPER GUIDE R. (p515)
10. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FRAME
COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT.
11. Open the FRAME COVER ASSY from the NEUTRALIZING BRUSH side, and
remove the FRAME COVER ASSY from the ADF FRAME UNIT.
Figure 4-206. Removal of FRAME COVER ASSY (1)
Figure 4-207. Removal of FRAME COVER ASSY (2)
10)
FRAME COVER ASSY
11)
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
REINSTALLATION
1. Couple the FRAME COVER ASSY (NEUTRALIZING BRUSH attached side) to
the ADF FRAME UNIT positioning them as shown in Figure 4-208.
2. Insert the two STOPPER UPs of the EXIT ROLL ASSY into the holes of the
FRAME COVER ASSY as shown in Figure 4-208.
3. Secure the FRAME COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT by inserting six
tabs of the FRAME COVER ASSY in the order shown in Figure 4-209.
4. Secure the FRAME COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two
5. Attach the PAPER GUIDE R. (p515)
Figure 4-208. Reinstallation of FRAME COVER ASSY (1)
Figure 4-209. Reinstallation of FRAME COVER ASSY (2)
CHECK
POINT
When attaching the TURNING ROLLER to the ADF FRAME
UNIT, make sure to place the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER so
that one end of the shaft with D-shaped cross-section is at the right
side as shown in Figure 4-209.
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH Side
STOPPER UP
2)
D-shaped Cross-section of
TURNING ROLLER Shaft
1
2
3
4
5
6
TURNING ROLLER
ADF FRAME UNIT
EXIT ROLL ASSY
FRAME COVER ASSY
4.4.3.5 EXIT ROLL ASSY
REMOVAL
10. Remove the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p516)
11. Slide the EXIT ROLL ASSY rightward to pull out its left shaft, and then pull out
its right shaft from the ADF FRAME UNIT to remove the EXIT ROLL ASSY.
Figure 4-210. Removal of EXIT ROLL ASSY
REINSTALLATION
1. First insert the one end of the EXIT ROLL ASSY shaft with longer cut surface
into the right shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT, and then insert the other end
into the left shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT.
2. Attach the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p516)
CHECK
POINT
When sliding the EXIT ROLL ASSY rightward, lift it upward so
that its roller does not hit the ADF FRAME UNIT.
The cut surface is longer than the other end
11)-2
11)-1
EXIT ROLL ASSY
ADF FRAME UNIT
CHECK
POINT
Make sure to position the EXIT ROLL ASSY with its longer cut
surface side on the right when attaching the EXIT ROLL ASSY to the
ADF FRAME UNIT. See Figure 4-210.
4.4.3.6 TURNING ROLLER
REMOVAL
10. Remove the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p516)
11. Slide the TURNING ROLLER rightward to pull out its left shaft, and then pull out
its right shaft from the ADF FRAME UNIT to remove the TURNING ROLLER.
REINSTALLATION
1. First insert the one end of the TURNING ROLLER shaft with longer cut surface
into the shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT, and then insert the other end into
the shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT.
2. Attach the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p516)
Figure 4-211. Removal of TURNING ROLLER
TURNING ROLLER
ADF FRAME UNIT
11)-2
11)-1
4.4.3.7 COVER SENSOR
REMOVAL
of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE, and remove the grounding wire of the
CABLE.
9. Remove the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
FIX PLATE to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the two LOCKING CABLE
CLIPs, and then remove the MOTOR FIX PLATE from the ADF BASE ASSY.
10. Remove the three gears attached on the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below.
1. GEAR 60T 18T
2. GEAR 48T
3. GEAR 40T 18T
Figure 4-212. Removal of COVER SENSOR (1)
8) 9) Grounding Wire MOTOR FIX PLATE
LOCKING CABLE CLIPS
FIX PLATE R
GEAR 48T GEAR 60T 18T GEAR 40T 18T
11. Release the COVER SENSOR from the two clamps of the FIX PLATE R.
12. Remove the screw (M2 x 10 mm, G-type, P-head) that secure the COVER
SENSOR to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the COVER SENSOR from the FIX
PLATE R.
12)
11) FIX PLATE R
COVER SENSOR
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the COVER SENSOR to the FIX PLATE R with the screw (M2 x 10 mm,
G-type, P-head). See Figure 4-214.
2. Secure the harnesses of the COVER SENSOR with the two clamps of the FIX
PLATE R.
3. Secure the three gears to the FIX PLATE R in the order given below. See Figure
4-213.
1. GEAR 40T 18T
2. GEAR 48T
3. GEAR 60T 18T
4. Secure the MOTOR FIX PLATE and the two LOCKING CABLE CLIPS to the
FIX PLATE with the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure
4-212.
5. Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE with the
screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure 4-212.
ADJUSTMENT
REQUIRED
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling GEAR
40T 18T, GEAR 48T, GEAR 60T 18T.
4.4.3.8 CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
REMOVAL
7. Turn the ADF FRAME ASSY over, release the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
from the tab of the ADF FRAME ASSY to remove the CONNECTOR UNIT
ACEMU.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU into the place on the ADF FRAME
ASSY and secure the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU with the hook of the ADF
FRAME ASSY.
Figure 4-215. Removal of CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
7)-2
7)-1
CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
ADF FRAME ASSY
4.4.3.9 SENSOR ARM
REMOVAL
7. Remove the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU. (p523)
8. Remove the shaft of the SENSOR ARM from the bearing of the PAPER GUIDE
F, and remove the SENSOR ARM.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft of the SENSOR ARM into the bearing of the PAPER GUIDE F.
See Figure 4-216.
2. Attach the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU. (p523)
Figure 4-216. Removal of SENSOR ARM
CHECK
POINT
A spring is attached to the SENSOR ARM.If the spring falls off the
SENSOR ARM, reattach it referring to the figure below.
Spring
SENSOR ARM
SENSOR ARM
PAPER GUIDE F
8)
4.4.4 ADF PCB ASSY
4.4.4.1 ADF PCB ASSY
REMOVAL
4. Remove the PCB COVER. (p495)
5. Disconnect the nine connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY.
6. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secures the ADF PCB ASSY
to the SDH COVER, and remove the ADF PCB ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the ADF PCB ASSY to the SDH COVER with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-
type, A-head).
2. Connect the all harnesses to the nine connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY. See
Figure 4-218.
3. Attach the PCB COVER. (p495)
Figure 4-217. Removal of ADF PCB ASSY
Figure 4-218. Connector Layout
5)
6)
P301
CABLE
P303
MOTOR
PAPER GUIDE
ASSY
P306
AS SENSOR
P309
P308
P305
COVER SENSOR
P307
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
P301
(ADF FRAME ASSY)
P302
(ADF BASE)
4.4.5 PAPER GUIDE ASSY
4.4.5.1 PAPER GUIDE ASSY
REMOVAL
4. Open the ADF COVER and remove the KNOB from the ADF FRAME ASSY.
5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the PAPER
GUIDE ASSY to the SDH COVER.
6. Disconnect P308 and P309 connectors of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY from the
ADF PCB ASSY.
7. Release the hook of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY to remove the PAPER GUIDE
ASSY from the SDH COVER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY to the SDH COVER matching the protrusion on
the PAPER GUIDE ASSY with the hole on the SDH COVER, and secure the
PAPER GUIDE ASSY with its hook.
2. Open the ADF COVER and attach the KNOB to the ADF FRAME ASSY.
Figure 4-219. Removal of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY
CHECK
POINT
When attaching the PAPER GUIDE ASSY, match the rib on the
PAPER GUIDE ASSY with the hole on the SDH COVER.
Hook
Rib
PAPER GUIDE ASSY
Holes on the SDH
COVER ASSY
P309 Connector
P308 Connector
5)
Hook
KNOB
5)
4)
SDH COVER ASSY
PAPER GUIDE ASSY
4.4.5.2 GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC. ADJUST L/R
REMOVAL
5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the TRAY
COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
6. Release the hook and remove TRAY GEAR 24T.
7. Release the hook and remove the two GEAR PLATEs.
8. Release the hook and remove the DOC.ADJUST L and R.
Figure 4-220. Removal of GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC.ADJUST L/R
(1)
(2)
(3)
TRAY COVER
5)
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
GEAR PLATE TRAY GEAR 24T
Hooks
DOC. ADJUST L
DOC. ADJUST R
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
REINSTALLATION
1. Put the DOC. ADJUST L through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE and attach
the DOC. ADJUST L to the groove on the GEAR PLATE.
2. Put the DOC. ADJUST R through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE and
attach the DOC. ADJUST R to the groove on the GEAR PLATE.
3. Move the two GEAR PLATEs so that the gap between them becomes smallest,
and attach TRAY GEAR 24T to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
4. Secure the TRAY COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the two screws (M3
Figure 4-223. Reinstallation of GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC.ADJUST L/R
ADJUSTMENT
REQUIRED
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling the
DOC.ADJUST L/R and TRAY GEAR 24T, or replacing them with
new ones.
Attach TRAY GEAR 24T
with the smallest gap
between two GUIDE
PLATEs.
GEAR PLATE
TRAY GEAR 24T DOC. PAPER GUIDE
4.4.5.3 PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L, PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R
REMOVAL
5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the TRAY
COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
6. Remove the two screws (M2 x 8 mm, B-type, P-head) that secure the PAPER
SENSOR SWITCH L and PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R to the DOC. PAPER
GUIDE.
7. Pull out the harnesses from the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE, and remove the
PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Pull the two harnesses for the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and PAPER
SENSOR SWITCH R outward through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
2. Secure the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R to
the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the screw (M2 x 8 mm, B-type, P-head)
respectively.
3. Secure the TRAY COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the two screws (M3
Figure 4-224. Removal of PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L/R
PAPER SENSOR
SWITCH L
PAPER SENSOR
SWITCH R
Hole for the Harness of the PAPER SENSOR
SWITCH L/R
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
6)
CHAP T E R
5
ADJUSTMENT
ADJ USTMENT Overview 531
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the adjustment procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts in the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F.
There is no required adjustment for the Scanner/ADF.
5.1.1 Precautions
Be sure to observe the following precautions before starting adjustments.
5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items
The following table indicates the adjustment items and life counter clear items necessary when the specific unit is replaced or removed.
Note : Updating the firmware does not initialize the setup data stored on the EEPROM.To initialize the setup data, execute Factory Setting from the control panel.
"*" : X = Y, M, C, K
CAUTION
Refer to 5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items (p531), always confirm the adjustment items and the orders for the replaced/removed parts and
units in advance.
Start adjustment after fully checking the Caution given in the explanation area of each adjustment item. Incorrect work may interfere with the product
operations and/or functions.
Table 5-1. Adjustment Item List
Repaired Part Adjustment Item Execution Timing Adjustment Execution Means Reference
FUSER ASSY Life counter clear After replacement
with a new one
With the control panel, execute Reset Fuser Counter in Maintenance Menu.
p553
2ND BTR ASSY Life counter clear After replacement
with a new one
With the control panel, execute Reset 2ndBTRCounter in Maintenance Menu.
p553
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Life counter clear After replacement
with a new one
With the control panel, execute Reset X* DvopCounter in Maintenance Menu.
p553
PWBA ESS Writing USB ID After replacement
with a new one
Execute by the dedicated program
p532
--- Controller Firmware Update --- Start up the product in Program ROM update mode by performing special
operation, and send the firmware data from the PC.
p535
--- MCU Firmware Update --- Start up the product in Engine Firmware Update mode by performing special
operation, and send the firmware data from the PC.
p537
--- Color table update --- Start up the product in normal mode, and send the program data from the PC. p540
--- Fax unit Firmware Update --- Start up the product in normal mode, and send the program data from the PC. p541
ADJ USTMENT Printer Section 532
5.2 Printer Section
5.2.1 Writing USB ID
AcuLaser CX11/CX11F are equipped with a USB interface as a standard feature. The
PC connected to the product via the USB interface identifies the product by referring to
the USB ID information specific to each product. AS the USB ID information is stored
in the EEPROM on the main board, writing the USB ID on the new main board is
required after replacing the board.
The procedure to write the USB ID is given below.
REQUIRED TOOL
The following shows the name of the program to write the ID, and the operating
environment.
Program
Main Board Initialization Tool
Operating Environment
(OS)
Windows95/OSR2.0 or later, Windows98, Windows Me, Windows 2000/XP
Port
LPT, USB
INSTALLATION METHOD AND BASIC OPERATION
1. Copy all the Main Board Initialization Tool files in a folder onto a computer.
2. Double-click on the [ ] icon to start up the program and select AcuLaser CX11
or AcuLaser CX11F in the Select Model.
3. Select the port used to connect the printer at the [Interface].
Figure 5-1. Basic Operation
CAUTION
All the files of Main Board Initialization Tool should be copied in
one folder.
CHECK
POINT
If you select Auto, connected products are detected and
communication with the first detected one start automatically.
When connecting with 2 or more products, specify the target port to
avoid unexpected connection since the auto detection varies
depending on the connection state.
WRITING METHOD
The method of writing USB ID differs, according to the condition of the main board. Referring to the following table, figure out what to do depending on the conditions.
Follow the instructions shown in the program to do the writings.
Store optional ID
Figure 5-2. Store optional ID Screen
OLD ID Retrieval/Restore
Figure 5-3. OLD ID Retrieval/Restore Screen
Store auto-generated NEW ID
Figure 5-4. Auto-generated NEW ID Screen
CONFIRMING THE WRITING
When completed to write USB-ID, print a status sheet to confirm that the serial number printed on the sheet is identical to that on the label attached on the product. (Refer to 1.4
Status Sheet (p71))
Table 5-2. Writing Method
Condition of Main Board Check of the previous ID
Writing Method
(Button Name)
Explanation
Communication is impossible between PC
and the Main Board
The previous ID can be confirmed by a status sheet
or something else that has been already printed out.
Store optional ID Enter the previous ID to write it into the new Main Board.
There is no way to confirm the previous ID. Store auto-generated
NEW ID
The program automatically creates the new ID from the serial number of the
product and write it into the new Main Board.
Communication is possible between PC
and the Main Board
(Can retrieve the previous ID from the previous
Main Board)
OLD ID Retrieval/
Restore
Retrieve the ID from the old board, and then enter the retrieved ID value into
the new board.
5.2.2 Firmware Update
This section explains how to update the firmwares.
REQUIRED TOOL
The firmware for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F can be updated by transferring the
program update data from the PC to the product via USB using a dedicated tool. The
dedicated tool is shown below.
Name
Firmware Update Tool
Unit Data Format
Updating Method
Panel Operation Tool
Controller (p535) RCC NR Required
CRB Required Required
MCU (p537) BIN Required Required
Color table (p540) RCC NR Required
5.2.2.1 Controller Firmware Update
The procedure to update the controller firmware is given in the following table.
Table 5-3. Controller Firmware Update
Procedure
Method 1 Method 2
(RCC) (CRB) LCD Panel
1
Check the current
version.
Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version. Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version.
---
2
Connect the printer with
the computer.
Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable.
Confirm that the Ready is displayed on the LCD.
After turning the power off for both the printer and computer,
connect them with a USB cable.
Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to
disconnect other interface cables from the
product.
---
3 Prepare the update data.
Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the
extension is RCC) onto the computer.
Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the
extension is CRB) onto the computer.
---
4 Start up the Printer. ---
Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color Start],
[Reset], and [Down] buttons.The product will start up in
Program ROM update mode.
5 Prepare to send the data.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and the
program update file on the selection window of the tool.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and the
program update file on the selection window of the tool.
---
6 Transmit the data.
Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
CAUTION
Program Device
Version XX.XX
Please Send Data
Program Device
Version XX.XX
OLD: XXXX NEW: XXXX
7 Execute the update.
Once file-receiving or rewriting operation is started on the
printer side, the data LED flashes and the message "ROM P
Writing" is displayed on the LCD panel.
When the transfer is complete, "completed" window pops up.
Click [OK].
Confirm that both the old and new firmware versions are
displayed on the LCD, and press the [Right ] button on the
control panel.
Completion pop-up window will be displayed when the
data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
8 Confirm the checksum.
---
When the program update is finished, the checksum will be
indicated on the LCD panel.
Confirm the checksum.
9 Reboot the product.
After confirming that the data LED of the printer is turned
off and the LCD panel displays "Ready", turn the printer
power off and turn back on again.
Pressing the [Right ] button on the control panel reboots
the product.
---
10 Print the status sheet.
Prints the status sheet. Prints the status sheet.
---
11
Check the version on the
status sheet.
Confirm that the program firmware version has been
updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that
printed in step 1. Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet (p71)
Confirm that the program firmware version has been
updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that
printed in step 1. Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet (p71)
---
Table 5-3. Controller Firmware Update
Procedure
Method 1 Method 2
(RCC) (CRB) LCD Panel
Program Device
Version XX.XX
Erasing Device
Program Device
Version XX.XX
PRG XXXXXXXX
Program Device
Version XX.XX
Code=
XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
Total=
XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
5.2.2.2 MCU Firmware Update
The procedure to update the MCU firmware (engine firmware) is given in the following tables.
Table 5-4. MCU Firmware Update
Procedure Method LCD Panel
1
Check the current version. Print a status sheet or engine status sheet, and check the current firmware version. ---
2
Connect the printer with the
computer.
After turning the power off for both the printer and computer, connect them with a USB cable.
Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to disconnect other interface cables from the product.
---
3
Prepare the update data. Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is MOT) onto the computer. ---
4 Start up the Printer.
Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color Start], [Reset], [Up], and [Down] buttons. The product will start
up in Engine Firmware Update mode.
CAUTION
Engine Firmware Update
EFU Ver. XXX
Please send EFU data
5 Prepare to send the data.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool.
---
6
Transmit the data.
Click the [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
send size=XXX
SENT SIZE=XXX
Type: XXX sum=XXX
7 Execute the update.
Press the [Right ] button on the control panel of the product.
Completion pop-up window will be displayed when the data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
8
When the program update is finished, the checksum will be indicated on the LCD panel.
9 Reboot the Printer. Turn the printer off and back on. ---
10
Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet or engien status sheet. ---
11
Check the version on the status
sheet.
Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status or engine status sheet
with that printed in step 1. (Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet (p71) , 6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet (p555))
---
Writing : Erasing
Writing: Size=XXX
TYPE: XXX SUM: XXX
WAIT RESET
5.2.2.3 Color Table Update
The procedure to update the Color Table is given below.
Table 5-5. Color Table Update
Procedure Method
1
Check the current version. Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version.
2
Connect the printer with the
computer.
3
Prepare the update data. Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is RCC) onto the computer.
4 Start up the Printer. Start up the product in normal mode.
5 Prepare to send the data. Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool.
6
Transmit the data.
Click the [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
Completion pop-up window will be displayed when the data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
7 Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet.
8
Check the version on the status
sheet.
Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that printed in step 1.(Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet
(p71))
CAUTION
ADJ USTMENT Fax Function 541
5.3 Fax Function
5.3.1 Fax unit Firmware Update
The procedure to update the Fax unit firmware is the same with that of the color table.
(Refer to 5.2.2.3 Color Table Update (p540))
5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data
The Fax Maintenance Tool is an application that operates under Windows. Retrieving/
writing the user-established data, retrieving received fax jobs and backup data (for
collecting information on fax troubles) can be made by connecting the product with the
computer on which the tool is installed with a USB cable.
REQUIRED TOOL
Program
EPSON MFP Maintenance Utility
Operating Environment
OS Windows 98, Windows 98 Second Edition,
Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
PC/AT compatible machine with a USB port (USB 1.1)
USB Cable
INSTALLING AND STARTING UP THE SOFTWARE
Install
Execute the Setup.EXE.
Start up
Start up the MFP Maintenance Utility from the Windows menu.
CHECK
POINT
It is not necessary to install AcuLaser CX11/CX11F printer driver
to run or execute this utility.
CPU Intel Pentium II 233 MHz or higher
Memory: 128 MB or more
Display Resolution: 800 x 600 dots or moreColor number:
256 colors or more
Printer driver Driver for AcuLaser CX/CX11F
CAUTION
The tool does not allow multiple products to be connected to the
computer at a time.
And connecting using a USB hub is not supported.
5.3.2.1 Retrieving the User Data
With this function, the user-established data stored in the fax unit can be retrieved and
stored onto the computer by information type specifying the folders to save them.
System Parameter Information
Relative addresses and the corresponding parameter settings are written in hexadecimal
onto the computer as shown below.
Figure 5-5. System Parameter Information
Speed Dial Information
Group Dial Information
G3-ID Information/Header Information
The binary parameters are stored onto the computer without changing the format.
File Name File Name Description
BackUpDataYY-MM-DD SysParam.Txt System Parameter Information
G3-ID.Bin G3-ID information
TxHeader.Bin Information in the fax header
SpeedDial.Bin Speed Dial information
GroupDial.Bin Group Dial information
OneTuch.Bin One-Touch button information
CAUTION
Do not shuffle the order or delete the settings. Only changing the
setting values is allowed.
0x0000 = 08
0x0001 = 00
0x0002 = 00
0x0003 = 00
0x013E = 01
0x013F = 00
.
.
.
.
Relative Address Parameter Setting
Stored name and fax number
(77 bytes)
XXH
Stored name and fax number
(77 bytes)
XXH
Speed-dial code (1 through 60) (1 byte)
Information assigned to the
group-dial code (65 bytes)
XXH XXH
Group-dial code (1 through 20) (1 byte)
Information assigned
group-dial code (65 b
RETRIEVING METHOD
Procedure Method
1 Connect the printer with the computer.
2 Start up the computer and the product. Turn the power ON for both the computer and the product.
3
Start up the tool Start up the Fax Maintenance Tool.
4
Retrieve the user data
Click on the User Data tab, and select the Read user data, then click the [Start] button.
Select the destination to save the user data in the selection window, and click the [OK] button.
Once the communication and the transaction are started when the MFP Maintenance Tool is executed, the message "Using Fax
Tool" is displayed on the LCD panel.
Note : When the folder already exists in the selected destination, a confirmation message about whether or not to overwrite will appear.
5 Completion of user data read
When retrieving the user data is finished, a completion message will appear.
CAUTION
4-3
4-2
4-1
4-4
CAUTION
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
5.3.2.2 Writing the User Data
The function enables the user data stored onto the computer to be written into the fax unit. Corresponding memory sections in the fax unit are completely overwritten.
WRITING METHOD
Procedure Method
1 Connect the printer with the computer.
2
Start up the computer and the product. Turn the power ON for both the computer and the product.
3 Start up the tool Start up the Fax Maintenance Tool.
4 Write the user data
Click on the User Data tab, and select the Write user data, then click the [Start] button.
Select the folder in which the user data is stored in the selection window, and click the [OK] button.
Note : When the [OK] is clicked, the tool searches the files in the folder and starts writing them to the fax unit upon finding them. If the
corresponding files cannot be found, the writing is not performed.
5
Completion of user data write
When writing the user data is finished, a completion message will appear.
CAUTION
4-4
4-3
4-1
4-2
CHAP T E R
6
MAINTENANCE
MAI NTENANCE Overview 546
6.1 Overview
This chapter provides information necessary for maintaining the AcuLaser CX/CX11F
in its optimum condition.
Before starting the work, be sure to observe the following precautions.
WARNING
To prevent an electric shock, burn, injury, etc., always turn the
product off and unplug it from power outlet before starting
maintenance work.
When the power supply cable must be connected to measure
voltage or for any other task, use extreme caution in working
on electronic components.
While the product is operating, never inspect the drive areas
such as the motor, sprockets and gears.
Since the product is heavy in weight (approx. 25 kg,
consumables not included), two or more personnel are required
to transfer the product. On this occasion, make sure to lay
hands on the specified places.
Special care must be taken to maintain safety devices such as
fuse, INTERLOCK S/W, which are provided to prevent the
product from malfunction and accidents, and also carefully
check the parts such as panel, covers, which are directly
operated by the user.
Do not touch the FUSER ASSY immediately after using the
product, or you may burn your hand. Allow the assy to cool
enough to work with it.
Pay attention to the following when turning the product back
on after servicing.
Be careful not to get your hands and clothes caught up in the
rotating parts (various rollers and cooling fans) of the
product.
Never touch the electrical terminals and high-voltage
components such as the HVPS and LVPS unit.
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring the
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
WARNING
Take extra care not to let the laser beam get into your eye, or it
could cause loss of sight.
While servicing the laser printer, never open any cover on
which a Warning Label for Laser beam is attached.
Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme
caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you.
When you need to work on the hot part or unit (Fuser Assy, for
example), make sure to unplug the product from power outlet
in advance, and do not start the work basically until the part or
unit cool down sufficiently to avoid burn injury.
This printer produces a laser beam when the following
conditions are all satisfied.
The printer is in ready status.
The interlock switches are OFF (TOP COVER and FRONT
COVER are closed).
Do not use a general vacuum cleaner to clean spilt toner. To do
so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire by sparks
of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the floor, etc.,
clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth moistened with
neutral detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot of spilt toner
with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed for toner.
CAUTION
Always wear gloves when servicing to avoid injury from sharp
metal edges.
Do not disassemble the Toner Cartridge.
Do not expose the Photoconductor Unit to direct sunlight.
Do not disassemble the ROS ASSY.
Do not touch the onboard components with bare hands to
prevent the ICs and other electrical components from being
damaged by static electricity. (When necessary, wear a wrist
strap.)
To ensure safety and workability, use the specified tools.
Do not turn the product off until all motors stop completely.
Should the printer be transported, use the special packing
material, pallet, etc.
Do not use alcohol, paint thinner, or any other such solvents.
MAI NTENANCE On-site Service 547
6.2 On-site Service
This section describes about on-site servicing procedures.To prevent possible accidents
during servicing, strictly observe the warnings and cautions given in this section and
Section 6.1.Never perform dangerous operations.
ON-SITE SERVICING FLOWCHART
Figure 6-1. On-site Servicing Flowchart
CAUTION
When it is necessary to transport the main unit, use the special
packing material, pallet, etc.
Be sure to bring back trash created during the work and old
parts or consumables that are replaced, and not to leave them
on the site.
Before starting your work, spread a sheet of cloth or paper
over the working place to prevent the site from getting dirt with
spilt toner.
Which is the Purpose of Visit?
Maintenance Repair
Preventive maintenance
Perform troubleshooting according
to the procedure given in Chapter 3.
What to Do Last
1. Check the printer appearance.
2. Train the user as necessary
Cleaning
Image Quality Check
Replacement of regular replacement
parts and main after-sales service parts
General operation checks
What to Do First
1. Ask the user about the printer conditions.
2. Ensure safety.
3. Grasp the printer conditions from the status sheet.
4. Grasp how the printer has been used from the engine status sheet.
Trouble Repeatability Check
6.2.1 Details of On-site Servicing
This section explains the details of on-site servicing.
WHAT TO DO FIRST
1. Ask the user about the printer conditions.
Frequency of paper feeding errors (jams)
How the product has been used (paper type, printing frequency, environment,
etc.)
Image quality status (front and back, separately)
2. Check how the power cord is plugged, damage to the cord and plug, etc. to ensure
safety.
3. Print and check several status sheets to grasp the printer conditions.
4. Print the engine status sheet, and grasp the lives of the consumables, regular
replacement parts and how the product has been used.
TROUBLE REPEATABILITY CHECK
Perform troubleshooting according to the procedure given in Chapter 3.
1. Refer to Section 3.4.3 FIP (p145) and confirm the trouble conditions and
execute troubleshooting.
2. If a fatal image quality problem (all white, all black, etc.) has occurred due to
engine failure, perform troubleshooting with reference to Section 3.4 Image
Quality-related Troubles 3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble (p248).
IMAGE QUALITY CHECK
1. Print the status sheet and confirm the image quality.
Image quality check items
Color balance
Color shift
Density (color) unevenness
Poor color reproducibility with low density
Others
2. If any of the image quality problem described above is shown:
Take corrective action with reference to Section 3.4.5 Printing Quality-
related Trouble (p248).
CLEANING
There is no part to be cleaned regularly in the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F. The following
describes the procedure to clean certain parts which should be cleaned on an as-needed
basis.
Cleaning the Pick Up Roller
1. Open the MP Tray Cover and take out the loaded papers.
2. Wipe the rubber part of the Pick Up Roller using a clean soft cloth moistened with
water.
Figure 6-2. Cleaning the Pick Up Roller
Cleaning the Exposure Window
1. Open the cleaner cover on the right side of the product, and open Cover A.
2. Pull the lever placed right inner side of the product in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 6-3. Cleaning the Exposure Window (1)
3. Slowly pull the cleaner outward and push it back. (1 cycle)
Figure 6-4. Cleaning the Exposure Window (2)
4. Push the lever back to its original position.
CAUTION
Do not use chemical solvent such as thinner, benzine, acetone
to clean the housing or any other exterior part of the product.
Doing so may deteriorate or deform those parts.
Be careful not to get the internal components wet when
cleaning.
CAUTION
When cleaning the Pick Up Roller, be careful not to damage the
actuator placed in front of the Feed Roller
Actuator
Feed Roller
CAUTION
To clean the printhead properly, pull the cleaner until it do not
move anymore, and push it back as far as it will go.
Lever
Cover A
Cleaner Cover
Cleaner
5. Close Cover A and then close the cleaner cover.
Cleaning the Document Table
If scanned image quality trouble occurs, clean the document table with a clean dry soft
cloth wiping off any dirt on it.
Cleaning the ADF Pick Up Roller
If the ADF has troubles to feed paper, open the ADF and clean the ADF Pick Up Roller
with a clean dry soft cloth and remove paper dust.
Figure 6-5. Cleaning the ADF Pick Up Roller
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (CONSUMABLES/COMPONENTS
NEEDING PERIODIC REPLACEMENT)
Do preventive maintenance work to maintain the product performance and prevent
failures from occurring.
1. After completion of repair or maintenance, print several status sheets and make
sure that there are no problems.
2. After completion of repair or maintenance, print the engine status sheet.
Note: The judgement whether to replace components needing periodic
replacement can be done by the cumulative numbers of printed
sheets. Replace the components as the occasion arises.
REPLACEMENT OF CONSUMABLES AND COMPONENTS NEEDING
PERIODIC REPLACEMENT
Do the replacement with reference to 6.5 Consumables and Components needing
Periodic Replacement (p562).
GENERAL OPERATION CHECKS
After completion of servicing, make general operation checks. Print a status sheet and
perform several printjobs from the host computer testing both one-side printing and
duplex printing (if an optional unit for dupulexing is installed).
Simplex printing
Feed paper from the MP Tray
Feed paper from the 500-sheet Cassette
1. Make sure that there are no image quality problems.
2. Make sure that the paper feeding is normal and there is no abnormal noise.
WHAT TO DO LAST
1. Check the appearance of the product.
2. If necessary, inform the user on how to handle the product, deal with paper jam,
and replace the consumables.
ADF Pick Up Roller
MAI NTENANCE Lubrication and Glueing 551
6.3 Lubrication and Glueing
This section explains the part required glueing and lubrication when performing the
service work, or replacing the unit or parts.
6.3.1.1 Glueing
There is no relevant glueing part for this unit.
6.3.1.2 Lublication
The part requires lubrication for this unit is as below
6.3.2 Scanner/ADF Section
6.3.2.1 Glueing
There is no relevant glueing part for this unit.
6.3.2.2 Lublication
The part requires lubrication for this unit is as below
Parts Name CHUTE ASSY FSR
Lubrication Part Spring attached on the [CHUTE ASSY FSR]
Types of oil
applied
Parts Name : GREASE G-76
Parts Number :1304691
Amount of
lublicate
About 5mm
Note Lubrication is required when CHUTE ASSY FSR and FRAME ASSY 2ND
are replaced at the same time. When replacing only one of them, lubrication
is not necessary as the grease is remaining on the other one.
FRAME ASSY 2ND
CHUTE ASSY FSR
Lubrication Part
Parts Name FIX PLATE R
Lubrication Part Shaft of the [FIX PLATE R]
Types of oil
applied
Parts Number : 1033657
Amount of
lublicate
A little modest amount
FIX PLATE R
Lubrication Part
MAI NTENANCE Lubrication and Glueing 552
Parts Name
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
Lubrication Part Parts of the [DOC. PAPER GUIDE] indicated in the figure
Types of oil
applied
Amount of
lublicate
Lubrication Part
Lubrication Part
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
Parts Name
TRAY GEAR 24T
Lubrication Part Parts of the [TRAY GEAR 24T] indicated in the figure
Types of oil
applied
Amount of
lublicate
TRAY GEAR 24T
Lubrication Part
MAI NTENANCE Printer Maintenance Function 553
6.4 Printer Maintenance Function
6.4.1 Maintenance Menu
This menu is displayed and selectable only when a special operation performed at
power-on to enter the maintenance mode. Basically, this menu is provided to be used
by a service personnel for maintenance.
At the time of maintenance, print the Engine Status Sheet from the Maintenance Menu
and grasp the usage conditions of various consumables and components needing
periodic replacement.
6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items
This menu is displayed and selectable only when a special operation performed at
power-on to enter the maintenance mode.
When the power is then turned off once and on again, the Maintenance Menu is deleted
(the printer returns to the normal operating mode).
Engine Status Sheet (p555)
Press the [Right ] button to print the Engine Status Sheet.
Before entering the maintenance mode, make sure that an engine-related service
call error is not occurring in normal operating mode (not maintenance mode). The
sheet is printed according to the default settings, except RIT, toner save, and
resolution settings (current settings are applied for those settings), and others are
printed according to the factory settings.The user default environment (settings)
does not change after the printing. While the printing is in progress, the LCD
keeps flashing.
The contents of the engine status sheet are the counted values of each unit which
makes up the printer engine.
Print Log Report (p560)
Prints a log file of printing status.
Reset 2ndBTRCounter
Resets the life counter of the 2nd BTR ASSY.
After executing the counter reset, open and close the Cover A, and do not turn the
printer off until the engine stops completely.
The counter must be reset after the 2nd BTR ASSY is replaced with a new one.
When resetting the counter, the number of printed pages for the previous 2nd BTR
ASSY at that point is stored in the engine.The stored value will be printed on the
Engine Status Sheet as the number of previous replacement.
Reset Y (M, C, K) DvlpCounter
Resets the life counter of the Housing ASSY-DEVE.
After executing the counter reset, open and close the Cover A, and do not turn the
printer off until the engine stops completely.
The counter must be reset after the Housing ASSY-DEVE is replaced with a new
one.
Reset Fuser Counter
Resets the life counter of the FUSER ASSY.
The counter must be reset after the Fuser unit is replaced with a new one.
When resetting the counter, the number of printed pages for the previous FUSER
ASSY is stored in the engine. The stored value will be printed on the Engine Status
Sheet as the number of previous replacement.
Clear Error Log
Clears error log list stored in the engine to print on Engine Status Sheet.
Performing this operation reboots the printer.
MCU DATA BackUp
Backups the data stored on the NVM in the engine controller.
"MCU Data BackUp" is displayed while the backup is in progress.
MCU DATA Restore
Restores the backup data made by MCU DATA Backup on the NVM in the
engine controller.
"MCU DATA Backup" is displayed while the restoring is in progress.
CAUTION
This menu is provided only for a service personnel to perform
maintenance. It must not be disclosed to the users.
6.4.1.2 Accessing the Maintenance Menu
1. Turn the product ON while holding down the [Left ], [Right ], [Up ], and
[Down ] buttons.
When the product is turned on, all LEDs and LCD light and the following message
is then displayed.
(When MAINTENANCE MODE appears on the LCD, release the buttons.)
2. Refer to the Maintenance Menu flowchart, access the desired function in the menu
using the control panel.
NOTE 1: Disconnect all the Interface Cables in advance.
2: Engine-related service call errors are ignored when the Maintenance
Mode starts. Before starting the product in the Maintenance Mode and
executing printing, make sure that no errors have occurred in the normal
operating mode.
3:
4: Turn the product OFF to exit from the Maintenance Menu. Be sure not to
turn the product OFF until the engine stops operating.
Figure 6-6. Maintenance Menu Flowchart
CAUTION
Executing MCU DATA BackUp and ,MCU DATA Restore
is not possible when the product in the following statuses:
In sleep mode
During warming-up
During printing
During adjusting the printer
Do not turn the power OFF until the engine completely stops
after executing MCU DATA BackUp and MCU DATA
Restore.
Ready MAINTENANCE lODE RAM CHECK **.*MB
Command
Command
Clear execution
Clear execution
Clear execution
Clear execution
Clear execution
Clear execution
Clear execution
Print execution
Ready
Maintenance Menu
Information Menu
[Up ] button
[Right ] button
Engine Status Sheet
Print Log Report
Reset 2ndBTRCounter
Reset C DvlpCounter
Reset M DvlpCounter
Reset Y DvlpCounter
Reset K DvlpCounter
Reset Fuser Counter
Clear Error Log
MCU DATA BackUp
MCU DATA Restore
[Up ] button
[Down ] button
Print execution
[Right ] button
Engine Status Sheet
MCU DATA Restore
[Up ] button
6.4.2 Maintenance Information Output
6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet
ENGINE STATUS SHEET ITEMS
Total Counts
Total Pages : Total number of pages printed to date.
Color Pages : Total number of pages printed in color to date.
Jam Counts : Number of occurrence of a jam.
ET Cartridge (Toner Cartridge)
C Toner :Amount of C toner used (dispense time)
C toner limit value, C total dots
M Toner :Amount of M toner used (dispense time)
M toner limit value, M total dots
Y Toner :Amount of Y toner used (dispense time)
Y toner limit value, Y total dots
K Toner :Amount of K toner used (dispense time)
K toner limit value, K total dots
C Toner Change :Number of replacements of C toner (for 4K),
Number of replacements of C toner (for 1.5K).
M Toner Change:Number of replacements of M toner (for 4K),
Number of replacements of M toner (for 1.5K).
Y Toner Change :Number of replacements of Y toner (for 4K),
Number of replacements of Y Toner (for 1.5K).
K Toner Change :Number of replacements of K toner (for 4K),
Number of replacements of K Toner (for 1.5K).
Photoconductor : Number of revolutions of photoconductor.
Photoconductor Change
: Number of replacements of Photoconductor Unit.
Fuser : Total number of pages printed using the current FUSER ASSY
Fuser Change : Number of replacements of FUSER ASSY. /Number of
pages printed at the time of replacing the previous one.
2nd BTR : Total number of pages printed using the current 2nd BTR.
2nd BTR Change : Number of replacements of 2nd BTR ASSY.
Development Unit
C Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE C.
M Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE M.
Y Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE Y.
K Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE K.
C Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C.
M Deve Change: Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M.
Y Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y.
K Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K.
2nd BTR Offset
Normal : Setting value of the transfer voltage for plain paper.
SemiThk : Setting value of the transfer voltage for High quality paper.
Thick : Setting value of the transfer voltage for thick paper.
ExtraThk : Setting value of the transfer voltage for Extra thick paper.
Card : Setting value of the transfer voltage for postcard paper.
Envelope : Setting value of the transfer voltage for envelope.
Power On : Number of times power is turned on.
Sleep : Number of times printer returns from standby mode.
Engine Version
MCU : Firmware version of mechanical controller.
CAUTION
This Engine Status Sheet is used only by a service personnel for
maintenance. It must not be disclosed to the users.
Error LogDisplays the latest 20 errors with the following information; panel
message, EJL status code, the number of pages, jam code, paper size, paper type,
and date/time.The 20 errors are listed in the order of number of pages form largest
to smallest. Service call errors which occurred after the Ready mode and jam
errors are listed. The errors with total pages which are the same as previously
recorded errors are not included.
Jam Code
The location of the jam is indicated by 8-digit hexadecimal strings as bit data.
Table 6-1. Jam code
Bit Location of jam
31-24 ---
23 At Exit sensor
22 At Fuser In sensor
21 At Regi sensor
20 At OHP sensor
19 At Tray Path1 sensor
18 At Tray Path2 sensor
17 At Dup In sensor
16 At Dup Out sensor
15 After Exit sensor turns off, Dup In sensor does not turn off
14 After Dup In sensor turns on, Dup Out sensor stays off
13 After Duplex loading signal, Regi sensor stays off
12 After Regi sensor turns on, Exit sensor stays off.
11 After Regi Roll turns on, Exit Fuser In sensor is stays off.
10 ---
9
The setting is for transparency, but media other than transparencies
was fed. The setting is for other than transparency, but transparencies
were fed.
8 ---
7 After Regi Roll turns on, Exit sensor stays off, Fuser In sensor off.
6 After Regi Roll turns on, Exit sensor is stays off, Fuser In sensor on.
5 After Regi Roll turns on, Regi sensor stays on.
4 Regi sensor signal from cassette 1 or 2 is not received.
3 Regi sensor signal from MP tray is not received.
2 Tray Path1 sensor signal from cassette 1 is not received.
1 (Tray Path1 sensor signal from cassette 2 is not received.)
0 (Tray Path2 sensor signal from cassette 2) is not received.
Paper Size
Indicated same as the panel display.
Paper type:
Indicated as the specified value set for each media to control the engine.
Note *1: The date and time (yy/mm/dd hh:mm) are indicated in the local time when
generated.
(The date and time is not re-calculated even if the time difference is changed.)
yy are the lower two digits of the calendar year.
In the non-synchronous mode, --/--/-- --:-- is displayed.
*2: The value of the total dot counter on ASIC is used in the dot calculation.Threshold is
128.
Figure 6-7. Engine Status Sheet
Table 6-2. Paper Type
Paper Type Front Side Back Side
Plain paper 1 17
High quality paper 8 24
Thick paper 4 20
Extra thick paper 10 26
Coated paper 7 23
Transparency 2 ---
Labels 5 ---
Envelopes 15 ---
Postcards 14 30
LIST OF INFORMATION MANAGED AND METHODS OF MANAGEMENT
Table 6-3. List of information managed and methods of management
Information name
Count processing and storage
location
Range Unit Count conditions Clear conditions
Total Pages
Color Pages
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
Pages
Pages
During printing
During printing
When a jam occurs
When a jam occurs
Jam Counts Controller 0 - 100,000 Times When a jam occurred. (EEPROM Initialization)
C Toner Dispense time
Limit value
Total dots
M Toner Dispense time
Limit value
Total dots
Y Toner Dispense time
C Toner Dispense time
Total dots
K Toner Dispense time
Limit value
Total dots
C Toner Change 4K only
1.5K only
M Toner Change 4K only
1.5K only
Y Toner Change 4K only
1.5K only
K Toner Change 4K only
1.5K only
Engine
Engine
Controller
Engine
Engine
Controller
Engine
Engine
Controller
Engine
Engine
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
msec
msec
---
msec
msec
---
msec
msec
---
msec
msec
---
Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
When replaced C Toner
When replaced C Toner
When replaced M Toner
When replaced M Toner
When replaced Y Toner
When replaced Y Toner
When replaced K Toner
When replaced K Toner
New C toner detected
---
(EEPROM Initialization)
New M toner detected
---
New Y toner detected
---
New K toner detected
---
Photoconductor
Photoconductor Change
Engine
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 255
Rotation
Times
During printing
When replaced Photo
conductor
New photoconductor detected
Fuser
Fuser Change
Fuser Change (Pages at the time of replacing the
pervious one)
Controller
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 255
0 - 99,999,999
Pages
Times
Pages
During printing
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Second BTR & FUSER
2nd BTR Change
Engine
Controller
0 - `
0 - 255
Pages
Times
During printing
Counter clear
Counter clear
Development Unit
C Development
M Development
Y Development
K Development
C Deve Change
M Deve Change
Y Deve Change
K Deve Change
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
msec
msec
msec
msec
Times
Times
Times
Times
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
2nd BTR Offset
Normal
SemiThk
Thick
ExtraThk
Card
Envelope
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
---
---
---
---
---
---
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
Power On (Times power is turned on)
Sleep (Number of recoveries from standby)
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
Times
Times
At Power on
When returning from
standby
MCU
Duplex
Engine
Engine
---
---
---
---
(Fixed value)
(Fixed value)
None
None
Panel Message 1
Error Code 1
Error Page 1
Jam Code 1
Page Size 1
Paper Type 1
Date, Time 1
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
When an error occurs
SelecType
(EEPROM initialization)
Information name
location
6.4.2.2 Print Log Report
PRINT LOG REPORT ITEMS
S/N : Serial number of main unit
Date : yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm
The date and time are indicated in the local time.
Not displayed when it is in asynchronous state.
Toner Remain
C Toner : Remaining amount of C toner [%]
M Toner : Remaining amount of M toner [%]
Y Toner : Remaining amount of Y toner [%]
K Toner : Remaining amount of K toner [%]
Print of papers [pages]
: Number of printed pages by paper size.
Total : Number of printed pages.
Mono Simplex : Monochrome Number of printed pages by one-side printing.
Color Simplex : Color (process color) Number of printed pages by one-side printing.
Print of mode : Number of printed pages by print mode.
Coverage Duty [%] : Percentage of printed dots in total dots per page of each color.
It is avaraged each time one page is printed.
Dots/1% [dots] : Number of dots when 1% of each toner is used.Updated with
every reduction of 1%.
Estimate [pages] : Estimated number of pages that can be print with remained toner.
The estimate is made based on the Coverage Duty [%] and
Dots/1%[dots].
Figure 6-8. Print Log Report
LIST OF INFORMATION MANAGED AND METHODS OF MANAGEMENT
Note : Values in parentheses in the Clear Condition column are cleared as a result.If a value exceeds its range, it is not guaranteed if it is controlled by the controller.
Information name
location
Serial Number
Date, Time
Controller
Controller
xxxxxxxxxx
---
---
---
---
---
None
At Power on
C Toner
M Toner
Y Toner
K Toner
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
%
%
%
%
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
New C toner detected
New M toner detected
New Y toner detected
New K toner detected
Print [pages]
Total
Mono Simplex
Mono Duplex
Color Simplex
Color Duplex
Dummy
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
pages
pages
pages
pages
pages
pages
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
Coverage Duty [%] C,M,Y,K
Dots/1% [dots] C,M,Y,K
Estimate [pages]
Controller
Controller
Controller
0.0 - 100.0
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 99,999,999
%
dots
pages
During printing
During printing
During printing
MAI NTENANCE Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement 562
6.5 Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement
6.5.1 Consumables
Note *1: A4, Print ratio=5 %
*2: Monochrome : Color = 1:2, 2P/J, A4, Print ratio is 5%
CAUTION
The print page-based service life values of the Consumables and Periodical Replacement Parts are guidelines. The number of printable pages varies
depending on how they are printed. The number of printable pages decreases depending on the intermittent printing (where a few pages, one to several
pages, are printed each time), paper size, paper orientation, thick paper printing, printed document, frequent power-on/off, etc. Hence, the number of
printable pages of the consumables and periodical replacement parts may become less than a half depending on the operating conditions and environment
of the user.
Table 6-5. Information on Consumables
Part Name Part Code Life (Pages) Service life indication Remarks
Toner Cartridge
Yellow
LPCA4ETC4Y 1500
*1
Replace Toner C (1500 pages by the K toner is the figure for the packaged cartridge only.)
LPCA4ETC5Y 4000
*1
Magenta
LPCA4ETC4M 1500
*1
Replace Toner M
LPCA4ETC5M 4000
*1
Cyan
LPCA4ETC4C 1500
*1
Replace Toner Y
LPCA4ETC5C 4000
*1
Black
--- --- Replace Toner K
LPCA4ETC5K 4000
*1
Photoconductor Unit
LPCA4KUT3 14000
*2
Replace Photocondctr When the error LED is flashing, the product shifts to eco-mode by pressing the
[Start] button.(Printing can be continued)
However, the print quality is not guaranteed.
MAI NTENANCE Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement 563
6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts
Table 6-6. Maintenance Information on Regular Replacement Parts
Part Name Part Code Life (Pages) Service life indication
Part to be replaced
at the same time
Remedy after Replacement Remarks
FUSER ASSY
2090471 100000
Worn Fuser 2ND BTR ASSY Execute Reset Fuser Counter in
the Maintenance Menu to reset the
life counter.
While it can still be printed, it is
desirable to replace the unit. If
printing is continued, a paper
jam will occur at the fusing
section frequently because the
wear of the heat roller shaft
increases the torque of the heat
roller.
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE
K 1292991 100000 Worn K Dev Unit PIVOT AD Execute Reset X DvlpCounter
(X=Y, M, C, or K) in the
Maintenance Menu to reset the life
counter.
After executing the counter reset,
open and close the Cover A. Do not
turn the printer off until the engine
completely stops.
While it can still be printed,
it is desirable to replace the
unit.
The PIVOT AD is packed
with the ASP HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE.
Y 1292994
66700
Worn Y Dev Unit PIVOT AD
M 1292996 Worn M Dev Unit PIVOT AD
C 1292999
Worn C Dev Unit PIVOT AD
2ND BTR ASSY
1292981 100000 ---
FUSER ASSY Execute Reset 2ndBTRCounter in
the Maintenance Menu to reset the
life counter.
After executing the counter reset,
open and close the Cover A. Do not
turn the printer off until the engine
completely stops.
While it can still be printed after
the message is displayed, it is
desirable to replace the unit.
CHAP T E R
7
APPENDIX
APPENDI X System Connection Diagram 565
7.1 System Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the main board and each system.
Figure 7-1. Main Board Block Diagram
CN704
ADF I/F
*1
(12Pin)
CN705
Sensor I/F
*2
(2Pin)
CN405
Panel I/F
(30Pin)
CN701
CCD_A I/F
(14Pin)
CN702
CCD_B I/F
(13Pin)
CN703
Motor I/F
(4Pin)
Control Panel
CN601
Engine I/F
(16Pin)
CN602
Viedo I/F
(2Pin)
CN300 ROM/RAM DIMM P (90Pin)
CN201 RAM DIMM A (90Pin)
CN202 RAM DIMM B (90Pin)
P
S0
S1
CN502
Power (24V)
(2Pin)
CN410
FAX I/F
*2
(40Pin)
CN402
USB I/F
(2Pin)
CN501
Power (5V, 3.3V)
(2Pin)
CN407
Cobalt I/F
(30Pin)
APPENDI X Printer System Electrical Connection 566
7.2 Printer System Electrical Connection
7.2.1 Connector Summary
This section gives the connector summary for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F and each
connectors plug and jack alignment.
7.2.1.1 Plug and Jack Layout
IOT
Table 7-1. IOT
P/J Location Remarks
1 G-156 Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
2 G-156 Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY AC
3 G-157 Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
100 F-122 Connects SWITCH-P/H and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
101 G-123 Connects SENSOR OHP and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
102 F-123 Connects SENSOR REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
103 D-124 Connects SENSOR PAPER ENPTY and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
104 H-110 Connects SENSOR HUM&TEMP and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
105 D-108
Connects SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI and HARNESS ASSY
MAIN
106 H-108
Connects ANTENNA CTRG and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
107 D-107
Connects SENSOR IBT RETRACT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
108 D-106
Connects SENSOR TR-O and HARNESS-ASSY XERO
109 D-106
Connects ANTENNA ASSY and HARNESS ASSY XERO
111 G-137
Connects SENSOR FUSER IN and HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
112 H-137
Connects SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT and HARNESS ASSY ADC
113 H-136
Connects SWITCH 2BTR COVER and HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
114 D-104
Connects SWITCH-INLK FUSER and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
115 G-107
Connects SWITCH-INLK FRONT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
116 G-108
Connects SWITCH ASSY TOP and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
117 D-105
Connects SWITCH-INLK FUSER and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
125 G-108 Connects SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
126 F-138 Connects SENSOR TNER FULL and HARNESS ASSY TNER FULL
128 G-153 Connects FUSER LOCK SWITCH and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
200 H-153 Connects MOT ASSY P/R and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
201 G-153 Connects MOT ASSY P/R and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
202 F-124 Connects CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
203 F-122 Connects CLUTCH ASSY REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
204 C-109 Connection in MOT ASSY ROT
400 I-149 Connects PWBA MCU and FFC-ASSY ESS
401 I-149 Connects PWBA MCU and FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
403 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
404 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY FSR
405 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
406 H-149 Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
407 H-149 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
408 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
409 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
410 I-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
411 I-148 Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
414 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
415 J-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
416 J-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS-ASSY XERO
417 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
418 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ADC
420 J-148 Not used
421 J-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
422 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ADC
429 D-109 Connects PWBA CRUM and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Table 7-1. IOT
430 E-109 Connects PWB ASSY ROT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
431 F-138 Connects SENSOR ASSY ADC and HARNESS ASSY ADC
432 D-109 Connects PWB ASSY ROT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
433 D-109 Connects PWB ASSY ROT and PWB ASSY MOT
500 H-153 Connects LV/HVPS and FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
501 I-152 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
502 I-153 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
503 I-155 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY AC
D H-154 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY BTR
F F-109 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY 2BTR
G E-109 Connects PWBA HVPS and WIRE ASSY IBT
H E-109 Connects PWBA HVPS and WIRE ASSY DTN
A H-155 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY BCR
C H-156 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY DEVE
510 I-108 Connects HOLDER ASSY BIAS and WIRE ASSY DEVE
512 I-107 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY and WIRE ASSY BTR
513 H-107 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY IBT
514 I-108 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY BCR
515 H-153 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
516 F-110 Connects PWBA HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
600 F-153 Connects MOT ASSY MICRO and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
601 H-138 Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
602 H-138 Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
603 F-124 Connects HARNESS ASSY P/H1 and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
604 F-124 Connects MOTOR-PH and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
605 E-124 Connects SOLENOID PICK UP and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
607 E-140 Not used
614 E-105 Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
617 D-140
Connects HARNESS-ASSY TNER FULL and HARNESS ASSY
MAIN
Table 7-1. IOT
620 H-137 Connects HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS and HARNESS ASSY ADC
621 I-136 Connects HARNESS ASSY 2BTR and HARNESS ASSY ADC
CN1 B-106 Connects OP PANEL and HARNESS ASSY PANEL
CN405 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY PANEL
CN410 G-156 Connects PWBA ESS and FAX BOARD
CN501 G-156 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
CN502 F-155 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
CN601 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and FFC-ASSY ESS
CN602 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
CN1 I-153 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
CN701 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and SCANNER
T2 I-107 Connects PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY and WIRE ASSY 2BTR
T4 H-107 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY DTN
Table 7-1. IOT
500 FEEDER
7.2.1.2 Plug and Jack Layout
Figure 7-2. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (1)
Table 7-2. 500 FEEDER
119 E-307 Connects SENSOR NO PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FEED3
120 D-307 Connects SENSOR T/R (P120) and HARNESS ASSY FEED3
121 C-308
Connects SWITCH FEEDER DOOR and HARNESS-ASSY FEED
MAIN
435 E-309 Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED1
436 E-309 Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED2
437 E-309 Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
CN1 E-308 Connects PWBA MOT and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
CN2 D-308 Connects PWBA MOT and MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
608 D-307 Connects HARNESS ASSY MAIN and HARNESS-ASSY FEED1
609 C-309 Connects CLUTCH ASSY FEED and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
610 C-308 Connects SOLENOID FEED and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
618 D-307
Connects HARNESS ASSY FEED MAIN and HARNESS ASSY
FEED3
4358 D-309
Not Connects
108 117 114 614 109
105
115 T4 (IBT)
204
107
CN1
429
106
433 432 430 104 116 G H 516 F
510
(DEVE)
514
(BCR)
513
(IBT)
512
(1BTR)
T2
(2BTR)
125
A
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
101
B C D E F G H I J K L
Leg_04_001RB
Figure 7-3. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (2) Figure 7-4. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (3)
604 603 605 103
100
202
101
102
203
A
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
116
Leg_04_002RA
126
617
431 111 620 112 113
601
607
602
621
A
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
131
Leg_04_003RB
Figure 7-5. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (4) Figure 7-6. Plug and Jack Layout for 500 FEEDER
501
500
510
D
503
A
C
502
515
608
3 2 1 CN501
CN601
400
415
412
403
404
405
421
420
411
413
409
406
416 414 422 418 417
401 410 408 407
600
201
200
CN602
CN405
CN502
128
CN705
CN703
CN410
CN704
CN702
CN701
A
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
146
Leg_04_004RC
121 608 618 120 119 CN2
609 610 4358 436 435 437
CN1
A
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
301
Leg_Sec04_006EB
7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams
7.2.2.1 Symbols used in the Overall Wiring Connection Diagram
The table below shows how to interpret the Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams.
Table 7-3. List of the Symbols
Symbols Explanation
Indicates a connection between parts with a harness or wire.
Indicates a connection that differs according to the specification.
Indicates a connection between parts by conductive materials
such as a leaf spring.
Indicates a connection between parts with a screw.
Indicates Frame Ground.
Indicates a connector, and the connector No.
Indicates a connection terminal with a leaf spring or other spring
on a board, and the connector (terminal) No.
Indicates a connector attached directly to the board, and the
connector No.
Box with a part name in it indicates the part.
Indicates a functional component in a part, and its name.
Indicates a section in 7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram
between Parts (p573), and the section No.
Indicates a screw that secures conductive material such as a leaf
spring to harness.
Indicates conductive materials such as leaf spring.
Symbols Explanation
7.2.2.2 Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams
Figure 7-7. Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams
P
W
B
A

F
U
S
E
R
C
O
N
T
P
L
1
2
.
2
.
1
2
P
/
J
1
P
/
J
2
P
/
J
3
P
/
J
4
P
W
B
A

M
C
U
P
L
1
2
.
2
.
1
P
/
J
4
0
1
P
W
B
A

E
S
S
P
L
1
2
.
2
.
7
P
/
J
4
0
0
C
N
6
0
1
C
N
5
0
1
O
P

P
A
N
E
L
P
L
1
.
1
.
1
7
C
N
4
0
5
C
N
1
R
O
S

A
S
S
Y
P
L
8
.
1
.
1
C
N
6
0
2
P
/
J
6
0
2
P
/
J
4
0
7
P
W
B
A

H
V
P
S
P
L
1
2
.
1
.
9
P
/
J
5
1
6
G
L
V
/
H
V
P
S
P
L
1
2
.
2
.
3
P
/
J
5
0
1
C
N
5
0
2
P
/
J
5
0
2
P
/
J
4
1
0
P
/
J
5
0
3
P
/
J
6
0
1
D
R
I
V
E

A
S
S
Y

P
R
O
P
L
1
1
.
1
.
2
S
E
N
S
O
R

T
N
E
R

F
U
L
L
P
L
7
.
1
.
2
4
P
/
J
1
2
6
P
/
J
6
1
7
S
E
N
S
O
R
I
B
T

R
E
T
R
A
C
T
P
L
6
.
1
.
2
6
P
/
J
1
0
7
S
E
N
S
O
R

T
R
-
0
P
L
7
.
1
.
2
P
/
J
1
0
8
A
N
T
E
N
N
A

A
S
S
Y
P
L
7
.
1
.
1
0
P
/
J
1
0
9
M
O
T

A
S
S
Y

P
/
R
P
L
1
1
.
1
.
6
P
/
J
2
0
0
P
/
J
4
1
1
P
/
J
4
1
4
P
/
J
4
1
3
P
/
J
4
1
5
P
/
J
4
1
6
S
E
N
S
O
R

H
U
M

&

T
E
M
P
P
L
1
2
.
1
.
6
P
/
J
1
0
4
P
W
B
A

C
R
U
M
P
L
1
2
.
1
.
1
1
P
/
J
4
2
9
M
O
T

A
S
S
Y

M
A
G
P
L
1
1
.
1
.
4
S
E
N
S
O
R

R
O
T
A
R
Y
H
O
M
E

P
O
S
I
P
L
9
.
1
.
1
8
P
/
J
1
0
5
A
N
T
E
N
N
A

C
T
R
G
P
L
9
.
1
.
1
2
P
/
J
1
0
6
S
W
I
T
C
H
-
F
R
O
N
T

D
O
O
R
P
L
1
.
1
.
2
6
P
/
J
1
2
5
S
E
N
S
O
R

F
U
S
E
R

I
N
P
L
6
.
1
.
3
P
/
J
1
1
1
S
E
N
S
O
R

2
B
T
R
R
E
T
R
A
C
T
P
L
6
.
1
.
2
2
P
/
J
1
1
2
S
W
I
T
C
H

2
B
T
R
C
O
V
E
R
P
L
6
.
1
.
1
8
P
/
J
1
1
3
S
E
N
S
O
R

A
S
S
Y

A
D
C
P
L
6
.
1
.
2
0
P
/
J
4
3
1
M
O
T

A
S
S
Y

M
I
C
R
O
P
L
1
1
.
1
.
7
M
O
T

A
S
S
Y

F
S
R
P
L
1
1
.
1
.
3
F
U
S
E
R

A
S
S
Y
P
L
1
0
.
1
.
1
S
W
I
T
C
H
-
I
N
L
K
F
U
S
E
R
P
L
1
.
1
.
3
4
M
O
T
O
R
-
P
H
P
L
5
.
2
.
2
0
P
/
J
6
0
4
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D

P
I
C
K

U
P
P
L
4
.
1
.
2
3
P
/
J
6
0
5
C
L
U
T
C
H

A
S
S
Y

P
R
E

R
E
G
I
P
L
5
.
2
.
2
2
P
/
J
2
0
2
C
L
U
T
C
H

A
S
S
Y

R
E
G
I
P
L
5
.
2
.
2
P
/
J
2
0
3
S
W
I
T
C
H
-
P
H

D
O
O
R
P
L
5
.
2
.
2
3
P
/
J
1
0
0
S
E
N
S
O
R

P
A
P
E
R

E
M
P
T
Y
P
L
4
.
1
.
2
4
P
/
J
1
0
3
P
/
J
6
0
3
P
/
J
4
0
8
P
/
J
4
0
9
P
/
J
4
1
8
P
/
J
6
2
0
P
/
J
6
2
1
P
/
J
4
2
2
P
/
J
6
0
0
P
W
B

A
S
S
Y

R
O
T
P
L
1
2
.
1
.
1
0
P
/
J
4
3
3
P
/
J
4
3
0
P
/
J
4
1
2
P
/
J
4
0
5
P
/
J
4
0
6
M
O
T

A
S
S
Y

R
O
T
P
L
1
1
.
1
.
5
P
/
J
2
0
4
P
/
J
4
3
2
P
/
J
2
0
1
P
/
J
4
0
4
P
/
J
4
1
7
P
/
J
4
0
3
P
/
J
6
1
4
P
/
J
1
1
4
P
W
B
A

T
R
A
Y

5
0
0
P
L
1
4
.
3
.
3
P
/
J
4
2
1
P
/
J
6
0
8
P
/
J
4
3
5
P
/
J
4
3
7
P
W
B
A

M
O
T
P
L
1
4
.
3
.
4
C
N
1
C
N
2
C
L
U
T
C
H

A
S
S
Y

F
E
E
D
P
L
1
4
.
3
.
1
2
S
W
I
T
C
H

F
E
E
D
E
R

D
O
O
R
P
L
1
4
.
3
.
1
8
S
E
N
S
O
R

N
O

P
A
P
E
R
P
L
1
4
.
4
.
3
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D

F
E
E
D
P
L
1
4
.
3
.
8
P
/
J
6
0
9
P
/
J
1
2
1
P
/
J
1
1
9
P
/
J
6
1
0
P
/
J
6
1
8
S
E
N
S
O
R

T
/
R

(
P
1
2
0
)
P
L
1
4
.
4
.
7
P
/
J
1
2
0
N
.
C
.
P
/
J
4
3
6
S
W
I
T
C
H
-
I
N
L
K

F
R
O
N
T
P
L
1
.
1
.
2
7
F
U
S
E
R

L
O
C
K

S
W
I
T
C
H
P
L
1
0
.
1
.
6
S
W
I
T
C
H
A
S
S
Y

T
O
P
P
L
1
.
1
.
7
P
/
J
1
1
5
P
/
J
1
1
5
P
/
J
1
1
6
P
/
J
1
1
6
S
W
I
T
C
H
-
I
N
L
K
F
U
S
E
R
P
L
1
.
1
.
3
4
P
/
J
1
1
7
P
/
J
1
1
7
P
/
J
5
1
5
P
/
J
5
0
0
M
O
T
O
R

A
S
S
Y

F
E
E
D
E
R
P
L
1
4
.
3
.
9
H
O
U
S
I
N
G

A
S
S
Y
-
D
E
V
E

P
L
9
.
2
.
5
I
B
T

A
S
S
Y

P
L
7
.
1
.
1
2
N
D

B
T
R

A
S
S
Y

P
L
6
.
1
.
1
2
D
F
U
S
E
R

A
S
S
Y
P
L
1
0
.
1
.
1
P
/
J
6
1
4
9
-
1
578
2 3
9
-
2
1
6
4
1
0
L
e
g
_
0
0
7
_
0
0
1
R
A
J
4
3
5
8
S
E
N
S
O
R

O
H
P
P
L
5
.
2
.
1
6
S
E
N
S
O
R

R
E
G
I
P
L
5
.
2
.
1
9
P
/
J
1
0
1
P
/
J
1
0
2
P
/
J
1
2
8
P
/
J
1
2
8
P
/
J
5
1
0
CA
F H
7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts
7.2.3.1 Symbols used in the Wiring Connection Diagram between
Parts
The table below shows how to interpret the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts
given on the following pages.
Commonly used symbols are omitted here.
Symbol Explanation
Indicates a plug.
Indicates a jack.
Indicates a Pin YY or Jack YY of the connector P
XX and J XX.
Indicates a part.
Indicates a functional component in a part, and its
name.
Indicates control inside the PWB, and a brief
outline of the control.
P/JXX
YY
PWBA HNB DRV PL
X.Y.Z
Heater
Control
Indicates a connection between parts with a
harness or wire, and its signal name/details.An
arrow indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of
the signal for enabling the function. The voltage is
the value when the signal is High.An arrow
indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of
the signal when the function is detected. The
voltage is the value when the signal is High. An
arrow indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates cable-to-cable connection.
I/L +24VDC Indicates the DC voltage when the HNB MCU
WITH CPU internal interlock switch is ON.
+5VDC
+3.3VDC
Indicates DC voltage.
SG Indicates a Signal Ground.
AG Indicates Analog Ground.
RTN Indicates a Return.
Symbol Explanation
DEVE_A
REGI CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC
EXIT PAPER SENSED (L) +3.3VDC
7.2.3.2 Composition of the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts
The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into 11 sections as shown below to
indicate the detailed connection between parts.
1. DC POWER SUPPLY (p576)
Connection between PWBA MCU and LV/HVPS
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA FUSER CONTROL
Connection between LV/HVPS and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWB ASSY ROT
Connection between LV/HVPS and SWITCH-INLK FRONT
Connection between the SWITCH-INLK FRONT and SWITCH ASSY TOP
Connection between the SWITCH ASSY TOP and SWITCH-INLK FUSER
Connection between SWITCH-INLK FUSER and LV/HVPS
2. MSI REGI (p577)
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOTOR-PH
Connection between the PWBA MCU and SOLENOID PICK UP
Connection between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
Connection between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY REGI
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH-PH DOOR
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR OHP
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR REGI
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
3. FEEDER (500) (p578)
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA TRAY 500
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and CLUTCH ASSY FEED
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SWITCH FEEDER
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SENSOR NO PAPER
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SENSOR T/R
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SOLENOID FEED
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and PWBA MOT
Connection between PWBA MOT and MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
4. ROS (p579)
Connection between PWBA MCU and ROS ASSY
Connection between ROS ASSY and PWBA ESS
5. XEROGRAPHIC (p580)
Connection between PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR TNER FULL
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR IBT RETRACT
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR TR-O
Connection between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA ASSY
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between LV/HVPS and MOT ASSY P/R
6. HIGH VOLTAGE (p581)
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA HVPS
Connection between LV/HVPS and HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, IBT ASSY,
2ND BTR ASSY
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA MCU
7. DEVELOPER (p582)
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH FRONT-DOOR
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR HUM&TEMP
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA CRUM
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
Connection between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWB ASSY ROT
Connection between PWBA ASSY ROT and MOT ASSY ROT
Connection between PWB ASSY ROT and LV/HVPS
8. 2nd BTR (p583)
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR FUSER IN
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH 2BTR COVER
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR ASSY ADC
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MICRO
9. FUSER (p584)
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY FUSER
Connection between PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
Connection between PWBA MCU and FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA FUSER CONT
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and FUSER ASSY
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and PWBA MCU
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA MCU
10. CONTROLLER (p585)
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA ESS
Connection between PWBA ESS and OP PANEL
Connection between PWBA ESS and LV/HVPS
1. DC POWER SUPPLY
Overcurrent Protection
All outputs (+24VDC, +5VDC, +3.3VDC) from LV/HVPS are stopped when
short-circuiting on the way to the earth or ground. Each output is restored by
eliminating the cause of the short-circuit, and turning the printer OFF and then
back ON at specified time interval. The overcurrent protection circuit is activated
when a current exceeds 16A flows.
Overvoltage Protection
All outputs from LV/HVPS are stopped when an overvoltage is detected. The
operating voltages for overvoltage protection of each output are as follows:
+24VDC: 36VDC
+5VDC: 7VDC
+3.3VDC: 5VDC
Power save
Stopping output by Interlock Switch
The I/L +5VDC signal that arrives via Front Interlock Switch, Upper
Interlock Switch and Fuser Interlock Switch becomes the power source of the
LV/HVPS internal Relay coil. This signal opens/closes Relay contacts, and
controls INTERLOCK +24VDC and INTERLOCK +5VDC.
Figure 7-8. DC POWER SUPPLY Connection and Wiring Diagram
Name of Signal Line Remarks
POWER SAVE Signal for turning +24VDC OFF
I/L +5VDC ---
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
Power
Save
P/J500
3
+5VDC
Supply
+24VDC
Supply
+3.3VDC
Supply
15
P/J500
5
P/J502
3
4
+5VDC
+24VDC
5
6
7
8
1
2
9
10
11
12
+3.3VDC
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
4
P/J502
13
SWITCH-
INLK
FRONT
PL.1.1.27
SWITCH-
INLK
FUSER
PL.1.1.34
+5VDC
SWITCH
ASSY
TOP
PL.1.1.7
I/L +5VDC
POWER SAVE
P/J401
20
19
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
I/L +5VDC
P/J401
18
+5VDC
SG
P/J410
3
4
I/L +24VDC
I/L +24VDC
SG
SG
5
6
7
8
+3.3VDC
SG
I/L +24VDC
SG
I/L +24VDC
SG
1
2
P/J201
1
2
P/J432
1
3
MOT ASSY P/R
PL11.1.6
PWBA FUSER CONTROL
PL12.2.12
P/J2
3
1
P/J503
3
1
Interlock
+24VDC
PWB ASSY
ROT
PL12.1.10
Interlock
+24VDC
Interlock
+5VDC
+5VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
+3.3VDC
1 3
P/J115
3
P/J115
1 3
P/J116
1 1
P/J116
3
3
P/J117
1 1
P/J117
3
Leg_Sec007_002FB
2. MSI&REGI
Figure 7-9. MSI&REGI Connection and Wiring Diagram
PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +5VDC Paper detection signal for MSI generated by
Sensor Photo (No Paper Sensor)
P/H MOTER ON (H) +3.3VDC
P/H MOTER PWM
P/H MOTER FG
P/H MOTER CW/CCW
P/H MOTOR drive control signal
FEED SOL ON (L) +24VDC Solenoid Feed ON/OFF signal
PREREGI CL ON (L) +24VDC Pre-Regi Clutch ON/OFF signal
REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC Regi Clutch ON/OFF signal
P/H DOOR SW OPEND (H) +3.3VDC CHTE ASSY REATR open/close detection
signal generated by P/H Door Switch
OHP SENSED (H) +5VDC
OHP media detection signal generated by Sensor
Photo (OHP Sensor)
REGI SENSED (H) +5VDC Paper detection signal at REGI section generated
by Sensor Photo (REGI Sensor)
SG
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
2
3
4
5
P/H MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
P/H MOT PWM +3.3VDC
P/H MOT TG +3.3VDC
P/H MOT ON CW/CCW
SG
P/J409
1
6
I/L +24VDC
P/J604
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
M
MOTOR-PH
PL5.2.20
P/J409
7
I/L +24VDC
8
FEED SOL ON (L) +24VDC
P/J605
2
1
1
2
P/J408
1
PRE REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC
2
I/L +24VDC
P/J202
2
1
1
2
3
REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC
4
I/L +24VDC
3
4
10
9
P/J203
2
1
1
2
5
6
P/H POOR SW OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
5
6
8
7
P/J603
12
11
1
2
7
SG
8
OHP SENSED (H) +5VDC
7
8
6
5
9
+5VDC
9 4
P/J100
2
1
2
1
P/J101
3
10
PULL UP +5VDC
11
SG
10
11
3
2
12
REGI SENSED (H) +5VDC
12 1
2
1
P/J102
3
SENSOR REGI
PL5.2.19
SENSOR OHP
PL5.2.16
SWITCH-PH
DOOR
PL5.2.23
13
PULL UP +5VDC
14
SG
15
PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +5VDC
2
1
P/J103
3
SENSOR PAPER
EMPTY
PL4.1.24
SOLENOID
PICK UP
PL4.1.23
CLUTCH ASSY
PRE REGI
PL5.2.22
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI
PL5.2.2
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
Leg_Sec007_003FB
3. FEEDER (500)
Figure 7-10. FEEDER 500 Connection and Wiring Diagram
TRAY SENSOR
RXD
TXD
PWBA TRAY CONT. control signal
FEED MOTOR ON (H) +
FUSER MOTOR control signal
FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC
Feed Clutch ON/OFF signal
DOOR SW OPEND (H) +5VDC
Rear Cover open/close detection signal generated
by Door Rear Cover Switch
NO PAPER SENSED (H) +5VDC Paper detection signal for Paper Tray generated
by Sensor Photo (No Paper Sensor)
PAPER PASS SENSED (L) +5VDC Paper feed starting signal generated by Sensor
Photo (Paper Pass Sensor)
Solenoid Feed ON/OFF signal
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J421
10
9
TRAY
SENSOR
10
9
P/J608
1
2
8
RXD
8 3
2
3
P/J435
1
7
TXD
6
SG
7
6
4
5
5
+5VDC
5 6
5
6
4
4
SG
3
SG
4
3
7
8
2
I/L +24VDC
2 9
8
9
7
1
I/L +24VDC
1 10 10
PWBA TRAY 500
PL14.3.3
+5VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
PWBA TRAY
500
PL.14.3.3
P/J437
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
16
17
FEED MOT ON (H)
I/L +24VDC
SG
1
2
4
CN1
5
PWBA MOT
PL14.3.4
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MOTOR ASSY
FEEDER
PL14.3.9
M
I/L +24VDC
FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC
1
P/J609
2
2
1
SG
P/J121
2
1
SWITCH FEEDER
DOOR
PL14.3.18
P/J119
3
2
1
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
NO PAPER SENSED (H) +5VDC
SENSOR NO PAPER
PL14.4.3
13
14
15
P/J120
3
2
1
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
PAPER PASS SENSED (L) +5VDC
SENSOR T/R (P120)
PL14.4.7
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
CLUTCH ASSY FEED
PL14.3.12
+5VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
I/L +24VDC
P/J610
2
1
1
2
SOLENOID FEED
PL14.3.8
P/J618
6
5
4
1
2
3
3
2
1
4
5
6
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
N.C. N.C.
N.C.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
P/J436
1
J4358
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
DOOR SW OPENED (H) +5VDC
Leg_Sec007_004FB
Tray Interface
Connector
4. ROS
Figure 7-11. ROS Connection and Wiring Diagram
ESS DATA-
ESS DATA+
Image signal from ESS
MCU DATA-
MCU DATA+
Image signal from MCU
PCONT
LASER ON (L) +5VDC
VREF
PWBA LD control signal in ROS ASSY
SCANNER MOTOR ON (L) +5VDC
SCANNER MOTOR CLOCK
PWBA Scanner control signal in ROS ASSY
SOS SENSED (L) +5VDC
Reference signal for start of laser scanning
SOS PWB
SCANNER PWB
SCANNER MOTOR
PWBA LD
PWBA ESS
PL12.2.7
CN602
1
2
P/J407
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P/J424
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P/J425
5
4
3
1
P/J426
3
2
1
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J602
2
1
P/J601
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P/J427
2
1
DATA-
DATA+
DATA-
DATA+
P CONT
LASER ON (L) +5VDC
SG
VREF
SG
+5VDC
+3.3VDC
I/L +24VDC
SG
SCAN MOT ON(L) +5VDC
SCAN MOT CLOCK
SG
SOS SENSED (L) +5VDC
+5VDC
ROS ASSY
PL8.1.1
Single
Beam Laser
Diode
M
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
+5VDC
+3.3VDC
+5VDC
Leg_007_005RA
5. XEROGRAPHIC
Figure 7-12. XEROGRAPHIC Connection and Wiring Diagram
IBT BRUSH MOT ON
IBT BRUSH MOT PWM
IBT BRUSH MOT TG
IBT BRUSH MOT CW/CCW
IBT Brush Motor drive control signal
IBT CLEN RET MOT START
IBT CLEN RET MOT PWM
IBT CLEN RET MOT TG
IBT Cleaner Retract Motor drive control signal
FULL TONER SENSED (H) +5VDC
Full toner detection signal generated by Sensor
Photo (Sensor Toner Full)
IBT RETRACT SENSED (L) +5VDC IBT Cleaner retract detection signal generated by
Sensor Photo (IBT Retract Sensor)
TR0 SENSED (H) +5VDCS Belt position detection signal generated by
Sensor Photo (TR0 Sensor)
ANTENNA OUT
ANTENNA IN
Crum XERO Antenna control signal
P/R MOT GAIN
P/R MOT CLK
P/R MOT LD
P/R MOT FG
P/R MOT ON (L) +
P/R MOTOR drive control signal
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
2
3
4
5
6
IBT BRUSH MOT ON
IBT BRUSH MOT PWM
IBT BRUSH MOT TG
IBT BRUSH MOT CW/CCW
SG
I/L +24VDC
I/L +24VDC
IBT BRUSH MOTOR
M
P/J 411
1
1
2
3
IBT CLEN RET MOT ON
SG
IBT CLEANER
RETRACT MOTOR
P/J 414
M
P/J 413
8
9
I/L +24VDC
RETRACT SOL ON (L) +24VDC
10
11
SG
FULL TONER SENSED (H) +5VDC
12
PULL UP +5VDC
P/J 606
2
1
P/J 617
3
2
1
1
2
3
P/J 126
3
2
1
SENSOR
TNER FULL
PL7.1.24
P/J 415
3
4
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
5
IBT RETRACT SENSED (L) +5VDC
P/J 107
3
2
1
IBT RETRACT
SENSOR
PL6.1.26
P/J 416
1
2
+5VDC
TRO SENSED (H) +5VDC
3
SG
P/J 108
3
2
1
SENSOR TR-0
PL7.1.2
4
ANTENNA OUT
5
ANTENNA IN
P/J 109
2
1
ANTENNA
ASSY
PL7.1.10
P/J 403
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P/J 502
9
10
P/R MOT GAIN
P/J 200
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P/J 201
1
2
P/R MOT CLK
P/R MOT LD
P/R MOT FG
P/R MOT ON (L) +
+5VDC
SG
I/L +24VDC
SG
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
MOT ASSY P/R
PL11.1.6
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
M
Leg_Sec007_006FC
DRIVE ASSY PRO
PL11.1.2
N.C.
6. HIGH VOLTAGE
Figure 7-13. HIGH VOLTAGE Connection and Wiring Diagram
1st BTR CONT 1st BTR Bias voltage control signal
IBT CLEANER H/L IBT CLEANER Bias voltage control signal
BCR CONT BCR Bias voltage control signal
DE-TONER CONT DE-TONER Bias voltage control signal
DEVE BIAS ON DEVE Bias ON/OFF signal
DEVE BIAS CONT DEVE Bias voltage control signal
IBT CLEANER ON Belt Cleaning Brush Bias ON/OFF signal
1st BTR REV ON 1st BTR DC Bias control signal
2nd BTR REV ON 2nd BTR DC Bias control signal
1st BTR ON 1st BTR Bias ON/OFF signal
2nd BTR ON 2nd BTR Bias ON/OFF signal
DEVE BIAS CLK DEVE AC Bias cycle control signal
2nd BTR CONT
2nd BTR Bias voltage control signal
BCR CLK
BCR Bias cycle control signal
LV/HVPS
12.2.3
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
P/J500
22
11
10
9
8
7
6
6
P/J515
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
D
1
C
1
A
1
P/J401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
P/J516
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
H
1
F
1
G
1
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
PWBA HVPS
PL12.1.9
1st BTR CONT
IBT CLEANER H/L
SG
SG
BCR CONT
DE-TONER CONT
DEVE BIAS ON
DEVE BIAS CONT
IBT CLEANER ON
1st BTR REV ON
2nd BTR REV ON
1st BTR ON
2nd BTR ON
DEVE BIAS CLK
2nd BTR CONT
BCR CLK
SG
I/L +24VDC
CLEANER H/L
DE-TONER CONT
IBT CLEANER ON
2nd BTR REV ON
2nd BTR ON
2nd BTR CONT
DE-TONER
PHOTO
CONDUCTOR
UNIT
PL7.1.1
2ND BTR
ASSY
PL6.1.12
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
PL9.2.58
1st BTR
IBT CLEANER
DEVE
BCR
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
D
C
A
H
F
G
2nd
BTR
Leg_Sec007_007FB
7. DEVELOPER
Figure 7-14. DEVELOPER Connection and Wiring Diagram
MAG ROLL MOT ON
MAG ROLL MOT PWM
MAG ROLL MOT TG
MAG ROLL MOT CW/CCW
Magnet Roll Motor drive control signal
TEMP. Data of temperature inside the printer measured
by Sensor (analog value)
HUMI. Data of humidity inside the printer measured by
Sensor(analog value)
HOME POSITION SENSED (H) +5VDC
Deve Rotary home position detection signal
generated by Sensor Photo (Rotary Home
Position Sensor)(High:
ANTENNA OUT
ANTENNA IN
CRUM Cartridge Antenna control signal
SG
HOLD
CLOCK
ON (H) +5VDC
PWBA Rotate Motor Control control signal
DEVE ROT A, XA, B, XB Deve Rotate Motor excitation signal
DATA
CLOCK
PWBA CRUM control signal
FRONT DOOR OPEN (H) +3.3VDC
Front Door open/close detection signal
PWBA
MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J405
1
2
3
MAGNET
ROLL MOTOR MAG ROLL MOT ON
3
5
7
P/J406
1
PULL UP +5VDC
4
5
6
MAG ROLL MOT PWM
MAG ROLL MOT TG
MAG ROLL MOT CW/CCW
SG
I/L +24VDC
M
2
DISP CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC
I/L +24VDC
P/J413
5
6
7
SG
HOME POSITION SENSED (H) +5VDC
P/J105
3
3
1
2
2
1
SENSOR ROTARY
HOME POSI
PL9.1.18
HOLD
ANTENNA IN
P/J415
1
2 1
ANTENNA CTRG
PL9.1.12
P/J415
6
7
8
9
CLOCK
ON (H) +5VDC
P/J430
4
PWB ASSY ROT
PL12.1.10
MOT
ASSY ROT
PL11.1.5
M
I/L +24VDC
3
P/J432
1
P/J502
11
12
P/J433
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
11
DEVE ROT A
I/L +24VDC
DEVE ROT XA
DEVE ROT B
I/L +24VDC
DEVE ROT XB
ANTENNA OUT
Interlock
+24VDC
SG
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
Interlock
+24VDC
+5VDC
Interlock
+24VDC
2
3
4
2
3
4
TEMP.
SG
HUMI.
+5VDC
DATA
+5VDC
CLOCK
SG
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
PL12.1.6
3
2
1
3
2
1
PWBA CRUM
PL12.1.11
+5VDC
+5VDC
P/J413
P/J415
1
P/J412
1
P/J10
P/J125
4
4
P/J429
4
SG
P/J204
1
P/J106
2
+5VDC
+5VDC
10
11
SG
FRONT DOOR OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
2
1
MOT ASSY MAG
PL11.1.4
DISPENSE CLUTCH
Leg_Sec007_008FB
SWITCH-FRONT
DOOR
PL1.1.26
8. 2ND BTR
Figure 7-15. 2nd BTR Connection and Wiring Diagram
FUSER IN SENSED (L) +5VDC 2nd BTR paper detection signal generated by
Sensor Photo (Fuser In Sensor)
RETRACT SENSED (H) +5VDC 2nd BTR retract detection signal generated by
Sensor Photo (2nd BTR Retract Sensor)
ADC SOL RELEASE ON (L) +24VDC
Sensor ADC internal Solenoid ON/OFF signal
(The shutter is placed on the position to measure
reflection from the reference board)
ADC SOL NIP ON (L) +24VDC Sensor ADC internal Solenoid ON/OFF signal
(The shutter is placed on the position to measure
diffuse light)
ADC LED COLOR ON (L) +5VDC Lighting signal of LED for detection of Sensor
ADC internal color toner patch
ADC LED BLACK ON (L) +5VDC Lighting signal of LED for detection of Sensor
ADC internal black toner patch
ADC SENSOR Toner patch density data measured by the sensor
(analog value)
RETRACT MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
RETRACT MOT PWM
2nd BTR Retract Motor control signal
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
4
5
6
PULL UP +5VDC
Interlock
+24VDC
7
8
SG
RETRACT SENSED (H) +5VDC
SG
COVER OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
P/J112
3
2
1
SENSOR
2BTR
RETRACT
PL6.1.22
SENSOR ASSY ADC
PL6.1.20
MOT ASSY MICRO
PL11.1.7
P/J422
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5VDC
1
P/J113
2
SWITCH
2BTR COVER
PL6.1.18
7
P/J431
8
ADC SOL RELEASE ON (L) +24VDC
I/L +24VDC
6
5
4
3
2
1
ADC SOL NIP ON (L ) +24VDC
SG
ADC LED COLOR ON (L) +5VDC
ADC LED BLACK ON (L) +5VDC
ADC SENSOR
+5VDC
7
8
P/J403
1
2
3
1 3
2
3
2
1
P/J600
RETRACT MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
I/L +24VDC
1
P/J621
2
2 1
P/J418
1
2
3
SG
FUSER IN SENSED (L)+5VDC
+5VDC
SENSOR
FUSER IN
PL6.1.3
2
1
1
P/J620
3
2 2
3 1
+5VDC
SG
Interlock
+24VDC
P/J111
3
+5VDC
Leg_Sec007_009FB
M
9. FUSER
Figure 7-16. FUSER Connection and Wiring Diagram
FUSER MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
FUSER MOT PWM
FUSER MOT TG
FUSER MOT CW/CCW
Fuser Motor drive control signal
RL Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by
Temp. Sensor for high-temperature detection
(analog value)
VC
Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for
temperature control (analog value)
VD Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for
temperature control (analog value)
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +5VDC Paper ejection detection signal generated by
Sensor Photo (Fuser Exit Sensor) (High:
DATA
CLOCK
CRUM control signal
FLICKER CLK +3.3VDC
Flicker countermeasure control signal (AC220V/
AC240V only)
LAMP ON (L) + Fuser Lamp lighting signal
RELAY ON (L) +24VDC Fuser Lamp Relay ON/OFF signal in PWBA
Fuser Cont
FUSER DOOR SW OPEND (H) +3.3VDC Cover Fuser open/close detection signal
RL
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J404
1
2
3
4
5
Interlock
+24VDC
+5VDC
6
P/J417
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FUSER MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
FUSER MOT PWM
FUSER MOT TG
+5VDC
SG
I/L +24VDC
SG
SG
Vc
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +5VDC
FUSER ASSY
PL10.1.1
Safety Temp.
Sensor
Temp. Sensor
1 2
P/J615
2 1
1
2
3
3
P/J616
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
11
10
9
8
P/J614
7
8
9
7
6
5
1
2
3 1
2
P/J619
3
FUSER EXIT
SENSOR
P/J110
3
2
1
MOT ASSY FSR
PL11.1.3
M
P/J403
11
12
SG
FUSER DOOR SW OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
P/J114
2
1
SWITCH-FUSER
DOOR
PL1.1.36
FUSER LOCK
SWITCH
PL10.1.6
RELAY ON (L) +24VDC
PWBA FUSER CONT
PL12.2.12
5
P614
P/J1
3
1
22
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
P/J500
2
1
6
P/J3
2
1
I/L +24VDC
P/J410
9
1 2
10
P/J614
3
1
Thermostat
100/115V
220/240V
Heater
3
2
Thermostat
Heater
FRIKER CLK +3.3VDC
LAMP ON (L)
220/240V ONLY USE
5
6
P/J401
21
Interlock
+24VDC
FUSER
RELAY
CONTROL
P/J503
4
P/J2
4
+5VDC
Vd
Leg_Sec007_010FB
10. CONTROLLER
Figure 7-17. CONTROLLER Connection and Wiring Diagram
PWBA ESS
PL12.2.7
CN601
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CN501
1
2
3
4
5
6
P/J 400
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P/J 501
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN405 CN1
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
OP PANEL
PL1.1.17
+3.3VDC
+5VDC
CN502
1
2
P/J 510
1
2
Leg_007_011FA
APPENDI X Packaging Specification 586
7.3 Packaging Specification
1. After unpacking, make sure that there is no missing component, and check the
appearance.
2. Then remove all tapes and protection materials.
MAIN UNIT
Fax Model
CAUTION
Carrying the product should be done by two or more people
keeping it in a horizontal position.
Since the rear side of the product is heavier than its front side,
be aware of the difference when carrying the product.
Use extreme care during the installation to avoid an accident
and injury.
1) Main Unit
2) Toner Cartridge (YMCK)
3) POWER CORD
4) Anticounterfeit Label (15 countries)
Note: Photoconductor unit is packed
separately.
3)
1)
2)
4)
APPENDI X Packaging Specification 587
Base Model
500-SHEET CASSETTE
1) Main Unit
2) IBT ASSY
3) Toner Cartridge (YMCK)
4) POWER CORD
5) CAUTION SHEET
6) Anticounterfeit Label (15 countries)
Note: Photoconductor unit is packed
separately.
2)
4)
1)
3) 5)
6)
1) Main Unit
1)
APPENDI X Parts List 588
7.4 Parts List
MAIN UNIT
Table 7-5. Main Unit
Diagram No. Part Name
01-01-02 TRAY EXTENSION
01-01-03 COVER TOP
01-01-04 COVER HUSER
01-01-05 COVER TOP SIDE L
01-01-06 COVER TOP SIDE R
01-01-07 SWITCH ASSY TOP
01-01-10 COVER CLEANER
01-01-100 LOGO PLATE,13X54;C
01-01-12 FOOT REAR
01-01-13 FOOT FRONT
01-01-14 COVER MSI
01-01-15 COVER FRONT-L
01-01-16 COVER FRONT ASSY-U
01-01-17 CONTROL,PANEL
01-01-18 HARNESS
01-01-19 COVER ASSY LH
01-01-20 COVER LH
01-01-21 COVER ESS
01-01-22 SWITCH ASSY FUSER
01-01-23 COVER TRAY
01-01-24 COVER INNER TOP
01-01-26 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
01-01-27 SWITCH INLK FRONT
01-01-28 COVER ASSY RH
01-01-32 COVER DUP
01-01-33 COVER INNER L
01-01-34 SWITCH INLK FRONT
01-01-99 KIT SLIDE BAR
12-02-01 PWBA MCU
12-02-02 FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
12-02-03 LV/HVPS
12-02-04 HARNESS ASSY AC
12-02-05 FFC-ASSY ESS
12-02-07 BOARD ASSY., MAIN
12-02-08 BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY
12-02-10 HARNESS ASSY MAIN
12-02-12 PWBA FUSER CONT
12-02-13 POWER CABLE
12-02-13 POWER CABLE
04-01-01 MSI ASSY
04-01-02 ROLL ASSY MSI
04-01-08 ROLL MSI
04-01-09 CHUTE MSI
04-01-11 GEAR MANUAL
04-01-12 GUIDE SIDE L
04-01-13 GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
04-01-15 PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
04-01-16 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
04-01-17 PLATE ASSY RETARD
04-01-20 OIL DAMPER
04-01-22 GEAR PICK UP
04-01-23 SOLENOID PICK UP
04-01-24 SENSOR UPPER PASS
04-01-25 ACUTUATOR EMPTY
04-01-26 HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
05-01-01 COVER-PH
05-01-02 CHUTE ASSY-REAR
05-02-01 FRAME ASSY-PH
05-02-02 CLUTCH ASSY REGI
05-02-06 GEAR-REGI
05-02-08 ROLL REGI RUBBER
05-02-11 VARISTOR
05-02-12 ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
05-02-16 SENSOR
05-02-17 SPRING-ACTUATOR
05-02-18 ACTUATOR-REGI
05-02-20 MOTOR-PH
05-02-21 HARNESS ASSY P/H2
05-02-22 CLUTCH ASSY REGI
05-02-24 DRIVE ASSY PH
05-02-25 COVER HARNESS
06-01-01 CHUTE ASSY-FSR
06-01-03 SENSOR
06-01-04 HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
06-01-06 DIODE FUSER
06-01-07 FRAME ASSY-2ND
06-01-08 GEAR 27
06-01-12 2ND BTR ASSY
06-01-13 CAM ASSY-2ND
06-01-15 COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
06-01-16 HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
06-01-20 SENSOR ASSY ADC
06-01-21 HOLDER-ADC 2ND
06-01-27 PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
06-01-29 CAM ASSY-IBT CL
06-01-30 HARNESS ASSY ADC
07-01-02 SENSOR TR-0
07-01-04 GUIDE CRU ASSY D
07-01-12 HARNESS ASSY XERO
07-01-13 GUIDE CRU ASSY AD
07-01-15 LEVER-LATCH PR
07-01-16 CAP-PLATE PR
07-01-20 BCR CLN XERO ASSY
07-01-24 SENSOR TNER FULL
07-01-27 GUIDE CRU
07-01-30 WIRE ASSY IBT
07-01-31 WIRE ASSY BTR
07-01-32 WIRE ASSY BCR
07-01-33 WIRE ASSY DTN
08-01-01 ROS ASSY
08-01-02 CLEANER ASSY
08-01-05 CLEANER ASSY BASE
09-01-01 LATCH ASSY-ROTARY
09-01-04 LEVER LATCH
09-01-10 ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
09-01-15 LEVER CTRG SET
09-01-17 HOLDER ASSY-BIAS
09-01-20 WIRE ASSY DEVE
09-02-05 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K
09-02-06 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y
09-02-07 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M
09-02-08 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
09-02-09 FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
09-02-10 PIVOT ASSY
09-02-11 PIVOT AD
09-02-13 BEARING BALL
10-01-01 FUSER ASSY
10-01-02 HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
10-01-06 FUSER LOCK SWITCH
11-01-01 DRIVE ASSY BTR
11-01-02 DRIVE ASSY PRO
11-01-03 MOT ASSY FSR
11-01-04 MOT ASSY MAG
11-01-05 MOT ASSY ROT
11-01-06 MOT ASSY P/R
11-01-07 MOT ASSY MICRO
11-01-09 GEAR 2ND
12-01-06 SENSOR HUM & TEMP
12-01-09 PWBA HVPS
12-01-10 PWB ASSY ROT
12-01-11 PWBA CRUM
NONFIG GREASE G76
500-SHEET CASSETTE
Table 7-6. 500-sheet Cassette
01-01-01 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
01-01-02 GUIDE END ASSY
01-01-04 GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500
01-01-05 PINION 12
01-01-06 GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
01-01-09 LOCK LIFT R
01-01-10 ROLL LINK
01-01-12 COVER FRONT CST 500
01-01-14 LOCK LIFT L
01-02-01 COVER LEFT 500
01-02-02 CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
01-02-10 COVER RIGHT 500
01-03-02 HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
01-03-03 PWB TRAY 500
01-03-04 PWBA MOT
01-03-08 SOLENOID FEED
01-03-09 MOT ASSY FSR
01-03-10 GEAR ASSY DRIVE
01-03-11 GEAR FEED
01-03-12 CLUTCH ASSY FEED
01-03-14 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
01-03-16 ROLL ASSY TURN 500
01-03-20 FOOT FEEDER
01-03-21 BLOCK CST
01-03-22 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
01-03-23 CHUTE ASSY 500
01-03-24 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
01-03-26 FILM ASSY FDR
01-03-29 LEVER 500
01-03-32 GUIDE CST R
01-03-34 GUIDE CST L
01-04-01 HOUSING ASSY FEED
01-04-04 ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST
01-04-05 SPRING ACTUATOR
01-04-06 ACTUATOR T/R
01-04-11 ROLL ASSY FEED 500
01-04-14 HARNESS ASSY FEED 3
01-04-15 CAP ACTUATOR
Table 7-6. 500-sheet Cassette
IR_A_UNIT_ASSY
Table 7-7. IR_A_Unit_Assy
01
IR_BASE_A_ASSY
01-1
IR_BASE_A
01-2
SHEET_HOLE
01-3
IR_PLATE_FFC
01-4
PLATE_REINFORCEMENT
01-5
SCREW
01-6
PLATE_EMI_1
01-7
PLATE_GROUND
01-8
SCREW
01-9
TWO_SIDE_TAPE_4
01-10
SCREW
02
CORE_ASSY
03
IR_TIMING_BELT
04
IR_SHAFT
05
PLATE_HW
06
FFC_CR
07
SPONGE1
08
SPONGE3
09
PLATE_HARNESS
10
ASSLUG_ASSY_GND
11
ASSLUG_ASSY_GND_2
12
PULLEY_ASSY
13
MOTOR_ASSY
14
CCD_MODULE_ASSY
15
IR_COVER_A_ASSY
16
FFC_CLIP
17
FERRITE_BEAD
18
LOCK_CR
19
SHEET_ESD
20
SCREW
21
SCREW
22
SCREW
23
FFC_BOARD
24
IR_ENGINE_LOCK_ASSY
25
ADF_IR_LOCK_ASSY
26
PLATE_HARNESS_2
27
PCB_ASSY
28
SCREW
Table 7-7. IR_A_Unit_Assy
IR_B_UNIT_ASSY
DOCUMENT_COVER_ASSY
Table 7-8. IR_B_Unit_Assy
01
IR_BASE_B_ASSY
01-1
IR_BASE_B
01-2
SHEET_HOLE
01-3
IR_PLATE_FFC
01-4
PLATE_REINFORCEMENT
01-5
SCREW
01-6
PLATE_EMI_1
01-7
PLATE_GROUND
01-8
SCREW
01-9
TWO_SIDE_TAPE_4
01-10
SCREW
01-11
SCREW
02
CORE_ASSY
03
IR_TIMING_BELT
04
IR_SHAFT
05
PLATE_HW
06
FFC_CR
07
SPONGE1
08
SPONGE3
09
PLATE_HARNESS
10
ASSLUG_ASSY_GND
11
ASSLUG_ASSY_GND_2
12
PULLEY_ASSY
13
MOTOR_ASSY
14
CCD_MODULE_ASSY
15
IR_COVER_B_ASSY
16
FFC_CLIP
17
FERRITE_BEAD
18
LOCK_CR
19
SHEET_ESD
20
SCREW
21
SCREW
22
SCREW
23
SCREW
24
HINGE_HOLDER_1
25
SCREW
Table 7-9. Document_Cover_Assy
01
DOCUMENT_COVER_UNIT
01-1
DOCUMENT_COVER
01-2
WHITE_PAD_ASSY
2
HINGE_HOLDER_2
3
MAGNETIC
4
SCREW
Table 7-8. IR_B_Unit_Assy
7.4.3 ADF Section
ADF_UNIT_ASSY
Table 7-10. ADF_UNIT_ASSY
01
ADF_FRAME_ASSY
02
ADF_BASE_ASSY
03
PAPER_GUIDE_ASSY
04
ADF_COVER_C
05
ADF_COVER_R
06
SDH_COVER_EXTEND
07
PCB_COVER
08
ADF_PCB_ASSY
09
SDH_COVER
10
HOOK_FIX_PLATE
11
SCREW
12
COVER_SPRING_ASSY
13
SCREW
14
WHITE_PAD_ASSY
15
CABEL_TIE
16
SCREW
17
MAGNETIC
18
SCREW
19
ADF_HINGE
20
CABEL
21
SCREW
22
RUBBER_FOOT
ADF_FRAME_ASSY
Table 7-11. ADF_FRAME_ASSY
01
FRAME_COVER_ASSY
01-1
FRAME_COVER
01-2
NEUTRALIZING_BRUSH
02
PAD_BASE_ASSY
03
CORK_HOLDER_ASSY
04
GUIDE_FRONT_ASSY
05
FIX_PLATE_ASSY
06
ADF_FRAME_UNIT
07
EXIT_ROLL_ASSY
08
CLIP
09
KNOB
10
FIX_PLATE_R
11
COVER_SENSOR
12
COVER_HOOK
13
BUSH_D6
14
MOTOR_FIX_PLATE
15
MOTOR_CUSHION
16
MOTOR
17
TURNING_ROLLER
18
PAPER_GUIDE_R
19
EXIT_ROLLER
20
EXIT_ROLLER_SPRING
21
SCREW
22
SCREW
23
SCREW
24
SCREW
25
GEAR_30T
26
GEAR_40T_18T
27
GEAR_15T
28
GEAR_60T_18T
29
GEAR_33T_M0.5
30
GEAR_26T
31
GEAR_48T
32
GEAR_32T_15T
33
E_RING
34
LOCKING_CABLE_CLIPS
Table 7-11. ADF_FRAME_ASSY
ADF_FRAME_ASSY (SUB-ASSY UNIT)
Table 7-12. ADF_FRAME_ASSY (SUB-ASSY UNIT)
02
PAD_BASE_ASSY
02-1
TORSION_SPRING
02-2
PAD_BASE
02-3
RUBBER_PAD
02-4
PAD_SHEET
02-5
PLASTIC_RIVET
03
CORK_HOLDER_ASSY
03-1
CORK_HOLDER
03-2
CORK
04
GUIDE_FRONT_ASSY
04-1
SPRING_COVER
04-2
PRESS_SPRING
04-3
PINCH_ROLL
04-4
SHAFT
04-5
PAPER_GUIDE_F
04-6
CONNECTOR_UNIT_ACEMU
04-7
SENSOR_ARM
04-8
TORSION_SPRING
04-9
ELASTIC_SHEET
04-10
SCREW
05
FIX_PLATE_ASSY
05-1
FIX_PLATE_LID
05-2
FIX_PLATE_F
06
ADF_FRAME_UNIT
06-1
ADF_FRAME
06-2
COPPER_SHEET
06-3
READING_PLATE_SPRING
06-4
READING_PLATE
06-5
READING_PLATE_STUD
06-6
GAP_SHEET
06-7
READING_SHEET
07
EXIT_ROLL_ASSY
07-1
PRESS_SPRING_STOPPER_R
07-2
STOPPER_ARM_L
07-3
STOPPER_UP
07-4
EXIT_ROLLER
07-5
STOPPER_ARM_R
07-6
PRESS_SPRING_STOPPER_L
Table 7-12. ADF_FRAME_ASSY (SUB-ASSY UNIT)
PAPER_GUIDE_ASSY ADF_BASE_ASSY
Table 7-13. PAPER_GUIDE_ASSY
01
DOC._PAPER_GUIDE
02
PAPER_GUIDE_EXTEND
03
DOC._AJUST_L
04
DOC._AJUST_R
05
GEAR_PLATE
06
TRAY_GEAR_24T
07
TRAY_COVER
08
PAPER_SENSOR_SWITCH_L
09
PAPER_SENSOR_SWITCH_R
10
SCREW
11
SCREW
Table 7-14. ADF_BASE_ASSY
01
PICK_UP_ASSY
01-1
ADF_ROLLER
01-2
PICK_UP_ROLLER
01-3
ADF_SHAFT
01-4
PICK_UP_SHAFT
01-5
PICK_UP_PLATE
01-6
GEAR_19T_23T
01-7
GEAR_23T
01-8
STOPPER_CUSHION
02
E_CLUTCH_UNIT
02-1
MAGNETIC_CLUTCH
02-2
BUSH_D4
02-3
GEAR_33T_M0.8
02-4
CLUTCH_SHAFT
02-5
BUSH_D6
02-6
CLUTCH_FIX_PLATE
02-7
SCREW
03
GEAR_20T
04
TENSION_SPRING
05
GEAR_12T
06
E_RETAINING_RING
07
CONNECTOR_UNIT_ACEMU
08
ADF_BASE
09
AS_SENSOR
10
ADF_ROLLER_FIX_PLATE
11
BUSH_D6
12
SENSOR_LEVER
13
SCREW
14
BUSH_D4
15
TRANSFER_SHAFT
APPENDI X Exploded Diagram 598
7.5 Exploded Diagram
Printer Section
Scanner/ADF Section
01-01-100
Rev.01 C567
FOR LP-V500 NO.1-1
The parts to which no reference number
is assigned will not be available as
after-sale service parts.
C567-CASE-001A
01-01-99
01-01-36
01-01-34
01-01-22
01-01-28
01-01-32
01-01-13
01-01-18
01-01-17
01-01-16
01-01-15
Front
01-01-13
01-01-12
01-01-12
01-01-06 01-01-05
01-01-04
01-01-20
01-01-21
01-01-10
01-01-07
01-01-03
01-01-02
01-01-33
01-01-27
01-01-26
01-01-24
01-01-23
01-01-19
Leg_Sec005_001EC
A
01-01-14
A
Rev.01 C567 FOR LP-V500 NO.12-2
C567-ELEC-001A
C
C
B
B
A
A
Front
12-02-01
12-02-09
12-02-08
12-02-07
12-02-05
12-02-04
12-02-03
12-02-02
Leg_Sec005_013EB
12-02-13
12-02-12
12-02-10
B
B
A
Front
Rev.01 C567 FOR LP-V500 NO.4-1
C567-MECH-001A
All this page including 04-01-01
04-01-16
04-01-15
04-01-02
Leg_Sec005_002EB
04-01-17
04-01-26
04-01-25
04-01-24
04-01-23
04-01-20
04-01-22
04-01-13
04-01-09
04-01-12
04-01-11
04-01-08
A
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
Front
FOR LP-V500 NO.5-1
Rev.01 C567
C567-MECH-002A
Leg_Sec005_003EB
[Ref PL5.2.1]
05-01-02
05-01-01
D
D
A
A
C
C
B
B
Front
Rev.01 C567
FOR LP-V500 NO.5-2
C567-MECH-003A
Leg_Sec005_004EB
05-02-25
05-02-24
05-02-08
05-02-23
05-02-22
05-02-21
05-02-20
05-02-19
05-02-18
05-02-17
05-02-16
05-02-12
05-02-11
05-02-06
05-02-06
05-02-02
E
E
C
Front
C567-MECH-004A
06-01-06
06-01-07
06-01-27
06-01-15
06-01-01
06-01-04
06-01-08
06-01-16
06-01-30
06-01-29
06-01-26
06-01-22
06-01-21
06-01-20
06-01-18
06-01-13
06-01-12
06-01-03
Leg_Sec005_005EA
E
E
D
D
A
A
C
B
B
Front
F
E
D
D
A
C
C
B
B
Rev.01 C567
FOR LP-V500 NO.7-1
C567-MECH-005A
Leg_Sec005_006EB
07-01-27
07-01-20
07-01-13
07-01-04
07-01-12
07-01-27
07-01-16
07-01-15
07-01-24
07-01-30
07-01-31
07-01-33
07-01-32
07-01-02
E
F
A
Front
Rev.01 C567
FOR LP-V500 NO.8-1
C567-MECH-006A
08-01-02
08-01-05
Leg_Sec005_007EB
08-01-01
Front
Rev.01 C567
FOR LP-V500 NO.9-1
C567-MECH-007A
Leg_Sec005_008EB
09-01-18
09-01-15
09-01-20
09-01-17
09-01-04
09-01-10
09-01-01
Front
C567-MECH-008A
09-02-13
09-02-10
09-02-13
09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-10
09-02-10
09-02-09
09-02-08 (with 11)
09-02-07(with 11)
(with 11) 09-02-06
(with 11) 09-02-05
Leg_Sec005_009EB
Rev.01 C567 FOR LP-V500 NO.10-1
C567-MECH-009A
Leg_Sec005_010EB
10-01-06
10-01-02
10-01-01
Front
Front
11-01-09
Rev.01 C567 FOR LP-V500 NO.11-1
C567-MECH-010A
Leg_Sec005_011EA
11-01-07
11-01-06
11-01-04
11-01-05
11-01-03
11-01-02
11-01-01
Rev.01 C567
FOR LP-V500 NO.12-1
C567-MECH-011A
Leg_Sec005_012EB
12-01-06
12-01-09
12-01-10
12-01-11
Front
Front
Rev.01 FOR DUPLEX UNIT LPA4CRU2 NO.1-1
C802-OPTI-049
Leg_Sec005_014EB
01-01-03
01-01-04
01-01-04
01-01-06
01-01-02
[Ref PL1.3.1]
[Ref PL1.2.1]
C802-OPTI-050
Leg_Sec005_015EA
01-02-28
01-02-23
01-02-29
01-02-29
01-02-23
01-02-21
01-02-20
01-02-18
01-02-17
01-02-16
01-02-15
01-02-10
01-02-09
01-02-08
01-02-07
01-02-04
01-02-03
01-02-01
01-02-22
01-02-05
Front
A
A
C
C
B
B
C802-OPTI-051
01-03-03
01-03-32
01-03-30
01-03-30
Leg_Sec005_016EB
(with RING KL) 01-03-99
(with RING KL) 01-03-99
01-03-24
01-03-01
01-03-25
01-03-25
01-03-22
01-03-23
[Ref PL1.4]
01-03-10
01-03-09
01-03-12
01-03-11
01-03-07
A
A
C
C
B
B
Front
Front
Rev.01
FOR DUPLEX UNIT LPA4CRU2 NO.1-4
C802-OPTI-052
Leg_Sec005_017EA
01-04-07
01-04-07
01-04-14
01-04-13
01-04-09
01-04-08
01-04-08
01-04-07
01-04-07
01-04-06
01-04-10
01-04-17
01-04-01
Rev.01 FOR 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit LPA4CZ1CU2 NO.1-1
C802-OPTI-053
Leg_Sec005_018EA
01-01-02
01-01-06
01-01-14
01-01-10
01-01-12
01-01-10
01-01-09
01-01-05
01-01-04
Front
Rev.01
C802-OPTI-054
Leg_Sec005_019EA
[Ref PL1.1.1]
[Ref PL1.3.1]
01-02-10
01-02-01
01-02-02
Front
FOR 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit LPA4CZ1CU2 NO.1-2
Rev.01
FOR 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit LPA4CZ1CU2 NO.1-3
C802-OPTI-055
Leg_Sec005_020EA
01-03-34
01-03-32
[Ref PL1.4.1]
01-03-21
01-03-22
01-03-20
01-03-21
01-03-20
01-03-26
01-03-20
01-03-20
01-03-18
01-03-16
01-03-29
01-03-24
01-03-23
01-03-08
01-03-04
01-03-03
01-03-02
01-03-14
01-03-12
01-03-11
01-03-10
01-03-09
E
F
F
E
D
D
A
A
C
C
B
B Front
Rev.01 FOR 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit LPA4CZ1CU2 NO.1-4
C802-OPTI-056
Leg_Sec005_021EB
01-04-15
01-04-14
01-04-11
01-04-07
01-04-06
01-04-05
01-04-04
01-04-03
Front
IR A ASSY
IR B ASSY
1
4
3
01-1
01-2
2
DOC COVER
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
13
11
17
18
12
22
14 19
16
20
21
15
11
11
13
ADF UNIT ASSY
1
2
3
9
5
12
13
17
7
13
10
11
12
14
15
16
6
19
18
20
23
24
21
21
21
22
21
21
21
4
20
23
23
23
01-1
01-2
25
32
31
26
27
28
29
30
33
34
8
33
8
34
ADF frame assy
4
5
7
6
2-1
2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
3
3-1
3-2
5-1
5-2
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-8
4-7
4-6
4-9
4-10
4-10
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5 6-7
6-6
6-5
7-1
7-3
7-6
7-2
7-5
7-3
7-4
ADF frame assy (sub)
PAPER GUIDE ASSY
02-7
02-6
02-2
02-3
02-5
02-4
02-1
1
3
11
6
15
5
14
8
2
9
12
10
13
4 7
01-1
01-5
01-7
01-8
01-3
01-6
01-2
01-4
ADF base assy
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
APPENDI X Schematic Circuit Diagram 628
7.6 Schematic Circuit Diagram
C588 MAIN
Board : C588MAIN BOARD
Model : Aculaser CX11/CX11F
Sheet : 1 of 6
Rev. : A
Sheet : 2 of 6
Rev. : A
Sheet : 3 of 6
Rev. : A
Sheet : 4 of 6
Rev. : A
Sheet : 5 of 6
Rev. : A
Sheet : 6 of 6
Rev. : A
APPENDI X Fax Unit System 635
7.7 Fax Unit System
7.7.1 List of System Parameter
The list of system parameter is given on the following pages.
System (p636)
Print (p639)
Scan (p640)
Phone Line (p641)
Communication Control (p648)
Report (p657)
Image Data Processing (p658)
See the pages given below for information on how to check and overwrite the system
parameter.
3.3.2.3 Parameter Check (p140)
3.6.4.3 System Parameter Settings (p298)
CAUTION
Some of the system parameter settings are restricted according
to the regulations or standards of the country or region. To
prevent those settings from being changed by mistake,
changing system parameter settings that are not described in
this manual is prohibited.
Be sure to observe the specified setting range for the system
parameter. Setting a value out of the range is not guaranteed.
If a malfunction of the fax operation occurs due to the
improper setting, the system parameter should be initialized.
See 3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
SYSTEM
Table 7-15. List of System Parameter (System)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Description Setting Value Default Remarks
Main Sub
SYS_COUNTRY 300 009 001 Country setting
Phone line-related system parameter settings are changed
automatically according to the selected country.
0x00 ~ 0xFF (ITU-T T.35 Country Code)
0x00 = Japan
0x04 = Germany
0x07 = Argentine
0x09 = Australia
0x0A = Austria
0x0F = Belgium
0x16 = Brazil
0x20 = Canada
0x26 = China
0x2E = Czechoslovakia
0x31 = Denmark
0x3C = Finland
0x3D = France
0x46 = Greece
0x50 = Hong Kong
0x51 = Hungary
0x57 = Ireland
0x59 = Italy
0x61 = Korea
0x69 = Luxembourg
0x6C = Malaysia
0x73 = Mexico
0x7B = Holland
0x7E = New Zealand
0x82 = Norway
0x8A = Poland
0x8B = Portugal
0x9C = Singapore
0xA0 = Spain
0xA5 = Sweden
0xA6 = Swiss
0xA9 = Thailand
0xB4 = England
0xB5 = America
0xB8 = Russia
0xFD = CTR (*1)
0xFE = Taiwan(*1)
0xFF = Common (*1)
Common
(0xFF)
Original codes are
assigned to countries
or areas that are not
defined in T.35
SYS_OEM_MODE 300 010
---
002
OEM setting
0 = ORIGINAL
1 = OEM
ORIGINAL
(0)
Fixed to 0
(for expansion)
SYS_LANGUAGE 300 011 003 Language setting to be used for printing fax reports 0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = US English
3 = Germany
4 = French
5 = Spanish
6 = Portuguese
7 = Italian
8 = Dutch
9 = Russian
10 = Chinese
11 = Korean
12 = Taiwanese
13 = Danish
14 = Swedish
15 = Finnish
Japanese
(0)
---
SYS_MACHINE_MODE 300 028
---
004
Operating Mode 0 = Normal mode1 = Maintenance mode Normal
(0)
---
SYS_SPEAKER_ENABLE 300 002 --- 005 Enables or disables the line monitor function
When this is set to disable, the speaker volume setting (300-
003) becomes invalid. (The speaker does not sound)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
Fixed to 1
SYS_SPEAKER_VOLUME 300 003 006 Speaker volume setting 1 = OFF
2 = Minimum
3 = Medium
4 = Full
Medium
(3)
---
SYS_INFORMATION_SERVICE 300 004
---
007
Enables or disables the notification function 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
Not used
SYS_FILE_MEM_SIZE 300 008 --- 008 Total memory size (SDRAM) for a file 1 to 4 Mbytes 4Mbytes Not used
SYS_FORCED_POLLING 300 012
---
009
Enables or disables the forced polling function 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
Not used
SYS_DRPD_ENABLE 300 029 --- 00A Enables or disables the DRPD setting
When this is set to disable, the DRPD setting (100-013) becomes
invalid.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
---
SYS_RX_RESTRICT 310 005 --- 00B Enables or disables the fax receiving restriction function
When the function is enabled, the fax unit does not accept faxes
from sources whose numbers are not stored in the speed-dial
memory.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
Not used
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
SYS_RX_LIMIT_MEM 310 031
---
00C
Threshold level for judging received faxes as NG
When available memory lowers the threshold level, faxes are
not received automatically.
0 ~ 100 % (1step = 1%)100% = Rejects to
receive all faxes.
0%
(0)
---
SYS_SIFT_PRINT_LIMIT_MEM 310 032
---
00D
Threshold level for judging to print a received fax immediately
When available memory lowers the threshold level, a received
fax is printed out immediately without being stored into the
memory.
0 ~ 99 % (1step = 1%)
20%
(20)
---
SYS_TX_LIMIT_MEM 310 033 --- 00E Threshold level for judging sending faxes as NG
When available memory lowers the threshold level, any more
fax jobs to be sent are rejected causing an insufficient memory
error.
0 ~ 100 % (1step = 1%) 0%
(0)
---
SYS_TX_HEADER 100 002 00F Source information (fax header) setting 0 = OFF
1 = ON
OFF
(0)
---
SYS_DATE_FORMAT 100 003 010 Year-month-day format 0 = YY_MM_DD
1 = MM_DD_YY
2 = DD_MM_YY
YY_MM_DD
(0)
---
SYS_TIME_FORMAT 100 004 --- 011 Time display format 0 = Displays on a 12-hour basis
1 = Displays on a 24-hour basis
24-hour basis
(1)
---
SYS_MANRX_POLL_SEL 100 006
---
012
[Start] button function during a call
Sets the [Start] button to receive a fax manually or performs
manual polling when it is pressed during a call.
0 = Manual receiving
1 = Manual polling
Manual
receiving
(0)
Not used
SYS_OVERSEAS_SENDING 100 010
---
013
Overseas transmitting mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
OFF
(0)
Not used
SYS_OUTPUT_PAPER_SIZE 100 011 --- 014 Paper size 0 = A4
1 = Letter
2 = Legal
A4
(0)
Not used
SYS_OUTPUT_PAPER_KIND 100 012 --- 015 Paper type 0 = Standard paper
1 = Coated paper
2 = etc
Standard paper
(0)
Not used
SYS_DRPD_SETTING 100 013 016 DRPD setting 0 = OFF (All)
1 = ON (Normal)
OFF
(0)
---
SYS_COLOR_RX_PAGE_LIMIT 100 014 --- 017 Maximum data size of one page in color for receiving
When a received one page exceeds the set value, the product
causes an insufficient memory error.
0 ~ 4MB (1step = 64KB) 1MB
(16)
---
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
PRINT
Table 7-16. List of System Parameter (Print)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
PRN_SPLIT_MARGIN 320 001 --- 020 Threshold value for dividing a received one page to print on multiple
sheets
When a received image exceeds the set value and valid length for one
page, it is divided into two or more pages.
0 ~ 127 mm (1step = 1mm) 10mm
(10)
Not used
PRN_PAGE_MERGE 320 002 --- 021 Page combining setting for printing received faxes
Received two pages are laid out in one page and printed on one sheet.
0 = Not combine
1 = Combine (2 pages into one page)
Not combine
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
PRN_REDUCTION 320 003 --- 022 Auto reducing print setting 0 = Not reduce (100%)
1 = Reduce
100%
(0)
Not used
PRN_ROTATE_90 320 004
---
023
Image rotating setting
Prints a received image with it rotated 90 degrees.
0 = Not rotate
1 = Rotate
Not rotate
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
PRN_CAS1_ENABLE 200 001 --- 024 Cassette 1 available/not available 0 = Not available
1 = Available
Available
(1)
Not used
1 = Available
Available
(1)
Not used
PRN_CAS3_ENABLE 200 003
---
026
Cassette 3 available/not available 0 = Not available
1 = Available
Available
(1)
Not used
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
---
029
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS7_ENABLE 200 007 --- 02A Cassette 7 available/not available 0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS8_ENABLE 200 008 --- 02B Cassette 8 available/not available 0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
---
02C
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS10_ENABLE 200 010 --- 02D Cassette 10 available/not available 0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_SCANDOC_OUT 200 011 --- 02E Print out of stored sending fax jobs 0 = Do not print stored sending fax jobs
1 = Print stored sending fax jobs
(Do not transmit)
Not print
(0)
Fixed to 0
For debugging
SCAN
PRN_SAVE_FILE 200 012
---
02F
Data handling at the time of forced print interruption 0 = Delete the data
1 = Save the data
Delete the
data
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
PRN_PAGE_OVERLAP 200 013
---
030
Amount of overlap space for printing divided page 1 to 20 mm (1 step = 1 mm)
2mm
(2)
Not used
PRN_OFSET_L_300DPI 200 020 --- 031 Amount of left margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots) 64dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_R_300DPI 200 021
---
032
Amount of right margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots)
64dot
Not used
PRN_OFSET_T_300DPI 200 022 --- 033 Amount of top margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots 60dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_B_300DPI 200 023 --- 034 Amount of bottom margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots 60dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_L_600DPI 200 024
---
035
Amount of left margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots)
120dot
Not used
PRN_OFSET_R_600DPI 200 025 --- 036 Amount of right margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots) 120dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_T_600DPI 200 026 --- 037 Amount of top margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots 120dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_B_600DPI 200 027
---
038
Amount of bottom margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots
120dot
Not used
Table 7-17. List of System Parameter (Scan)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
SCN_MEMOVR_CONTINUE 100 005
---
040
Handling sending fax jobs when available memory becomes insufficient 0 = Cut the phone line (delete the job)
1 = Transmit pages that can be
stored in the memory
Cut phone
line
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
Table 7-16. List of System Parameter (Print)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
PHONE LINE
Table 7-18. List of System Parameter (Phone Line)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
LIN_DIAL_TYPE 300 001 050 Dial type 0 = PB ( DTMF )
1 = DP ( 10 PPS )
2 = DP ( 20 PPS )
PB
(0)
---
LIN_RX_MODE 300 005 051 Reception mode 0 = reserVe
1 = Fax only
2 = Auto switch
3 = Phone only
4 = TAM
Auto switch
(2)
---
LIN_LINE_TYPE 300 007 052
Line type 0 = PSTN (Public Switched Telephone
Network)
1 = PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
PSTN
(0)
---
LIN_PBX_TO_PSTN 300 013 053
PSTN connection method 0 =Numbers
1 =Not numbers (earth start/flash start)
Numbers
(0)
---
LIN_FLASH_ENABLE 300 014
---
054
Flash start enabling or disabling 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
---
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN 300 015 --- 055 Minimum ringer frequency 0 ~ 127.5 ms (1step = 0.5ms) 14ms
(28)
---
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX 300 016 --- 056 Maximum ringer frequency 0 ~ 127.5 ms (1step = 0.5ms) 100m
(200)
---
LIN_MAKE_10PPS 300 017
---
057
10 PPS Make time
Make time for dialing at DP (10 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms)
31.275ms
(75)
---
LIN_BREAK_10PPS 300 018 --- 058 10 PPS Break time
Break time for dialing at DP (10 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms) 67.137ms
(161)
---
LIN_MAKE_20PPS 300 019 --- 059 16/20 PPS Make time
Make time for dialing at DP (16/20 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms) 16.263ms
(39)
---
LIN_BREAK_20PPS 300 020
---
05A
16/20 PPS Break time
Break time for dialing at DP (16/20 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms)
33.777ms
(81)
---
LIN_DP_PAUSE_TIME 300 021 --- 05B DP interdigit time
The time between output digits for DP dialing
0 ~ 5100 ms (1step = 20ms) 720ms
(36)
---
LIN_PAUSE_WAIT_TIME 300 022 --- 05C Pose wait time
Wait time for pose signal
0 to 25.5 sec(1 step = 100 ms) 4 seconds
(40)
---
LIN_BUSYTONE_DETECTION 300 023
---
05D
Enables or disables detecting busy tone at the time of dialing 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
---
LIN_BLIND_TIME 300 026 --- 05E Blind time when performing blind dialing 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 5 seconds
(5)
---
LIN_DIALTONE_DETECT_TIME 300 027
---
05F
Dial tone detecting time out 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 20 seconds
(20)
---
LIN_RING_DETECT_TIME 300 030 --- 060 Ring detecting time
The time from detecting ring until it is judged as dialing
100 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 180ms
(18)
---
LIN_ONHOOK_DETECT_TIME 300 031 --- 061 Off-hook detection time
Time limit for attached phone off-hook condition to regard it as a
shut-off signal
200 to 5100 ms (1 step = 20 ms) 1300ms
(65)
---
LIN_DIALTONE_DETECTION 300 032 --- 062 Enables or disables detection of dial tone
Select whether detect or not detect dial tone immediately after
detecting off-hook condition when the line type is set to PSTN.
When this is set to disable, blind dialing is perfomed.
0 = Enable (detect)
1 = Disable (not detect)
Disable
(1)
---
LIN_DIALTONE_FREQ 300 033 --- 063 Dial tone frequency 0 = 350 to 450Hz
1 = 300 to 500Hz
2 = 450 to 650Hz
400Hz
(0)
---
LIN_BUSYTONE_FREQ 300 034 --- 064 Busy tone frequency 0 = 400Hz
1 = 350 to 450Hz
2 = 300 to 500Hz
3 = 450 to 650Hz
400Hz
(0)
---
LIN_BUSYTONE_PATTERN 300 035
---
065
Busy tone pattern 0 = ON 0.30 ~ 0.80S
OFF 0.30 ~ 0.80S
1 = ON 0.20 ~ 0.60S
OFF 0.30 ~ 0.60S
2 = ON 0.50 ~ 1S
OFF 0.50 ~ 1S
3 = ON 0.12 ~ 1.2S
OFF 0.12 ~ 1.2S
(0)
---
LIN_NCU_TYPE 300 036 --- 066 NCU type 0 = For Japan (0) Not used
LIN_20PPS_ENABLE 300 037
---
067
Enables or disables 20 PPS setting
When this is set to disable, 20 PPS setting specified in the dial
type setting (300-001) becomes invalid.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
Enable
(0)
---
LIN_DP_RELAY_DELAY 300 038
---
068
Waiting time until the line stabilizes when performing pulse dialing 0 to 2550 ms (1 setp = 10 ms)
10ms
(1)
---
LIN_DIAL_NG_NUMBER 300 039 --- 069 Allows or not allows to store emergency phone number into the
speed-dial memory
Emergency phone number: XXXXX
0 = Allows
1 = Not allows
Allows
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
LIN_RING_INVALID_TIME 300 040 --- 06A Time for judging ring signal is OFF
The time limit for ring signal. The line is shut-off if the time exceeds
the set value.
0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
0 = 125 ms
125ms
(0)
---
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
LIN_TAM_SOUNDLESS_LEVEL 300 041
---
06B
Noiseless level at TAM setting
According to the noiseless level, a call received by an answer phone
(attached phone) is judged as a fax.
0 = -43dBm
1 = -40dBm
2 = -39dBm
3 = -38dBm
-43dBm
(0)
---
LIN_TAM_SOUNDLESS_TIME 300 042 --- 06C Noiseless time at TAM setting
When the set noiseless level continues for the time, a call received
by an answer phone (attached phone) is judged as a fax.
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 5.0 seconds
(50)
---
LIN_DRPD_ON_MIN 300 043 --- 06D Minimum ON time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 1.6 seconds
(16)
---
LIN_DRPD_ON_MAX 300 044
---
06E
Maximum ON time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 2.4 seconds
(24)
---
LIN_DRPD_OFF_MIN 300 045 --- 06F Minimum OFF time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 3.2 seconds
(32)
---
LIN_DRPD_OFF_MAX 300 046 --- 070 Maximum OFF time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 4.8 seconds
(48)
---
LIN_OFFHOOK_ALARM 300 047
---
071
Enables or disables the off-hook alarm after finishing fax
communication
The alarm goes off when off-hook condition of the attached phone is
detected after finishing fax communication.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
Not used
LIN_EARTH_TIME 300 048 --- 072 Earth time
Earthing time when the outside line connecting method is earth start.
100 to 1000 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 300ms
(30)
---
LIN_FLASH_TIME 300 050
---
073
Flash time
Flashing time when the outside line connecting method is flash start.
100 to 1000 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
320ms
(32)
---
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
LIN_DAA_REG16 300 051
---
074
SiDAA country setting register 1 ---
0x04
---
(bit0) Ringer Threshold Select 0 = 11 To 22 VRMS
1 = 17 To 33 VRMS
0 ---
(bit1) Ringer Impedance 0 = Maximum ringer impedance
1 = Synthesize ringer impedance
0
---
(bit3, 2) DC Termination Select 00 = Low Voltage Mode
01 = Japan Mode
10 = FCC Mode
11 = CTR21 Mode
10 ---
(bit4) IIR Filter Enable 0 = FIR Filter Enable
1 = IIR Filter Enable
0
---
(bit5) AC Termination Select 0 = Select the real impedance
1 = Select the complex impedance
0 ---
(bit6) On-Hook Speed 0 = fast
1 = Slow(AustraliaASouth Africa)
0 ---
(bit7) DC Termination Off
Fixed to 0
0
---
LIN_DAA_REG17 300 052 --- 075 SiDAA country setting register 2 --- 0x00 ---
(bit0) Billing Tone Detected 0 = No billing tone detected
1 = Billing tone detected
0 ---
(bit1) ReceiVe OVerload 0 = Normal receiVe input leVel
1 = ExcessiVe receiVe input leVel
0 ---
(bit2) Billing Tone Protect Enable 0 = Billing Tone Protect disabled
1 = Billing Tone Protect enabled
0
---
(bit3) OVerload Protect Enable 0 = Disable oVerload protection
1 = Enable oVerload protection
0 ---
(bit4) Current Limit 0 = All other mode
1 = CTR21 moded
0 ---
(bit5) Auto-Calibration Disable 0 = Enable auto-calibration
1 = Disable auto-calibration
0
---
(bit6) Manual Calibration 0 = No calibration
1 = Initiate calibration
0 ---
(bit7) ReserVed Fixed to 0 0 ---
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
LIN_DAA_REG18 300 053
---
076
SiDAA country setting register 3 ---
0x00
---
(bit0) Ring Detect Network Squelch 0 = Normal operation
1 = Squelch function enabled
Fixed to 0 ---
(bit1) Ring Detector Full WaVe Rectifier Enable 0 = Half WaVe
1 = Full WaVe
0
---
(bit2) MODE control dont care 0 ---
(bit3) Force Low Voltage DC Termination Mode 0 = Normal Gain
1 = Force Low Voltage Mode
0
---
(bit4) Line Voltage Adjust 0 = Normal operation
1 = Lower DCT Voltage
0 ---
(bit5) Force Japan DC Termination Mode 0 = Normal Gain
1 = Force Japan Mode
0 ---
(bit6) DTMF Dialing Mode 0 = Normal operation
1 = Increase headroom for DTMF
0
---
(bit7) Full Scale 0 = Default
1 = Transmit/receiVe full scale
0 ---
LIN_DAA_MODE 300 054 --- 077 SiDAA operating mode --- 0 ---
(bit0) Automatic adjustment of boundary value between On-hook and Off-
hook
0 =Enable
1 =Disable
(DAA base is used for the boundary
value)
0 ---
(bit1) Automatic adjustment of DCT mode 0 = Enable
1 = Disable
0 ---
(bit2)
Line monitor setting at ringer check 0 = Ringer check without monitoring line
1 = Ringer check with monitoring line
0
---
(bit3) Setting value of country register 16 0 =Recommended value by the manufacturer
(Refer to the manual)
1 =Value set for DAA_REG 16
0 ---
(bit4)
Setting value of country register 17 0 =Recommended value by the manufacturer
0
---
(bit5) Setting value of country register 18 0 =Recommended value by the manufacturer
0 ---
(bit6)
Free --- --- ---
(bit7) Free --- --- ---
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_BASE 300 055
---
078
SiDAA on-hook detection threshold value (LVCS value) 1 to 30
20
(20)
---
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_MIN 300 056 --- 079 SiDAA on-hook detection lowest level (LVCS value) 1 to 31 (LVCS value) 7
(7)
---
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_CHG 300 057 --- 07A SiDAA on-hook detection variation range (LVCS value) 1 to 31 (LVCS value) 6
(6)
---
LIN_ONHOOK_RATE_NORING 300 058
---
07B
SiDAA ring noiseless on-hook threshold value (%) 1 to 100% (1 step = 1%)
85%
(85)
---
LIN_ONHOOK_RATE_RING 300 059 --- 07C SiDAA ringing on-hook threshold value (%) 1 to 100% (1 step = 1%) 85%
(85)
---
LIN_DIAL_END_TIME 300 060 --- 07D Dialing end judging time 0 to 25.5 sec(1 step = 100 ms) 5.5 seconds
(55)
---
LIN_NUM_DP 300 061
---
07E
Number of pulses of DP
0 = n, "0"=10
1 = "10-n"
2 = "n+1"
n, 0=10
(0)
---
LIN_DTMF_TX_TIME 300 062
---
07F
PB (DTMF) transmitting time
Tone transmitting time at PB (DTMF) dialing
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms)
100 ms
(100)
---
LIN_DTMF_PAUSE_TIME 300 063
---
080
PB (DTMF) pose time
Interdigit time at PB (DTMF) dialing
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms)
101 ms
(101)
---
LIN_DTMF_TX_LEVEL 300 064 --- 081 PB (DTMF) transmitting level
DTMF transmitting attenuator level at PB (DTMF) dialing
4 to 15 (-4 to -15 dBm)
4 = -4 dBm
5 = -5 dBm
6 = -6 dBm
:
15 = -15 dBm
-9 dBm
(9)
---
LIN_DTMF_LEVEL_GAP 300 065
---
082
PB (DTMF) level differenceDifference between the higher and
lower audio frequencies at PB (DTMF) dialing
Difference = Higher frequencies Lower frequencies
0 = 2.0 dB
1 = 2.5 dB
2 = 3.0 dB
3 = 3.5 dB
4 = 4.0 dB
5 = 4.5 dB
6 = 5.0 dB
12 = 0 dB
13 = 0.5 dB
14 = 1.0 dB
15 = 1.5 dB
2.0 dB
(0)
---
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
LIN_REDIAL_TIMES 310 001 083
Number of redialing
When the product cannot send a fax by auto dialing because the
receiving fax machine does not answer or is busy, it performs
redialing set number of times.
0 to 255 times (1 step = 1 time)
0 = Does not redial
5 times
(5)
---
LIN_REDIAL_INTERVAL 310 002 --- 084 Redialing intervals 1 to 255 min (1 step = 1 min) 1 minute
(1)
---
LIN_RING_RESPONSE_TIME 310 004 085
Attached phone ringing time-out period
When the phone rings with the reception mode set to auto switch,
the product starts to receive a fax after a lapse of the set time period.
1 to 99 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 10 seconds
(10)
---
LIN_RESEND_TIMES 310 025
---
086
Number of refaxing
When an automatic fax sending is interrupted due to line fault or any
other external factors, the product starts to send remaining pages
after a lapse of a predetermined time interval. The attempt is made
the set number of times.
0 to 5 times (1 step = 1 time) 3 times
(3)
---
LIN_COMM_INTERVAL 310 026 --- 087 Time interval between the independent communications 3 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 8 sec
(8)
---
LIN_NUM_CHECK_ENABLE 310 027 --- 088 Enables or disables calling control for identical destination 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
LIN_NUM_CHECK_INTERVAL 310 028
---
089
Calling control time for identical destination 1 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 60 seconds
(60)
---
LIN_CNG_DETECT_TIME 310 030 --- 08A CNG signal (dial tone) detecting time
Use this setting when phone-first mode is set.
If CNG signal is not detected during the set time interval, the
product starts to call the answer phone (attached phone).
(55)
Not used
LIN_REDIAL_TIMES_MAX 310 078
---
08B
Maximum number of redialing 0 to 255 times (1 step = 1 time) 99 times
(99)
---
LIN_RING_TIMES_MIN 310 079 --- 08C Minimum time interval between answering and starting to receive a
fax
0 to 10 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 0 second
(0)
---
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
COMMUNICATION CONTROL
Table 7-19. List of System Parameter (Communication Control)
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Description Setting Value Default
Remark
s
Main Sub
COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL 300 006 --- 0A0 Tone transmitting level
(decreasing amount from offset 0 dBM)
5 to 15 (-5 to -15dBm)
1step = -1dBm
Tone transmitting level = minus set dBm
-10 dBm
(10)
---
COM_MANTX_CNG 300 024 --- 0A1 CNG transmitting at manual sending
Set whether send or not send the CNG signal when sending a fax
manually.
0 = Not send
1 = Send
Send
(1)
---
COM_RX_ATT_LEVEL 300 025 --- 0A2 Receiving level
Set the tone level to be detected as an incoming fax.
0 = -43 dBm
1 = -38 dBm
2 = -33 dBm
3 = -48 dBm
-43 dBm
(0)
---
COM_CED_DETECT_TIME 310 006 --- 0A3 CED detecting time 0 to 2550 ms (1 Step = 10 ms) 100 ms
(10)
---
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_MAX 310 007 --- 0A4 Symbol speed maximum variation tolerance
This setting is enabled only when receiving a fax
0 = 2400 baud
1 = 2743 baud
2 = 2800 baud
3 = 3000 baud
4 = 3200 baud
5 = 3429 baud
3429 baud
(5)
---
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_MAX 310 008 --- 0A5 Maximum bit speed 1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = 12000 bps
6 = 14400 bps
7 = 16800 bps
8 = 13200 bps
9 = 21600 bps
10 = 24000 bps
11 = 26400 bps
12 = 28800 bps
13 = 31200 bps
14 = 33600 bps
33600 bps
(14)
---
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_ENABLE 310 009
---
0A6
Direction to enable symbol speed
Corresponds to bit 12 to 19 of INGO0c and INFO0a.
--- 0xFF
---
(bit0) 2743 baud symbol speed support 0 = Not support
1 = Support
Support
(1)
---
(bit1) 2800 baud symbol speed support 0 = Not support
1 = Support
Support
(1)
---
(bit2)
3429 baud symbol speed support 0 = Not support
1 = Support
Support
(1)
---
(bit3) Low carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3000 baud symbol
speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit4) High carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3000 baud symbol
speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit5)
Low carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3200 baud symbol
speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit6) High carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3200 baud symbol
speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit7) Transmitting at 3429 baud symbol speed 0 = Not allow
1 = Allow
Allow
(1)
---
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_ENABLE1 310 010
---
0A7
Direction to enable bit speed 1
This setting is used during MPh sequence.
---
0xFF ---
(bit0) V.34 2400 bps ability 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit2)
V.34 7200 bps ability 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit5)
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_ENABLE2 310 011
---
0A8
Direction to enable bit speed 2
This setting is used during MPh sequence.
--- 0x3F
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit2)
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit5)
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
COM_V34_CTRL_BIT_RATE 310 012 --- 0A9 Control channel bit speed 0 = 1200 bps
1 = 2400 bps
1200 bps
(0)
---
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_THRESH1 310 013 --- 0AA Symbol speed threshold value 1
Phone line characteristic distortion permissible level
The smaller value, the more difficult it is to select higher symbol
speed.
0xFA = -6 dB Difficult to judge
0xFB = -5 dB
0xFC = -4 dB
0xFD = -3 dB
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x00 = 0 dB Standard
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB Easy to judge
0dB
(0x00)
---
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_THRESH2 310 014
---
0AB
Symbol speed threshold value 2
Minimum S/N permissible level
The smaller value, the easier it is to select higher symbol speed.
0xFA = -6 dB Easy to judge
0xFB = -5 dB
0xFC = -4 dB
0xFD = -3 dB
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB Difficult to judge
0dB
(0x00)
---
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_THRESH 310 015 --- 0AC Bit speed selecting threshold value
The smaller value, the easier it is to select higher communication
speed.
0xFA = -8 dB Easy to judge
0xF9 = -7 dB
0xFA = -6 dB
0xFB = -5 dB
0xFC = -4 dB
0xFD = -3 dB
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB
0x06 = 7 dB Difficult to judge
1dB
(0x01)
---
COM_V8_ANSAM_REVERSE 310 016 --- 0AD ANSam signal phase reversing
Set whether perform phase reversing for 450 ms when transmitting
ANSam.
0 = Not perform
1 = Perform
Perform
(1)
---
COM_V8_TE_TIME 310 017 --- 0AE Te time at V.8
When this is set to more than 1 second, echo canceller is disabled.
(11)
---
COM_V34_CC_TIME 310 018 --- 0AF Time-out interval from when starting V.34 mode (Phase 2) to the
control channel.
(30)
---
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
COM_V34_SHIFT_G3 310 019
---
0B0
Enables or disables shifting to G3 mode when V34_CC time-out
occurs.
Set whether shift or not to shift to usual G3 mode when
COM_V34_CC_TIME time-out occurs.
If this is set to shift to G3 mode, it may happen to infringe
certain patent.
0 = Not allow
1 = Allow
Not allow
(0)
---
COM_V34_ENABLE 310 020 --- 0B1 Enables or disables the V.34 ability
Set whether enables or disables V.34 performance regarding the
modulation method.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
COM_ANSAM_TX_TIME 310 021 --- 0B2 ANSam signal maximum transmitting time 0.1 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 4.0 seconds
(40)
---
COM_ANSAM_START_DELAY 310 022
---
0B3
Time interval until ANSam signal is transmitted
Set the time interval to start transmitting ANSam signal after the
line gets disconnected.
0.1 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 2.2 seconds
(22)
---
COM_V34_FRAME_SIZE 310 023
---
0B4
Frame size when transmitting V.34
0 = 256 octets
1 = 64 octets
256 octets
(0)
---
COM_ECM_ENABLE 310 024 --- 0B5 Enables or disables the ECM performance (auto resending
function)
When line fault occurs in the middle of sending a fax, the function
allows the fax to be resend automatically immediately after the line
is restored.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
COM_RTN_TX_RATE 310 034 --- 0B6 RTN command transmitting criterion (percentage)
RTN: Indicates that training is required because messages are not
received correctly.
0 to 100 % (1 step = 1%) 5%
(5)
---
COM_RTN_TX_LINE 310 035
---
0B7
RTN command transmitting criterion (number of continuous lines) 0 to 255 lines (1 step = 1 line)
5 lines
(5)
---
COM_T1_TIME_CALL 310 036 --- 0B8 T1 timer immediately after dialing 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 50 seconds
(50)
---
COM_T1_TIME_TX 310 037 --- 0B9 T1 timer when transmitting a fax 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 36 seconds
(36)
---
COM_T1_TIME_RX 310 038
---
0BA
T1 timer when receiving a fax 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 39 seconds
(39)
---
COM_T2_TIME 310 039 --- 0BB T2 timer 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 6 seconds
(60)
---
COM_T3_TIME 310 040 --- 0BC T3 timer 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 15 seconds
(150)
---
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
CAUTION
COM_T4_TIME_AUTO 310 041
---
0BD
T4 timer when communicating automatically
T4 timer for automatic transmitting and receiving
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 3 seconds
(30)
---
COM_T4_TIME_MANU 310 042 --- 0BE T4 timer when communicating manually
T4 timer for manual transmitting and receiving
(45)
---
COM_SOUNDLESS_TIME 310 043 --- 0BF T.30 noiseless timer
Timer for noiseless time recommended by T.30.
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms) 75 ms
(75)
---
COM_FSK_CHK_TIME 310 044
---
0C0
FSK receiving judge timer
When the product is waiting for incoming data in high speed
receiving mode, it judges that the incoming fax is FSK within the
set time interval.
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms)
200 ms
(200)
---
COM_PIX_DELAY 310 045 --- 0C1 Time interval before starting to transmit image data in G3 mode 0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 500 ms
(50)
---
COM_DROP_OUT_TIME 310 046
---
0C2
Drop-out judging timer when receiving image data
Time interval from carrier down in the middle of receiving image
data to when judging it as drop-out.
0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
1000 ms
(100)
---
COM_DIS_RESEND_TIME 310 047
---
0C3
NSF, DIS resend timer
NSF: Signal to indicate that the receiving fax machine supports
functions other than those given in ITU-T G3 standard.
DIS: Signal to notify the sender that the receiving fax machine
features meet the ITU-T G3 standard.
0 = 3 seconds
1 = 3.45 seconds
2 = 2.55 seconds
3 = 4.5 seconds
3 seconds
(0)
---
COM_TX_SPEED 310 048 --- 0C4 Transmitting speed performance
Enabled when communicating at V.17 or lower.
0 = Fallback by best performance of the
receiving machine
1 =V.27 ter fallback mode (2400 bps) only
2 =V.27 ter fallback mode (2400, 4800 bps)
only
3 =V.29 (7200, 9600 bps) only
4 = V.33(TC12000bps,TC14400bps) only
5 = V.17(TC7200bps, TC9600bps,
TC12000bps, TC14400bps) only
(0) ---
COM_RX_SPEED 310 049
---
0C5
Receiving speed performance
Reception mode that receives a fax declaring DIS, NSF (DTC,
NSC).
Enabled when communicating at V.17 or lower.
0 =V.27ter, V.29, V.33 and V.17
1 =V.27ter fallback mode (2400 bps)
2 = V.27ter(2400bps,4800bps)
3 = V.29(7200bps,9600bps)
4 =V.27ter and V.29
5 =V.27ter, V.29 and V33
(0)
---
COM_MODEM_MODE 310 050
---
0C6
Modem mode 0 = Auto (unique mode enabled)
1 = ITU-T G3 (unique mode disabled)
ITU-T G3
(1)
Fixed to 1
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
COM_DIS_NEGLECT_NUM 310 051
---
0C7
Number of ignoring DIS 0 to 255 times (1 step = 1 time)
0 time
(0)
COM_TSI_CIG_SEND 310 052 --- 0C8 Transmitting TSI and CIG
TSI: Signal that notifies ID of the sending machine as a response to
CSI signal sent from the receiving machine.
CIG :Signal that indicates identification information on the sending
machine.
0 = AUTO
1 = forced transmit
2 = not transmit
AUTO
(0)
---
COM_CSI_SEND 310 053
---
0C9
Transmitting CSI
CSI :Signal that notifies the sending machine of ID code of the
receiving machine.
0 = Transmit
1 = off
transmit
(0)
---
COM_FTT_FALLBACK 310 054 --- 0CA FTT number for judging fallback
Number of FTT until the product falls back at 14400/12000/9600/
7200/4800/2400 bps.
Fallback means an operation to find out an acceptable
communication speed for the receiving machine by reestablishing
the communication at lower speed when a training check signal at
certain transmitting speed is rejected by the receiving machine.
0 = All 2 FTT Fall Back
2 = All 1 FTT Fall Back
All 2 FTT
(0)
---
COM_TCF_CHECK 310 055 --- 0CB TCF signal judging time
TCF: Training check signal consists of 0 signal for about 1.5 seconds.
0 = 1.2 seconds
1 = 1.0 second
1.2 seconds
(0)
---
COM_TX_CABLE_EQU 310 056 --- 0CC Transmitting cable equalizer 0 = 0db (equivalent to 0 Km)
1 = 4db (equivalent to 1.8 Km)
8db
(2)
---
COM_RX_CABLE_EQU 310 057 --- 0CD Receiving cable equalizer 0 = 0db (equivalent to 0 Km)
8db
(2)
---
COM_TAP_HOLD 310 058
---
0CE
Enables or disables tap hold 0 = Disable
1 = Enable (equalizer freeze)
Enable
(1)
---
COM_RX_RESO 310 059 --- 0CF Specify resolution for received fax
(for evaluation)
0 x 00 = Default
0x01 = (Not used)
0x02 = (Not used)
0x04 = R8x15.4l/mmAR8x7.7l/mmA
R8x3.85l/mm
0x08 = (Not used)
0x10 = (Not used)
0x20 = R8x7.7l/mmAR8x3.85l/mm
0x40 = (Not used)
0x80 = R8x3.85l/mm
(0x00) ---
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
COM_V29_EPTONE 310 060
---
0D0
Enables or disables superimposing V.29 EP-tone
Set whether superimpose or not superimpose EP-tone to V.29 tones
based on the ITU-T G3 standard.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
---
COM_BYTE_DIS_DTC 310 061
---
0D1 Number of bytes for transmitting FIF of DIS/DTC
DTC: Transmit command corresponds to DIS.
0 = 4 bytes system
1 = 5 bytes system
2 = 6 bytes system
3 = 7 bytes system
4 = 8 bytes system
5 = 9 bytes system
6 = 10 bytes system
7 = 11 bytes system
8 = 12 bytes system
9 = 13 bytes system
10 = 14 bytes system (maximum capacity)
10bytes
(6)
---
COM_CTC_NUM 310 062 --- 0D2 Number of transmitting CTC 0=000 to 7=111 5 ---
COM_T5_TIME 310 063
---
0D3 ECM T5 timer
Timer for RNR signal sent from the receiving machine when the
receiving machine cannot continue to receive a fax due to
insufficient memory or any other troubles.
(65)
---
COM_EQM_48 310 064 --- 0D4 EQU comparison value at 4800 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x3A ---
COM_EQM_72 310 065 --- 0D5 EQU comparison value at 7200 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x32 ---
COM_EQM_96 310 066
---
0D6
EQU comparison value at 9600 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x3A ---
COM_EQM_120 310 067 --- 0D7 EQU comparison value at 12000 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x4F ---
COM_EQM_144 310 068 --- 0D8 EQU comparison value at 14400 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x3F ---
COM_EQM_TCM72 310 069
---
0D9 EQU comparison value at TCM 7200 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x48
---
COM_EQM_TCM96 310 070 --- 0DA EQU comparison value at TCM 9600 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x4E ---
COM_TX_CODE 310 071 --- 0DB Encoding method for transmission
Changes the method according to the receiving machine
performance.
0 = MH
1 = MR
2 = MMR
3 = JBIG(Not used)
MMR
(2)
---
COM_RX_CODE 310 072
---
0DC Encoding method for reception 0 = MH
1 = MR
2 = MMR
3 = JBIG(Not used)
MMR
(2)
---
COM_V34_GAIN_CHG 310 073 --- 0DD Gain switching mode when detecting V.34 tones 0 = Not switch the gain
1 = Switches the gain
Switches
(1)
---
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
COM_RX_GAIN_AJST 310 074
---
0DE
Received gain correction value
0 = 0.0 dB
1 = 0.5 dB
2 = 1.0 dB
3 = 1.5 dB
4 = 2.0 dB
5 = 2.5 dB
6 = 3.0 dB
7 = 3.5 dB
8 = -4.0 dB
9 = -3.5 dB
10 = -3.0 dB
11 = -2.5 dB
12 = -2.0 dB
13 = -1.5 dB
14 = -1.0 dB
15 = -0.5 dB
3.0dB
(6)
---
COM_MANRX_CED_DELAY 310 075 --- 0DF Time interval for CED signal when receiving a fax manually
Time interval from when starting to receive a fax manually to when
issuing CED signal.
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 0 second
(0)
---
COM_CNG_DELAY 310 076 --- 0E0 Time interval for CNG signal
Time interval from when finishing dialing to when issuing the first
CNG signal.
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 3 seconds
(30)
---
COM_MANTX_CNG_DELAY 310 077 --- 0E1 Time interval for CNG signal when sending a fax manually
Time interval from when starting to send a fax manually to when issuing
the first CNG signal.
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 0 second
(0)
---
COM_COLOR_MONO_CHG 320 010 --- 0E2 Action when the receiving machine does not support color faxing 0 = Continue by changing the data into
monochrome
1 = Cut off the line
Continue
(0)
---
COM_SAVE_DECERR_PAGE 320 011 --- 0E3 Storing pages which occur decode error 0 = Not store
1 = Store
Store
(1)
---
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Remark
s
Main Sub
REPORT
Table 7-20. List of System Parameter (Report)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
REP_MONITOR_OUT 100 001 --- 0F0 Monitor report automatic printing
Disabled (it is included in transmission report)
0 : OFF
1 : ON
OFF
(0)
Not used
REP_DOHO_OUT 100 007 0F1
Multiple transmission report automatic printing 0 = Not print
1 = Print only when failed to transmit
2 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_TX_OUT 100 008 0F2
Transmission report automatic printing 0 = Not print
1 = Print only when an error occurs
2 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_ACTIV_OUT 100 009 0F3
Activity report automatic printing 0 = Not print
1 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_PROTOCOL_OUT 330 001 --- 0F4 Protocol monitor report automatic printing 0 = Not print
1 = Print only when an error occurs
2 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_SEL_OPP_NAME 310 003 --- 0F5 The second priority for Name of The Other End on the activity report
Select which to be printed at Name of The Other End column on the
activity report as the second priority, name (which sent from the other end)
or phone number.
0 = Name
1 = Phone number
Phone
number
(1)
Fixed to 1
REP_SEND_ALL 330 002
---
0F6
Transferring size for printing report
The ASIC transfers data for printing report so that it fits within a standard
(letter) sized paper.
0 = Transfers all data
1 = Transfers data so that it fits within a
standard (letter) sized paper
Transfers all
data
(0)
---
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING
Table 7-21. List of System Parameter (Image Data Processing)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User
Access
Internal
Address
Main Sub
IMG_TX_LINE_OR 320 005
---
100
Sub-scanning OR setting when changing resolution
Set whether process of not process sub-scanning OR when changing
resolution to transmit a fax.
0 = Not perform OR process
1 = Perform OR process
Not perform
(0)
Not used
IMG_JBIG_L0 320 006
--- 101
102
Number of lines for one stripe of JBIG encoding to transmit a fax 1 to 65535 (lines)
128 lines
(128)
Not used
IMG_JBIG_ATMOVE 320 007
---
103
Maximum horizontal offset allowed for AT pixels in JBIG encoding 0 to 127 0 Not used
IMG_JBIG_TP 320 008
---
104
Use or not use TP for prescribed layers in JBIG encoding
0 = Not use TP
1 = Use TP
Not use TP
(0)
Not used
IMG_DEF_JBIG_LRLTWO 320 009
---
105 LRLTWO value (number of reference lines) in JBIG encoding method
0 = 3 lines
1 = 2 lines
3 lines
(0)
Not used
7.7.2 Error List
The error list is given on the following pages.
Service Call Error (p660)
Operator Call Error (p662)
Other Error Codes (p670)
The following is information on the error codes.
External Error Code
This code consists of main and sub codes and displayed in that order on the fax reports listed below.
1) Activity Report
The code is displayed as "XXX-XXX" on the "Result" column.
2) Fax Setting List
The code is displayed as "XXX-XXX" on the "Error Code" column in the "Error History".
(Example) "300-048"= DCN reception (During faxing, something went wrong with the other end machine and the fax could not be completed)
Internal Error Code
This code can be checked by the backup data obtained using the "MFP Maintenance Tool".
The code is displayed in two bytes binary form (XXXX) on the "Error Code" column in the "Internal Error History" at the top part of the backup data (TXT data).
(Example) "6F00" = Internal error in process of creating REPORT FILE.
CAUTION
The code is displayed on the list only when the operating mode is
set to "Maintenance Mode" by the corresponding system
parameter setting.
m
a
n
u
a
l
s
4
y
o
u
.
c
o
m
SERVICE CALL ERROR
Table 7-22. Service Call Error
External
Error Code
Internal
Code
Description Cause Remedies
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display Trigger for Stopping Operation
Notification
Message
MAIN SUB
100 000 0x1000 An error occurs in reading and writing SDRAM
during power-on sequence
SDRAM failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices
required for a fax communication
End of initialization
100 001 0x1001
The product failed to write date information in RTC Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 002 0x1002 The product failed to read time after initializing the
clock
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 003 0x1003
The product failed to write into the fax flash
memory
Flash memory failure Replace the fax board
*1, *2
External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices
---
100 004 0x1004 SUM check of the fax flash memory was not
performed correctly
Flash memory failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices
End of initialization
Diagnosing job
termination
100 005 0x1005 An error occurs in reading and writing SRAM
during power-on sequence
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 006 0x1006 SRAM backup failure Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 007 0x1007 Normal writing on the EEPROM was not
performed
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 008 0x1008 Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT
(An error of writing/reading image data on the
memory)
SDRAM failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices
Diagnosing job
termination
100 009 0x1009 Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT
(BM in the ASIC could not be cleared)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 010 0x100A
Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT
(MN86064 related error)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 011 0x100B Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT
(ASIC related error)
ASIC failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices
Diagnosing job
termination
100 012 0x100C The ASIC could not clear buffer memory Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 013 0x100D The product failed to write into the modem flash
memory
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 014 0x100E Modem failure Modem failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices
Diagnosing job
termination
100 900
--- This code is used by the MFP
(Using for fax is prohibited)
--- --- --- --- --- ---
Note *1: Displays the external error code.
*2: A message requesting to turn off and back on the product, or to call service center is displayed.
200 000 0x2000
Fault of parts in the PWBA MCU Not used
--- --- --- ---
---
200 001 0x2001 MODEM&NCU LOOPBACK TEST NG Not used --- --- --- --- ---
200 900 This code is used by the MFP
--- --- --- --- --- ---
Table 7-22. Service Call Error
External
Error Code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display Trigger for Stopping Operation
Notification
Message
MAIN SUB
OPERATOR CALL ERROR
Table 7-23. Operator Call Error
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
Notification Message
MAIN SUB
300 000 0x3000 Sending a fax is attempted at the time of receiving a fax Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 001 0x3001 NSS/DCS function used by the received fax does not
meet those of the product
It is more likely that there
is something wrong with
the sending machine
Confirm if the sending
machine is normal.
*1, *2 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax is finished
300 002 0x3002 Abnormal commands are received from the other end
machine.
The other end machine
failure
Confirm the condition of
the other end machine,
and resend the fax. Or
ask the sender to resend
the fax if the error occurs
during receiving process.
*1, *2 Transmitting failure
Receiving failure
50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is
finishedReceiving a fax is
finished
300 003 0x3003 CS becomes ON in FSK method Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 004 0x3004
Overrun Noises in the line or GND,
or loose connection of the
modular cable, or etc.
Check the line, GND, and
the modular cable, and try
the failed operation again
*3 Transmitting failure
Receiving failure
50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
Receiving a fax is finished
300 005 0x3005
Underrun Noises in the line or GND,
Receiving failure
300 006 0x3006
CS of the modem did not become ON for RS request
while training in high speed
Noises in the line or GND,
*3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 007 0x3007
The product received illegal commands from the other
end machine after receiving a communication reserve
request signal
failure
and try the failed
operation.
Receiving failure
300 008 0x3008 The product received RTN/PIN when transmitting in
G3 mode
Line quality is not good Ask the recipient if the
fax was sent correctly,
and resend the fax as
necessary.
300 009 0x3009 The product sent RTN when receiving in G3 mode Line quality is not good Ask the sender to resend
the fax if necessary.
*3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
finished
300 010 0x300A The product sent EOR-Q when transmitting ECM Line quality is not good Confirm the condition of
and try the failed
operation.
300 011 0x300B
The product received EOR-Q when receiving ECM Line quality is not good Confirm the condition of
and ask to resend the fax.
finished
300 012 0x300C
The product terminated the communication by issuing
command reject signal
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 013 0x300D The product terminated the communication by issuing
procedure invalid signal
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 014 0x300E The product terminated the communication because it
received a command reject signal
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 015 0x300F
T1 time-out for transmitting a fax The modular cable is
disconnected, or the other
end machine does not
answer
Check that the modular
cable is properly
connected, confirm the
condition of the other
end, and try the failed
operation.
*1, *2 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 016 0x3010
DCS/NSS resending over The other end machine cut
off the line, or the modular
cable get disconnected
cable is properly
operation.
300 017 0x3011
Fallback error Line quality is not good Try the operation again *3 Transmitting failure
Receiving failure
300 018 0x3012 Post message resending over The other end machine cut
cable is properly
operation.
300 019 0x3013 T2 time-out The other end machine cut
cable is properly
operation.
finished
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
MAIN SUB
300 020 0x3014
T1 time-out for receiving a fax The other end machine cut
cable is properly
end, and ask the sender
to resend the fax.
finished
300 021 0x3015
T5 time-out The other end machine
runs out of paper or the
memory is full
and try the failed
operation.
*3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
finished
300 022 0x3016 Carrier cut off The other end machine cut
cable is properly
end, and ask the sender
to resend the fax.
finished
300 023 0x3017 The product received an illegal frame in ECM Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 024 0x3018 CTC/EOR resending over Line quality is not good Try the operation again *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 025 0x3019
Not for the operator (for RX and communication
reservation)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 026 0x301A Time-out between frames in ECM Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 027 0x301B
PIN reception (except EOR) Line quality is not good Try the operation again *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 028 0x301C The product could not detect EOL within 13 seconds
(default time) when receiving image data in G3 mode.
Line quality is not good,
or there is something
wrong with the other end
machine
and ask to resend the fax.
finished
300 029 0x301D The product failed to detect dial tones before starting
dialing
The line type setting is
wrong, or the line is
disconnected
Correct the line type
setting. Connect the line
properly.
External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 030 0x301E The product failed to detect the second dial tones
before starting dialing
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 031 0x301F The product detected busy tones before starting dialing
(BT1)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 032 0x3020
The product detected busy tones before starting dialing
(BT2)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 033 0x3021
The product failed to detect the second dial tones
during dialing operation
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
MAIN SUB
300 034 0x3022
The product detected busy tones during dialing
operation (BT1)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 035 0x3023 The product detected busy tones during dialing
operation (BT2)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 036 0x3024 The product failed to detect dial tones during dialing
operation
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 037 0x3025
The product failed to detect dial tones after dialing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 038 0x3026 The product detected busy tones after dialing (BT1) Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 039 0x3027 The product detected busy tones after dialing (BT2) Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 040 0x3028
The product received no reply from the other end
machine after dialing
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 041 0x3029 The product detected off-hook condition while making
auto dialing
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 042 0x302A The product could not detect line current Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 043 0x302B The product could not detect the polarity Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 044 0x302C
The other end machine backed to ready status from
busy status which was detected by busy tones while
ringing
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 045 0x302D
The other end machine is not ready or available for
sending a fax
During polling faxing,
original documents were
not set on the other end
machine
and ask the sender to
resend the fax.
*4 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 046 0x302E The other end machine is not ready or available for
receiving a fax
runs out of paper or the
memory is full
and resend the fax.
300 047 0x302F The product disconnect the line because it received
forced polled transmission (for maintenance) in the
middle of processing a fax job
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 048 0x3030 DCN reception During the fax
communication,
something went wrong
with the other end
machine
If the error occurs when
transmitting, resend the
fax. If the error occurs
during receiving process,
ask the sender to resend
the fax
300 049 0x3031 Auto dialing function is used, but no data is stored for
the function.
The speed-dial memory is
deleted
Check if the number of
the speed-dial memory is
correct, and try the
operation again.
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
MAIN SUB
300 050 0x3032
Invalid data exists in the dial data Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 051 0x3033 The current setting of the product does not support
caller ID display service used for the phone line.
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 052 0x3034
Even though the current product mode supports caller
ID service, the phone line is not using the service.
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 053 0x3035 JM is not detected Line quality is not good,
or a GND for the product
is not established properly
Check the line and the
GND condition, and try
300 054 0x3036 CJ is not detected Line quality is not good,
finished
300 055 0x3037 V8 error Line quality is not good,
Receiving failure
300 056 0x3038 Phase2(Line Probing) error Line quality is not good,
Receiving failure
300 057 0x3039 Phase3(Primary Channel
Equalizer Trainning)error
Line quality is not good,
Receiving failure
300 058 0x303A Modem Parameter Exchange error Line quality is not good,
Receiving failure
300 059 0x303B Primary channel re-synchronizing error Line quality is not good,
Receiving failure
300 060 0x303C Control channel re-synchronizing error Line quality is not good,
Receiving failure
300 061 0x303D Control channel re-train error Line quality is not good,
Receiving failure
300 062 0x303E Control channel OFF time-out Line quality is not good,
300 063 0x303F
Primary channel OFF time-out Line quality is not good,
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
MAIN SUB
300 064 0x3040
Receiving the fax is rejected due to the DM prevention
function
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 065 0x3041 The product failed to read the original while
performing manual transmitting
The next original was not
set in time
Try the operation again *3 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 066 0x3042 When transmitting, image data conversion was not
made in time
MFP data transferring
failure
External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 100 0x3100
The product could not detect normal lines within a
minute after starting to receive the image data in G3
mode
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 101 0x3101
Decoding data without RTC at the time of ECM
reception caused the MN8604 to be disabled to perform
decode process
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 102 0x3102
Number of lines for received one page exceeded
acceptable level (more than 65535 lines)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 103 0x3103 Abnormal termination of MN86064 Not used
300 104 0x3104
MN8604 failed to process commands within a
prescribed time period
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 105 0x3105 File pointer that is used for writing/reading in
encoding/decoding process caused an error
There is something wrong
with the fax board or the
S/W
Replace the fax board --- Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 106 0x3106 The number of lines that indicate the processed lines in
encoding/decoding process is 0
S/W
Replace the fax board --- Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 107 0x3107 Monitor timer for encoding/decoding by MN86064
became time-out
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 108 0x3108 Target file is empty in decoding/encoding process Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 109 0x3109 During MMR decoding, MN86064 decode error
occurred
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 110 0x310A During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, BIH/over
flow error was detected
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 111 0x310B
During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, an end
marker error was detected
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 112 0x310C During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, a YD error
was detected
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 113 0x310D During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, an abort
marker error was detected
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 114 0x310E During decoding JBIG data, BIH operated abnormally Not used --- --- --- --- ---
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
MAIN SUB
300 115 0x310F
Forced termination of data processing The communication was
interrupted
--- --- Forced stop 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 200 0x3200 Communication was interrupted The communication was
interrupted
--- --- Forced stop 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 300 0x3300 The file to be opened does not exist The file was deleted for
some reason
I f t he er r or occurs
f r equent l y,
i ni t i al i ze or repl ace
t he f ax board
*1, *2 External error code FDH:
Uncategorizable
factors
Fax scanning job is finished
Writing pages is finished
Printing of the received fax is
finished
Reading pages is finished
Printing report is finished
300 301 0x3301 The product attempted to perform Write Open, but
could not get FCB (FCB FULL)
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 302 0x3302
Memory full (the memory for storing data is insufficient) Memory full Pre-stored received faxes
are printed out When
sending faxes are stored,
the product waits for the
jobs to be send or delete
the jobs for starting the
latest job.
--- ---
21H: Fax
memory is
insufficient
Printing of the received fax is
finished
Reading pages is finished
300 400 0x3400 When transferring data between PRMs, time-out error
occurred before finishing the transferring
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 500 0x3500
The product failed to create a power-off report Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 501 0x3501 A log file for the communication result could not be made Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 502 0x3502 The product failed to read time Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 503 0x3503
When storing a two-page combined transmission data,
the data exceeded 65535 lines for one page
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 504 0x3504 When the QM-Coder is in coding process, SC count
over error occurred
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 505 0x3505 When the QM-Coder is in decoding process, the end
marker was not detected
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 506 0x3506
When printing a received fax stored in the memory, the
product failed to decode the top part of the page for 10
seconds
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
MAIN SUB
Note *1: Displays the external error code.
*2: A message requesting to see the users guide is displayed
*3: A message requesting to retry the operation is displayed
*4: A message requesting to confirm the condition of the other end machine is displayed
*5: A message requesting to confirm the condition of the other end machine and retry the operation is displayed
300 507 0x3507
Memory full status (the memory has no more space for
the new job) was detected when the product received a
sending fax job
Memory full Pre-stored received faxes
are printed out.
When sending faxes are
stored, the product waits
for the jobs to be send or
delete the jobs for
starting the latest job.
*1, *2* External error code 21H: Fax
memory is
insufficient
300 508 0x3508 Creating a report file and log file for a report printing
job could not be made
Memory full Pre-stored received faxes
are printed out.
When sending faxes are
stored, the product waits
for the jobs to be send or
delete the jobs for
starting the latest job.
1, *2 50H: Forced stop Printing report is finished
300 509 0x3509 Opening/closing a report file for a report printing job
could not be made
S/W
If the error occurs
frequently, replace the
fax board
*1, *2 50H: Forced stop Printing report is finished
300 510 0x350A Reserving memory for creating a report or an instant-
faxing job could not be made
Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 511 0x350B RTC was not detected during decoding process Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 900 --- This code is used by the MFP
--- --- --- --- --- ---
External
error code
Internal
Code
Panel
Display
(reference)
Report Display
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
MAIN SUB
OTHER ERROR CODES
Figure 7-18. Other Error Codes
Internal Error Code Description
0x4000 ~ 0x4FFF Fax unit Firmware failure (for SW debug)
0x5000
~
0x500A
Internal error (MFP I/F task)
0x50B0 ~ 0x50B5 Internal error (Communication check task)
0x5100 ~ 0x5104 Internal error (Communication check task (Boot))
0x5200
~
0x5202
Internal error (Schedule task), Failed to write dummy data into FILE
0x5310 ~ 0x5316 Error between tasks (MFP/Others)
0x5501 ~ 0x6230 Internal error (HOOK task, CODE task, DECODE task)
0x6400
~
0x64F0
Internal error (CODEC all-purpose function)
0x6C00 ~ 0x6DDF Internal error (Report task)
0x6E00 ~ 0x6E14 Internal error (Self diagnosis report)
0x6E90
~
0x6EBC
Internal error (Report common function)
0x6F00 ~ 0x6F20 Internal error (REPORT FILE creating process)
0x6F88 Internal error (ERROR CODE converting process)
0x6FC2
~
0x6FC4
Internal error (REPORT FILE-related)
0x7000 ~ 0x7080 Internal error (Self diagnosis task)
0x7100 ~ 0x7140 Internal error (Self diagnosis processing)
0x7400
~
0x7420
Internal error (RTC task)
0x81B7 Internal error (Timer interruption process related)
0x9000 ~ 0x9006 Internal error (Message I/F)
0xA000
~
0xA00B
Internal error (Received fax print task)
0xF023 ~ 0xF07E Internal error (Protocol (ECM))
0xF303 Internal error (G2/G3)
0xF41C
~
0xF485
Internal error (Protocol (G3))
0xF502 Internal error (G3 task)
0xF62F ~ 0xF63B Internal error (Modem process related)
0xF704
~
0xF77C
Internal error (Protocol (V.34))

Epson Color Multi-Function Page Printer Aculaser CX11, CX11F Parts & Service PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Epson Color Multi-Function Page Printer Aculaser CX11, CX11F Parts & Service PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

Color Multi-Function Page Printer

S-ar putea să vă placă și